Orland Park City Zoning Code
ARTICLE 6
Development Regulations
§ 6-101 Zoning Districts Established.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
A.
Purpose. In order to carry out the goals and objectives of the Comprehensive Plan of the Village and the purposes of these regulations, the following districts are hereby created:
E-1 | Estate Residential District |
R-1 | Residential District |
R-2 | Residential District |
R-3 | Residential District |
R-4 | Residential District |
LSPD | Large Scale Planned Development District [Ord. 2514, 1-17-1994] |
RSB | Residential/Supporting Business District |
BIZ | General Business District |
MFG | Manufacturing District |
OOH | Old Orland Historic District |
COR | Mixed Use Core District |
ORI | Mixed Use Office, Research and Industrial District |
VC | Village Center District [Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995] |
OS | Open Space District [Ord. 4217, 2-5-2007; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822] |
RMC | Regional Mixed-Use Campus [Ord. 5168, 2-20-2017] |
B.
Boundaries. The boundaries of these districts are described on the Zoning District Map, attached hereto and incorporated herein.
§ 6-102 Zoning District Map.
A.
Purpose. The purpose of the Zoning District Map is to set forth the boundaries of the zoning districts established in Section 6-101 as they may be applied from time to time to all land within the corporate limits of the Village.
B.
Interpretation of Boundaries. Where uncertainty exists with respect to the boundaries of the zoning districts shown on the Zoning District Map amended from time to time in accordance with the provisions of Section 5-108 of these regulations, the following rules shall be used to interpret the maps:
1.
In cases where a boundary line is located within a street or alley right-of-way, railroad or utility line right-of-way, easement, or navigable or non-navigable waterway, it shall be considered to be in the center of the right-of-way, easement or waterway. If the actual location of such right-of-way, easement, or waterway varies slightly from the location as shown on the map, then the actual location shall control.
2.
In cases where the map shows a boundary line as being located a specific distance from a street line or other physical feature, this distance shall control.
3.
Where the map shows a district boundary to approximately coincide with a property line or Village limit line, the property line or Village limit line shall be considered to be the district boundary, unless otherwise indicated.
4.
In cases where a district boundary does not coincide or approximately coincide with any street, alley, railroad, waterway, or property line, and no dimensions are shown, the location of the boundary shall be determined by use of the scale appearing on the map.
C.
Maintenance of Map. The originals of the Zoning District Map shall be signed by the Village Clerk and the President of the Board of Trustees and retained in the offices of the Village Clerk. Copies of the Zoning District Map shall be maintained by the Village and kept up-to-date by posting thereon all changes and subsequent amendments.
[Ord. 4374, 6-30-2008]
D.
Update. The Zoning District Map shall be updated and published in accordance with III. Rev. Stat. ch. 24, sec. 11-13-19 (1989).
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
§ 6-103 Zoning of Newly Annexed Land and Rezoning.
A.
Annexation. All fully developed land which shall be annexed to the Village shall be classified into the zoning district that is most compatible, in the opinion of the Board of Trustees, with the Village's Comprehensive Plan. All undeveloped or partially developed land which shall be annexed to the Village shall be automatically classified and zoned in the E-1 Estate Residence District until otherwise classified in accordance with the Village's Comprehensive Plan.
B.
Petition For Annexation. The owner of any land proposed for annexation to the Village shall file with the Development Services Department a petition for annexation. The Development Services Department shall review such application and shall recommend to the Board of Trustees whether such annexation should be approved. If such petition involves a zoning classification other than E-1, the petition shall be referred to the Plan Commission which shall recommend to the Board of Trustees the appropriate zoning district in accordance with the procedures of Section 5-108. If such petition involves an annexation agreement, the provisions of III. Rev. Stat. Ch. 24, § 7-1-2, as amended, shall be followed.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
C.
Proposal for Rezoning. If a petition or application is made requesting a map amendment to a property other than E-1, the petition goes to Plan Commission as a public hearing and shall include a site plan in its submission to the Development Services Department.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
Districts Tables were deleted |
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; amended by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
§ 6-104 Bulk Regulations.
A.
General.
1.
All development, except as provided by special use, must conform to the minimum bulk regulations as set out in this section.
2.
No building, structure or land located in the Village shall be used or occupied, and no building or structure shall be erected, moved, reconstructed, extended, enlarged or altered unless in accordance with the minimum lot area, lot width, setback and open space requirements set forth on Table 6-104(A) or as otherwise required by these regulations.
3.
No setbacks existing on the effective date of these regulations shall subsequently be reduced below, or further reduced below if already less than the minimum setback requirements set out in Table 6-104(A) for equivalent new construction.
4.
No lot shall hereafter be divided into two or more lots unless all lots resulting from such division conform with all applicable minimum lot size requirements of the zoning district in which such lots are located or as otherwise provided in these regulations.
5.
(Reserved.)
6.
Any lot which was of record at the time of the adoption of these regulations, and which does not meet the requirements for minimum lot width and area set forth on Table 6-104(A),[1] may be utilized for a use permitted under the zoning district in which the lot is located, provided that the applicable setbacks and other provisions of these regulations are met.
[Amended by Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
[1]
Editor's Note: Table 6-104(A), including amendments by Ord. 2514, 1-17-1994; Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005; Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; and Ord. 5168, 2-20-2017, was deleted by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018.
B.
Lot Coverage.
1.
Location of Required Open Space.
a.
Open spaces shall be maintained on all lots outside of the required building setback (the building envelope), unless otherwise enabled by these regulations as accessory uses and structures. Required building setbacks shall be measured inward from the property lines of the subject site.
b.
No required setbacks, other open space, or minimum lot area allocated to a building shall be used to satisfy the setbacks or other open space or minimum lot area requirements for any other building.
2.
Uses and Structures Prohibited in Required Setbacks.
a.
No principal building or structure shall be located within any setback required by these regulations.
b.
Except as otherwise provided in Section 6-306 of these regulations, no off-street parking area, maneuvering area for parking spaces, or loading area shall be located within any required front setback or within any required side setback which abuts a street. This restriction shall not apply to driveways of single family detached dwellings providing access from the street to the parking area.
c.
No outdoor storage of goods and materials or refuse containers shall be located within any required front setback, or within any required side setback which abuts a street, except for the temporary placement of refuse containers for curbside pick-up in residential districts.
3.
Maintenance of Setbacks and Other Open Spaces. The maintenance of setbacks and other open spaces and minimum lot areas set forth on Table 6-104(A) shall be a continuing obligation of the owner(s) of the property.
4.
Required Building Setbacks v. Actual Building Setbacks. The regulations of this section and the subsequent zoning districts establish the required building setbacks for the lots of each zoning district, effectively establishing a building envelope in which to erect principal structures, additions and accessory uses and structures. The setbacks of each zoning district shall be interpreted to read as the required setbacks. In the case when a principal building is set back further than the required setback, the actual setback, being more restrictive, shall not govern nor override the ability of a property owner to construct within the zone's established building envelope, which meets the required building setbacks. The exception to this is fences and similar accessory structures, which have regulations regarding presence in front yard spaces.
[Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
C.
Number of Buildings Per Lot. No more than one principal building devoted to a single use shall be located on a lot, except as approved as a special use for planned development in accordance with these regulations.
[Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998]
D.
Height Limitations. Except as otherwise provided in this subsection and listed below, height limitations for all structures are listed in each district, in Sections 6-201 through 6-213.
1.
The height limitation established for each district shall not apply to public utility poles and lines, skylights, fire towers, spires, cooling towers, parapet walls, collocated wireless communication facilities, and roof structures for elevators, stairways, tanks, heating, ventilation and air-conditioning equipment, or similar equipment for the operation and maintenance of a building.
2.
Unless located in or adjacent to a residential district, the height limitation shall not apply to radio or television towers, steeples, chimneys, and water tanks. Freestanding wireless communication facilities must meet the height requirements of Section 6-311.
3.
Structures exempted from the maximum height provisions by Subsections D1 and 2 above may not exceed a height of 10 feet above the average roof line of the building to which they are affixed or adjacent unless permitted by a special use permit. Wireless communication facilities shall follow the height regulations of Section 6-311.
[Amended by Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
E.
Clear Sight Triangles at Street Intersections.
1.
The restrictions set out in this subsection shall apply to the following triangles of land abutting street intersections:
a.
Arterial Streets. The triangle bounded on two sides by the curb (or pavement edge where there is no curb), measured in each direction along the curb or pavement edge for 50 feet from their point of intersection or pavement edge, and on the third side by the diagonal line connecting the ends of the fifty-foot sides; and
b.
Collector Streets. The triangle bounded on two sides by the intersecting street lines, measured 35 feet in each direction from their point of intersection, and on the third side by the diagonal line connecting the ends of the thirty-five foot sides.
2.
Within the triangles identified in Subsection E1 above, and except as provided in Subsection E3 below, no structure, sign, plant, shrub, tree, berm, fence, wall, or other object of any kind shall be installed, constructed, set out or maintained so as to obstruct cross-visibility at a level between 30 and 72 inches above the height of the curb.
3.
The restrictions of this subsection shall not apply to:
a.
Existing natural grades which, by reason of natural topography, rise 30 or more inches above the level of the center of the adjacent intersection;
b.
Trees having limbs and foliage trimmed in such a manner that no limbs or foliage extend into the area between 30 and 72 inches above the level of the center of the adjacent intersection; and
c.
Fire hydrants, public utility poles, street markers, and traffic control devices.
F.
Obstruction of Public Right-of-Way. Except as otherwise permitted by these regulations, no structure, fence, landscaping, driveway, parking lot, newspaper vending machine or mailbox shall be permitted which obstructs or otherwise interferes with public use of a street right-of-way or other public easement.
§ 6-201 E-1 Estate Residential District.
A.
Purpose. The E-1 District is established to preserve and enhance very low density residential areas characterized by an essentially rural character.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the E-1 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
2.
3.
Parks, forest preserves and recreational areas, provided that any parking lots are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
4.
Single family detached dwellings; and
5.
Day Care Home. [Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the E-1 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
1.
Cemeteries;
2.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
3.
Golf courses, including uses normally ancillary to such uses, such as restaurants, but not including commercially operated driving ranges or miniature golf courses, provided that such ancillary uses, parking and all structures are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
4.
Governmental uses;
5.
Horse stables, provided that:
a.
The stable is located on a lot at least three acres in area;
b.
A minimum of one acre of the lot is devoted exclusively to horses;
c.
A fence of not less than five and no more than six feet high is maintained around the paddock, pasture or other area where a horse would be left unattended;
d.
A minimum of 150 feet separates the stable and horse fence from any property line; and
e.
A waste management plan for controlling manure is approved.
6.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults, provided that no building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
8.
Public utility structures, other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008] |
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
9.
Planned developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
No more than one dwelling for every one gross acre of land is permitted, unless a critical and sensitive area located on the map identified in the Village's Comprehensive Plan is present on the parcel proposed for development, in which event smaller lots may be permitted, provided that:
(2)
Buildings are oriented to provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds and hills to the maximum extent practicable; and
(3)
Streets are designed to provide a variety of views and approaches.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
D.
Minimum Lot Sizes. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal use in the E-1 District shall be permitted on a lot less than one acre (43,560 square feet) in area and a width of less than 150 feet. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the E-1 District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
1.
Front.
2.
Side and Corner Side.
[Ord. 4183, 9-18-2006]
a.
Major or minor arterial: 50 feet from the property line.
b.
Major collector: 50 feet from the property line.
c.
All other streets and sides not abutting a street: 25 feet from the property.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
d.
Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line. [Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016] |
3.
Rear. All lots: 50 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 6-2-2008 by Ord. No. 4374; 7-6-2010 by Ord. No. 4574; 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 35 feet to the mean height of the roof.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006] |
§ 6-202 R-1 Residential District.
A.
Purpose. The R-1 District is established to protect, promote and maintain areas that are developing or have been developed with single-family detached housing and limited public and institutional uses that are compatible with a low density residential neighborhood.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-1 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
2.
3.
Golf courses, including uses normally ancillary to such uses, such as restaurants, but not including commercially operated driving ranges or miniature golf courses, provided that such ancillary uses, parking and all structures are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
4.
Parks, forest preserves and recreational areas, provided that any parking lots are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
5.
Single family detached dwellings; and
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
6.
Day Care Home. [Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-1 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Cemeteries;
2.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
3.
Governmental uses;
5.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
The dwelling units are located on the parcel to ensure adequate privacy for residents, such as by the separation of buildings or landscaping between buildings;
(2)
No more than one dwelling unit for every 1/2 gross acre of land is permitted, unless a critical and sensitive area located on the map identified in the Village's Comprehensive Plan is present on the parcel proposed for development, in which event smaller lots may be permitted, provided that:
(3)
Buildings are oriented to provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds and hills to the maximum extent practicable; and
(4)
Streets are designed to follow natural soils and contours and provide a variety of views and approaches.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
6.
Public utility structures, excluding electrical generating facilities and wastewater treatment facilities, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
D.
Minimum Lot Sizes. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal use in the R-1 District shall be permitted on a lot less than 21, 780 square feet in area and a width (see definition) of less than 125 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-1 District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "corner side" setback.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
1.
Front.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 45 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 40 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 40 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
2.
Side. All lots: Not less than 15% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal building to the side lot line. Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 15% calculation; however no side yard shall be less than 12.5 feet.
[Ord. 2586, 6-6-1994; Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996, Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; amended by Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
3.
Corner Side.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 25 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 20 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 15 feet from the property line or 15% of the lot width, whichever is greater. Corner side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway shall be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line.
[Ord. 2586, 6-6-1994; amended by Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
4.
Rear. All lots: 45 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 35 feet to the mean height of the roof.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
§ 6-203 R-2 Residential District.
A.
Purpose. The R-2 District is established to protect, promote and maintain the development of single-family detached housing and limited public and institutional uses that are compatible with the surrounding residential neighborhood. The development standards and range of allowable uses are designed to provide for residential living at a slightly higher density of development than that of the R-1 district.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-2 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Section 6-101 through 5-104:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
2.
3.
Day Care Home;
[Ord. 2680, 3-18-1996]
4.
Golf courses, including uses normally ancillary to such uses, such as restaurants, but not including commercially operated driving ranges or miniature golf courses, provided that such ancillary uses, parking and all structures are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
5.
Parks, forest preserves and recreational areas, provided that any parking lots are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
6.
Single family detached dwellings. [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-2 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Cemeteries;
2.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
3.
Governmental uses;
5.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
The dwelling units are located on the parcel to ensure adequate privacy for residents, such as by the separation of buildings or landscaping between buildings;
(2)
No more than one dwelling unit for every 1/2 gross acre of land is permitted, unless a critical and sensitive area located on the map identified in the Village's Comprehensive Plan is present on the parcel proposed for development, in which event smaller lots may be permitted, provided that:
(3)
Buildings are oriented to provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds and hills to the maximum extent practicable; and
(4)
Streets are designed to follow natural soils and contours and provide a variety of views and approaches.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
6.
Public utility structures, other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
D.
Minimum Lot Sizes. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal use in the R-2 District shall be permitted on a lot less than 15,000 square feet in area and a width of less than 100 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-2 District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
2.
Side. All streets: Not less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal building to the side lot line. Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line. For irregular lots, not less than 10 feet on each side of the principal building to the side lot line.
[Ord. 2462, 10-18-1993; amended by Ord. 2959, 11-18-2009; Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 35 feet to the mean height of the roof.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
§ 6-203.5 R-2A Residential District.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4217, 2-5-2007]
A.
Purpose. The R-2 District is established to protect, promote and maintain the development of single-family detached housing and limited public and institutional uses that are compatible with the surrounding residential neighborhood. The development standards and range of allowable uses are designed to provide for residential living at a slightly higher density of development than that of the R-1 district.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-2 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
2.
3.
Day Care Home;
[Ord. 2680, 3-18-1996]
4.
Golf courses, including uses normally ancillary to such uses, such as restaurants, but not including commercially operated driving ranges or miniature golf courses, provided that such ancillary uses, parking and all structures are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
5.
Parks, forest preserves and recreational areas, provided that any parking lots are located at least 500 feet from any lot line;
6.
Single family detached dwellings. [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-2 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Cemeteries;
2.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
3.
Governmental uses;
5.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
The dwelling units are located on the parcel to ensure adequate privacy for residents, such as by the separation of buildings or landscaping between buildings;
(2)
No more than one dwelling unit for every 1/2 gross acre of land is permitted, unless a critical and sensitive area located on the map identified in the Village's Comprehensive Plan is present on the parcel proposed for development, in which event smaller lots may be permitted, provided that:
(3)
Buildings are oriented to provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds and hills to the maximum extent practicable; and
(4)
Streets are designed to follow natural soils and contours and provide a variety of views and approaches.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
6.
Public utility structures, other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
D.
Minimum Lot Sizes. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal use in the R-2A District shall be permitted on a lot less than 15,000 square feet in area and a width of less than 100 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-2A District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
2.
Side. All streets: Not less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal building to the side lot line. Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line. For irregular lots, not less than 10 feet on each side of the principal building to the side lot line.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 6-2-2008 by Ord. No. 4374; 7-6-2010 by Ord. No. 4574; 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
1.
The lot coverage is not to exceed 40% for the principal structures, pavement, and accessory structures.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5857]
a.
An additional 3% impervious lot coverage is allowed for single-family homes with side-loaded garages.
2.
Nonresidential land uses are allowed up to 70% impervious lot coverage by right.
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 30 feet to the mean height of the roof. If the distance between the subject building and existing adjacent buildings is less than 15 feet, then the mean height of the subject building shall not exceed the mean height of adjacent buildings by more than 10 feet.
§ 6-204 R-3 Residential District.
A.
Purpose. The R-3 Residential District is established to promote and maintain the development of single-family detached and attached housing and limited public and institutional uses that are compatible with the surrounding residential neighborhood. The district therefore provides housing opportunities similar in scale to single family detached dwellings but encouraging clustering in order to promote establishing on-site amenities at a slightly higher density of development than that of the R-2 District.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-3 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
1.
Accessory uses, as provided in Section 6-302;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008] |
a.
Garages for two vehicles facing a public street or side-loaded;
b.
Garages for three vehicles facing a public street on the primary front yard provided that:
c.
Garages for three vehicles facing a public street on the side yard of a corner lot provided that: The bay for the third vehicle is offset a minimum of one foot from the primary garage;
d.
Garages for three or four vehicles if it is side-loaded and not facing a public street.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016] |
2.
3.
Day Care Home;
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
4.
Public parks and recreational areas;
5.
Single family detached dwellings. [Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-3 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Cemeteries;
[Ord. 2420, 7-6-1993]
2.
Congregate Elderly Housing, provided that the use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility.
[Ord. 4664, 8-16-2011]
3.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
4.
Day care centers and day care homes, provided that:
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997] |
a.
The use is licensed by or registered with the Illinois Department of Children and Family Services in accordance with the Child Care Act of 1969. (Ill. Rev. Stat. ch 23, par. 2211 et seq.).
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
b.
The use is located on a parcel of no less than five acres in size.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
5.
Governmental uses;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
6.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
7.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
Private open space is provided as follows:
(A)
Single family detached units shall have at least 450 square feet of usable, private green space adjacent to each unit with some separation from neighbors' space and with direct access from the unit.
(B)
Townhouses and multi-family units shall have at least 200 square feet of private open space per unit. Such open space can be located on a patio, deck, balcony, or next to the building or combination thereof.
(2)
Common Open Space. At least 25% of the area of the development shall be maintained as common open space.
(3)
30% less side or rear setbacks may be permitted for every 10% of private open space more than the minimum required, provided that the required distance between buildings is maintained and provided that the windows in adjacent buildings are not aligned so as to ensure privacy of the residents;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(4)
20% less required private open space may be permitted for every 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(5)
Density and Bonuses. Except as otherwise provided in this subsection, the density for dwellings shall not exceed 2.5 dwellings per acre. Density may be increased up to four dwelling units per acre according to the following:
(A)
One unit per acre for every 20% (minimum) of common open space is provided in addition to the minimum required; or
(B)
One unit per acre for every 1200 (minimum) linear feet of boulevard treatment of a street; or
(C)
One unit per acre if all other optional bonuses in Subsection C7a(6) are provided.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
(6)
Optional Bonuses. Additional density bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following for the proposed development:
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(A)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped median strip or island in the middle of a street;
(B)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(C)
Buildings oriented for solar heating;
(D)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(E)
Garbage enclosures and places for recreational vehicles hidden from view from the street; and
(F)
Attractive non-standard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
8.
Public utility structures other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002] |
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
D.
Minimum Lot Size. Except as provided by special use permit, no single family dwelling in the R-3 District shall be permitted on a lot less than 10,000 square feet in area and a width (see definition) of less than 80 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width, and a depth of less than 125 feet, adding at least 20 feet if the rear of the lot is adjacent to a collector or arterial road. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-3 District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "corner side" setback.
1.
Front.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 45 feet from the property line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 10% calculation; however no side yard shall be less than eight feet.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 40 feet from the property line. For irregular lots, not less than eight feet on each side of the principal building to the side lot line.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 25 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
d.
Front porches may have a reduced setback of five additional feet.
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
2.
Side. All streets: Not less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal building to the side lot line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 10% calculation; however no side yard shall be less than eight feet.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
a.
Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
3.
Corner side.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 25 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 20 feet from the property.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 15 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 2586, 6-6-1994; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
4.
Rear.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 45 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 40 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other lots: 30 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
1.
The lot coverage is not to exceed 45% for the principal structures, pavement, and accessory structures.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5857]
a.
An additional 3% impervious lot coverage is allowed for single-family homes with side-loaded garages.
2.
Nonresidential land uses are allowed up to 70% impervious lot coverage by right.
G.
Height. No structure may exceed a maximum of 30 feet to the mean height of the roof. If adjacent buildings are less than 30 feet from the subject building, the mean height of the subject building shall not exceed the mean height of adjacent buildings by more than 10 feet.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
§ 6-204.5 R-3A Residential District.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4217, 2-5-2007]
A.
Purpose. To bring existing lots into conformance with zoning standards and facilitate remodeling and additions. The R-3A Residential District shall not apply to lots recorded after January 1, 2006.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-3A District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
1.
Accessory uses, as provided in Section 6-302;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
a.
Garages for two vehicles facing a public street or side-loaded;
b.
Garages for three vehicles facing a public street on the primary front yard provided that:
c.
Garages for three vehicles facing a public street on the side yard of a corner lot provided that: The bay for the third vehicle is offset a minimum of one foot from the primary garage;
d.
Garages for three or four vehicles if it is side-loaded and not facing a public street.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016] |
2.
3.
Day Care Home;
4.
Public parks and recreational areas;
5.
Single family detached dwellings.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-3A District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Cemeteries;
2.
Congregate Elderly Housing, provided that the use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility.
[Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
3.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
4.
Day care centers and day care homes, provided that:
5.
Governmental uses;
6.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
7.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development provided that:
(1)
Private open space is provided as follows:
(A)
Single family detached units shall have at least 450 square feet of usable, private green space adjacent to each unit with some separation from neighbors' space and with direct access from the unit.
(B)
Townhouses and multi-family units shall have at least 200 square feet of private open space per unit. Such open space can be located on a patio, deck, balcony, or next to the building or combination thereof.
(2)
Common Open Space. At least 25% of the area of the development shall be maintained as common open space.
(3)
30% less side or rear setbacks may be permitted for every 10% of private open space more than the minimum required, provided that the required distance between buildings is maintained and provided that the windows in adjacent buildings are not aligned so as to ensure privacy of the residents;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(4)
20% less required private open space may be permitted for every 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(5)
Density and Bonuses. Except as otherwise provided in this subsection, the density for dwellings shall not exceed 2.5 dwellings per acre. Density may be increased up to four dwelling units per acre according to the following:
(A)
One unit per acre for every 20% (minimum) of common open space is provided in addition to the minimum required; or
(B)
One unit per acre for every 1200 (minimum) linear feet of boulevard treatment of a street; or
(C)
One unit per acre if all other optional bonuses in Subsection C7a(6) are provided.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
(6)
Optional Bonuses. Additional density bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following for the proposed development:
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(A)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped median strip or island in the middle of a street;
(B)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(C)
Buildings oriented for solar heating;
(D)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(E)
Garbage enclosures and places for recreational vehicles hidden from view from the street; and
(F)
Attractive non-standard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
8.
Public utility structures other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
D.
Minimum Lot Size. Except as provided by special use permit, no single family dwelling in the R-3A District shall be permitted on a lot less than 7,000 square feet in area and a width (see definition) of less than 60 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width, and a depth of less than 115 feet. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-3A District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall therefore be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall be considered to be the "corner side" setback.
1.
Front.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 45 feet from the property line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 10% calculation; however no side yard shall be less than eight feet.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 40 feet from the property line. For irregular lots, not less than eight feet on each side of the principal building to the side lot line.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 25 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
d.
Front porches may have a reduced setback of five additional feet.
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
2.
Side. All streets: Not less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal building to the side lot line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 10% calculation; however no side yard shall be less than eight feet.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
a.
Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet and the driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
3.
Corner Side.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 25 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 20 feet from the property.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other streets: 15 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 2586, 6-6-1994; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
4.
Rear.
a.
Abutting a major or minor arterial: 45 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Abutting a major collector: 40 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
c.
Abutting all other lots: 30 feet from the property line.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
1.
The lot coverage is not to exceed 45% for the principal structures, pavement, and accessory structures.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5857]
a.
An additional 3% impervious lot coverage is allowed for single-family homes with side-loaded garages.
2.
Nonresidential land uses are allowed up to 70% impervious lot coverage by right.
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 30 feet to the mean height of the roof. If the distance between the subject building and existing adjacent buildings is less than 15 feet, then the mean height of the subject building shall not exceed the mean height of adjacent buildings by more than 10 feet.
§ 6-205 R-4 Residential District.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
A.
Purpose. The R-4 Residential District is established to provide residential opportunities at a slightly higher density than that of the R-3 District.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the R-4 District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the R-4 District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Bus terminals;
2.
Cemeteries;
3.
Convents, monasteries and schools, limited to public and private not-for-profit preschools, elementary and secondary schools and colleges/universities with day and boarding programs, provided that:
4.
Congregate elderly housing, provided that the use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility.
5.
Day care centers and day care homes, provided that the use is licensed by or registered with the Illinois Department of Children and Family Services in accordance with the Child Care Act of 1969. (225 ILCS 10/1 et seq.).
6.
Governmental uses;
7.
Public transportation facilities;
8.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
9.
Planned Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses.
a.
Residential planned development, provided that:
(1)
Private open space is provided as follows:
(A)
Single family detached units shall have at least 450 square feet of usable, private green space adjacent to each unit with some separation from neighbors' space and with direct access from the unit.
(B)
Townhouses and multi-family units shall have at least 200 square feet of private open space per unit. Such open space can be located on a patio, deck, balcony, or next to the building or combination thereof.
(2)
Common Open Space. At least 20% of the area of the development shall be maintained as common open space.
(3)
30% less side or rear setback may be permitted for every 10% of private open space more than the minimum required, provided that the required distance between buildings is maintained and provided that the windows in adjacent buildings are not aligned so as to ensure privacy of the residents;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(4)
20% less required private open space may be permitted for every 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(5)
Density for dwellings shall not exceed six units per acre, and the higher end of this limit shall only be considered provided that:
(A)
One unit per acre for every 20% (minimum) of common open space provided in addition to the minimum required; or
(B)
One unit per acre for every 1200 (minimum) linear feet of boulevard treatment of a street; or
(C)
One unit per acre if all other optional bonuses set forth in Subsection C9a(6) are provided.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(6)
Optional Bonuses. Additional density bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following in the proposed development:
(A)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped medium strip or island in the middle of a street;
(B)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(C)
Buildings oriented for solar heating;
(D)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(E)
Garbage enclosures and places for recreational vehicles hidden from view from the street; and
(F)
Attractive non-standard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
10.
Utility Substations. Public utility structures other than electrical generating facilities, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed and operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations;
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling; and
D.
Minimum Lot Size. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal use in the R-4 District shall be permitted on a lot less than 8,500 square feet in area and a width (see definition) of not less than 70 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width. Lots fronting cul-de-sac bulbs shall have a minimum lot width of 50 feet at the right-of-way line and meet zoning district lot width at the front setback.
E.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the R-4 District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "corner side" setback.
1.
Single-Family Detached Residential Building Setbacks.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
b.
Side Setbacks.
(1)
Not less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of a principal single family building to the side lot line. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the 10% calculation; however no setback shall be less than 7.5 feet.
(2)
Side yards with side loading garages shall be a minimum of 20 feet. The driveway must be a minimum of three feet from the nearest side property line.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
2.
Single-Family Attached and Multi-Family Building Setbacks.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
b.
Side Setbacks.
(1)
Major or minor arterial: 35 feet from the property line.
(2)
Major or minor collector: 30 feet from the property line.
(3)
All other streets: 20 feet from the property line.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
(4)
Setbacks that do not abut a street: All single-family attached and multi-family buildings shall maintain a minimum distance of 25 feet between the side of the building and any neighboring buildings or property lines.
[Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
c.
Rear Setbacks.
(1)
Major or minor arterial: 35 feet from the property line.
(2)
All other streets: 30 feet from the property line.
(3)
Setbacks that do not abut a street: All single-family attached and multi-family buildings shall maintain a minimum distance of 30 feet between the rear of the building and any neighboring buildings or property lines.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
F.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
G.
Height. No structure may exceed 50 feet in height to the highest point except for single family attached and detached which shall be 30 feet to the mean height of the roof, and be more than 14 feet higher than an adjacent structure.
§ 6-205.1 LSPD Large Scale Planned Development District.
A.
Purpose. Large Scale Planned Developments possess characteristics of unique and special form with such a large impact on the entire community that each development must be considered individually. The following use will be permitted only upon presentation of a concept plan of development to the Director of Development Services and final approval by the Board of Trustees. The Large Scale Planned Development District is established to provide mixed uses including residential opportunities at a higher density than that of the R-4 District and appropriate commercial uses. The minimum property size that may be zoned LSPD is 1,000 acres of property under single ownership or unified control. To the extent this section conflicts or is inconsistent with other provisions of the Land Development Code, this section shall control. All land uses must conform to the approved Spring Creek Concept Plan or be approved as a special use amendment.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
B.
Permitted Uses.
1.
All permitted uses in the R-1, R-2, R-3, R-4, RSB, and BIZ Districts, as set forth in this Land Development Code.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998]
2.
Grocery/food/pharmacy store with a ground floor area not exceeding 40,000 square feet.
3.
Restaurants, with or without drive-through windows, provided each is approved as a separate special use by the procedures set forth in this Land Development Code.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
4.
Such other special uses as may be approved by the Village Board in accordance with the procedures set forth in this Land Development Code.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
C.
Special Use. A Large Scale Planned Development may be established as a special use only in the LSPD District, in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in Section 5-105.1.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
D.
Minimum Lot Size. Except as provided by special use permit, no principal residential single-family detached dwelling in the LSPD District shall be permitted on a lot less than 8,000 square feet in area and a width (see definition) of not less than 70 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996]
E.
Setbacks.
1.
Building Setbacks from street right-of-ways. The following setback standards shall apply in the LSPD District.
a.
Single-family attached and detached dwellings including duplexes and townhomes, and condominium and cooperative buildings. For residential developments with square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
(2)
Side. All streets: Not less than 15% of the width of the lot on each side of the principal multi-family building to the side lot line, with a minimum setback width of 15 feet on each side; or no less than 10% of the width of the lot on each side of a principal single family detached building to the side lot line, with a minimum setback width of 7.5 feet on each side. Where the width of a lot varies, the average of the lot width at the front setback line and the rear setback line shall be used to make the calculation.
(3)
Rear. All streets: 25 feet from the property line.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
Non-residential and mixed use buildings (commercial and residential uses), and multifamily dwellings, including condominium and cooperative buildings (if the block on which they are located includes commercial uses). Setbacks between the street right-of-way and the building facade facing the street shall follow the minimum requirements set in Table 6-205.1.E.1.ii(A) (below). The setback width is related to the width and character of the street.
Table 6-205.1.E.1.ii(A) | ||
|---|---|---|
Street Name | Minimum Building Setback From Street | Purpose of the Setback Area |
All streets, except as below | 25 feet | For streets carrying moderate to high regional and local traffic, a setback area of 25 feet will be required. This will allow commercial buildings to maintain high visibility from the streets, and also provide a significant landscaped area along the street. |
Exceptions: | ||
LaGrange Road | 35 feet | LaGrange Road is proposed to be widened to a six lane arterial with a landscaped median. A larger setback area is being proposed for this street to distinguish it from other arterials. The wider setback will allow substantial landscaping that will add a sense of scale, safety and enclosure to this high speed corridor, and help create a unique look for the street. |
147th Street | 15 feet | For pedestrian oriented streets that also carry moderate local traffic, a setback area of 15 feet is required. This will encourage building entrances to connect directly to the sidewalk, while allowing landscaping with low plantings along the street. |
Ravinia Avenue | ||
West Avenue | ||
144th Place | ||
149th Street | ||
157th Street | 0 to 15 feet | These special pedestrian oriented streets shall be defined by buildings with active street fronts, multiple entrances and well articulated street facades, and by parkway trees along the sidewalk. Buildings shall be allowed to be placed at the lot line or set back up to 15 feet to strengthen the pedestrian character of the street. |
142nd Street | ||
Ravinia extension (north of 143rd Street and south of 159th Street) | ||
161st Street | ||
160th Street | ||
95th Avenue | ||
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017] |
2.
Building setbacks from rear and side lot lines that do not abut a street. All buildings must maintain a minimum of 30 feet of setback area from the rear lot line and a minimum of 15 feet of setback area from the side lot lines that do not abut a street.
3.
Permitted uses in building setback areas along streets.
a.
Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
(1)
Widened sidewalks and entranceways;
(2)
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
(3)
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
(4)
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.;
(5)
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
(6)
Benches and complementary site furniture.
b.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the setback area up to 10 feet, including:
(1)
Canopies, marquees and other projections that create shaded and protected entrances;
(2)
Extended roofs and eaves;
(3)
Awnings and canopies over windows;
(4)
Projecting blade signs that comply with the Village's sign ordinance;
(5)
Tensile Canopies that project over outdoor congregation areas.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
4.
Uses not permitted in building setbacks along streets.
Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street.
Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear "hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
[Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
5.
Parking Lot Setbacks. A minimum of a ten-foot landscaped setback must be provided between the parking lot and the primary street right-of-way.
[Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005] |
F.
Lot Coverage. No more than 45% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 55% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space"). Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 50% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; amended by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
G.
Height. No single-family residential structure may exceed 2-1/2 stores or 30 feet in height to the mean height of the roof, whichever is higher. No multi-family residential structure may exceed four stories.
[Ord. 2514, 1-17-1994; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
§ 6-206 RSB Residential and Supporting Business District.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
A.
Purpose. The RSB Residential and Supporting Business District is established to provide for residential and nonresidential uses meeting the day to day convenience shopping and service needs of persons residing in the district and adjacent residential areas. This District is intended to provide uses that are on a more intimate, pedestrian-oriented scale than those uses located in the BIZ District.
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the RSB District, in accordance with the procedures set forth in Sections 5-101 through 5-104, provided that all other applicable regulations are met:
2.
3.
Existing single family detached units.
4.
Financial institutions;
5.
Governmental uses;
6.
Public Parks and Recreation Areas; and
7.
Townhouse and multi-family dwellings.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the RSB District in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105A:
1.
Animal Services;
2.
Community centers;
3.
Congregate elderly housing, provided:
a.
The use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
4.
Funeral Parlors;
5.
Places of worship with overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
6.
Private Parks and recreation areas;
7.
Residential planned development provided that:
a.
No more than 30% of the total dwelling units within the development will be single family detached;
b.
Private open space is provided as follows:
(1)
Single family detached units shall have at least 450 square feet of usable, private green space adjacent to each unit with some separation from neighbors' space and with direct access from the unit.
(2)
Townhouses and multi-family attached units shall have at least 200 square feet of private open space per unit. Such open space can be located on a patio, deck, balcony, or next to the building or combination thereof.
c.
Common open space: At least 20% of the net area of the development shall be maintained as common open space.
d.
30% less side or rear setback may be permitted for every 10% of private open space more than the minimum required, provided that the required distance between buildings is maintained and provided that the windows in adjacent buildings are not aligned so as to ensure privacy of the residents;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
e.
20% less required private open space may be permitted for every 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
f.
Density and Bonuses. Except as otherwise provided in this subsection, the density for dwellings shall not exceed four units per acre. Density may be increased up to eight units per acre provided that:
(1)
One unit per acre for every 20% (minimum) of common open space provided in addition to the minimum required;
(2)
One unit per acre for every 1200 (minimum) linear feet of boulevard treatment of a street;
(3)
One unit per acre if all other optional bonuses in Subsection C7g are provided;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
g.
Optional Bonuses. Additional density bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following in the proposed development:
(1)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped median strip or island in the middle of a street;
(2)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(3)
Buildings oriented for solar heating;
(4)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(5)
Garbage enclosures and places for recreational vehicles hidden from view from the street; and
(6)
Attractive non-standard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
8.
Utility substations, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed according to design guidelines and is operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations; and
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
D.
Floor Area Ratio. Not to exceed 0.6 for residential dwelling units and 1.0 for nonresidential and mixed uses.
E.
Lot Area. The lot area for each business establishment or residential dwelling unit shall not be less than 5,000 square feet with a minimum width (see definition) of 40 feet adding 10% for a corner lot width.
F.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the RSB District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
3.
Permitted Uses in Building Setback Areas along Streets.
a.
Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
(1)
Widened sidewalks and entranceways;
(2)
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
(3)
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
(4)
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.;
(5)
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
(6)
Benches and complementary site furniture.
b.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the setback area up to 10 feet, including:
4.
Uses Not Permitted in Building Setbacks Along Streets.
Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street.
Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connecting pedestrian routes.
g.
The architectural design of the building elevations facing the street should have the appearance of a primary facade and include transparency in the form of full or clerestory windows.
5.
Parking Lot Setbacks. A minimum of a ten-foot landscaped setback must be provided between the parking lot and the primary street right-of-way.
G.
Lot Coverage. Lot coverage is the measure of impervious area on a property, including the area of the building(s), pavement, stormwater storage, and other impervious surfaces. All areas not included in the impervious lot coverage shall be green space.
[Amended 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
H.
Height. No structure may exceed three stories or 35 feet whichever is higher.
§ 6-207 BIZ General Business District.
A.
Purpose. The BIZ General Business district is established to provide a location for higher-volume and higher intensity commercial uses than the RSB district, including establishments involving heavy equipment, and the processing and distribution of goods, which provide employment and revenues for the Village. Due to the higher volume of these uses, and the automobile and truck traffic they typically generate, it is intended that the BIZ District be located only along major and minor collectors and arterials in order to ensure that the traffic generated by such uses does not adversely impact nearby residential neighborhoods. Recognizing the impacts such uses may have on adjacent residential areas and the overall character of the Village, the development standards for the BIZ District are designed to buffer the BIZ District from nearby residential properties and to maintain the general appearance of major thoroughfares through the Village.
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the BIZ District in buildings up to 50,000 square feet unless otherwise limited below, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
2.
Building material sales;
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
3.
4.
Clinics and medical or dental offices; Medical offices may require an entrance canopy.
5.
Commercial retail establishments not exceeding 50,000 square feet of floor area;
6.
Contractors or construction offices, but not including storage yards;
7.
Convenience stores;
8.
Day care centers, day care homes, and adult day care centers, provided they are licensed/registered with the appropriate state agencies.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
9.
Drycleaning and laundry processing stations, provided that they have all necessary State approvals for handling and disposing of toxic substances used at the station;
[Ord. 2462, 10-18-1993]
10.
Financial institutions;
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
11.
Food concession associated with a primary use;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
12.
Governmental uses;
13.
Indoor recreation areas;
14.
Medical rehabilitation centers;
15.
Nurseries and greenhouses;
16.
Offices;
17.
Overnight accommodations, provided that rooms are not rented for a period of more than 30 days.
18.
Personal service establishments;
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
19.
Public parks and recreation areas;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
20.
Schools - arts or vocational;
21.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, greater than 300 feet of a residential parcel.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; amended by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012; Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the BIZ District, in accordance in the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
2.
Animal Services;
[Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
3.
Clubs and lodges;
4.
Commercial retail establishments with a floor area of 50,000 square feet or greater;
5.
Community centers;
6.
Congregate elderly housing, provided that the use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility.
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999; amended by Ord. 4475, 4-20-2009; Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
7.
Drive-in service windows, provided that:
a.
The principal use is an office, retail establishment, financial institution or restaurant located on the same lot;
b.
Stacking spaces are provided per Code requirements as indicated in Section 6-306, Off Street Parking; and
c.
The amount of stacking space and circulation patterns on the lot is adequate to keep traffic from backing up into the street, based upon documentation of similar circumstances.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; amended by Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010] |
8.
Funeral parlors.
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011]
9.
Health clubs and fitness centers;
10.
Hospitals;
11.
Motor vehicle sales or rental;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
12.
Motor vehicle services;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; amended by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
13.
Museums, civic and cultural centers;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
14.
Outside, open markets;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
15.
Private parks and recreational areas;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
16.
Pawn shops/Pawnbrokers subject to licensing by the Village and State (per 205 ILCS 510/Pawnbroker Regulation Act) and provided that the building or unit in building is not closer than 1,000 feet to another pawn shop/pawnbroker building/unit or to the property line of a school, child care facility or park;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
17.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
18.
Planned Developments, provided that:
a.
Common open space: At least 20% of the net area of the development shall be maintained as common open space;
b.
20% less required private open space may be permitted for every 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005]
c.
Optional Bonuses. Addition al building square footage bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following in the proposed development:
[Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005]
(1)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped median strip.
(2)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(3)
Buildings are oriented for solar heating;
(4)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(5)
Garbage enclosures hidden from view from the street;
(6)
Attractive, nonstandard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
[Ord. 2462, 10-18-1993]
19.
Public transportation facilities;
20.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, within 300 feet of a residential parcel.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012; Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
21.
Sale of building materials with outdoor storage if surrounded by solid, six-foot high fence.
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
22.
Tattoo/body piercing shops subject to licensing by the Village and registering with the State (per 410 ILCS 54/Tattoo and Body Piercing Establishment Registration Act) and provided that the building or unit in building is not closer than 1,000 feet to another tattoo/body piercing establishment building/unit or to the property line of a school, child care facility or park;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
23.
Theaters, except open-air, drive-in;
24.
Public utility structures and utility substations, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed according to design guidelines and is operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations; and
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling.
25.
Wireless communication facilities.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
D.
Floor Area Ratio. Not to exceed 1.0.
E.
Lot Area. The lot area for each business establishment shall not be less than 10,000 square feet with a minimum lot width (see definition) of 80 feet.
F.
Setbacks.
1.
Building Setbacks from Street Right-of-Ways. Setbacks between the street right-of-way and the building facade facing the street shall follow the minimum requirements set in Table 6-207.F.1(A) (below). The setback width is related to the width and character of the street.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
Table 6-207.F.1(A) | ||
|---|---|---|
Street Name | Minimum Building Setback From Street | Purpose of the Setback Area |
All streets, except as below | 25 feet | For streets carrying moderate to high regional and local traffic, a setback area of 25 feet will be required. This will allow commercial buildings to maintain high visibility from the streets, and also provide a significant landscaped area along the street. |
Exceptions: | ||
LaGrange Road | 25 feet | LaGrange Road is proposed to be widened to a six lane arterial with a landscaped median. This setback area will distinguish it from other arterials as the main commercial area of the Village. The setback will allow landscaping that will add a sense of scale, safety and enclosure to the corridor, and help create a unique look for the street. [Ord. 4996, 6-15-2015] |
147th Street | 15 feet | For pedestrian oriented streets that also carry moderate local traffic, a setback area of 15 feet is required. This will encourage building entrances to connect directly to the sidewalk, while allowing landscaping with low plantings along the street. |
Ravinia Avenue | ||
West Avenue | ||
144th Place | ||
149th Street | ||
151st Street, between Ravinia Avenue and West Avenue [Ord. 3990, 2-21-2005] | ||
157th Street | 0 to 15 feet | These special pedestrian oriented streets shall be defined by buildings with active street fronts, multiple entrances and well articulated street facades, and by parkway trees along the sidewalk. Buildings shall be allowed to be placed at the lot line or set back up to 15 feet to strengthen the pedestrian character of the street. |
142nd Street | ||
Ravinia extension (north of 143rd Street and south of 159th Street) | ||
161st Street | ||
160th Street | ||
95th Avenue | ||
2.
Building setbacks from rear and side lot lines that do not abut a street. All buildings must maintain a minimum of 30 feet of setback area from the rear lot line and a minimum of 15 feet of setback area from the side lot lines that do not abut a street.
3.
Permitted uses in building setback areas along streets.
a.
Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
(1)
Widened sidewalks and entranceways;
(2)
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
(3)
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
(4)
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.;
(5)
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
(6)
Benches and complementary site furniture.
b.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the setback area up to 10 feet, including:
(1)
Canopies, marquees and other projections that create shaded and protected entrances;
(2)
Extended roofs and eaves;
(3)
Awnings and canopies over windows;
(4)
Projecting blade signs that comply with the Village's sign ordinance;
(5)
Tensile Canopies that project over outdoor congregation areas.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017] |
4.
Uses not Permitted In Building Setbacks Along Streets.
Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street.
Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
[Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
G.
Lot Coverage. No more than 75% of the area of the parcel proposed for development shall be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 25% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space"). Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 80% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; amended by Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
H.
Height. No structure may exceed four stories or 50 feet, whichever is higher, nor cast a shadow on adjacent residential buildings.
§ 6-208 MFG Manufacturing District.
[Amended by Ord. 2420, 7-6-1993; Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998; Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999; Ord. 3762, 8-5-2002; by Ord. 3642, 8-5-2002; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 4042, 7-5-2005; Ord. 3183, 9-18-2006; Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; Ord. 4418, 9-15-2008; Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010; by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; by Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010; by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011; by Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; by Ord. 4792, 2-4-2013; Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 5-20-2024 by Ord. No. 5893]
A.
Purpose. The purpose of the MFG Manufacturing District is to create and protect areas for industrial uses, manufacturing, assembling, processing, servicing and storing of parts and products, and distribution of products at wholesale. Whenever possible, this district should be separated from residential districts by natural or structural boundaries such as drainage channels, sharp breaks in topography, strips of vegetation, traffic arteries and similar features.
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the MFG District in buildings up to 50,000 square feet unless otherwise limited below, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104 and the conditions of subsection H of this regulation:
2.
3.
Carpet cleaning establishments;
4.
Dry cleaning processing stations;
5.
Food concession associated with a primary use;
6.
Food production, artisanal, not exceeding 2,500 square feet of floor area.
7.
Governmental uses;
8.
Indoor recreation areas less than 5,000 square feet;
9.
Light industrial;
10.
Monument sales;
11.
Outside storage of materials, equipment or vehicles essential to the operation of a business, on land other than the lot on which the business is located, shall be considered as a special use if the land is in the MFG Manufacturing District and is on a lot adjacent to and in possession of the same title holder of record as the lot occupied by the business for which the outside storage items are accessory.
12.
Motor vehicle services;
13.
Offices, subject to meeting office parking requirements;
a.
Medical offices may require an entrance canopy.
14.
Outside storage, when the storage area does not exceed 50% of the area of the lot, is located at the rear of the principal building, is screened on all sides, and the height of the stored materials, equipment or vehicles does not exceed the height of the screening. (See also § 6-208.H, Required Conditions, § 6-308.J, Screening and § 6-302, Accessory Structures and Uses, for further terms and conditions.)
15.
Outside storage of vehicles essential to the operation of a business, on land other than the lot on which the business is located, shall be considered as part of the appearance review process if the land is in the MFG Manufacturing District and is a lot with or without an existing primary use that is owned or leased, in full or in part, by a business establishment granted a special use for motor vehicle sales or rental or motor vehicle services located within the Village's BIZ General Business District for the purpose of the storage of new or used motor vehicle inventory, with the following conditions:
a.
Conditions.
(1)
The vehicle storage area shall not be open to the public;
(2)
No signage shall be allowed that advertises the BIZ General Business District business establishment or contents of the vehicle storage area; and
(3)
No vehicle sales, rental, or leasing shall take place on the premises. (See Section 6-208.B and C.)
b.
Review. Landscape and engineering review fees shall be collected per Land Development Code requirements. All engineering review requirements apply. Landscape review requirements are detailed below. All project-related fees shall be paid prior to appearance review approval;
c.
Site plan. At minimum, the following information shall be provided on proposed site plans:
(1)
The total number of proposed parking spaces;
(2)
The hours of operation for the facility;
(3)
An estimate of frequency of daily ingress/egress of vehicles;
(4)
The location of an address marker, visible from abutting frontage;
(5)
The location of proposed vehicle storage area(s), ingress/egress points, a general parking plan for the vehicle storage area, proposed lot coverage and a description of base material to be used;
(6)
The location of required fence. See below for fence requirements. Plans must include an elevation drawing showing proposed material, dimension, post footing and color details of the fence and entry gate;
(7)
If an electric gate will be used, include where meter will be located, how electricity will be brought to site and any underground utility details;
(8)
The location of all required setbacks, as outlined below in § 6-208B.13.d;
(9)
Any additional information deemed necessary by the Development Services Department for the review of a project.
d.
Screening. A uniform, eight-foot-tall wood or vinyl opaque fence shall be installed around the entire vehicle storage area. Vehicles shall not exceed the height of the screening. A 25-foot front setback shall apply to all fences abutting a public right-of-way. A 15-foot setback shall apply to all fences not abutting a public right-of-way;
e.
Landscape. Parkway tree requirements per § 6-305 apply to all projects. Foundation landscaping requirements per § 6-305.D.5.a shall apply to all fences abutting a public right-of-way. One ornamental tree shall be planted for every 30 feet of fence length not abutting a public right-of-way. No landscape requirements apply to the interior vehicle storage area. Submittal of a Tree Survey and Tree Mitigation Plan is required per § 6-305.F.3.h. Tree mitigation requirements apply per § 6-305.F.3.f.
16.
Printing, publishing or photography plants;
17.
Public parks and recreation areas;
18.
Public transportation facilities;
19.
Schools - arts or vocational;
20.
Warehouses or distribution establishments.
21.
Wholesale establishments.
22.
Wineries and Microbreweries under 12,000 square feet, and Distilleries under 5,000 square feet, provided they are located at least 300 feet from a residential district or use as measured from the area of activity.
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the MFG District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105 and the conditions of Subsection H of this regulation:
1.
Animal Services;
2.
Composting facilities;
3.
Drive-in service windows, provided that:
a.
The principal use is an office, retail establishment, financial institution or restaurant located on the same lot;
b.
Stacking spaces are provided per Code requirements as indicated in Section 6-306, Off Street Parking; and
c.
The amount of stacking space and circulation patterns on the lot is adequate to keep traffic from backing up into the street, based upon documentation of similar circumstances.
4.
Equipment and motor vehicle rental;
5.
Excavating and recycling services, provided they are located at least 1,000 feet from a residential use or district;
6.
Food processing plants, provided they are located at least 1,000 feet from a residential use or district;
7.
Food production, artisanal, exceeding 2,500 square feet of floor area.
8.
Indoor recreation areas equal to or greater than 5,000 square feet;
9.
Light Industrial Facilities handling or processing hazardous and/or toxic material, as defined by the IEPA, provided they are located at least 1,000 feet from a residential use or district;
10.
Outside storage, for a storage area that does not meet the requirements of § 6-208.B.12 or § 6-208.H.2. (See also § 6-208.H, § 6-308.J, Screening, and § 6-302 Accessory Structures and Uses, for further terms and conditions.)
11.
Private parks and recreational areas;
12.
Petroleum storage facilities, provided they are located at least 1,000 feet from a residential use or district;
13.
Planned Manufacturing Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses;
14.
Public utility structures and utility substations, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed according to design guidelines and is operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations; and
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling.
15.
Sites or site plans with total building area greater than 50,000 square feet. This special use is in conjunction with any principal special use.
16.
Self-service storage facilities, provided that they are wholly contained within a building with access to the individual units provided through the building interior.
17.
Wineries and Microbreweries over 12,000 square feet, and Distilleries over 5,000 square feet, or within 300 feet from a residential use or district as measured from the area of activity.
18.
Wireless communication antennae on the required minimum lot of 20,000 square feet;
19.
Wireless communication facilities.
D.
Floor Area Ratio. Not to exceed 1.5.
E.
Lot Area. The minimum lot area established for uses in this district shall be 20,000 square feet with a minimum lot width (see definition) of 100 feet.
F.
Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply to property in the MFG District. For square corner lots, where neither side is narrower to determine the front setback, the "front" setback shall be considered based on the location of the building's main door; the non-entry side of the building shall therefore be considered as the "side" setback.
3.
Rear. The rear setback from an abutting right-of-way shall conform to the same setback standards outlined in Subsection 6-208F1 above, titled "Front". The rear setback from the rear lot line that does not abut a right-of-way shall be 20 feet.
4.
Uses not Permitted in Building Setbacks Along Streets.
Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street.
Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
G.
Height. No structure may exceed three stories or 40 feet, whichever is higher.
H.
Required Conditions. All permitted and special uses in the MFG District shall meet the following conditions:
1.
All production, fabricating, servicing, assembling, testing, repair, processing and outdoor storage, including all accessory uses and structures, shall be conducted wholly within an enclosed building or behind a uniform solid fence eight feet in height, as provided for in Section 6-208B11 Permitted Uses and Section 6-310 Fences.
2.
Outside storage of automobiles and commercial vehicles and trucks shall be prohibited except as follows:
b.
Temporary parking of commercial vehicles and trucks in loading areas designed and designated for such purposes and for the purpose of loading and unloading.
c.
Parking of commercial vehicles or trucks essential to the operation of a business located on the same lot and with each commercial vehicle or truck not to exceed 19,500 pounds. Outside storage of such vehicles shall comply with § 6-208.B.12, § 6-208.H.1, and § 6-308.J unless a special use is granted as per § 6-208.C.9 herein.
 |
3.
Where a railroad right-of-way separates the district from a residential district, buildings and storage may be located within 150 feet from the centerline of the railroad right-of-way, provided that suitable landscaping or fencing is provided in accordance with 6-305 Landscape and Tree Preservation and 6-310 Fences of these regulations.
4.
A minimum of a ten-foot landscaped setback must be provided between the parking lot and the primary street right-of-way, in addition to any other landscape or buffer requirement.
I.
Lot Coverage. No more than 80% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 20% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space"). Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 85% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
§ 6-209 Old Orland Historic District.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4131, 4-17-2006]
Vision |
The Old Orland Historic District is Orland Park's oldest neighborhood and the historic heart of the Village. It has a picturesque turn-of-the-century collection of small shops, historic churches and attractive houses. The Village Center, McGinnis Slough, Humphrey Woods and the train station are within close walking distance. To ensure that Old Orland retains its unique character and special sense of place, the Village offers the following vision for the area: |
New development will respect the established character of this historic neighborhood - narrow tree lined streets, small walkable blocks, buildings on small lots, and gardens and outdoor spaces for people to enjoy. Contributing buildings will be preserved for future generations. Historic churches, museums and other civic buildings will continue to be places where the community comes to gather, learn and celebrate. The area will attract small businesses and unique local stores, and also be a great place to live. Trails will connect the area to woods and forest nearby. |
 Orland Park circa 1938 |
 Historic images of the district from the 1900's |
MAP 1: OOH District Boundary Map with Contributing Structures [Amended 5-20-2024 by Ord. No. 5894]  |
List of Contributing Structures with Photos | |
1. | Orland Park School, 9960 West 143rd Street. The center two-story brick portion of the school was built in 1922 and the gymnasium to the west was added in 1940. The distinctive stone walls of the gymnasium are made of Joliet limestone. This is the most substantial of buildings in the Old Orland area. |
2. | Former Christ Lutheran Church, 9999 West 143rd Street. Erected in 1898, this simple wood frame building is typical of many Gothic Revival rural churches of the period. It has not been altered significantly. The small building south of the church was built in 1922 as a school house. |
3. | Former Residence, 9953 West 143rd Street. This small, simple frame building was built around 1890. The original materials and building elements have been unaltered. This is a fine example of a National style building with Folk Victorian detailing in the district. |
4. | Former Residence, 9925 West 143rd Street. This two-story Italianate structure from the 1880's has some nice decorative elements. Except for later residing, this building appears to have had no significant alterations. |
5. | Orland Park Library, 9917 West 143rd Street. This commercial building with Tudor styling was built in 1937 and once served as Orland Park's first public library. |
6. | Orland Park Hotel, 14306-10 Union Avenue. This frame commercial building was originally the Orland Park Hotel. The ornate Italianate trim dates to the early 1880's. Although the building has been resided and the fenestration of the first floor has been rebuilt, it is still the most ornate early structure in Orland Park. |
7. | Loebe Bros. General Store, 14314 Union Avenue. This was the first general store in Orland Park. The building appears to be a series of buildings that were added onto each other. Most of them appear to date from the early 1880's to mid 1890's. The front is particularly well preserved. |
8. | Loebe House, 9952 West 144th Street. This large residence from about 1895 is an excellent example of the Queen Anne style. The house shows typical features of Queen Anne houses in the use of bay windows, patterned shingles along the sides and gables, and a tower to break the flat wall surfaces. |
9. | Twin Towers Sanctuary, 9967 144th Street. Designed by Chicago architect William Arthur Bennet and constructed in 1898, the twin octagonal towers make this the most imposing and visible landmark in Old Orland. This building was substantially renovated by the Old Orland Heritage Foundation. In 1987, the building was added to the National Register of Historic Places. |
10. | Orland State Bank, 14316 Beacon Avenue. Built in 1910, this well preserved brick building is a good example of Italianate commercial buildings once common in the Midwest. |
11. | Commercial Emporium, 14320-24 Beacon Avenue. Built approximately in 1885, this is an unusual combination of Commercial, Italianate and National building style. |
12. | Former Residence, 14330 Beacon Avenue. This well preserved frame building was likely constructed in the late 1880's or early 1890's. The wealth of Queen Anne decorations have survived since the house was built. |
13. | Former Residence, 14315 Beacon Avenue. This two story Folk Victorian building dates back to the 1880's and is typical of many residences constructed during this period in Old Orland. |
14. | Residence, 14339 Beacon Avenue. This single story residence in the National style was built in 1890. Many of the original building features have been restored. |
15. | Residence, 14420 Second Avenue. Constructed in 1880, this house is believed to be the first residence built in Orland Park. The front bay windows and the roof that joins them were later additions at the turn of the 20th Century. The porch and garage building along Second Avenue were additions at the turn of the 21st Century. |
16. | John Humphrey House, 9830 West 144th Place. This stately two story Italianate frame residence was built in 1881 by the late Sir John Humphrey, a prominent early resident of the Orland area and Orland Park's first Mayor. The interior has been restored with authentic furnishings and is maintained by the Orland Historical Society. This building was added to the National Register of Historic Places in 2005. |
More detailed information about these buildings is available from the Village of Orland Park. | ||||
 Old Orland looking east, early 20th century; | ||||
 Historic perspectives of the district from the 1900's; | ||||
 | ||||
 | ||||
 | ||||
 | ||||
 16. 9830 West 144th Place (NRHP) |
Historic Architectural Styles in the District
The Old Orland Historic District has a collection of modest homes in a variety of styles, including National, Folk Victorian, Commercial and Commercial Italianate, Craftsman, Queen Anne, Gothic and Tudor Revival. The early buildings of the historic district were made of wood frame with wood siding and trim. Some later commercial buildings are of brick. The various architectural styles of buildings in the Historic District are described with examples below. While some buildings have elements of many other architectural styles, they were classified under the predominant style.
National (1835-1895) | |
National is the term given to indigenous forms of building construction. Some refer to National buildings as Vernacular style. Although buildings continued to be constructed according to the earlier traditional folk forms, the increased availability of lumber (mill-sawn lumber was available after 1850) led to some new shape innovations. Folk form, or vernacular buildings are typically of frame construction and covered with wood siding. Some may have details taken from high styles such as Greek Revival or Colonial Revival; others may have later high style modifications. Some of the many variants of the vernacular identified in the survey area are: | |
Four-over-Four: A side gable, two story, center entry house, two rooms deep and two rooms wide. |  Example: 9830 West 144th Place (top left) |
Gable-Front: During the Greek Revival movement in the period between 1830 and 1850, the front-gabled shape was commonly used to echo the pedimented facade of typical Greek temples. This form was particularly common in New England and its popularity expanded along the with the expansion of the railroad network and remained a dominant folk form until well into the 20th century. Part of its staying power reflected the fact that gable-front houses were well suited for narrow urban lots, which were found in many rapidly developing cities. | .tiff.png "LD 14438 Second Avenue (left).tiff") |
Examples: 14438 Second Avenue (left), 9953 West 143rd Street, 14329 Beacon Avenue, 14420 First Avenue and 9856 West 144th Place | |
Gabled L: This house form also descended from styled Greek Revival houses and the gable-front form. This variant shows an additional side-gabled wing added at right angles to the gable-front plan to give a compound, gable-front-and-wing shape with uniform roof height. A shed-roofed porch was typically placed within the L made by the two wings. This form is also commonly known as Gable-Front-and-Wing. |  |
Example: 9833 West 144th Place | |
Hipped: Massed-plan folk house of nearly square plan are commonly built with hipped or pyramidal roofs. It may be one or two stories high. Hipped folk houses differ principally in roof pitch and in the size and placement of porches. Many one story houses have full or partial integral porches included under the principal roof. |  |
Examples: 9999 West 143rd Street at West Avenue and 9853 West 144th Place (right) | |
Side Gable: This house form, with a side gable and massed-plan (more than one room deep) was very popular after lightweight lumber became widely available by the railroads. Simpler methods of light roof framing led to these massed-plan houses which had larger and more flexible interior plans, therefore, eventually replacing the traditional one room deep Hall-and-Parlor and I-House forms. | .tiff.png "LD 14420 Second Avenue (right).tiff") |
Example: 14420 Second Avenue (right) | |
Upright-and-Wing: This house form is similar to the Gabled L. It is usually a one and a half to two story front gable house with a one-to-one and a half story wing at right angles of lesser height. A porch was often placed in the area formed by the gable front and wing. Some Upright-and-Wing houses may have started out as a Front Gable to which a wing was added. |  |
Examples: 9855 West 144th Street and 9976 West 144th Street (the latter is shown at right) | |
Craftsman (1905-1930) | |
Craftsman was the dominant style for smaller houses built across the country during the period between 1905 through the mid-1920's. By the end of the 1920's, the style was fading from popularity and few were built after 1930. Common characteristics include low-pitched, gabled or hipped roof with wide, unenclosed eave overhang; exposed roof rafters; decorative beams or knee braces under gables; porches, full or partial width, with roof supported by tapered square columns, often of brick or stone material; dormers often with exposed rafter ends and knee braces; usually shed or gable roof; windows designed with a horizontal emphasis. |  |
Examples: 14407 Beacon Avenue (shown at right) and 9955 West 144th Street | |
Commercial Vernacular or Commercial/Storefront (1880-1900) | |
Early vernacular commercial buildings are referred to as Commercial Vernacular. These buildings are identified by their form, not their architectural style, although they may have some decorative features taken from architectural styles, often Italianate or Classical. These buildings are typically found in main street areas. Common characteristics include street facades abutting one another and sited at the lot line; false fronts visible at the roof line of the typically gable roof; buildings in relative scale with adjacent commercial vernacular buildings; typical three part facades: storefront, upper stories, and cornice or parapet; most often of wood with transoms above storefronts, and decorative cornices. |  |
Examples: 14300 Beacon Avenue, 14320 Beacon Avenue, 14306 Union Avenue (right) and 14314 Union Avenue | |
20th Century Commercial (1900-) | |
Later Commercial Vernacular buildings are referred to as 20th Century Commercial Style. These buildings are identified by their form and materials, not their architectural style, although they may have some decorative features taken from architectural styles. Common characteristics include facades of brick or stone with contrasting masonry ornament; street facades abutting one another and sited at the lot line; buildings in relative scale with adjacent commercial vernacular buildings. |  |
Examples: 14316 Beacon Avenue (right) and 9875 West 143rd Street | |
Folk Victorian (1870-1910) | |
This style is defined by the presence of Victorian decorative detailing on simple folk house forms, and generally much less elaborated than the Victorian styles that they attempt to mimic. The details are usually of either Italianate or Queen Anne inspiration. The primary areas for the application of this detailing are the porch and cornice line. Common characteristics include porches with spindle-work detailing or flat, jig-saw cut trim; turned balusters used both in porch railings and in friezes suspended from the porch ceiling; roof-wall junction may be either boxed or open; simple window surrounds with simple pediment above. |  |
Examples: 14315 Beacon Avenue, 14330 Beacon Avenue (bottom right), 14339 Beacon Avenue and 9852 West 144th Place | |
Georgian Revival (1880-1955) | |
The Georgian Revival style is more commonly grouped under the Colonial Revival style, which includes Georgian, Adam and Dutch. Colonial Revival refers to the entire rebirth of interest in the early English and Dutch houses of the Atlantic seaboard. The Georgian and Adam styles form the backbone of the Revival, with secondary influences from post medieval English or Dutch Colonial prototypes. The principal areas of elaboration are entrances, cornices and windows. Common characteristics include an accentuated front door, normally with a decorative pediment supported by pilasters, or extended forward and supported by slender columns to form the entry porch; doors, commonly with overhead fanlights or sidelights; a facade normally showing symmetrically balanced windows and center door; windows with double-hung sashes, usually with multi-pane glazing in one or both sashes, and frequently in adjacent pairs. |  |
Example: 9960 West 143rd Street (left). | |
Gothic Revival (1840-1880) | |
The Gothic Revival style, based on English precedents, was promoted as an ideal picturesque rural style, suitable for residential use. The style was loosing popularity for residential designs by the late 1860's, but resurgence during the 1870's occurred when the style was applied to public and religious buildings. Common characteristics include a steeply pitched roof, usually with steep cross gables; roofs often topped with pinnacles; gables, commonly with decorated vergeboards; wall surfaces extend into a gable without a break; windows commonly extended into a gable, frequently having pointed-arch shape (Gothic arch); doors often with pointed-arch and/or heavy hood ornament. | .tiff.png "LD 9999 W 143rd Street (left).tiff") |
Example: 9999 West 143rd Street (left) | |
Italianate (1840-1885) | |
A popular 19th century style, the Italianate was derived from the architecture of Italian villas and originated in England at the start of the Picturesque Movement. This style with its wide overhanging bracketed eaves was typically found on two and three story buildings. Often this style included a cupola. Common characteristics include vertical proportions; wide eaves and intricate cornices; large brackets, sometimes paired; tall, curved or arched topped windows and doors with hooded molds; porches, both small entry and full width, of single story height; paired and single doors, commonly with large-pane glazing in the door itself. |  |
Examples: 9925 West 143rd Street (left) and 14306 Union Avenue. | |
Prairie (1900-1925) | |
An American style of architecture that originated with the Prairie School, popular in the Midwest from about 1900 to 1930. Characteristics include broad, low-pitched roof, and hipped eaves usually with a very wide overhang; light colored stucco exterior walls, brick or concrete block; contrasting wood trim between stories; Sullivanesque ornamentation such as friezes and/or door surrounds; ribbon windows below roof overhang, emphasizing the horizontal plane. | .tiff.png "LD 9960 W 143rd Street (top right).tiff") |
Example: 9960 West 143rd Street (top right) | |
Queen Anne (1880-1910) | |
The very popular style of the 1880's and 1890's has asymmetrical shapes characterized by projecting bays and prominent, compound roof shapes. A one story porch along the front sometimes wraps around the side. These buildings were clad in a variety of materials and with multiple textures including patterned shingles. Common characteristics include an abundance of decoration; varied and rich contrasting materials, shapes and textures; expansive, encircling porches; turrets or conical towers; pressed metal bays; irregular roofline with many dormers and chimneys; some may have half-timbering with windows grouped three or more. | .tiff.png "LD 9952 W 144th Street(1).tiff") .tiff.png "LD 9952 W 144th Street(2).tiff") |
Examples: 9952 West 144th Street (sketch at right) and 9967 West 144th Street (middle right) | |
Tudor Revival (1890-1940) | |
A popular romantic revival style from the first half of the 20th century, Tudor Revival was a romantic inspiration based on English medieval buildings. The style is recognized by the use of a steeply pitched side gable or hipped roof, with one or more front facing, asymmetrically placed gables. Common characteristics include walls of masonry, brick, stucco and half-timbering most commonly used in a mixture; mullions, transoms, and trim of stone are typical, as are rounded Tudor arch door openings; tall, narrow windows, double-hung or casement, often with leaded glass; multiple and overlapping dormers; multi-colored slate on the roof; massive chimneys, often stone or stucco with stone ornament. |  |
Example: 9917 West 143rd Street (bottom right) | |
A.
Purpose. The purpose of the Old Orland Historic District (OOH) is to retain the commercial and residential character of the original core of Orland Park. It is also the purpose of this district to encourage the restoration and preservation of historically and architecturally significant structures that are an important part of the Village's heritage. To maintain the historic, semi-residential character of the district, commercial development is limited to certain streets: 143rd Street, Beacon Avenue between 143rd Street and 144th Place, Union Avenue between 143rd Street and Brook Avenue, and in the existing commercial portion of West Avenue between 143rd Street and 143rd Place. Uses within this area are therefore restricted to small retail businesses, offices and residential dwellings, all of which must be compatible in scale and ambiance with the district (see Map 1). The Certificate of Appropriateness review process was designed to ensure all development in the district meets these objectives.
B.
Uses.
1.
The following uses may be established in the OOH District in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Sections 5-101 through 5-104 for permitted uses and Section 5-105 for special uses in the Land Development Code. Although certain uses are listed as "permitted uses" within the district, a Certificate of Appropriateness must still be obtained, as described later in this section, and any other required development approval from the Village prior to construction, alteration or demolition. "Special Uses" must obtain a special use permit as well as any other required development approvals from the Village.
2.
The following applies to redevelopment in the Old Orland Historic District:
a.
In the non-commercial areas, existing residential buildings cannot be converted to mixed use buildings, or be used for office or commercial uses;
b.
In the commercial areas, mixed use and single use commercial/office buildings can replace existing residential buildings via a tear-down when a parcel is redeveloped, but require a special use permit.
c.
In the commercial areas, mixed use and single use commercial/office uses are permitted in existing residential buildings as a permitted use.
[Amended 5-20-2024 by Ord. No. 5894]
Table of Uses | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Permitted/Special Use | Geography | ||
1. | Accessory Uses: see Section 6-302 | Any Area | |
2. | Residential Uses: | ||
Multifamily residences without commercial; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Overnight accommodations up to 6 rental units, 30-day occupancy; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Residential units above retail or commercial establishments; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Townhomes; | Permitted | Areas Indicated on OOH Boundary Map | |
Single-family detached dwelling; | Permitted | Any Area | |
3. | Commercial Uses: | ||
(The maximum permitted square footage of commercial uses in Old Orland is 5,000 square feet.) | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Clinics and medical or dental offices; Medical offices may require an entrance canopy. | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Commercial retail establishments; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Day care homes; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Financial institutions; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Food concession; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Offices; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Personal service establishments; | Permitted | Commercial Areas | |
Restaurants and outdoor seating for restaurants*; | Special Use | Commercial Areas | |
*When located within 300 feet of a residential use; | |||
4. | Civic and Institutional Uses: | ||
Community centers, clubs and lodges; | Special Use | Any Area | |
Government uses, including office, recreational uses, public parks and playgrounds; | Permitted | Any Area | |
Museums, civic and cultural centers; | Special Use | Any Area | |
Overnight sleeping accommodations (shelter), without charge from 6:00 p.m. to 7:00 a.m., limited to one such time period in seven days, for people having no regular home or residence address, as an accessory use to an existing place of worship; | Special Use | Any Area | |
Places of worship; | Special Use | Any Area | |
Public schools; | Special Use | Any Area | |
5. | Transportation and Utilities: | ||
Public transportation facilities such as bus shelters; | Special Use | Commercial Areas | |
Utility substations; | Special Use | Commercial Areas | |
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019; amended by Ord. 5553, 11-2-2020]
C.
Bulk Requirements. The following requirements apply to all properties in the OOH District.
1.
Lot Area and Width. The minimum lot area for each residential dwelling unit shall be 2,500 square feet. The minimum front lot width shall be 25 feet, adding 10 feet for a corner lot, to a maximum of 50 feet for new construction. The minimum lot area for each nonresidential or mixed use development shall be 5,000 square feet. The minimum front lot width shall be 50 feet, adding 10 feet for a corner lot, to a maximum of 125 feet for new construction.
2.
Height. The maximum building height in the Historic District is 37 feet to the top of the structure.
3.
Lot Coverage. For all residential developments, no more than 80% of the area of the lot may be impervious. The remaining 20% must be maintained as green space. For all non-residential or mixed use developments, at least 10% of the site shall be maintained as green space.
4.
Building Setbacks. The following setback standards shall apply in the OOH District. For square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
a.
Residential:
(1)
Front: Eight foot minimum and fifteen-foot maximum. The minimum may be reduced to the average of the front setback of the two adjacent lots if one or both of the setbacks of adjacent lots are smaller.
(2)
Side: Five foot minimum and fifteen foot maximum.
(3)
Corner side: Ten foot minimum and no maximum.
(4)
Rear: Thirty foot minimum and no maximum.
D.
Other Regulations.
1.
Permitted Uses in the Right-of-Way and Setback Areas. Pedestrian oriented uses are allowed within the public right-of-way and in setback areas, including sidewalks, canopies, marquees, benches, projecting signs and landscaped gardens. No parking shall be permitted in the front setback for any use located in the OOH District.
2.
Parking Lot Setbacks. For existing lots, if there is insufficient area to provide a landscape buffer between the parking lot and sidewalk, a three-foot high decorative fence or a two-foot high masonry seating wall should be provided to separate the sidewalk from the parking area.
3.
Parking Requirements. All parking regulations apply as outlined in Section 6-306 of the Land Development Code. If there is insufficient area for Historic District businesses in new or existing buildings to provide required parking on-site, parking opportunities demonstrated to exist either on-street or via shared parking nearby may be applied to meet the requirement.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
4.
Loading. All loading regulations apply as outlined in Section 6-306 of the Land Development Code. For businesses in the Historic District that do not have sufficient land area on site to provide a designated loading space, loading may occur from a side street, from an alleyway or in a parking lot drive aisle, provided loading activities do not disrupt traffic flow for other uses.
5.
Landscaping. Buffer landscaping between like uses and between commercial uses and the street is not required in the Old Orland Historic District. All other landscaping regulations apply as outlined in Section 6-305 of the Land Development Code. If there is insufficient area to provide required landscaping on-site, petitioners are encouraged to provide landscape improvements in areas visible from the street, including movable benches, decorative planter boxes, hanging baskets, et cetera. It is the responsibility of the property owner to maintain these improvements.
6.
Tree Preservation. Tree preservation requirements outlined in Section 6-305 Landscape and Tree Preservation of the Land Development Code for preserving and/or removing trees four inches in caliper and above apply to the OOH District. All healthy mature trees that contribute to the character of the Historic District should be maintained.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
7.
Fences. For front yards and yards abutting a street, fences shall not exceed a height of four feet, must be 50% open, and be of picket construction. All other fences shall not exceed a height of five feet. Chain link fences are not permitted. Fences on property with contributing structures shall be of wood construction. Fencing on property with non-contributing structures or new construction can be vinyl.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
8.
Garages. New construction should continue the tradition of locating the garage at the rear of the lot, behind the principal building. Garages should be compatible in design, materials and roof form of the principal building. The maximum height permitted for a garage is 16 feet to the top of the structure. Additional height may be permitted for a specific roof form that reflects the principal building. Attached garages are allowed only on corner lots and only when mitigating for natural features such as topography or heritage trees. No living space is allowed above an attached garage. Attached garages must be built to a similar scale as detached garages, located at the rear of the principal building and maintain ornamental overhead doors when facing the right-of-way. Garages may have a maximum of two overhead doors or, when located on corner lots, three overhead doors and they must be ornamental doors when facing the right-of-way.
[Amended by Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013]
E.
Signage. Signs in the OOH District shall be compatible with the architecture, scale and design of the building of which they are a part. Signs should not obscure or overwhelm architectural details. Building directories are encouraged for multi-tenanted buildings. All signs shall conform to the requirements listed in Section 6-307 (Signs).
[Amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020]
F.
Architectural Design Standards.
1.
Applicability. There are 16 buildings designated as "Contributing Structures" in Old Orland, two of which are listed on the National Register of Historic Places. These buildings are identified in Map 1 of this section. (While not in the District, Building 1 is considered a contributing structure and should be protected). Remaining buildings in the OOH District are classified as "Non-Contributing" or "New Construction".
a.
Buildings on the National Register of Historic Places. Buildings listed on the National Register of Historic Places must comply with the United States Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation and design standards outlined in this section to maintain and improve the accuracy and integrity of the interior and exterior of the building. These are eligible for matching funds from the Facade Improvement Program.
b.
All Contributing Structures and Additions to Contributing Structures. All Contributing structures and additions to Contributing Structures must comply with the Design Standards outlined in this section in order to maintain and improve the accuracy and integrity of the exterior of the building only. These are eligible for matching funds from the Facade Improvement Program.
c.
All Non-Contributing Structures, Additions to Non-Contributing Structures and New Construction. All Non-Contributing Structures, additions to Non-Contributing Structures and New Construction are strongly encouraged to follow the Design Standards outlined in this section. If the Design Standards are met, these structures may be eligible for Low Interest Loans and matching funds from the Facade Improvement Program.
2.
General Design Standards. The following are based both on the United States Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation and on local preservation objectives for the OOH District. These standards will be used to evaluate applications for Certificates of Appropriateness.
a.
Compatible Use With Minimal Alterations. Every reasonable effort shall be made to use a property for its originally intended purpose or to provide a compatible use for a property which requires minimal alteration of the building, structure, or site and its environment.
b.
Relationship to Streets and Open Spaces. The unique character of streets and open spaces in the Historic District shall be retained and preserved. The removal of historic materials or alterations of features and spaces that characterize a property and contribute to the character of the Historic District should be avoided.
c.
Distinctive Architectural Features. The distinguishing original qualities or character of the District including buildings, structures or sites and their environment shall not be destroyed. Avoid the removal or alteration of any historic material or distinctive architectural features. Distinctive stylistic features or examples of skilled craftsmanship which characterize a building, structure or site shall be preserved.
d.
Historic Appropriateness. All buildings, structures and sites shall be recognized as products of their own time. Avoid alterations that have no historical basis and which seek to create an earlier appearance.
e.
Past Alterations. Changes that have taken place in the course of time are evidence of the history and development of a building, structure or site and its environment. These changes may have acquired significance in their own right, and this significance shall be recognized and respected.
f.
Deteriorated Architectural Features. These shall be repaired rather than replaced. If the severity of deterioration requires replacement, new material should match the historic material being replaced in composition, design, color, texture and other visual qualities. Repair or replacement of missing architectural features should be based on accurate duplications of features, substantiated by historic, physical or pictorial evidence than on conjectural designs or availability or architectural elements on other buildings or structures.
g.
Chemical of Physical Treatment. Chemical or physical treatment, such as sandblasting, that cause damage to historic materials shall not be used. Surface cleaning or structures, if appropriate, shall be undertaken using the gentlest means possible.
h.
Archaeological Resources. Every reasonable effort shall be made to protect and preserve archaeological resources affected by or adjacent to any project.
i.
Contemporary Design. Contemporary design for alterations and additions to existing buildings and construction of new buildings within the District shall not be discouraged when such alterations and new construction do not destroy significant historical, architectural or cultural material, and such design is compatible with the size, scale, color, material, and character of the property and the District.
j.
Structural Integrity. Wherever possible, new additions or alterations to structures shall be done in such a manner that if such additions or alterations were to be removed in the future, the essential form and integrity of the structure would be unimpaired.
k.
Replacement of Existing Features. Architectural elements shall be repaired with original materials rather than replaced. Replacement should be considered only when features have severely deteriorated. New material should match the existing material. If the material being replaced is not original to the structure, original materials shall be used to improve the overall integrity of the structure.
l.
Additions and New Construction. Appropriate locations of an addition are at the rear or sides of the building. These should be connected to the property in a way that does not alter, obscure, damage, or destroy any significant features, and has a minimal impact on the exterior walls. Additions should complement the original building in size, scale, massing and design. These should not be taller or wider than the original building. Design features including the roof shape, materials, color, location of windows and doors, cornice heights et cetera should be consistent with the original building.
New construction should be compatible with the architectural styles of the District. Replication of a specific architectural style can create a false historic appearance and should be avoided. Contemporary designs are acceptable when compatible in size, scale, color, material, and character of the District.
Building additions and new construction are encouraged to be compatible with the proportions predominant in the District: rectangular, vertically oriented massing with gable ends facing the street.
3.
Specific Design Standards.
a.
Windows.
(1)
Replacement Windows. Use wood windows, specifically on the front facades. Metal windows can be used for secondary facades if they are painted to match wood windows. Retain the location and size of original window openings. Retain or simplify divisions of glass, and retain transoms.
(2)
New Windows. Simple double-hung wood windows with vertical proportions are appropriate for the District. Wood is preferred; if metal is used, it should be painted to match any existing windows.
(3)
Storm Windows and/or Screens. Painted wood is preferred. Painted metal may be used for additions. The division in the storm window should align with the divisions of the window.
(4)
Shutters. Avoid using shutters unless they were original to the building. If shutters are used, they should be half the width of the window opening and be hinged rather than screwed to the siding.
(5)
Sashes. Wood sashes are preferred. Clad wood and painted metal may be used for additions. Sash can have either single light or multiple divided lights. Storm windows and screens of wood or painted metal with divisions in alignment of the divisions of the window.
(6)
Not Permitted.
(A)
Dividing each sash into more than six lights;
(B)
Synthetic trim to cover existing trim and synthetic siding which conceals the original wood window frame;
(C)
Glass block windows;
(D)
Horizontally proportioned windows;
(E)
Snap-in-muntins and applied muntins;
(F)
High-gloss metal finishes;
(G)
Unique contemporary shapes or casements;
(H)
Mirrored, reflective or tinted glass.
(7)
Predominant Style.
(A)
Wood, double hung sash windows, with both single and multiple divided lights are common in the historic buildings. The most common light configuration is a simple one-over-one.
(B)
Some buildings have ornamental Queen Anne windows with large lower sash and leaded or stained glass fixed sash above. Queen Anne windows have been identified in Folk Victorian, Queen Anne and National style houses.
 |
b.
Exterior Doors.
(1)
Replacement Doors. Use wood doors, specifically on the front facades. Metal doors can be used for secondary facades if they are painted to match wood doors.
(2)
New Doors. Doors should be wood with the appropriate paneling to the architectural style with transoms or lights in the door as appropriate.
(3)
Storm Doors or Screen Doors. Should be wood with full size screen or glass, or paneled lower half with screen or rectangular glass light above. Any metal should be painted.
(5)
Predominant Style.
(A)
Typically the historic houses in the District had wood doors of four or five panels.
(B)
Large glass lights in doors are not typical in the District.
(C)
There are examples of wood paneled doors with vertically oriented, divided lights in the upper panels of the door.
(D)
Sidelights on residential buildings are not typical for the District but are seen on a few commercial buildings.
(E)
Transoms above front doors are seen throughout the District, although many have been obscured with plywood or siding.
 |
c.
Porches and Door Overhangs. Wood porches and door overhangs are very common in the District. These add greatly to the pedestrian scale and character of the street facades, and are strongly encouraged for all new construction.
(1)
Existing Porches and Overhangs. Existing porches and overhangs should be maintained. If replacement is necessary, wood components and wood siding closely matching the original style should be used.
(2)
New Porches and Door Overhangs. New porches and over hangs are encouraged for all additions and new buildings. Wood components and wood siding are appropriate and should be painted. Porches on additions or new construction are encouraged to be open and of a compatible scale and material. If new porches are enclosed, these should be screened or have double-hung windows. Front door overhangs with wall braces are appropriate.
(3)
Not Permitted.
(A)
Enclosing an existing porch detracts from the character of the main facades. Original porches have to remain open and should not be enclosed;
(B)
Removing or concealing distinctive porch features when installing screens or windows;
(C)
Re-cladding porches with synthetic siding;
(D)
Eliminating significant detailing on porches;
(E)
Two story porches or overhangs, mansard roof;
(F)
Elements, and overhangs without vertical supports.
(4)
Predominant Style.
(A)
Porches and door overhangs are typical of many of the existing buildings in the District.
(B)
Existing porches are of wood, with stone or brick piers or foundations.
(C)
Detailing for the porches vary with architectural style.
(D)
Front door overhangs are also seen in the District, which are typically supported by wall braces.
 |
d.
e.
Roofs, Skylights, Gutters and Chimneys. Replacement roofing, gutters and chimneys should match the historic in the existing building in material and configuration, or should be compatible.
(1)
Roofs, Skylights, Gutters and Chimneys. New or replacement roofs of wood or asphalt shingles are appropriate. Wood shingles should be machine cut. Asphalt shingles should be simple, flat and smooth, and in an appropriate color. Painted metal roofs in terne coated steel is allowed.
(A)
Skylights are not permitted on Contributing Structures as they are historically inappropriate. Skylights are acceptable on non-contributing structures provided that these have the appropriate scale; however, skylights with convex or bubble shapes, or other unusual contemporary shapes should be avoided.
(B)
Gutters were typically half round in profile. Gutters should be of a compatible profile; compatible material includes painted metal.
(C)
For new or replacement chimneys, brick chimneys with a simple profile should be used. Brick and original profiles should be matched if possible for replacements.
(2)
Not Permitted.
(A)
For new and replacement roofs, the following should be avoided: hand split wood shakes, asphalt shingles with rough, thick texture made to replicate shakes, clay or synthetic tile, slate, synthetic slate and asphalt shingles in the color of new wood.
(B)
Existing brick chimneys should not be clad in siding or stucco.
(3)
Predominant Style.
f.
Siding, Brick and Trim.
Narrow wood clapboard siding with painted wood trim is appropriate for the District. Brick is not typical and can be found in some commercial buildings. Original siding should be uncovered where possible and restored.
For replacements or additions, materials for siding, brick and trim should match and be compatible in character, color and texture with the original.
(1)
Siding. Narrow wood clapboard siding with four-inch exposure or wide wood clapboard siding with eight-inch exposure is appropriate for the District. Light paint colors should be used for the siding that will not conceal the shadow lines of the narrow clapboards and the decorative trim.
[Amended by Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013]
(2)
Brick. There are some examples of contributing commercial buildings with brick facades. These brick buildings often have sills, lintels and upper level ornament of brick or limestone. Brick should be used in limited amounts for replacement or additions to masonry buildings. Where used, this should match the original in size, texture, color and variation.
(3)
Trim. Painted wood trim is preferred, with simple flat trim for doors and windows.
(4)
Not Permitted.
(A)
Synthetic sidings on Contributing Structures as they are not historically appropriate. For non-contributing structures, synthetic siding such as aluminum or vinyl are discouraged;
(B)
Re-pointing with mortar matched to the brick rather than to the original mortar;
(C)
Applying mortar beyond the joints onto the face of the brick or stone itself;
(D)
Stucco facades;
(E)
Concealing decorative trim with synthetic siding and trim;
(F)
Removing original decorative trim elements or replacing them with profiles of another style;
(G)
Detailing with trim inappropriate to the historic style of the building;
(H)
Sandblasting or abrasive treatments;
(I)
Stone facing materials and concrete blocks.
(5)
Predominant Style.
(A)
The wood frame buildings were typically sided with horizontal wood clapboard.
(B)
Many of these buildings are now sided with composition board, asbestos board, rough sawn plywood siding, or synthetic (aluminum or vinyl) siding.
(C)
Wood trim is generally found on the cornices, porches, door and window frames.
(D)
Except for early 20th Century commercial buildings, brick facades are not typical of most of the older buildings in the District.
g.
Storefronts.
Storefronts are a significant architectural feature of historic commercial buildings and their preservation is an important strategy for retaining and preserving the character of commercial buildings in the District.
General design guidelines for windows, doors, roofs, chimneys, gutters, porches, materials et cetera as outlined in previous sections will apply to storefront designs in the District. The following specific guidelines for storefronts will also apply.
(1)
All Storefronts. All storefronts should be compatible in design, size, scale, color, material and character of the historic elements of each building. Changes should reflect the building's architecture based on evidence of the original. Important elements of storefronts include: display windows and transoms, entrance and awning.
(2)
For a Commercial Building with an Existing Storefront. For a storefront that is original or typical of the time period, it should be retained and restored if needed. For a storefront that is non-original or non-typical of the time period, rehabilitation is recommended. If no historic evidence exists, storefront features shall be compatible with other original storefronts in the District.
(3)
For New Commercial Buildings with Storefronts. Incorporate a design compatible with the size and scale of the existing storefronts.
(4)
For Conversions from Residential to Commercial. The original windows should be retained without modifying openings. All work on these buildings should refer to the design guidelines in this section.
(5)
Storefront Windows and Entrances. Entrances should be located based on historic precedent and recessed from the storefront. Storefront windows should be of clear and transparent glass. If a lower ceiling is desired in the interior, the dropped ceiling should maintain at least a twenty-four-inch setback from the facade of the storefront to maintain the visual integrity of the display windows and transoms.
(6)
Not Permitted.
(A)
Removal of original storefronts;
(B)
Introduction of contemporary storefronts with large expanses of glass, glass block, or high-gloss metal frames.
(C)
Imitations of earlier historical styles with mansard roofs, wood shakes, inoperable shutters, coach lanterns or Colonial type multiple lights.
(D)
Construction that includes interior dropped ceilings that block the storefront windows or door.
 |
(7)
Predominant Style.
(A)
The Old Orland Historic District has three commercial building types: Commercial Vernacular or Storefront, 20th Century Commercial, and residential buildings converted to commercial uses.
(B)
The Storefront type is characterized by a false front facade, which is a front wall that extends above the roof and/or beyond the sides of the building to create a more imposing facade. The typically gabled roof can be seen behind the cornice of the false front. In the District, these buildings are of wood. The facades are sited at the lot line and are composed of a storefront at ground level, and an upper story that is topped with a cornice or parapet. These buildings often have decorative features in the Italianate style.
 |
 |
20th Century Commercial buildings are also defined by their form but are typically masonry with storefront at ground level and an upper story that is topped with a cornice. These buildings may also have decorative features of other architectural styles. In the District, these buildings are of brick with stone decorative details and have a flat roof typically hidden behind a low parapet wall.
Commercial buildings converted from an original residential use should respect the design, character and scale of the original buildings.
Good Examples of Storefront Designs in Old Orland | |
 |
G.
Review Process for Certificate of Appropriateness.
The Certificate of Appropriateness review process is designed to protect historic properties from insensitive or non-conforming alterations and to ensure new buildings are compatible in design with older buildings in the Old Orland Historic District. The process for Certificates of Appropriateness is outlined in Section 5-101 of the Land Development Code (5-101C and D) and shall follow the requirements outlined in Section 5-110 of the Land Development Code pertaining to Landmarks. [Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
The tables below outline the Certificate of Appropriateness review and approval process for the three categories of buildings in the OOH District and landmarks and are followed by descriptions of the terms used. Once the required review and approval is obtained, building permits must be procured from the Village before the proposed work begins.
Table 6-209.G.1: Review and Approval Process for Contributing Structures and Landmarks | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Public Hearing | Plan Commission | Board of Trustees | Administrative Review | |
Major Change (All) | X | X | X | |
Minor Change (Landmarks) | X | X | ||
Minor Change (Contributing Structures) | X | |||
Routine Maintenance | X | |||
COA for Demolition | X | X | X | |
Table 6-209.G.2: Review and Approval Process for Non-Contributing Structures and New Construction | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Public Hearing | Plan Commission | Board of Trustees | Administrative Review | |
Major Change (All) | X | |||
Minor Change (All) | X | |||
Routine Maintenance | X | |||
COA for Demolition (All) | Not Required | |||
New Construction (Freestanding Residential) | X | |||
[Amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020]
1.
Contributing Structures. Any building that reinforces the historic, cultural or architectural significance of the Historic District, and retains a significant portion of its architectural or design integrity. Contributing Structures in the Old Orland Historic District are identified in Map 1 of this section.
2.
Landmarks. Any building listed on the Local Register of Significant Places in Section 5-110 of the Land Development Code, which reinforces the historic, cultural or architectural significance of Orland Park.
3.
Non-Contributing Structure. Any building that does not reinforce the historic, cultural or architectural significance of the Historic District.
4.
New Construction. The construction of a freestanding structure on any developable lot, including new construction that involves additions to existing buildings.
5.
Major Change.
a.
Substantial change to the exterior appearance of a structure, or any change to the impervious coverage on the site, including but not limited to: New Construction or additions, including new decks visible from the right-of-way, porches, driveways etc.; Demolition of any contributing structure or any part of a contributing structure; Relocation of buildings; Significant alteration/removal of historical or architectural features.
[Amended by Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
b.
All changes considered "Major" by the Development Services Department shall require a Public Notice prior to the Plan Commission meeting, as defined in the following tables.
6.
Minor Change. Changes that do not have a substantial impact on the exterior appearance of the structure or site, including alteration, addition or removal of exterior architectural elements such as doors, windows, fences, skylights, siding, exterior stairs, roofs, tuck-pointing etc.
7.
Routine Maintenance. Includes repair or replacement of exterior elements where there is no change in the design, materials, or appearance of the structure or property such as gutters and downspouts, driveways etc. Landscape changes for gardens, planting beds, new trees, outdoor lighting for single family homes etc. will be considered as routine maintenance.
8.
Determination of Type of Change. Any proposed changes to existing buildings and sites in the Old Orland Historic District will be considered a Major Change, a Minor Change or Routine Maintenance per the determination of the Development Services Department on a case by case basis, applying the above definitions.
[Amended by Ord. 4940, 11-3-2014] |
9.
Pre-Concept Meeting and Historic Preservation Resident Handbook. Prior to applying for a Certificate of Appropriateness, an owner in the Historic District or of a landmark building must meet with the Development Services Department to discuss project scope, the appropriateness of any changes to a site or a building and the impending application of a petition. Development Services Department staff will provide new petitioners with a copy of the Historic Preservation Resident Handbook and a general overview of the requirements and polices related to the Old Orland Historic District and to Landmark Buildings.
[Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
10.
Compliance. Failure to comply with the codes, requirements and policies of the Village may result in the removal of any inappropriate materials, designs or other changes made during the course of an approved project at the petitioner's expense. The Development Services Department shall notify a petitioner via certified mail when work is non-compliant and upon notification the petitioner shall have one week to remove non-compliant materials, designs or other changes. Upon the discretion of the Development Services Department, if the non-compliance is not rectified within five business days, a citation may be issued to the petitioner, who shall be fined not less than $100 and not more than $500 per day of non-compliance.
[Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
H.
Demolition Standards and Permits.
1.
Criteria for Demolition. A demolition permit from the Village is required for any proposal to demolish, partially demolish, or relocate any landmark or contributing structure within the Old Orland Historic District.
a.
For Contributing Structures and Landmarks. A Certificate of Appropriateness for Demolitions must be granted prior to the issuance of the demolition permit. The process for obtaining a Certificate of Appropriateness for Demolition is outlined in - and shall follow - Sections 5-101 and 5-110 of the Land Development Code.
b.
For Non-Contributing Structures. A Certificate of Appropriateness for Demolitions is not required, and petitioners may apply directly to the Development Services Department for a demolition permit.
2.
Demolition Standards.
a.
For All Proposals Requiring a Certificate of Appropriateness for Demolition. The petitioner must respond in writing to all of the following Demolition Standards and submit to the Development Services Department with the completed Certificate of Appropriateness application:
(1)
That the building or structure is not structurally sound;
(2)
That the property in question cannot yield a reasonable return if the building or structure were retained; and
(3)
That the cost of repair of the building or structure exceeds the value of the land and the building, thus creating an economic hardship for the owner.
(4)
That a historic landmark survey has been conducted and documents the historical and architectural significant of the building or site per Section 5-110E2c.
b.
The Petitioner is Responsible. The petitioner is responsible for submitting adequate documentation for each of the responses, as determined by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 4940, 11-3-2014; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
§ 6-210 COR Mixed Use District.
A.
Purpose. The COR Mixed Use District is established to encourage and promote a mix of commercial, office and residential uses and to create a Village core. It is the purpose of this district to permit the clustering of relatively dense development in an effort to create an integrated setting and reduce automobile dependency. The district therefore provides for flexibility in the design of pedestrian-oriented development and in the location of employment and retail centers in proximity to higher density housing. The district is also designed to provide for the development of a variety of retail and commercial services that may change over time in response to market conditions. The location and design of such development is intended to provide efficiently located and diverse shopping and service opportunities.
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the COR Mixed Use District in buildings up to 50,000 square feet unless otherwise limited below in accordance with the procedures set forth in Sections 5-101 through 5-104, provided that all other applicable regulations are met:
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
2.
3.
Clinics and medical or dental offices and medical rehabilitation centers; Medical offices may require an entrance canopy.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016] |
4.
Commercial retail establishments, up to a floor area of 50,000 square feet;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
5.
Convenience stores with a floor area of less than 5,000 square feet;
6.
Day care centers, day care homes, and adult day care centers, provided they are licensed/registered with the appropriate state agencies.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
7.
Financial institutions;
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
8.
Food concession associated with the principal use;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
9.
Governmental uses;
10.
Indoor recreation areas;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
11.
Offices;
12.
Overnight accommodations, provided that rooms are not rented for a period of more than 30 days;
13.
Personal service establishments;
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
14.
Public parks and recreation areas;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
15.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, greater than 300 feet of a residential parcel.
[Ord. 2420, 7-6-1993; amended by Ord. 4044, 7-5-2005; Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012; Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
16.
Schools - arts or vocational.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014] |
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in the COR District, in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Animal Services;
[Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
2.
Attached dwellings, provided that:
a.
No dwelling units are located on the street level unless the dwelling units are part of a mixed use development.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
b.
If the dwelling units are part of a larger mixed use development that is over 100,000 square feet in floor area, no more than 40% of the square footage is devoted to residential uses.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
3.
Bus terminals;
4.
Clubs and lodges;
5.
Colleges and universities;
6.
Community centers;
7.
Commercial retail establishments with a floor area of 50,000 square feet or greater;
[Amended by Ord. 4792, 2-4-2013]
8.
Congregate elderly housing, provided that the use is located no closer than 1,000 feet to any other congregate elderly housing facility;
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999; amended by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011]
9.
Drive-in service windows, provided that:
a.
The principal use is an office, retail establishment, financial institution or restaurant located on the same lot;
b.
Stacking spaces are provided per Code requirements as indicated in Section 6-306, Off Street Parking; and
c.
The amount of stacking space and circulation patterns on the lot is adequate to keep traffic from backing up into the street, based upon documentation of similar circumstances.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; amended by Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010] |
10.
Funeral parlor;
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011]
11.
Health clubs and fitness centers;
12.
Light industry and assembly;
[Ord. 2420, 7-6-1993]
13.
Museums, civic and cultural centers;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
14.
Outside, open markets;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
15.
Pawn shops/Pawnbrokers subject to licensing by the Village and State (per 205 ILCS 510/Pawnbroker Regulation Act) and provided that the building or unit in building is not closer than 1,000 feet to another pawn shop/pawnbroker building/unit or to the property line of a school, child care facility or park;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
16.
Private parks and recreational areas;
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
17.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
18.
Planned Developments, provided that:
a.
At least 20% of the net area of the development shall be maintained as common open space;
b.
20% less required private open space may be permitted for 20% of common open space provided beyond the minimum;
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; amended by Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005]
c.
Optional Bonuses. Additional building square footage bonuses may be permitted, provided that the applicant provides the following in the proposed development:
[Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005]
(1)
Boulevard treatment of a street, including a wide landscaped median strip.
(2)
Orientation of buildings that provide views of common open space, forests, valleys, ponds, wetlands and hills;
(3)
Orientation of buildings for solar heating;
(4)
Less than 50% of garage doors facing the street or common courtyard;
(5)
Garbage enclosures hidden from view from the street;
(6)
Attractive, nonstandard, but consistent, style for lampposts and signs, varied pavement treatments, tiles, stones, bricks and mosaics.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995]
19.
Public Transportation facilities;
20.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, within 300 feet of a residential parcel.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 4044, 7-5-2005; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012; Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
21.
Self-service storage facilities, provided that they are wholly contained within a building with access to the individual units provided through the building interior.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998]
22.
Sites or site plans with total building area greater than 50,000 square feet. This special use is in conjunction with any principal special use;
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
23.
Stadia, auditoria and arenas; and
24.
Tattoo/body piercing shops subject to licensing by the Village and registering with the State (per 410 ILCS 54/Tattoo and Body Piercing Establishment Registration Act) and provided that the building or unit in building is not closer than 1,000 feet to another tattoo/body piercing establishment building/unit or to the property line of a school, child care facility or park;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
25.
Theaters, except open-air drive-in.
26.
Public utility structures and utility substations, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed according to design guidelines and is operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations; and
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling.
27.
Motor vehicle sales or rentals.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996]
28.
Wireless communication facilities. [Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
[Ord. 4792, 2-4-2013; amended by Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
D.
Floor Area Ratio. The nonresidential density allowed in this district shall not exceed a floor area ratio of 1.0. However, greater density (up to a floor area ratio of 2.0) may be permitted if:
1.
Residential and non-residential uses are integrated in either the same building or in the immediately adjacent area in a pedestrian-oriented environment; and
2.
At least 25% of the development is residential; and
3.
Additional public amenities such as plazas, fountains, public art or additional landscaping are provided.
E.
Lot Area. The minimum lot area for each residential dwelling unit shall not be less than 4,356 square feet. The minimum lot area for each nonresidential establishment shall not be less than 10,000 square feet with a minimum lot width (see definition) of 80 feet.
[Ord. 2537, 3-21-1994] |
F.
Setbacks.
1.
Building Setbacks from Property Line. The following setback standards shall apply in the COR District.
a.
Residential, Excluding Mixed Use Buildings (Commercial and Residential Uses) For residential developments with square corner lots, the "front" setback shall be considered to be the yard where the main door is located; the other yard shall therefore be considered to be the "side" setback.
b.
Non-residential and mixed use buildings (commercial and residential uses) Setbacks between the street right-of-way and the building facade facing the street shall follow the minimum requirements set in Table 6-210. F.1.b(A) (below). The setback width is related to the width and character of the street.
[Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008]
Table 6-210.F.1.b(A) | ||
|---|---|---|
Street Name | Minimum Building Setback From Street | Purpose of the Setback Area |
All streets, except as below | 25 feet | For streets carrying moderate to high regional and local traffic, a setback area of 25 feet will be required. This will allow commercial buildings to maintain high visibility from the streets, and also provide a significant landscaped area along the street. |
Exceptions: | ||
LaGrange Road | 25 feet | LaGrange Road is proposed to be widened to a six lane arterial with a landscaped median. This setback area will distinguish it from other arterials as the main commercial area of the Village. The setback will allow landscaping that will add a sense of scale, safety and enclosure to the corridor, and help create a unique look for the street. [Ord. 4996, 6-15-2015] |
147th Street | 15 feet | For pedestrian oriented streets that also carry moderate local traffic, a setback area of 15 feet is required. This will encourage building entrances to connect directly to the sidewalk, while allowing landscaping with low plantings along the street. |
Ravinia Avenue | ||
West Avenue | ||
144th Place | ||
149th Street | ||
157th Street | 0 to 15 feet | These special pedestrian oriented streets shall be defined by buildings with active street fronts, multiple entrances and well articulated street facades, and by parkway trees along the sidewalk. Buildings shall be allowed to be placed at the lot line or set back up to 15 feet to strengthen the pedestrian character of the street. |
142nd Street | ||
Ravinia extension (north of 143rd Street and south of 159th Street) | ||
161st Street | ||
160th Street | ||
95th Avenue | ||
2.
Building Setbacks from Rear and Side Lot Lines that do not Abut a Street. All buildings must maintain a minimum of 30 feet of setback area from the rear lot line and a minimum of 15 feet of setback area from the side lot lines that do not abut a street.
3.
Permitted Uses in Building Setback Areas along Streets.
a.
Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
(1)
Widened sidewalks and entranceways;
(2)
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
(3)
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
(4)
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.;
(5)
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
(6)
Benches and complementary site furniture.
b.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the setback area up to 10 feet, including:
(1)
Canopies, marquees and other projections that create shaded and protected entrances;
(2)
Extended roofs and eaves;
(3)
Awnings and canopies over windows;
(4)
Projecting blade signs that comply with the Village's sign ordinance;
(5)
Tensile Canopies that project over outdoor congregation areas.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017] |
4.
Uses not Permitted in Building Setbacks along Streets.
Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street.
Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010]
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
[Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
G.
Lot Coverage. No more than 75% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 25% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space"). Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 80% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
H.
Height. No structure may exceed six stories or 75 feet, whichever is lower, and must be located 50 feet from adjacent residential buildings for every story over three stories.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997]
§ 6-211 ORI Mixed Use District.
[Amended by Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999; Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; 12-1-2003 by Ord. No. 3837; Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; by Ord. 4044, 7-5-2005; Ord. 4374, 6-2-2008; Ord. 4418, 9-15-2008; by Ord. 4535; by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010; by Ord. 4664, 8-1-2011; Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012; by Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; by Ord. 4792, 2-4-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015; by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
A.
Purpose. The ORI Mixed Use District is established to provide locations for a wide range of employment-generating office, institutional, research and light manufacturing uses along I-80, as indicated on the Village Zoning District Map. The standards of this district are designed to ensure that such uses are developed in a manner that is compatible with the use and enjoyment of nearby properties, and to minimize potential nuisances or damage to the environment. In addition, this district is intended to accommodate a variety of uses, whereby the developer can establish different combinations of uses on a site over time, as the market dictates, as long as all uses and development conform to the standards established by the Village to protect adjacent land uses and the natural environment.
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the ORI Mixed Use District in buildings up to 50,000 square feet unless otherwise limited below in accordance with the procedures set forth in Sections 5-101 through 5-104, provided that all other applicable regulations are met:
2.
3.
Clinics and medical or dental offices; Medical offices may require an entrance canopy.
4.
Convenience stores with a floor area of less than 5,000 square feet;
5.
Day care centers and day care homes, provided that the use is licensed by or registered with the Illinois Department of Children and Family Services in accordance with the Child Care Act of 1969. (III. Rev. Stat. ch. 23, par. 2211, et seq.)
6.
Food production, artisanal, not exceeding 2,500 square feet of floor area.
7.
Financial institutions;
8.
Food concession associated with a primary use;
9.
Governmental uses;
10.
Indoor recreation areas less than 5,000 square feet;
11.
Light industry and assembly;
12.
Medical rehabilitation centers;
13.
Offices;
14.
Outside storage, when the storage area does not exceed 25% of the area of the lot, is located at the rear of the principal building, is screened on all sides, and the height of the stored materials, equipment or vehicles does not exceed the height of the screening. (See also § 6-211.I, Required Conditions, § 6-308.J Screening, and § 6-302, Accessory Structures and Uses, for further terms and conditions.)
15.
Overnight accommodations, provided that rooms are not rented for a period of more than 30 days;
16.
Personal service establishments up to 10,000 square feet;
17.
Printing, publishing or photography plants;
18.
Public parks and recreation areas;
19.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, greater than 300 feet of a residential parcel.
20.
Retail, as an ancillary use, whose primary purpose is to serve the work force within the district;
21.
Schools - arts or vocational;
22.
Warehouses or distribution establishments.
23.
Wineries and Microbreweries under 12,000 square feet, and Distilleries under 5,000 square feet, provided they are located at least 300 feet from a residential district or use as measured from the area of activity.
24.
Wholesale establishments.
C.
Special Uses. The following uses may be established as special uses in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105:
1.
Animal Services;
2.
Drive-in service windows, provided that:
a.
The principal use is an office, retail establishment, financial institution or restaurant located on the same lot;
b.
Stacking spaces are provided per Code requirements as indicated in Section 6-306, Off Street Parking; and
c.
The amount of stacking space and circulation patterns on the lot is adequate to keep traffic from backing up into the street, based upon documentation of similar circumstances.
3.
Food processing plants; provided they are located at least 1,000 feet from a residential use or district;
4.
Hospitals;
5.
Indoor recreation areas equal to or greater than 5,000 square feet;
6.
Food production, artisanal, exceeding 2,500 square feet of floor area.
7.
Motor Vehicle Services;
8.
Outside storage, for a storage area that does not meet the requirements of § 6-211.B or § 6-211.I. (See § 6-308.J, Screening, and § 6-302, Accessory Structures and Uses.)
9.
Outside, open markets;
10.
Private parks and recreational areas;
11.
Places of worship which may include overnight shelter for up to eight adults;
12.
Planned Office/Research/Institutional Developments that include a site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses;
13.
Public transportation facilities;
14.
Public utility structures and utility substations, provided that:
a.
No building is located within 25 feet of a side lot line;
b.
The facility is constructed according to design guidelines and is operated to comply with all applicable local, state and federal regulations; and
c.
No above-ground structure for the treatment or disposal of wastewater and no surface disposal of wastewater is located within 300 feet of any stream or other body of water or any existing or proposed dwelling.
15.
Restaurants, and outdoor seating for restaurants, less than or equal to 300 feet of a residential parcel.
16.
Self-service storage facilities, provided that they are wholly contained within a building with access to the individual units provided through the building interior.
17.
Sites or site plans with total building area greater than 50,000 square feet. This special use is in conjunction with any other special use;
18.
Stadia, auditoria and arenas.
19.
Wineries and Microbreweries over 12,000 square feet, and Distilleries over 5,000 square feet, or within 300 feet from a residential use or district as measured from the area of activity.
20.
Wireless communication facilities.
D.
Floor Area Ratio. The nonresidential density allowed in this district shall not exceed a floor area ratio of 2.0.
E.
Lot Area. The minimum lot area for industrial uses shall not be less than 20,000 square feet with a minimum lot width (see definition) of 100 feet. The minimum lot area for commercial, office and mixed uses shall not be less than 10,000 square feet with a minimum lot width (see definition) of 80 feet.
F.
Setbacks. Setbacks between the street right-of-way and the building facade facing the street shall follow the minimum requirements set below. The setback width is related to the width and character of the street.
1.
Building Setbacks from the Street Right-of-Way. The following setback standards shall apply to properties in the ORI District. For square corner lots, where neither side is narrower to determine the front setback, the "front" setback shall be considered based on the location of the building's main door; the non-entry side of the building shall therefore be considered as the "side" setback.
2.
Permitted Uses in Building Setback Areas along Streets Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
a.
Widened sidewalks and entranceways;
b.
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
c.
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
d.
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.;
e.
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
f.
Benches and complementary site furniture.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the setback area up to 10 feet, including:
g.
Canopies, marquees and other projections that create shaded and protected entrances;
h.
Extended roofs and eaves;
i.
Awnings and canopies over windows;
j.
Projecting blade signs that comply with the Village's sign ordinance.
3.
Uses Not Permitted in Building Setbacks Along Streets. Parking lots or structures (exception cited below), drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street. Drive through facilities in the setback area shall be allowed via Special Use modification only, when there are no reasonable alternatives. In order to qualify for a Special Use Modification, the drive through facility must meet all of the following conditions:
a.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
b.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
c.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
d.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
e.
The drop off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
f.
The drop off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
4.
Parking Lot Setbacks. A minimum of a ten-foot landscaped setback must be provided between the parking lot and the primary street right-of-way.
G.
Lot Coverage.
1.
No more than 75% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 25% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space").
2.
Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 80% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
H.
Height. No building or structure may exceed six stories or 75 feet, whichever is lower, except as provided as follows: Where a building is located within 200 feet of a residential zoning district, the height of the building shall not exceed 1 1/2 times the average height of all buildings within the residential zoning district which are located within 200 feet of the building. Where a building is located more than 600 feet from a residential zoning district, the height of a building or structure may be increased up to 12 stories through approval of a special use, upon consideration of the impact on adjacent residential lots due to factors that include sunlight, shade and privacy.
I.
Outside storage of vehicles. Outside storage of automobiles and commercial vehicles and trucks shall be prohibited except as follows:
1.
Parking of automobiles is permitted subject to the off-street parking regulations in § 6-306 herein.
2.
Temporary parking of commercial vehicles and trucks in loading areas designed and designated for such purposes and for the purpose of loading and unloading.
3.
Parking of commercial vehicles or trucks essential to the operation of a principal building, located on the same lot, and with each commercial vehicle or truck not to exceed 19,500 pounds. Outside storage of such vehicles shall comply with § 6-211.B.13, § 6-211.H.1, and § 6-308.J unless a special use is granted as per § 6-211.C.7 herein.
 |
 |
§ 6-212 Village Center District (VCD).
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4137, 5-15-2006]
A.
Purpose and Vision.
The mayor and the Village Board envision the Village Center District to be the Downtown and Civic Core of Orland Park. From the Main Street Triangle area around the 142nd Street train station to the Village Center Complex along Ravinia Avenue, this unique district offers great potential to create mixed use walkable neighborhoods in the heart of the Village. To ensure that the district will create a unique pedestrian scale and civic character, the Village offers the following vision for the area:
The VCD District will offer a diverse mix of uses along intimate pedestrian scaled streets and buildings within compact, walkable blocks. Small-scale commercial uses will serve the district, and more residents will be attracted to live within walking distance of the 142nd Street train station. A fine grid of streets will connect the Village Center, the Downtown area around the train station, the Orland Crossing area, the Public Library, McGinnis Slough, Humphrey Woods, and the Old Orland Historic District. New development on infill or vacant sites will strengthen the intimate character of the area, and civic buildings and open spaces will continue to be key focal points in the district.
 |
Civic uses like the Metra Station, Library and Village Hall are the focal points of the Village Center District. |
Map 1: Village Center District (VCD) Map Boundary  |
B.
Development Principles. Land Development Codes for the Village Center District are based on the following principles:
1.
Establish the Village Center District as the Downtown for the Village by enhancing the prominence and setting of civic structures and public open spaces;
2.
Continue the tradition established by the Village Center Complex by encouraging buildings with strong architectural identities;
3.
Promote mixed-use buildings with ground floor retail and office or residential uses above;
4.
Create attractive street facades with street level uses scaled and oriented toward pedestrians;
5.
Create smaller walkable blocks that allow safe and attractive pedestrian connections through the district;
6.
Create open space amenities as focal points of developments;
7.
Encourage continuous building frontage along the streets to reduce the visual impacts of parking lots;
8.
Place parking lots at the rear of buildings away from pedestrian oriented streets;
9.
Encourage alternative parking options, including on-street parking, shared parking, parking below buildings, underground parking and parking structures;
10.
Encourage buildings to provide dual entrances, allowing patrons to enter both from the sidewalk along the street and the parking area at the rear or side of buildings;
11.
Promote sustainable and environmentally responsible design;
 A wide variety of uses in a small scale setting is one of the major assets of the Village Center District. |
C.
Uses.
1.
Introduction. Uses as outlined in Table 6-212.C.1 of this section may be established in the Village Center District, in accordance with the procedures established in Section 5-101 through Section 5-104 for permitted uses and Section 5-105 for special uses in the Land Development Code. Unless otherwise noted in the table, the following applies:
a.
A "Special Use" will be required for certain uses only if a lot line of the subject property is within 300 feet of an existing or approved single family detached residential lot line.
b.
To protect the existing residential uses in the district, the following applies to the areas in orange on Map 2 (below):
(1)
Mixed-use and single use commercial buildings are not permitted on Ravinia Place and the east side of John Humphrey Drive (north of 142nd Street).
(2)
Existing multi-family residential buildings cannot be converted to mixed-use buildings, or be used for office or commercial uses.
(3)
Mixed-use and single use commercial/office buildings can replace existing multi-family residential buildings via a tear-down when a parcel is redeveloped, but require a Special Use Permit.
.tiff.png "LD Village Center District Boundary Map(1).tiff") | .tiff.png "LD Village Center District Boundary Map(2).tiff") |
Map 2: Single use residential areas in the district will not be allowed where single use commercial developments exist. |
Table 6-212.C.1: Allowable Uses in the Village Center District | ||
|---|---|---|
Lot line 300 feet or more from single family detached residential lot line | Lot line within 300 feet of single family detached residential lot line | |
2. Accessory Uses: see Section 6-302 | ||
3. Residential Uses | ||
Congregate elderly housing | Special Use | Special Use |
Dwellings, detached [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014] | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Dwellings, attached [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014] | Special Use | Special Use |
Residential units above non-residential uses | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
4. Commercial Uses | ||
Animal services | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Parking structures — non-accessory | Special Use | Special Use |
Retail, up to 50,000 square feet | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Retail, in excess of 50,000 square feet [Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012 | Special Use | Special Use |
Day care centers and day care homes | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Drive through facilities (7 car stacking) [Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006] | Special Use | Special Use |
Dry cleaning and laundry processing stations | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Financial institutions | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Food concession associated with a primary use | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Funeral parlors | Special Use | Special Use |
Health clubs, fitness centers and indoor recreational uses, maximum of 50,000 square feet per floor | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Nurseries and greenhouses | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Offices; Medical offices may require an entrance canopy | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Overnight accommodation and extended stay: under 6 units | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Overnight accommodation and extended stay: 6 or more units | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Personal service establishments | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Restaurants, outdoor seating for restaurants, and banquet halls [Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015] | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Theatres, including live theatres and movie theatres | Permitted Use | Special Use |
5. Civic and Institutional Uses | ||
Boarding schools, seminaries and convents | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Colleges and universities | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Community centers, clubs and lodges | Permitted Use | Special Use |
Government uses, including office, recreational uses, research facilities, public parks and playgrounds | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Museums, civic and cultural centers | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Places of worship, which may include overnight shelter for up to 8 adults [Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012] | Special Use | Special Use |
Instructional facilities for arts, athletics and vocational training | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Public and private schools (primary/elementary, secondary/high schools) | Special Use | Special Use |
6. Transportation and Utilities | ||
Bus stop shelters owned and maintained by the Village | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Public transportation facilities | Special Use | Special Use |
Public utility structures and utility substations | Special Use | Special Use |
Wireless communication facilities | Special Use | Special Use |
Wireless communication facility collocations | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
7. Building Area | ||
Sites or site plans with total building area up to 50,000 square feet | Permitted Use | Permitted Use |
Sites or site plans with total building area greater than 50,000 square feet | Special Use | Special Use |
8. Planned Developments | ||
Site that is or is intended for two or more buildings, or one or more principal use, or one principal building for two or more principal uses [Ord. 4574, 7-6-2019] | Special Use | Special Use |
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
D.
Bulk Requirements.
1.
Lot Coverage. No more than 75% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 25% of total parcel area in green space. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Green Space"). Impervious coverage will be allowed up to 80% when Best Management Practices (BMP) such as porous pavements and green roofs are used. Up to 40% of the BMPs will be considered pervious, provided that the design standards outlined in the code for BMPs are met.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
2.
Lot Area and Lot Width. For detached dwelling units, minimum lot area shall be 2,500 square feet, with a minimum lot width of 25 feet and a maximum lot width of 50 feet. For commercial uses, the minimum lot area shall be 10,000 square feet, with a minimum lot width of 80 feet.
3.
Height. No building may exceed three stories, up to a maximum height of 40 feet, with the following exceptions:
a.
Building footprints within 600 feet of the 142nd Street train station may be up to six stories to a maximum height of 70 feet.
b.
At intersections of public streets, or private streets that are designed to public street standards with sidewalks and parkways, corner buildings may be up to four stories tall to a maximum height of 55 feet.
c.
Buildings cannot be more than two stories taller than adjacent existing single family homes.
4.
Land Use Intensity. Allowable square footage for all developments, including single use commercial and single use residential, as well as mixed-use projects, shall be measured by the Floor Area Ratio (FAR). All developments with residential uses will be regulated on the basis of FAR compliance rather than the number of residential units. The maximum Floor Area Ratio (FAR) will be 3.0 for developments within 1,000 feet of a mass transit facility and 1.0 for developments outside of 1,000 feet of a mass transit facility. FAR will be calculated by dividing the overall gross floor area by the gross site area. Gross floor area includes all building residential square footage. Accessory parking or transit facility parking is not included in the Gross Floor Area for FAR calculations.
5.
Parking. Large surface parking lots are not appropriate to the scale and character of this district. To promote smaller lots, shared parking, on-street parking and the shared use of public parking facilities, and mixed-use developments will be allowed to reduce the on-site parking requirements outlined in Section 6-306B by up to 25%.
6.
Setbacks.
a.
Purpose of the setback requirements:
(1)
To create attractive and pedestrian oriented streets with buildings and landscaping along the sidewalks; and
(2)
To minimize the visual impacts of surface parking lots and drive-through facilities along streets by locating these to the rear (preferred) or sides of buildings. If parking lots are located in the side-yard, an enhanced landscaping buffer with pedestrian accommodation and amenities must be provided.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
c.
Building setbacks from street right-of-ways: Setbacks between the street right-of-way and the building facade facing the street shall follow the minimum requirements set in Table 6-212.D.6.c below. The setback width is related to the width and character of the street.
Table 6-212.D.6.c: Building Setbacks from Street Right-of-Ways | ||
|---|---|---|
Street Name | Building Setback from Street | Purpose of the Setback Area |
All streets carrying moderate to high auto traffic: La Grange Road 143rd Street John Humphrey Drive Ravinia Avenue (south of 143rd Street) 151st Street Southwest Highway | 15 feet minimum, provided that a 5 foot sidewalk and an 8 foot parkway is maintained in the right-of-way; For La Grange Road, 25 feet minimum from the future right-of-way south of 143rd Street; | For streets carrying moderate to high regional and local traffic, a setback area of 15 feet will be required. This will allow commercial buildings to maintain high visibility from the street, and also provide a significant landscaped area along the street. |
All other pedestrian oriented streets, including: 142nd Street 144th Place 147th Street 149th Place Ravinia Avenue extension (north of 143rd Street) West Avenue and Any new internal street in the district | 5-15 feet, provided that a 5 foot sidewalk and an 8 foot parkway is maintained in the right-of-way; 0 lot line buildings will be allowed without a parkway when the sidewalk is at least 10 feet wide, with room for trees in grates; | These pedestrian oriented streets shall be defined by buildings with active street fronts, multiple entrances and well articulated street facades, and by parkway trees along the sidewalk. Buildings shall be allowed to be placed at the lot line or set back up to 15 feet to strengthen the pedestrian character of the street |
d.
Building setbacks from rear and side lot lines that do not abut a street: All buildings must maintain a minimum of 30 feet of setback area from the rear lot line and a minimum of 15 feet of setback area from the side lot lines that do not abut a street.
E.
Design Standards.
1.
Permitted Uses in Building Setback Areas along Streets.
a.
Setback areas will be primarily used for landscaping and other pedestrian oriented uses including:
(1)
Widened sidewalks and entrance-ways;
(2)
Plazas, outdoor gardens, patios and outdoor seating areas;
(3)
Water features, including bioswales or other stormwater management elements;
(4)
Public art or outdoor architectural features like clock towers, pergolas etc.
(5)
Pergolas and/or arbor structures;
(6)
Benches and complementary site furniture.
b.
The setback area can be expanded to accommodate the above pedestrian oriented uses if needed. Architectural features that help to create a stronger pedestrian scale can extend into the minimum required setback area no closer than five feet from the right-of-way, including:
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
(1)
Canopies, marquees and other projections that create shaded and protected entrances;
(2)
Extended roofs and eaves, and awnings and canopies over windows;
(3)
Projecting blade signs that comply with the Village's sign ordinance;
(4)
Tensile Canopies that project over outdoor congregation areas.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017] |
2.
Uses Not Permitted in Building Setback Areas along Streets.
Parking lots or structures, drive-through facilities, loading facilities or trash enclosures are not allowed within the setback area between the building facade and the street. Drive-through facilities located in the side-yard must provide an enhanced landscaping buffer with pedestrian accommodation and amenities.
Drop-off areas or drive-aisles are prohibited in the setback between the building facade and the street. Drop-off areas or drive aisles in the setback area are strongly discouraged and shall be allowed within the setback area with a Variance only when there are no reasonable alternatives. The following conditions shall be met if these uses are proposed in the setback area:
a.
That these do not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building; and
b.
That these are designed with special paving to appear to be extensions of the sidewalk and instead of curbs, the drive-aisle is differentiated with bollards, pavers etc.
[Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006]
c.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum with of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
d.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
e.
The drop-off area or drive aisle must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
f.
Any order windows and menu boxes must be designed to integrate into the architecture of the building and appear 'hidden' from vehicular and pedestrian view. All efforts should be made to keep the order windows and menu boxes out of the setback between the building and the street.
(1)
Menu boxes must include masonry architectural details, matching the materials and design of the building.
(2)
Menu boxes must be screened with landscaping and/or masonry walls so they are not visible from the street.
(3)
Order windows must be designed with trim and detail so they appear similar in appearance to other windows on the building.
g.
The drop-off area or drive aisle must be screened with a combination of masonry walls and/or decorative landscaping in order to provide a solid buffer at a minimum height of 36 inches.
h.
The drop-off area or drive aisle shall not obstruct any direct connections between the sidewalk along the street and the entrances to the building and shall include crosswalks connection pedestrian routes.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
3.
Street Facing Building Facades. The addition of windows along building facades are attractive, allow pedestrian views and daylight to the inside of the building, especially on street facing building facades.
a.
Each street facing non-residential building facade on the ground floor shall be at least 35% transparent between four feet and eight feet from adjacent grade. Each facade shall be calculated independently.
b.
The bottom of any window used to satisfy these transparency requirements may not be more than four feet above adjacent grade.
c.
Adjacent grade shall be measured from within two feet of the facade.
d.
Upper levels are also strongly encouraged to maximize windows wherever possible.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
4.
Materials.
a.
All buildings must be primarily of brick, or other quality materials like stone, metal and glass on all sides.
b.
Cinder or concrete blocks, plywood, vinyl siding, and unfinished precast concrete are not permitted.
c.
Decorative split face block, smooth or textured synthetic plaster, and wood trim shall only be used for decorative accents, and be limited in their use on street facing facades.
d.
All new and replacement parking lot lighting shall be ornamental (see below) subject to the provisions of Section 6-407A.
[Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012]
5.
Entrances and Corner Features. Vertically articulated corner and entry features are strongly encouraged for all buildings. Multiple entrances from the sidewalk and parking areas are also strongly encouraged for pedestrian convenience.
Examples of ornamental lighting in parking lots at Orland Crossing  |
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
§ 6-213 Open Space District.
[Amended by Ord. 4217, 2-5-2007; Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
A.
Purpose. The purpose of the Open Space District is to protect the Village's parks, natural areas, retention ponds, detention basins, civic and fraternal nonprofit organizations, and open space corridor connections. It is also to ensure permanent access to outdoor recreation, natural areas, and other recreational opportunities for residents in all neighborhoods and to enhance the value of nearby properties.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5855]
B.
Permitted Uses. The following uses may be established as permitted uses in the Open Space District, in accordance with the procedures established in Sections 5-101 through 5-104:
1.
Public recreational facilities including playgrounds, public swimming pools, playing fields, trails, sports activities, outdoor amphitheaters, camping areas, picnicking areas, boating areas, fishing activities, golf courses, civic and fraternal nonprofit organizations, and accessory uses such as related parking, washrooms, storage, etc.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5855]
2.
Natural areas and passive parks for the purpose of preservation of native flora and fauna and establishing wildlife corridors.
3.
Agricultural uses including cropfields, orchards, vineyards, grazing and community gardens.
4.
Retention ponds and detention basins.
5.
ComEd transmission towers and lines, substations and related facilities (including collocated wireless communication facilities) within established easements on privately and publicly owned land.
6.
Cemeteries including mausoleums, sepulchers, and related structures on privately owned land only.
7.
Commuter rail stations including accessory restaurant/retail uses within the station.
C.
Prohibited Uses. The following uses are prohibited as they would conflict with the purpose of protecting parks and natural areas:
1.
Any private development of structures or facilities; the exception is cemetery and ComEd facilities as stated above;
2.
Any public facilities unrelated to the operation or protection of parks, natural areas, civic and fraternal nonprofit organizations for the benefit of the public, and retention/detention facilities.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5855]
D.
Minimum Lot Size. There is no minimum lot size.
E.
Setbacks. Accessory buildings and structures cannot be placed closer than five feet from an adjacent property line.
§ 6-214 Regional Mixed-Use Campus.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 5168, 2-20-2017]
A.
Intent. These regulations for the Regional Mixed-Use Campus (RMC) are intended to guide the development of a high-intensity, interrelated live/work/learn/play district along Interstate 80 that emphasizes the pedestrian experience and public gathering spaces, promotes the clustering of various knowledge-based industries, respects the natural environment, and establishes a physical form that engages visitors, employees and residents.
B.
Applicability. The RMC District includes properties within the area loosely bordered by LaGrange Road on the east, Interstate 80 to the south, 107th Avenue to the west, and certain parcels on the north side of Orland Parkway.
 |
C.
Guiding Principles.
1.
Places for People. For places to be well-used and well-loved, they must be safe, comfortable, varied, and attractive for people.
2.
Promote a Positive Image. Walkable mixed-use developments are attractive and distinctive places that create a positive image for businesses, investors, and residents. Developments within the RMC District shall strengthen this positive image by shaping the public and private realm based upon the overarching themes of innovation, accessibility, continuity, cooperation, pedestrian amenities, and sustainability.
3.
Cultivate the Public Realm. Plaza areas, entrances to buildings, and other gathering places shall mark the origin and destination points of walking and bicycling trips, and collectively define the shape and extent of a multi-modal circulation system. Consistent landscaping, streetscape treatments, and signage shall provide visual continuity throughout the District.
4.
Lead with Sustainability. Compact mixed-use developments concentrate development where the road, transit, and utility infrastructure can support it. Because of its planned concentrated character, the RMC District shall be much more energy efficient than the same amount of development built in a typical one-and two-story, car-oriented style. Thus sustainability shall start at the scale of the District - leveraging existing natural assets - and trickle down and inform green tactics among the individual buildings. A system to award the inclusion of such techniques should be considered.
5.
Target Diverse Users of Varying Scales. Encourage and enable mixed-use, cluster development to create active nodes of residential, office, retail, entertainment, advanced manufacturing and other compatible uses. The aim is to foster a variety of activity throughout the day and strengthen economic and knowledge spillover among users of various scales and interests - ranging from established corporations to start-ups.
6.
Promote Quality Urban Design and Architecture. Successful communities apply urban design principles to orchestrate numerous physical and non-physical elements to create dynamic, attractive places. This District shall use urban design methodologies to enhance the inter-relationships between blocks, streets, open space, and landscaping, and weave together different building forms and uses. Buildings shall display a coherent and memorable aesthetic with coordinated design details that create a consistent, attractive and welcoming built environment.
7.
Incentivize Code Conformance. The Village shall reward those who strive to meet its standards and regulations. Therefore, the length of review time and number of meetings required to obtain project approval shall be based upon the degree of conformance to this Code, with precise conformance resulting in a relatively quick review process.
D.
Development Objectives.
1.
Interconnected Site Planning. Buildings shall be (1) located at the street edge and clustered together with (2) shared parking facilities and (3) common amenity space, including (4) regional stormwater detention facilities.
2.
Life Between Buildings. The defining quality and character of the District shall be the campus feel created through a network of (5) public plazas and open space areas. The spaces between buildings shall flow together and provide visual and physical connections for pedestrians.
3.
Pedestrian Experience. Sidewalks and pathways are required to (6) connect the street frontage to all front building entrances, parking areas, plazas, and any other destination that generates pedestrian traffic.
4.
Mix of Development Intensity. The vast majority of the District shall have no height limit, thereby encouraging more intense development (7) appropriate next to an interstate. Development of (8) low- and (9) medium-intensity structures will be encouraged to collocate and share common areas.
5.
Target Knowledge-Based Industries. A broad spectrum of users are encouraged to congregate within the District - office, retail, multi-family, entertainment, and recreation - with a special emphasis on knowledge-intensive sectors, such as Class A office, research labs, advanced manufacturing (3D printing), and business incubator facilities.
 |
 |
E.
Process Overview. The following provides a concise overview of the general review process. The intent of this Code is to reward those who strive to meet its standards and regulations. Therefore, the length of review time and number of meetings required to obtain project approval shall be based upon the degree of conformance to this Code, as determined by the Director of Development Services.
1.
Precise Conformance (Board Only). Site plan matches the development and redevelopment goals of the Code, including use, site plan, massing, and architectural details. Proposal requires no variances and needs no special approvals.
2.
Moderate Conformance (Committee and Board Only). Site plan matches the spirit and intent of the Code, but there are some qualitative differences that do not require a variance and needs no special approvals.
3.
Non-Conformance and Special Approvals (Full Process). Site plan does not meet the spirit or intent of the Code, and/or requires a special approval, such as a Special Use Permit, map amendment, and/or a variance.
F.
Uses.
1.
Permitted Uses.
a.
Office, Research and Manufacturing.
Offices |
Business incubator facilities |
Laboratories for research, development, testing, and related production activities |
Medical research and manufacturing facilities, including but not limited to pharmaceuticals, biomedical technologies, medical instruments and supplies |
Printing, publishing, lithographing or similar |
Advanced manufacturing and assembly |
b.
Commercial.
Commercial retail establishments - not exceeding 30,000 square feet of floor area |
Convenience stores |
Personal service establishments |
Restaurants - including outdoor seating |
Wineries and microbreweries under 12,000 square feet, and distilleries under 5,000 square feet |
Financial institutions |
Hotels - not less than 50 rooms |
Convention centers, meeting space, and banquet facilities |
Movie theaters - excluding drive-in theaters |
Indoor commercial recreation |
Day care facilities |
Health clubs and fitness centers |
Dry-cleaning and laundry |
c.
Civic and Institutional.
Hospitals, medical rehabilitation centers and clinics for the treatment of human ailments, no overnight stay |
Government uses, including offices, public schools, parks, and municipal and recreational facilities, and incubator and research facilities |
Boarding schools |
Colleges and universities, public and private, including dormitories |
Structured parking - ancillary to a primary use |
d.
Residential.
Attached dwellings - provided that no dwelling units are located on the street level unless the dwelling units are part of a mixed use development |
2.
Special Uses.
a.
Office, Research and Manufacturing.
Warehousing or distribution establishments |
b.
Commercial.
Commercial retail establishments -exceeding 30,000 square feet of floor area |
Drive-through establishments (accessory to restaurants, banks, pharmacies and all other uses) |
c.
Civic and Institutional.
Hospitals, medical rehabilitation centers and clinics for the treatment of human ailments, with overnight stay |
Vocational schools |
Theater, auditorium, museum, library, and other civic and cultural facilities |
Stadia, auditoria and arenas |
Utility substations |
Public transportation facilities |
Wireless communication facilities |
3.
Prohibited Uses.
Adult regulated uses |
Automobile/gasoline service stations |
Automobile car wash (either manual or automatic) |
Automobile repair shops (including bodywork) |
Automobile rental |
Building material sales |
Congregate senior housing |
Contractors or construction offices |
Funeral homes, mortuaries, and cremation facilities |
Furniture stores |
Greenhouses, garden centers, and landscape nurseries |
Gun dealer/shooting range |
Industrial facility (heavy) |
Kennel/pound |
Machinery and equipment rental and sales |
Motel or motor inn |
Plumbing, heating, air conditioning sales and service |
Second hand stores, flea markets, pawn shops |
Self-service storage facility |
Tattoo parlor |
Truck depot/truck stop |
G.
Private Lot Standards.
1.
Land Use Intensity. This District shall have no restrictions on density or floor-area-ratio (FAR).
2.
Land Area Requirements. No minimum or maximum lot size.
3.
Lot Width Requirements. No minimum or maximum lot width.
4.
Maximum Lot Coverage. No more than 80% of the area of the parcel may be covered with building, pavement and storm water storage, leaving at least 20% of total parcel area in green space.
6.
Dimensional Requirements. Figure 6-214.G.6 and Figure 6-214.G.6 establish the dimensional regulations for the District, with the following special provisions:
a.
At least 50% of the length of the property line along the primary street frontage, excluding driveways, shall be occupied by the facade of the building.
b.
No more than 30% of the lot frontage of a site along a public right-of-way shall be devoted to parking or service.
c.
Where a plaza is between the building and the street, the actual maximum building setbacks from the public right-of-way shall be the depth of the plaza.
 |
7.
Encroachments into Setbacks.
Feature | Standard |
|---|---|
Architectural Features | 50% of setback |
Awnings, Canopies, and Marquees | 100% of setback |
Drive-Throughs | prohibited |
Flag Poles over 18' | prohibited |
Landscape Features | 50% of setback |
Loading Facilities | prohibited |
Parking Lots | prohibited |
Porticoes/Arcades | 50% of setback |
Public Art | 100% of setback |
Stairs/Stoop | 100% of setback |
Trash Enclosures | Prohibited |
Table 6-214.D.7 |
8.
Shared Parking Facilities. Large surface parking lots are not appropriate to the scale and character of this district. To promote smaller lots, shared parking, on-street parking and the shared use of public parking facilities, developments will be allowed to reduce the on-site parking requirements outlined in Section 6-306B by up to 25%.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
H.
Design Standards.
1.
General Layout and Street Pattern.
a.
Buildings shall be (1) located at the street edge and clustered together with (2) shared parking facilities and (3) common amenity space.
b.
Various land uses shall be laid out and spaced to make walking from one land use to any other land uses as easy as possible.
c.
Streets shall be laid out to create blocks, and blocks shall not exceed 600 feet in length before being interrupted by a street intersection.
d.
Streets shall be extended to abutting properties in logical locations, as determined by the Village. When warranted by unique circumstances, the Village may allow driveways to be used instead of streets for these connections, provided cross access for the driveway is guaranteed to the abutting property.
 |
 |
2.
Pedestrian Design Standards.
a.
Sidewalks with a minimum width of six feet are required along all street frontages and interior access roads.
b.
Sidewalks are required to connect the street frontage to all front building entrances, parking areas, plazas, and any other destination that generates pedestrian traffic. Sidewalks shall connect to existing sidewalks on abutting tracts and other nearby pedestrian destination points.
3.
Open Space and Plaza Design Standards.
a.
Required open space areas shall only consist of (1) plazas, (2) central greens, playgrounds, trails, greenways with trails, pedestrian malls, promenades, picnic areas, and other similar types of usable, public space.
b.
Plazas shall meet the following requirements:
(1)
Developments shall provide one square foot of plaza area for every 40 square feet of gross building floor area; however, developments with less than 30,000 square feet of gross floor area are not required to provide any plaza area. Because of limits on the maximum size of plazas, more than one plaza area may be required in larger developments.
(2)
Individual plazas shall be no smaller than 2,500 square feet and no larger than 75,000 square feet.
(3)
Plazas shall be surrounded on all sides by either (3) streets or the (4) front facades of buildings.
(4)
At least 25%, but no more than 80%, of the plaza shall be landscaped with trees, shrubs, and mixed plantings with year round interest.
(5)
The plaza shall not be used for parking, loading, or vehicular access, except emergency and maintenance vehicular access.
(6)
Plazas shall include a defining central element, such as a large fountain, sculpture, gazebo, pond, or similar feature.
 |
 |
4.
Parking Design Standards.
a.
Surface Parking.
(1)
Surface parking lots shall be located to the (1) rear of principal buildings or to the side. Surface parking (including drive-aisles) shall not be located between a building and a street.
(2)
Surface parking lots visible from a street shall be continuously screened by a four foot-high wall/fence, berm or hedge.
(3)
Surface parking lots within a block in development shall be interconnected by access driveways.
(4)
Each lot shall provide (2) cross-access easements for its parking areas and access driveways guaranteeing access to adjacent lots within the same block. Interconnections shall be logically placed and easily identifiable to ensure convenient traffic flow.
b.
Structured Parking.
(1)
Except for their pedestrian and vehicular entrances, structured parking garages, or structured parking within a principal building, that is located within 50 feet of a street curb-line at street level shall have (3) office, entertainment, institutional, apartment lobby, retail, restaurant, or a related use in occupied space along 70% of the first floor of the structured parking that faces the street.
(2)
Cars shall generally be screened from the street through features such as grills, lattices, (4) mock windows, louvers, false facades, etc. Such screening shall be in keeping with the rest of the building's architectural style and materials. Landscape screening is required.
 |
 |
5.
Building Design Standards.
a.
Building Orientation and Entrances.
(1)
Front facades of buildings shall be (1) oriented towards existing and proposed streets, with an everyday entrance in the front facade. Buildings with multiple front facades shall have entrances in each front facade, corner entrances, or, if permitted by the Village, entrances in only some of the front facades.
(2)
All primary building entrances shall be (2) accentuated. Permitted entrance accents may include: recessed, protruding, canopy, portico, or overhang.
(3)
Loading doors, service doors, and loading docks shall not be located in any facade facing a street or any portion of a facade within 35 feet of a street, plaza or outdoor gathering area.
b.
Walls and Windows.
(1)
Blank walls shall not be permitted along any exterior wall facing a street. Walls in these locations shall comprise a minimum of 35% window area.
(2)
Ground floor (3) facades of retail, restaurant, office and related uses facing a street shall comprise a minimum of 50% clear window area, with windows providing views of display areas or the inside of the building.
(3)
Smoked, reflective, or black glass in windows is prohibited.
 |
 |
I.
Supplemental Standards for Special Uses.
1.
Warehousing or Distribution Establishments.
a.
Minimum Lot Size: one acre.
b.
Maximum Lot Size: three acres.
c.
Cannot be located within 200 feet of a public right-of-way.
d.
The building height shall not exceed 48 feet.
e.
All exterior portions and/or facades, including the roof, shall use colors consisting of a neutral earth tone.
f.
Storage bay doors shall not face any abutting property located, nor shall they be visible from any public street.
g.
No outside storage shall be permitted.
2.
Drive-Through Establishments (Accessory to Restaurants, Banks, Pharmacies and All Other Uses).
a.
Drive through facilities cannot be located on the building face which fronts a public street.
b.
The drive through should be designed as a single lane with a maximum width of 14 feet and a minimum turning radius of 20 feet from the centerline of the drive aisle.
c.
Drive through lanes must be a minimum of 10 feet from all property lines.
d.
Drive through lanes must be constructed with decorative pavement or pervious pavers.
3.
Commercial Retail Establishments - Exceeding 30,000 Square Feet of Floor Area.
a.
Buildings shall be designed to achieve a fine-grained texture by dividing large facades into the appearance of several sections or smaller buildings to avoid the appearance of a large, monotonous building mass.
b.
Buildings must have at least a three foot break in depth in all front facades for every 100 feet of continuous facade.
c.
In addition to the required three foot break, building facades of 200 feet or more facing a street, surface parking lot, or walking area shall include design elements that will break up the facade, such as awnings, canopies, towers, bays, gables, changes in materials, changes in facade treatments, etc.
§ 6-301 Bulk Regulations.
[Entire section moved to 6-104 by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
§ 6-302 Accessory Structures and Uses.
A.
General Requirements. No land or structure shall be used, developed, or occupied unless all accessory uses and structures conform to all applicable requirements of these regulations. The remaining subsections of this section establish additional requirements and restrictions for particular accessory uses and structures. Any accessory use or structure shall be required to obtain the same type of approval under Article 5 of these regulations as the principal use would have to obtain. Any accessory use or structure may be approved in conjunction with approval of the principal use. No accessory use or structure shall be approved, established, or constructed before the principal use is approved in accordance with these regulations.
B.
Accessory Dwellings. An accessory dwelling shall be permitted in any residential district in accordance with the requirements that follow. Except as provided for in Subsection B7, below, all accessory dwellings shall be located within the primary dwelling.
1.
The principal use of the lot shall be a detached dwelling.
2.
No more than one accessory dwelling shall be located on a lot.
3.
The accessory dwelling shall be owned by the same person as the principal dwelling.
4.
The accessory dwelling shall not be served by a driveway that is separate from the driveway that serves the principal dwelling.
5.
The accessory dwelling shall have a floor area no greater than 50% of the floor area of the principal dwelling.
6.
If the entrance to the accessory dwelling is separate from the entrance to the principal dwelling, then that entrance shall not face any street on which the lot fronts.
[Ord. 2462, 10-18-1993]
7.
If the dwelling will be in a separate accessory structure, then that structure shall also serve as a garage for residents of the principal dwelling.
C.
Permitted Accessory Structures and Uses. The following tables summarize the permitted accessory structures. Please refer to the text following the tables for further details.[1]
[1]
Editor's Note: The accessory structures tables and notes are included as an attachment to this chapter.
D.
Dumpsters and Trash Handling Areas. The following requirements shall apply to walls and fences surrounding dumpsters and trash handling areas accessory to any multi-family or nonresidential use:
1.
Except as provided below, any dumpster, grease receptacles or trash handling areas shall be screened from view from public streets and any abutting properties by three opaque walls and an opaque gate. All dumpsters and grease receptacles shall have lids that remain closed and remain inside garbage enclosure area at all times unless in use.
[Amended by Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
2.
Except as provided in (4) (below) for industrial uses, any wall around a dumpster or trash handling area (enclosure) accessory to a new multi-family or a nonresidential use shall be constructed in a durable fashion of brick, stone, or other masonry materials with no greater than 25% of the wall surface left open. The wall shall be constructed of the same building material and in the same architectural style as the principal structure. Existing multi-family or nonresidential uses may construct enclosures using either wood or beige vinyl material as replacements to either wood or chain link existing enclosures or non-conforming trash handling areas. Existing masonry enclosures may only be replaced by other masonry enclosures.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998; amended by Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005; Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
3.
Any wall required under this section shall have a height no greater than eight feet and no less than six feet. For other fence heights see Section 6-310.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; amended by Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
4.
Any wall around a dumpster or trash handling area accessory to an industrial use shall be allowed to be constructed using walls of materials matching the primary building or wood doors with masonry support posts.
[Ord. 4015, 5-2-2005]
E.
Pet Shelters. Pens, runs, cages, houses or other facilities for the keeping of dogs, cats, and other small animals shall be permitted as an accessory use in any district in accordance with the requirements below. Hens shall be regulated in accordance with Section 8-4-15-2, Keeping of Hens.
[Amended 8-5-2002 by Ord. No. 3672; 5-20-2024 by Ord. No. 5899]
1.
Any structure for the keeping of animals, except for fences along property lines, shall be located between the principal structure and the rear lot line and shall be located no closer than 10 feet to any rear or side lot line.
2.
Extensions of or additions to property line fences to confine animals to a part of the property abutting the lot line shall not be permitted.
3.
Any fence required under this section shall have a height no greater than six feet.
4.
No such accessory use shall be operated for commercial purposes as a regular source of income.
F.
Stadia and Auditoria. Stadia and auditoria that are accessory to schools are permitted, provided that:
1.
The use shall be located on a lot of at least 20 acres;
2.
Vehicular access to the use shall not be provided by way of a local street;
3.
No direct beams of light from outdoor lighting fixtures, signs or vehicles maneuvering on the site shall shine into any abutting property located in a residential district; and
4.
Off-street parking areas and accessways shall be designed to allow direct public transit service to the use.
G.
Automobile Rental.
1.
Automobile rental shall be permitted as an accessory use where the principal use is a retail automobile dealership, a commercial retail establishment or an overnight accommodation.
2.
Where the principal use is an overnight accommodation, automobile rental shall be permitted as an accessory use only in accordance with the following requirements:
H.
Storm Water Best Management Practices.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
1.
Best Management Practices. The following list of best management practices serves to encourage residents and businesses to employ clean technologies for local water quality improvements and storm water management. For more information on best management practices, contact the Development Services Department and reference the most up to date Village of Orland Park Storm Water Management Technical Guidance Manual (TGM).
a.
Bio-Swale. A bio-swale is a shallow drainage conveyance trench or shoulder with a gentle slope designed to slowly transport and treat run-off. A swale looks similar to a ditch, but is slightly wider and may use berms and/or check dams to promote settling and infiltration.
b.
Flow-Through Planter. A flow-through planter is a structure or container placed above or below ground and filled with gravel, soil and vegetation. Run-off is temporarily stored above the soil and slowly filters down. Water that is not absorbed by the soils or plants is collected in a perforated pipe at the bottom of the planter and routed to a drain system or network of planters. These are effective for compact sites, next to building foundations or other locations where infiltration may be problematic or soils are poor-draining. Flow-through planters are permitted for all commercial sites.
c.
Green Roof/Eco-Roof. A green roof uses living plant material as part of the roofing system. Green roofs generally include a waterproof membrane, root barrier, thermal insulation, drainage system, filter layer, growing medium and living plant material. The plants, roots, and soil filters detain and absorb rainwater, slowing, cleansing and cooling the run-off. Roof gardens can be either extensive (soil depths three to four inches) or intensive (soil depths six inches or greater). Green roofs are permitted in all zoning districts.
d.
Infiltration Planters. An infiltration planter is a structure or container with an open bottom that is filled with a layer of soil and vegetation. Run-off is diverted into the planter and temporarily stored above the soil before infiltrating down into existing soils. This can be employed in space-limited sites where run-off is received by a piped inlet or sheet-flow, such as parking lot islands, plazas and walkways. If the soil does not drain well or infiltration is not desired, a perforated pipe under-drain can connect to storm sewers or defined, stabilized discharge point.
e.
Infiltration Trench. An infiltration trench is a shallow trench filled with stone, sand or rock to create a small reservoir for run-off until it infiltrates into the soil or is released slowly into a storm drain system, usually over a period of several days. Underground infiltration trenches are effective for compact sites with limited space. Trenches should be covered with stone, grass and small plants or shrubs to better incorporate into the urban landscape. Shallow, wide trenches (as opposed to narrow, deep trenches) are best for removing pollutants.
f.
Native Landscaping, See Section 6-305, Landscape and Tree Preservation."
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
g.
Permeable Pavers. A series of interlocking concrete pavers that contain drainage voids for passing runoff to the sub-surface, where the water is further conveyed through base materials into the ground or storm drain system. Permeable pavers can be used in parking lots, private roads, and private sidewalks where no chemicals or other hazardous materials are used. In areas where soils do not drain freely, permeable pavement can be used in combination with subsurface storm drain systems.
h.
Porous Pavement. Porous pavement is a mixed and placed hard surface that allows water to infiltrate across the entire area. The pavement is made without fine sand or small aggregate to create void spaces that allow rain and snow melt to pass through to a bed of open-graded aggregate beneath the pervious pavement. Storm water is then stored until it infiltrates into the underlying soils. Permeable paving should not be used in areas with the potential for high pollutant loads or high traffic/high speed because its load-bearing capacity is typically less than conventional pavement.
i.
Rain Barrels. Rain barrels are designed to collect storm water from residential single family home and condominium rooftops and stored for later irrigation and non-potable uses in buildings. Rain barrels that contain up to 55 gallons are permitted in all zoning districts.
(1)
Setbacks. Rain barrels may project up to three feet beyond the established building side and rear yard setbacks.
j.
Rain Garden (Bio-Retention). A rain garden is a shallow depression that captures storm water run-off from roofs, driveways, streets and parking lots allowing it to infiltrate into the soil. These gardens typically utilize a modified soil mixture to ensure that the gardens soak up the water within a two-day period. Many are designed to have overflow outlet during heavy rainfall events. Rain gardens may be planted with shrubs, perennials or native wildflowers and grasses to increase infiltration and attract biodiversity. Rain gardens typically absorb 30% more storm water than conventional lawns. Rain gardens are permitted in all zoning districts.
k.
Storm Water Cisterns. Storm water cisterns are designed to collect storm water runoff from non-residential and mixed-use rooftops and stored for later irrigation and non-potable uses in buildings. Above ground storm water cisterns that contain up to 10,000 gallons are permitted in the LSPD, BIZ, COR, VC, ORI, MFG and R-4 zoning districts. Dry wells shall have positive drainage to a Village-approved system if soil infiltration is less than 0.50 inch per hour.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(1)
Height. Storm water cisterns may not extend beyond the roofline of the building's height or 40 feet, whichever is lesser.
(2)
Setbacks. Storm water cisterns may project up to 10 feet beyond the established building side and rear yard setbacks. A cistern may not locate between the building and the right-of-way.
(3)
Appearance. Storm water cistern colors must match existing building colors and the system must be integrated as an architectural feature.
l.
Underground Storm Water Cistern/Dry Well. An underground storm water cistern/dry well is a process where storm water run-off is funneled into an underground rock-filled trench or vault, temporarily detained and infiltrated back into the surrounding soils. Dry wells can reduce the volume of storm water run-off generated by the roofs of structures, a significant source of run-off volume that enters storm drain systems (they can also potentially recharge local aquifers by diverting storm water into the soils). Dry wells should be placed near areas that accumulate standing water or receive rooftop run-off from gutter downspouts. They can be manufactured, made by filling a trench with stone and gravel, or utilize a perforated pipe made of concrete or plastic, and surrounded by gravel.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
I.
Outside storage. Outside storage, where permitted in a specific zoning district and as specifically regulated in said district, shall be located at the rear of the principal building. It shall be screened on all sides. Stored materials, equipment or vehicles shall not exceed the height of the screening, and shall not be visible from any adjacent streets or residential areas.
[Amended 12-1-2003 by Ord. No. 3837; 8-17-2015 by Ord. No. 5017; 9-19-2016 by Ord. No. 5126; 2-20-2017 by Ord. No. 5167; 7-16-2018 by Ord. No. 5312; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
J.
Collection Boxes.
1.
A permittee shall operate and maintain all collection boxes for which the permittee has been granted a permit as follows:
a.
Collection boxes shall be metal and be maintained in good condition and appearance with no structural damage, holes or visible rust and shall be free of graffiti.
b.
Collection boxes shall be locked or otherwise secured in such a manner that the contents cannot be accessed by anyone other than those responsible for the retrieval of the contents.
c.
Collection boxes shall have in, at minimum, one-half-inch lettering visible from the front of each collection box the name, address, email, website, and phone number of the operator.
d.
Collection boxes shall be serviced and emptied as needed, but at least every 30 days.
e.
The permittee and property owner shall maintain, or cause to be maintained, the area immediately surrounding the collection boxes, free from any junk, debris, overflow items or other material.
2.
Shall not be permitted on any undeveloped parcel, nor where the principal use of the land has been closed or unoccupied for more than 30 days;
3.
Shall not be less than 1,000 feet from another collection box as measured along a straight line from one box to the other;
4.
Shall not exceed seven feet in height, six feet in width and six feet in depth;
5.
Shall not be placed closer than 10 feet from:
6.
Shall not exist in the front setback of any property;
7.
Shall not interfere with an access drive, off-street parking lot maneuvering lane and/or required off-street parking space; and
8.
Shall be screened from view on all sides from public streets and any abutting properties.
K.
Drive-Through Accessories.
1.
Drive-Through Accessories shall be screened from all public rights-of-way and adjacent residential properties in accordance with the Screening Requirements set forth in Section 6-308J and Section 6-305D4, Landscape Bufferyards. No Drive-Through Accessories shall be located between the building setback area and the street, except in conjunction with a Special Use Permit.
2.
Drive-Through Accessory Standards.
a.
Drive Through Structures are subject to the following conditions:
(1)
Drive-Through Structures shall not exceed 14 feet in height.
b.
Menu Boards are subject to the following conditions:
(1)
One Menu Board shall be allowed per Order Confirmation Point.
(2)
Menu Boards shall not be more than 50 square feet in surface area.
(3)
The highest point of a Menu Board shall not exceed a height of seven feet from grade.
(4)
Menu Boards shall not exceed two feet in dimensional depth.
(5)
A minimum five-foot wide on average landscape planting bed shall be installed around the entire base of all new permanent menu boards. A minimum of 50% of the area of the landscape bed around a menu board shall be occupied by vegetation. Vegetation should have year-round interest and should include shrubs, ornamental grasses and perennials; turf grass is not permitted. Plantings should be large enough to cover or soften the base of the menu board without blocking the displayed information.
c.
Preview Boards are subject to the following conditions:
3.
Digital Menu Board Brightness Size.
a.
The maximum permitted brightness for a Digital Menu Board shall be determined by the total area that emits light. The regulations for Digital Menu Board size and brightness are set forth in Table 6-302.K.3.A. Digital Menu Board size shall be rounded to the closest correlated size listed in Table 6-302.K.3.A when defining maximum permitted brightness.
Table 6-302.K.3.A | |
|---|---|
Menu Board Screen Size (square feet) | Menu Board Brightness (nits) |
0-25 | 3500 |
30 | 3200 |
35 | 2900 |
40 | 2600 |
45 | 2300 |
50 | 2000 |
L.
Outdoor Seating Areas. Outdoor seating areas shall be located in the front, side, or rear of the principal building in the OOH, COR, ORI, VCD, BIZ, and RMC Districts.
1.
Permanent Outdoor Seating. Permanent outdoor seating shall be located within an attached patio or sidewalk area and meet the following requirements:
2.
Temporary Outdoor Seating. Temporary outdoor seating, in the case that governmental agencies issue a mandate that limits the occupancy of restaurants, may be permitted via a Special Event Permit, to be determined by Development Services Director, and shall meet the requirements of Title 7, Chapter 22 of the Village Code. [Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017; amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020] |
§ 6-303 Home Businesses.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
Home businesses are being regulated so as to ensure that nearby residents retain enjoyment of their properties and retain their property values. A home business may be permitted, accessory to any dwelling unit, provided that the following requirements are met:
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
A.
The use may not be located in a detached accessory structure, and may not require internal or external alteration of the dwelling, or involve construction features or use of equipment not customarily used for domestic or household purposes.
B.
The home business must be incidental and secondary to the use of the dwelling for dwelling purposes.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
C.
The use must be conducted entirely within the dwelling by members of the family residing on the premises, and shall employ no more than one person who is not a resident of the dwelling unit.
D.
The use shall not utilize mechanical, electrical, or other equipment which produces noise, electrical or magnetic interference, vibration, heat, glare, or other nuisances outside the dwelling unit.
E.
The primary access to the use shall be from the primary entrance to the dwelling unit.
F.
The use shall occupy no more than 25% of the total floor area of the dwelling unit, including the basement or cellar.
G.
Operation of the use shall not be visible from any existing dwelling on an adjacent lot and shall not change the essential residential character of the principal use.
H.
No more than 15 vehicle trips by either customers, delivery persons or employees may be made throughout a day to and from the home business.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
I.
No heavy equipment, including excavation, towing or construction equipment, may be located on the site of the home business.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
J.
No vehicle that exceeds a limit of 3/4 tons may be parked on the site of a home business, regardless of whether that vehicle is used for commercial purposes associated with the home business. No vehicle over five tons may provide deliveries to service the home business.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
K.
There shall be no outdoor storage or display of equipment or materials used in the home business.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
L.
No stock in trade shall be sold or displayed on the premises, and no services may be rendered on the premises that require receipt or delivery of merchandise, goods, or equipment by other than U.S. letter carrier mail service or by passenger automobile of the person conducting the home business.
[Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
M.
All necessary licenses for the business must be obtained and kept current.
[Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002]
§ 6-304 Temporary Uses.
A.
Temporary Use Permit Required. Unless expressly provided to the contrary in this section, no temporary use shall be established or maintained unless a temporary use permit evidencing the compliance of such use with the provisions of this section has first been issued by the Building Department.
B.
Use Limitations. Temporary uses are subject to the specific regulations and time limits that follow, and to other applicable regulations of the district in which the use is located:
1.
Any temporary use, together with any principal use, shall not jointly exceed the land use density or intensity that is applicable in the district in which it is located.
2.
No signs in connection with the temporary use shall be permitted except in accordance with Section 6-307 of these regulations.
3.
The temporary use shall operate only during the hours and dates specified in the permit.
4.
Off-street parking that will reasonably be required for such temporary use shall be provided if the Building Department determines that the use would otherwise unreasonably reduce the amount of off-street parking spaces available for nearby permanent uses. The operator of the temporary use shall be responsible for guiding patrons to such parking lots.
5.
No temporary use shall be permitted unless the Orland Park Fire Protection District and Police Department and the Village Health Official have first certified that such use will result in no additional on-site or off-site threat to the public health, safety and welfare.
6.
No temporary lighting shall be installed without an electrical permit issued by the Village Building Director.
7.
The site of the temporary use shall be cleared of all debris at the termination of the event. A cash bond for an amount deemed appropriate by the Village Manager shall be posted with the Building Department or a signed contract with a disposal firm shall be required to ensure that the site is cleared of debris.
C.
Permitted Temporary Uses. The following uses are some of the temporary uses permitted in the Village:
1.
Carnivals and Circuses.
a.
Permitted in any district, provided that such use obtains the prior approval of the Village Manager.
b.
The maximum length of the permit shall be 15 days.
c.
No structure or equipment shall be located within 300 feet of any residential structure. Such use need not comply with the height or setback requirements of Section 6-104 of these regulations, except that structures or equipment shall not be located within the sight triangle as provided in Section 6-104 of these regulations.
d.
The person responsible for the operation of any such carnival or circus shall provide the Village Manager in advance of the event date with the information as required.
2.
Christmas Tree Sales.
a.
Permitted in any district, provided that such use receives specific prior approval by the Village Manager.
b.
The maximum length of such permit shall be 60 days.
c.
Display of Christmas trees are exempt from the setback requirements of Section 6-104 of these regulations, except that no tree shall be displayed within the sight triangle, as provided in Section 6-104E.
d.
The person responsible for the operation of such Christmas tree sales shall provide the Village Manager in advance of the date of such operation with information as required.
3.
Contractor's Offices and Construction Equipment Sheds.
a.
Permitted in any district where the use is accessory to a construction project. No contractor's office or equipment shed shall contain sleeping or cooking accommodations, except as necessary to accommodate security personnel.
b.
The maximum length of the permit shall be one year, but may be renewed by the Building Department for a period not to exceed the duration of the construction project.
c.
Any contractor's office or equipment shed shall be removed upon completion of the construction project.
4.
House, Apartment, Garage and Yard Sales.
a.
Permitted in any residential district, provided that such sale is limited to the personal possessions of the owner-occupants of the dwelling unit and their neighbors.
b.
House, apartment, garage and yard sales are not to exceed a three consecutive day period.
c.
No residence shall conduct more than three such sales in a twelve-month period.
d.
No temporary use permit is required for such uses.
5.
Indoor and Outdoor Arts and Crafts Shows.
a.
Permitted in any district provided that such use receives the prior approval of the Village Manager.
b.
The maximum length of the permit shall be three days.
c.
The person responsible for the operation of such show shall provide the Village Manager in advance of the event date with information as required.
6.
Non-residential Seasonal Outdoor Storage.
a.
Permitted on parcels that have a minimum area of 25,000 square feet and a minimum road frontage of 250 feet. Storage containers shall be set back a minimum of 30 feet from the nearest street right-of-way.
b.
A drawing of the location of the storage container(s) must accompany any request for seasonal outdoor storage.
c.
The maximum length of the permit shall be three months in any single year.
d.
Not more that 10% of the required parking spaces may be used for the seasonal outdoor storage containers.
[Ord. 4125, 4-17-2006] |
7.
Real Estate Offices.
a.
Permitted in any district accessory to any new development. Such offices shall not be used as a residence, and shall not contain any sleeping or cooking accommodations unless a model home is used as a temporary sales office. All such offices shall comply with the Illinois Accessibility Code and the Illinois Plumbing Code.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
b.
The maximum length of a permit issued by the Building Department shall be one year, but the permit may be renewed throughout the sales or leasing period by action of the Village Board upon application made no less than one month prior to the termination of the then-current permit period. Village Board action to renew a permit shall state the length of the renewal period and whether further renewals will be considered.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000]
c.
If the temporary sales office is in a trailer or similar temporary structure, a letter of credit shall be provided prior to the issuance of a permit, in an amount not less than $5,000 to assure the removal of the trailer or similar temporary structure, disconnection of any utilities which were connected thereto, and storage of the trailer after removal. Storage costs shall be assessed at $100 per day. The letter of credit shall be in a form similar to that provided in Section 5-112B of this Land Development Code, and shall expire not less than 60 days after the end of the permit period or any renewal period granted.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000]
d.
No such office shall be used as the general office or headquarters of any real estate.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000]
9.
Seasonal Outdoor Sales.
a.
Permitted on parcels that have a minimum area of 25,000 square feet and a minimum road frontage of 250 feet. Sales area, including tents, produce stands, and all other structures, shall be set back a minimum of 30 feet from the nearest right-of-way of any street or highway.
b.
A drawing of the event location must accompany any request for outdoor sales.
c.
The maximum length of the permit shall be for a six month period in any single calendar year.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
d.
Not more than 10% of the required parking spaces may be used for the outdoor sales structures.
[Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997] |
10.
Temporary Hiring Offices.
a.
Permitted in any district where the use is accessory to a non-residential construction project. Such offices shall not be used as a residence, and shall not contain any sleeping or cooking accommodations. All such offices shall comply with the Illinois Accessibility Code and Illinois Plumbing Code.
b.
The maximum length of a permit issued for the temporary hiring office by the Building Department shall be 45 days from the date occupancy is granted for the temporary hiring office.
c.
If the temporary hiring office is in a trailer or similar temporary structure, the trailer or structure shall be removed upon completion of the construction project and before a Conditional or Full Certificate of Occupancy is issued for the principal non-residential construction project.
d.
If the temporary hiring office is in a trailer or similar temporary structure, a bond shall be provided prior to the issuance of a permit, in an amount not less than $5,000 to assure the removal of the trailer or similar temporary structure, disconnection of any utilities which were connected thereto, and storage of the trailer after removal. Storage costs shall be assessed at $100 per day. The bond shall expire not less than 60 days after the end of the permit period or any renewal period granted.
e.
No such office shall be used as a primary office headquarters.
[Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020] |
11.
Temporary Sales.
a.
For existing on-site businesses, temporary sales of items including flowers, food, novelties, sidewalk sales, tent sales and special promotions shall be permitted in any district, provided that all sales are conducted at least 30 feet from the right-of-way of any street or highway, and do not interfere with traffic.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
b.
A drawing of the event location must accompany request for outdoor sales.
c.
Permit application is required.
d.
The maximum length of a permit will be three days.
e.
Permits are limited to one per calendar month.
f.
In the event food is prepared for outside consumption, an inspection is required by the Village health inspector.
g.
Not more than 10% of the required parking spaces may be used for outdoor sales structure.
[Ord. 4695, 12-19-2011] |
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
12.
Temporary Shelter.
a.
When a natural disaster renders any residence unfit for habitation, the temporary use of a mobile home or recreational vehicle located on the parcel is permitted during the rehabilitation or construction of a new residence.
b.
The maximum length of the permit shall be six months, but may be extended by the Building Department.
c.
The temporary shelter shall be removed from the parcel after an occupancy permit has been issued for the new or rehabilitated residence.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
13.
Temporary Storage Units.
a.
Permitted Units. Temporary storage units that are not specifically regulated by Subsections C1 through 10 of this section may be allowed subject to the following:
(1)
The maximum total unit size shall be 768 cubic feet for residential zoning districts and a maximum of 1,000 cubic feet per 10,000 square feet of existing principal building area for non-residential zoning districts. A maximum unit height of eight feet above grade shall be allowed in all zoning districts;
(2)
Units shall be located on private property with a minimum lot line setback of five feet from any lot line;
(3)
The maximum time allowed for a temporary storage unit shall be 30 days from the day of placement on the site;
(4)
Residential waste collection/garbage enclosures are regulated by the Village Code (See 6-2-2-4 and 6-2-2-5);
(5)
Paper recycling containers/paper retrievers are permitted for governmental uses and schools.
b.
Prohibited Units. The following temporary storage units are prohibited:
(1)
Temporary storage units for materials that emit noxious odors or hazardous substances;
(2)
Temporary storage units in outdoor areas used for the collection of clothing, small household items, books, toys, hygienic materials, food, biohazards and other similar miscellaneous products and items;
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
14.
Tents and Canopies.
a.
Tents in excess of 200 square feet and canopies in excess of 400 square feet require permits for non-residential uses as an ancillary use to a permitted, accessory or special use permit. Tents for non-residential uses less than the above area thresholds do not require permits. Tents for residential uses are allowed and do not require a permit.
b.
The maximum length of the permit shall be 10 days, or two days longer than the allowable period for the principal use, where such tent is incidental to the primary use.
c.
No permit may be issued to the same person/business more than three times in a twelve-month period.
[Amended by Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
§ 6-305 Landscape and Tree Preservation.
A.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to establish meaningful standards for the design, installation, maintenance and preservation of landscaping and natural areas throughout the Village.
B.
Applicability.
1.
General. No permit for the construction, reconstruction, extension, repair or alteration of any building, structure or use of land and no building or land or any part of any building or land, may be occupied or used until landscaping has been provided in accordance with the requirements of this section.
2.
Responsibility for Compliance. The following shall comply with all requirements provided in this section, except where noted:
a.
All new single-family detached dwellings on an individual lot shall only comply with the provisions of 6-305.D.2 Landscape Parkways, Sections 6-305E Landscape Plan and 6-305F Maintenance and Preservation, where applicable.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
b.
New residential developments;
c.
New non-residential developments;
d.
New mixed-use developments;
e.
New vehicular parking areas;
f.
Modifications to an existing building or site (see Section 6-305B3 Modifications);
g.
Any project requiring a Special Use Permit, Map Amendment, or Appearance Review, as determined by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
3.
Modifications. An existing building or site may be renovated or repaired without providing additional landscaping except when:
a.
An addition, alteration, or enlargement to an existing building, excluding single-family dwellings, expands the original building square footage by 25% or more, singularly or collectively.
b.
There is a creation of, or increase in, residential units within an existing building, excluding single-family dwellings.
c.
The restoration of any building, accessory buildings or structures or portion thereof damaged by fire, explosion, flood, casualty or other natural disaster of any kind is undertaken.
C.
Special Conditions.
1.
Alternate Landscape Plans. The Board of Trustees may approve preliminary landscape plans whose makeup may not meet the specified quantities stated herein, if such plans are clearly superior to what could be achieved by using those minimum standards and are consistent with the purposes of this section, as determined by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
2.
Additional Landscaping. The Board of Trustees may require additional landscaping or site furnishings (e.g. benches, walls, park equipment) above quantities specified herein in order to mitigate a specified problem or in order to ensure a development is consistent with the objectives of this section and/or adopted Village policy.
3.
Changes to Approved Landscape Plan. Minor changes to an approved landscape plan shall require approval by the Development Services Department by way of an administrative appearance review. Minor changes are acceptable where such revisions do not diminish the overall intent of the approved landscape plan. Substantial changes to an approved landscape plan shall require the re-initiation of the preliminary/final landscape plan process outlined in Section 6-305E4.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
D.
Landscape Zones.
1.
General. Landscape zones refer to distinct areas within a particular site and the specific landscape requirements that apply therein. A project site may have up to seven different landscape zones, as described in this section, although not all sites will contain every landscape zone (e.g. some developments will not have stormwater basin landscaping), as determined by the Development Services Department. Plant material quantities shall meet or exceed the requirements detailed in this section.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
a.
Landscape Zones.
(1)
Landscape Parkways.
(2)
Landscape Corridors.
(3)
Landscape Bufferyards.
(4)
Foundation and Interior Landscape.
(5)
Parking Lot Area Landscape.
(6)
Signage Landscape.
(7)
Stormwater Management Area Landscape.
Figure 6-305.D.1.a(A) - Landscape Zones Overview (Figure for Illustrative Purposes Only) .tiff.png "LD Figure 6-305D1a(A).tiff") Non-Residential Development Example Scenario |
 Residential Development Example Scenario |
2.
Landscape Parkways.
a.
General. The Landscape Parkway is intended to provide a landscaped seam between the roadway and adjacent development to ensure a continuous green corridor along the public right-of-way. Movement between seams is facilitated and encouraged with pedestrian sidewalks, crosswalks and other amenities that give a positive sense of ambiance and create a desire to move from one side to the other.
(1)
A minimum number of parkway trees are required per lineal feet of frontage for all development. On a corner lot, the requirements of this section shall apply along both frontages.
(2)
Parkway requirements shall be based on the width of the parkway, as detailed in Table 6-305.D.2.b(A) Parkway Requirements. If more than one Landscape Parkway type may be used, the Development Service Department shall make the final determination.
b.
Requirements.
.tiff.png "LD Figure 6-305D2b(A and B).tiff") |
Table 6-305.D.2.b(A) - Parkway Requirements | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Type A | Type B | Type C | |
Parkway Width (P) | 4' or less | 4' or more | 7' or more |
Sidewalk Width (S) | varies | varies | varies |
Tree Location | Tree Grates* | Grass, Tree Grates* | Grass |
Tree Spacing | 30' on center | 40' on center | 40' on center |
Permitted Encroachments | Driveways, Furniture | Driveways, Furniture | Driveways, Furniture |
* | or equivalent |
c.
Details.
(1)
The parkway shall be planted with grass or low ground cover, except where occupied by trees, tree grates or equivalent, driveway pavement, plant materials, site furnishings or decorative brick pavers.
(2)
Parkway trees shall consist of recommended shade tree species unless overhead utilities exist or if the street is known to be subject to widening in the future. Evergreen trees are not allowed in any parkway. Recommended tree species are provided in 6-305.G List of Recommended Plant Species.
(3)
Parkway trees shall be planted in the public parkway and not on the private property side of the sidewalk unless such placement does not meet the other criteria set forth in this section. Any required tree that cannot be accommodated in the parkway shall be relocated to another landscape zone.
(4)
Trees shall be planted on the centerline of parkways or as close to five feet from the sidewalk as possible and located so as not to interfere with overhead wires, traffic or pedestrian safety.
(5)
Other than trees, no landscaping in the parkway shall be taller than three feet. No landscaping taller than two feet shall be located within six feet of fire hydrants or buffalo boxes.
(6)
The use of loose stone, rock, or gravel is prohibited in public parkways. Compacted cobbles, flagstone, or other rocks may be approved if these features are compacted firmly into the ground or mortared, reducing risk of being scattered in the street, as determined by the Development Services Department.
(7)
See Village of Orland Park Code of Ordinances Tree Management Program, Title 3, Chapter 6 for additional parkway tree regulations.
3.
Landscape Corridors.
a.
General. Landscape Corridors shall provide a physical and visual connection between the parkway and a building's main facade and foundation planting area. Landscape Corridors act as an extension of the parkway into the site, the intent of which is to add a consistent quality and definition to areas adjacent to roadways and enhance the physical and visual access to important site features.
(1)
Landscape Corridor requirements shall be based upon the adjacent roadway classification, as detailed in Section 2-102 Definitions, or as required by other provisions of the Land Development Code. Refer to individual Zoning District requirements for additional information. The more stringent requirements shall apply. Refer to Table 6-305.D.3.b(A) - Corridor Types for planting requirements.
(2)
Canopy, Ornamental and Evergreen trees are the only required plant materials within "Typical" and "Arterial" Landscape Corridors. "Auto-Row" Landscape Corridors require the use of canopy trees and a meandering, continuous row of low-growing perennials, hedge rows, ornamental grasses or other plant materials, as detailed in 6-305.D.3.b Requirements.
(3)
While not required, the use of planting beds with shrubs, perennials, ornamental grasses and other plant materials may be included in the design of Landscape Corridors. These plant materials should be designed in a way to frame or accentuate important site features.
(4)
New residential developments with rear and/or side yards abutting a public street are considered a special condition. See Section 6-305.D3c Special Conditions below for details.
b.
Requirements.
Figure 6-305.D.3.b(A) - Corridor Types (Figure for Illustrative Purposes Only) .tiff.png "LD Figure 6-305D3b(A).tiff") |
Table 6-305.D.3.b(A) — Corridor Types | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Typical | Arterial | Auto-Row | |
Landscape Corridor Width | Varies | Varies | Varies |
Shade Trees (per 100') | 1 | 2 | 0** |
Ornamental or Evergreen Trees (per 100') | 1 | 2 | 3 |
Shrubs* (per 100') | 0 | 0 | Minimum of 20 |
* | Includes shrubs, perennials and ornamental grasses. |
** | If trees in an adjacent parkway are not present or feasible, then two canopy trees and zero ornamental trees are required per 100 feet within the Corridor. [Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017] |
(1)
Typical Landscape Corridor: Typical Landscape Corridors are intended to act as a physical and visual connection between the parkway and a building's main facade. Requirements for Typical Landscape Corridors apply to all applicable parcels adjacent to any roadway not defined in Section 2-102 Definitions as "Street, Arterial, Major" and "Street, Arterial, Minor", except for those defined in Section 6-305D3b(3). Auto-Row Landscape Corridor.
(2)
Arterial Landscape Corridor. Arterial Landscape Corridors are intended to act as a physical and visual connection between the parkway and a building's main facade. Requirements for Arterial Landscape Corridors apply to all applicable parcels adjacent to any roadway defined in Section 2-102 Definitions as "Street, Arterial, Major" and "Street, Arterial, Minor", except for those defined in Section 6-305D3b(3). Auto-Row Landscape Corridor.
(3)
Auto-Row Landscape Corridor. Auto-Row Landscape Corridors are intended to accommodate the unique needs of auto dealerships while creating a visual relationship between the parkway and a building's main facade. Auto-Row Landscape Corridor requirements apply to any parcel occupied by a Village-licensed auto-dealership with frontage along any roadway. The use of shade trees and a meandering, continuous row of low-growing perennials, shrubs, ornamental grasses, and other plant materials shall be installed.
c.
Special Conditions.
(1)
New Residential Rear and Side Yard Corridors. Where the rear or side yard of a new residential development borders an arterial or collector street, the following requirements shall apply:
(A)
The plant material requirements detailed in "Typical Landscape Corridors" shall be installed along the entirety of the rear or side yard that adjoins an arterial or collector street. Refer to Table 6-305.D.3.b(A) - Corridor Types for planting requirements.
(B)
Additionally, a uniform fence shall be installed along the entirety of the rear or side yard that adjoins an arterial or collector street. Fencing shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 6-310 Fences.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
(C)
Small infill projects in established areas adjacent to public streets shall follow the existing pattern of rear yard screening, as determined by the Development Services Department.
(D)
The location of plant materials and fences shall be determined by the Development Services Department.
4.
Landscape Bufferyards.
a.
General. Landscape bufferyards shall act as physical and visual edges between the side and rear yards of adjacent parcels. Depending on the type of required bufferyard, their intent is to either unify or separate adjoining land uses. When the intent of a bufferyard is for the unification of adjacent parcels, pedestrian and vehicular cross-access between adjacent parcels is strongly encouraged, and may be required by the Village.
(1)
Single-family residential developments adjacent to single-family residential developments are exempt from bufferyard requirements. Mixed-use developments which include single-family residential units are not exempt from bufferyard requirements.
(2)
Bufferyards may remain in the ownership of the owner of the lot, or they may be subjected to deed restrictions and subsequently conveyed to a homeowners' association, provided that any such conveyance adequately guarantees the protection and maintenance of the bufferyards for the purposes of this section.
b.
Requirements.
(1)
A required bufferyard is determined by cross-referencing the "proposed land use" with the appropriate "adjacent land use" as detailed in Table 6-305.D.4.b(A) — Bufferyard Land Use Types. There are only two land use types: Residential and Non-Residential, as described below. Specific bufferyard requirements are detailed in Table 6-305.D.4.b(B) — Bufferyard Types. If an adjacent parcel is vacant or undeveloped, the appropriate bufferyard shall be based on the parcel's land use category as detailed in the Village's Comprehensive Plan. If more than one bufferyard option is available, a petitioner may decide which type of bufferyard to install.
Table 6-305.D.4.b(A) — Bufferyard Land Use Types | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Adjacent Land Use | |||
R | NR | ||
PROPOSED LAND USE | R | Type 1 | Type 2 or 3 |
NR | Type 2 or 3 | Type 1 | |
Residential (R) — Parcel containing only single- or multi- family residential uses(s).
Non-Residential (NR) — All other parcels, including mixed- use developments.
Figure 6-305.D.4.b(A) — Bufferyard Types (Figure for Illustrative Purposes Only) .tiff.png "LD Figure 6-305D4b(A).tiff") |
Table 6-305.D.4.b(B) — Bufferyard Types | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Type 1 | Type 2 | Type 3 | |
Bufferyard Width (min.) | 10' | 15' | 10' |
Planting Bed Width (min) | 7' | 7' | 7' |
Shade Trees per 100' | 3 | 4 | 3 |
Evergreen or Ornamental Trees per 100' | 1 | 2 | 1 |
Shrubs* per 100' | 16 | 18 | 16 |
Fencing | Permitted | Permitted | Minimum 6' required |
Site Amenities | Permitted | Not permitted | Not permitted |
* | Includes shrubs, perennials and ornamental grasses. [Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017] |
(2)
Type 1 Landscape Bufferyard — (10 feet). A Type 1 Landscape Bufferyard is intended to act as a physical and visual seam between adjacent parcels by unifying similar land uses using landscaping. Movement between seams is facilitated and encouraged with cross streets, pedestrian sidewalks, crosswalks and other amenities that give a positive sense of ambiance and create a desire to move from one side to the other. Minimum width for a Type 1 Landscape Bufferyard is 10 feet. Site amenities and pedestrian and vehicular cross-access between adjacent parcels is strongly encouraged, and may be required, where appropriate.
(A)
Site amenities can occupy any portion of the area within a Type 1 Landscape Bufferyard, subject to Development Services Department approval. Examples of site amenities include, but are not limited to:
(B)
A reduction in plant material requirements and/or landscape-related development fees proportional to the proposed site amenity (amenities) may be applied, as determined by the Development Services Department.
(3)
Type 2 Landscape Bufferyard — (15 feet). A Type 2 Landscape Bufferyard is intended to act as a physical and visual filter between adjacent parcels by separating dissimilar land uses using landscaping. Minimum width for a Type 2 Landscape Bufferyard is 15 feet. Vehicular cross-access between adjacent parcels is encouraged where appropriate. Site amenities are not encouraged within Type 2 Landscape Bufferyard.
(4)
Type 3 Landscape Bufferyard — (10 feet + Fence). A Type 3 Landscape Bufferyard is intended to act as a physical and visual filter between adjacent parcels by separating dissimilar land uses utilizing both an opaque, minimum six foot tall fence and required landscaping. Minimum width for a Type 3 Landscape Bufferyard is 10 feet. Site amenities are not encouraged in Type 3 Landscape Bufferyard. Fences shall comply with the requirements set forth in Section 6-310 Fences.
c.
Details.
(1)
If the area of a required bufferyard is increased or decreased through a modification to the required width, the required area coverage and planting requirements still apply based on the original minimum required width. If the area of the bufferyard will not accommodate the required number of plants, the same number of plants that cannot be accommodated shall be relocated to other areas within the site.
(2)
Landscape bufferyards shall be located within setbacks, except where landscape corridor requirements, easements, covenants, natural or engineered drainage, natural features, approved property entrances or exits, or required sight triangles require the bufferyard to be set back from the property line.
(3)
Landscape bufferyards shall not contain any development, impervious surfaces, or site features that do not function to meet the standards of this section, unless approved by the Development Services Department. No grading, development, or land-disturbing activities shall occur within the corridor unless approved by the Plan Commission at the time of site plan approval.
(4)
A landscape bufferyard may be used for passive recreation or for utility or drainage easements, if the utility requirements and the bufferyard requirements are compatible, as determined by Development Services Department. If approved by the Development Services Department, stormwater Best Management Practices (BMPs) may also be located within the bufferyard. For details see Section 6-302H Storm Water Best Management Practices.
d.
Bufferyard Fences, Walls, Berms and Hedges. Fences, walls, berms and/or hedges may be required to supplement required Landscape Bufferyard requirements if the Development Services Department determines that additional screening is necessary to shield a proposed land use from adjacent uses. All fences shall meet the requirements of Section 6-310 Fences. If required, fences, walls, berms or hedges shall be constructed in accordance with the following specifications:
(1)
Bufferyard fences or walls shall not exceed six feet in height in residential areas and shall not exceed eight feet in height in non-residential areas along the perimeter of the property as outlined above.
(2)
Bufferyard fences and walls for residential developments over two dwelling units and all non-residential development shall be made of natural materials such as wood, stone, vinyl or brick, with the design to be approved as a part of the landscape review. Hedges shall meet standards of this section.
(3)
Earthen berms may be a part of the approved final grading plan to ensure adequate stormwater management, as determined by the Development Services Department. Berms shall have a maximum slope of 3:1 and shall be integral to the planting design, with groundcovers, native materials, grasses, perennials and/or lawn required to cover the berm. Berms proposed for landscaping that are not a part of the original grading design will require re-submittal review and approval of stormwater engineering.
5.
Foundation and Interior Landscape.
a.
Foundation Landscaping.
(1)
General. Foundation landscape areas shall be provided to enhance architectural features, integrate a building(s) with the site and add visual interest to large expanses of building walls.
(2)
Requirements.
(A)
A minimum ten-foot wide on average foundation landscape area shall be provided along 100% of all building facades fronting a public street, except where building access walkways/driveways or emergency service connections are necessary.
(B)
A minimum seven-foot wide foundation landscape area shall be provided along 50% of all building facades not fronting a public street, except where building access walkways/driveways or emergency service connections are necessary.
(C)
Foundation landscape areas shall consist of well-defined planting beds. A minimum of 75% of each foundation landscape area shall be occupied by planting beds, with the remaining area to be covered in a turf-grass or turf-grass alternative.
(D)
Foundation planting beds shall consist of a combination of trees, shrubs, ornamental grasses, perennials and groundcovers. The majority of required foundation trees, shrubs and ornamental grasses shall provide year-round visual interest.
(E)
On average, a minimum of one ornamental tree and 16 shrubs or ornamental grasses shall be provided for every 100 linear feet of building face.
(F)
Foundation landscaping may be placed away from the building face in instances where the site layout allows such an alternative, but shall be no more than 25 feet from the building face.
b.
Interior Lot Landscaping.
(1)
A minimum of one tree is required per dwelling unit for multi-family residential development, one tree per 10,000 square feet of lot area for commercial/office development, and one tree per 25,000 square feet of lot area for industrial development.
c.
Residential Site Interior Landscaping.
(1)
For commonly owned land in single-family and multi-family developments with more than one structure, the open space between buildings shall appropriately landscaped to provide: screening of adjacent dwelling units, screening and shading to improve energy efficiency, and a visually appealing living environment. Landscape features such as trees and shrubs, groundcovers, flowering annuals and perennials, permitted naturalized landscaping areas, BMPs and berming shall be used as appropriate to enhance the overall appearance and function of the open space area.
6.
Parking Lot Area Landscape.
a.
General. The following standards shall apply to the perimeter screening and interior landscaping of parking lot areas:
(1)
Perimeter Screening. The design of the landscape screening around a parking lot area shall meet the following standards:
(A)
All parking lot areas greater than seven parking spaces shall be significantly screened from view from adjacent properties and streets with landscaping, ornamental fencing, masonry wall, or a combination thereof. A minimum ten-foot wide planting bed shall be required around the perimeter of all required parking lots that are visible from adjacent properties and streets. The setback distance between a parking lot and adjacent property line shall in all cases be a minimum of 10 feet, as measured from the parking lot back of curb. Parking lot screening and setback requirements shall be waived between lot lines for shared parking lots, as determined by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019; Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020]
(B)
A minimum of 75% of perimeter plant materials shall attain a minimum mature height of three feet and a minimum of 75% of the area of the planting bed shall be covered with plant materials. Plant material quantities and diversity shall comply with Section 6-305E6 Landscape Material Requirements.
(C)
The size and placement of plant material at maturity shall allow for a three-foot bumper overhang from the face of the curb.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
(2)
Parking Lot Island Landscaping. Landscaped parking lot islands are required in order to provide aesthetic relief and shade to large expanses of paved surface. The design of parking lot islands, the selection of plant materials and the vehicular use area shall meet the following standards:
(A)
One detached parking lot island is required for every 10 parking spaces provided. Required parking islands may be consolidated to allow for better soil volume and drainage. Parking lot islands at the corners of a parking lot do not count towards the parking lot island requirements.
(B)
The area of a single parking lot island shall match the size of a single adjacent parking lot space. Minimum landscape island soil depth shall be 36 inches, as measured from top of curb. If parking lot islands are consolidated, the area of a consolidated island shall be equal to or greater than the combined area of the required parking lot islands being consolidated.
(C)
At minimum, parking lot islands shall be located at the end of each row of parking stalls.
(D)
Shade trees shall be the primary plant materials used in parking lot islands and landscape areas. Each parking lot island shall have a minimum of one shade tree. If parking lot islands are consolidated, one shade tree is required for every 162 square feet of parking lot area.
(E)
Additional plant materials other than turf grass, such as shrubs, ornamental grasses, perennials and ground covers, shall be planted such that 60% or more of the parking lot island area includes live plant material. Other than trees, items planted in an island shall not exceed the mature height of 30 inches above the top of curb.
(F)
Evergreen and ornamental trees shall not be allowed in interior parking lot islands.
(G)
Curbs shall be provided between vehicular use areas and landscaped areas.
(H)
Parking lot islands shall contain at least six inches of stone base and 36 inches of topsoil per island. Islands should not be constructed on a compacted base; if severe compaction exists as determined by the Development Services Department, a drainage strategy shall be implemented.
(I)
Parking lots shall be graded so that landscape islands do not impound water, unless surface impoundment is required as a method of on-site retention of stormwater. Landscape islands may contain bioswales and vegetated swales to reduce stormwater runoff and facilitate ground infiltration if the parking lot is designed to accommodate such a strategy.
(J)
Best Management Practices (BMPs) should be used where appropriate within parking lot designs. See Section 6-302H Storm Water Best Management Practices for further information.
7.
Signage Landscape.
a.
Required Landscaping.
(1)
A minimum five-foot wide on average landscape planting bed shall be installed around the entire base of all new permanent ground signs, or existing ground signs where the external structure is modified, as determined by the Development Services Department.
(2)
A minimum of 50% of the area of the landscape bed around a ground sign shall be occupied by vegetation. Vegetation should have year-round interest and should include shrubs, ornamental grasses and perennials; turf grass is not permitted. Plantings should be large enough to cover or soften the base of the sign without blocking the sign copy. All planting beds shall be mulched with three inches of organic mulch.
(3)
A landscape plan for ground signs, which will be reviewed administratively, shall be submitted with the associated sign permit. Such plans shall only be required to comply with landscape plan requirements listed in Section 6-305E2a through f, or as determined by the Development Services Department.
.tiff.png "LD Figure 6-305D7a(A).tiff")
8.
Stormwater Management Area Landscape.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
a.
General. This section details landscape requirements for stormwater management areas, including retention/detention basins and volume control best management practices (BMPs). See § 6-409, Storm Sewers and Storm Water Detention, for additional stormwater management area requirements. See § 6-412, Local Stream and Waterbody Protection, § 6-413, Wetlands Protection, and § 6-414, Conservation Areas, for requirements for these areas.
b.
Requirements.
(1)
Stormwater management landscapes must be naturalized using native herbaceous plants, shrub and trees from the basin bottom to the outer edge of the required naturalized landscape area. The naturalized landscape area shall be planted with 100% context-appropriate naturalized landscaping, which shall provide complete coverage of the perimeter of the basins. At minimum, native canopy trees shall be planted at a ratio not less than one tree for every 100 linear feet of retention or detention basin perimeter as measured at the high water line; native understory trees shall be planted at a ratio not less than one tree for every 200 linear feet; and native shrubs at a ratio not less than three shrubs for every 50 linear feet.
(2)
Native vegetation that is appropriate for the basin's or BMP's hydrology shall be established from the basin's or BMP's bottom to the outer extent of the high water level. Only those plants that are adapted to temporary flooding shall be planted below the high water line.
(3)
Dry bottom detention/retention basins may be planted with mowable grass (for example, Kentucky bluegrass), under the following conditions:
(A)
Grass must be planted from the basin bottom to the outer edge.
(B)
Required volume control cannot be at the bottom of the basin and must be located elsewhere on site.
(C)
A minimum 40,000 square feet of grass is required.
(D)
Basin bottoms must be sloped to drain toward the outlet.
(E)
The area with volume control must be naturalized as stated in this section.
(4)
Within the greater of a minimum fifteen-foot setback from a detention/retention basin or the horizontal distance required to obtain 1 1/2 feet of freeboard, a minimum fifteen-foot-wide naturalized landscape area is required above all naturalized retention and detention pond high water levels in order to slow runoff, filter pollutants, recharge aquifers and enhance water quality. Within the naturalized landscape area, a maintenance vehicle access area shall be provided around the pond, at least eight feet wide not exceeding a 2% cross slope and shall remain open and accessible for maintenance purposes, planted with native low-growing plant materials or as a recreational/maintenance trail. The balance of the naturalized landscape area, not exceeding a 5% cross slope, shall include naturalized landscaping, as detailed below in § 6-305D.8.b(5). See also § 2-102, Definitions, "naturalized landscaping."
(5)
A monitoring and management plan (M&M plan) shall be submitted along with the required landscape plan for all applicable projects, as determined by the Engineering Department. M&M plans shall coincide with the project Watershed Management Ordinance (WMO) Permit Schedule R, if applicable. For further details see § 6-305F.2, Naturalized Landscaping Area Management Standards. Monitoring and management plans and Schedule R shall be recorded with the County Recorder of Deeds in which the project is located. For projects with stormwater management features, an annual monitoring report must be submitted to the Village before annual acceptance may be granted.
(6)
A hydro-period analysis, submitted in a diagrammatical "stage versus time" graph, shall be submitted for the two-, five-, ten-, and 100-year storm events so that it can be confirmed that proposed plantings within the basin will be able to withstand the frequency and duration of these storm events, if requested by the Director of Engineering. This information shall coincide with the project Watershed Management Ordinance (WMO) Permit, if applicable.
(A)
See Infrastructure Specification Guidelines, which may be updated by the appropriate Village department from time to time.
(7)
Conventional lawn grasses are not recommended within 10 feet of the required naturalized landscape area. However, a ten-foot-wide buffer of native vegetation or No Mow grasses is recommended to protect the required naturalized vegetation and expand the benefits of the naturalized habitat.
(8)
Where a stormwater basin is proposed to be located within or bordered on a required buffer, the intensity of landscaping around the basin shall be increased to comply with the applicable standard for the buffer. In these circumstances, the fifteen-foot naturalized landscape area is still required.
(9)
An "as-built" landscape plan of all stormwater management areas is required before final approval by the Village, including but not limited to topographic information, planting limits and normal and high water level elevations, or any additional information requested by the Village. Additional information may be required, as determined by the Development Services or Engineering Departments.
E.
Landscape Plan.
1.
General. An applicant for development required to install landscaping per this section shall comply with development regulations stated in the development petition. The applicant shall submit a landscape plan along with the application for development approval to the Development Services Department.
a.
The final grading plan approved by the Village shall be used as a base map for the landscape plan. It is imperative that the landscape design professional and project engineer coordinate their work to provide grading required for landscape compliance.
b.
All new developments and redevelopments shall adhere to the Watershed Management Ordinance (WMO), as amended, as written by the Metropolitan Water Reclamation District of Greater Chicago and regulated by the Village of Orland Park.
2.
Landscape Plan Requirements. The landscape plan shall be prepared by a landscape architect licensed in the State of Illinois or a qualified landscape designer. The landscape plan shall include all of the following:
a.
Landscape Architect/Designer's name, address, and telephone number;
b.
Petitioner's name and name of development;
c.
Scale, north arrow, date of preparation and revision dates;
d.
Location, quantity, size, and type of existing on-site naturalized landscaping to be retained, including a tree survey, if applicable;
e.
A proposed plant material list that includes botanical name, common name, caliper/height and pot size;
f.
Location, quantity, size and type of all proposed plant materials and species, including quantities for all seed mixes, including tree mitigation plantings, and showing the relationship of plant materials to other site features such as utilities and easements. Plants depicted on the plan should be represented at 2/3 mature plant width;
g.
Data box - A landscape data box which includes the required and proposed calculations for the following: total area in square feet of the lot to be developed, the total square feet and percentage of landscape area, the total number of and square footage of landscape islands as compared to parking stalls, and a list comparing all required and proposed landscape materials;
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
h.
Landscape construction and planting details;
i.
Elevations and details of all fences, retaining walls or other site amenities or decorative features proposed for location on-site. The details shall include, but are not limited to, materials, colors, styles and sizes;
j.
Lot numbers on all subdivision parcels;
k.
Planting time restrictions and/or limitations;
l.
Final engineering approved grading plan showing existing and proposed contours, including berms;
m.
All proposed building footprints and hardscape areas (i.e. parking areas, driveways, sidewalks, patios);
n.
Topography, grading plan and overland flow routes;
o.
Proposed and existing utilities and easements;
p.
Site utilities including transformers/power sources for buildings and location of mechanical equipment exhaust and air intakes;
q.
An attached WMO Permit for all qualifying developments with a maintenance plan included; and
r.
Any other information that may be needed to show compliance with this section.
3.
Additional Requirements.
a.
A preliminary landscape plan must be submitted at the initiation of all development petitions, unless otherwise noted. A final landscape plan must be submitted to the Development Services Department in conjunction with final engineering submittals. The Development Services Department may require landscape plans to be submitted earlier if deemed critical to the review of the overall proposal. A digital copy must accompany all landscape plan submittals.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
b.
A tree survey and tree mitigation plan shall be reviewed with either a site plan review, variance review, and/or special use review. See Section 6-305F3 for tree mitigation plan details. The following actions require a tree survey and tree mitigation plan:
c.
A Monitoring and Management Plan shall be submitted with the landscape plan for all projects where naturalized landscaping is included. See Section 6-305F2b Monitoring and Management Plan for details.
d.
A WMO permit shall be obtained for all qualifying developments. All WMO permitted projects require a Monitoring and Maintenance Plan and Schedule R. Qualifying developments shall reference the WMO Maintenance Plan when preparing the Monitoring and Maintenance Plan in conjunction with a landscape plan. See § 6-305.F.2.b, Monitoring and Management Plan, for details.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
e.
Letter of Credit. A letter of credit covering the estimated cost of required landscaping, including naturalized landscape installation, monitoring and establishment management shall be posted as part of the final landscape plan approval process. The letter of credit shall be provided to the Village by the owner or developer prior to the issuance of a building permit in accordance with the provisions of Section 5-112 Development and Subdivision Requirements. The letter of credit shall cover costs associated with earthwork, planting, inspections, maintenance or any other cost necessary to achieve Village acceptance standards. The amount of the letter of credit associated with naturalized landscape areas shall be held for the duration of period outlined in the Village approved Monitoring and Management Plan or until the naturalized landscape meets acceptance criteria, whichever is later, as determined by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
4.
Review and Approval of Landscape Plan.
a.
All development petitions shall provide a preliminary landscape plan as a part of the initial petition submission. The Development Services Department shall review, or have reviewed, all preliminary landscape plans. All preliminary and final landscape plans shall comply with the requirements outlined in Section 6-305 Landscape and Tree Preservation.
b.
The Development Services Department shall review preliminary landscape plans and other required documents and work with the petitioner until the plans satisfy the criteria set forth in this section and/or any conditions of approval.
c.
The Development Services Department shall issue a recommendation to the Village Board of Trustees regarding whether the proposed preliminary landscape plan satisfies the Village's landscape criteria.
d.
The Board of Trustees shall review the preliminary landscape plan and the recommendation of the Development Services Department and shall then approve or deny the preliminary landscape plan.
e.
The Village Board of Trustees may also impose conditions on the issuance of the preliminary landscape plan approval. These conditions shall pertain to the external appearance of the development, and may include additional landscaping, buffering, fencing or other exterior treatment. These conditions shall be reflected on the approved final landscape plan.
f.
Upon approval of a preliminary landscape plan by the Village Board, a final landscape plan shall be submitted to the Development Services Department for review and final approval. The final landscape plan shall reference and be in accord with a project's approved final engineering plans, site plan and Village Board conditions, if applicable.
g.
The Development Services Department shall review, or have reviewed, all final landscape plans. The Development Services Department shall approve or deny all final landscape plans.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
5.
Criteria for Approval of Landscape Plans.
a.
Design Guidelines. The following design guidelines shall be used to evaluate proposed landscaping plans:
(1)
Landscape improvements shall serve to integrate the project to the site and surrounding context, with particular sensitivity to the natural topography, watercourses, and existing vegetation. Preservation of the existing landscape material and land forms should be taken into account, particularly where mature trees are a part of the site. Depending on the context, landscaping should either offer a visual and physical connection or separation between land uses;
(2)
Landscaping shall be designed to have a natural aesthetic while having proportion, balance, unity, variety of species, and variety of color throughout the seasons, and shall be comprised of associations of plants which have similar climate, water, soil, sun exposure and maintenance needs;
(3)
The best professional practices of the American Society of Landscape Architects, American Nursery and Landscape Association, and Illinois Green Industry Association shall be followed. In addition, guidelines proposed and referenced through the Sustainable Sites Initiative shall be utilized;
(4)
Landscaping shall provide drifts and massing of plants with varying texture, color and forms to offset the mass of a building and to provide a visual relief to the straight lines of building architecture, parking lots and other man-made features;
(5)
Landscaping shall reduce the intrusion of headlights and other glare and shall provide a safety barrier between vehicles and pedestrians. Landscape plantings shall be designed to accommodate snow removal by providing appropriate setbacks and storage space;
(6)
Landscaping should screen the view of utilities or mechanical equipment. Existing site features within a required landscape zone which do not function to meet the standards of the required landscape zone shall be screened from the view of other properties or removed, as determined during review of a site plan or landscape plan;
(7)
If landscaping is used to screen service yards, utility meters and hardware, overhead doors, mechanical equipment, dumpster enclosures, and/or other potentially unattractive places from public view, landscape materials shall be planted in a natural type configuration, be equally effective in all seasons, and comply with Section 6-308J Screening;
(8)
Landscaping should shade seating, walking, and outdoor activity areas, shield buildings from winter wind and summer sun so as to conserve energy, and should not interfere with clear access to the sun where solar energy collection is anticipated;
(9)
Landscaping should provide a natural habitat for birds and other animal life, and should preserve existing natural vegetation and other natural features (unless prohibited by building use and other agency restrictions);
(10)
Landscapes should be designed to encourage the minimum use of water, inorganic fertilizers, herbicides, and pesticides in the development and long term maintenance of landscapes;
(11)
Irrigation systems may be required for certain landscaped areas, as determined by a landscape architect. The need for sprinkler irrigation systems shall be determined by the type of plant material and the condition/growing medium that they are installed in. All irrigation systems shall be designed to minimize the use of water;
(12)
All earth berm locations shall be reviewed by the Director of Engineering to determine how the berms shall relate to drainage and public utilities. Berms shall not exceed a maximum slope of 3:1;
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(13)
An appropriate sight triangle shall be maintained at all intersections and entryways to negate the impact of visual obstructions and shall comply with Section 6-104E Clear Sight Triangles at Street Intersections; and
(14)
Nothing shall be planted or installed within an underground or overhead utility easement or any other easement without the consent of the Village and/or the appropriate utility.
6.
Landscape Material Requirements.
a.
Plant Sizes. Minimum sizes for plant materials for all projects at time of installation shall be as follows:
(1)
Evergreen or deciduous shrubs: minimum 18 to 24 inches in height, varieties normally measured by spread shall be a minimum of 24 inches in spread;
(2)
Deciduous shade trees: minimum 2.5 inches caliper, balled and burlapped (B&B), measured six inches above the ground, all shade trees shall have a central leader. Smaller caliper trees (e.g. 1.5 inches) are permitted in naturalized landscape areas, or as determined by the Development Services Department;
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(3)
Ornamental trees: clump form shall be a minimum six feet in height or have a minimum trunk size of two inches caliper;
(4)
Evergreen trees: minimum six feet in height and (B&B) when installed; and
(5)
Ornamental grasses, perennials and climbing vines shall be specified as a minimum container size of one gallon unless otherwise approved by the Development Services Department.
Table 6-305.E.6.a(A) - Plant Size Requirements | ||
|---|---|---|
Plant Type | Minimum Plant Size | Minimum Plant Width |
Deciduous Shade Tree | 2.5" Caliper* | n/a |
Ornamental Tree | 6' OR 2" Caliper | n/a |
Evergreen Tree | 6' | n/a |
Evergreen/Deciduous Shrub | 18" to 24" | 24" |
Ornamental Grass, Perennials, Vines | 1 Gallon | n/a |
* | Smaller caliper trees (e.g. 1.5") are permitted in naturalized landscape areas, or as determined by the Development Services Department. |
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
b.
Plant Diversity. Diversity among required plant material is required for both visual interest and to reduce the chance of losing a large population of plants due to disease.
(1)
Table 6-305.E.6.b(A) - Plant Diversity Requirements details the necessary maximum and minimum percentage of plant species diversity based on the total quantity of plant species per plant type. Plant types include, but are not limited to, shade trees, evergreen trees, ornamental trees, shrubs, perennials and ornamental grasses. Minor deviations from plant diversity requirements may be permitted, as determined by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
(A)
For example, if a development requires 50 shade trees (i.e. plant type), no more than 40% [i.e. 20 trees] nor less than 10% [i.e. five trees] can be of any one species, and there must be a minimum of five different tree species within the 50 trees selected.
(2)
Native landscaping materials shall compromise 30% of the total plant count for all projects, except for trees and shrubs in naturalized landscapes, which should be 100% native plant material specific to the proposed area's soil, hydrology, and ecosystem.
(3)
The overall number of trees and shrubs required for a site shall be comprised of not less than 30% evergreen, and 70% deciduous, plus or minus 5%.
Table 6-305.E.6.b(A) - Plant Diversity Requirements | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Total Number of Plants per Plant Type* | Maximum % of Any Species# | Minimum % of Any Species | % of Native Species Per Plant Type^ | Minimum Number of Species |
1-4 | 100% | n/a | 30% | 1 |
5-10 | 60% | 40% | 30% | 2 |
11-15 | 45% | 20% | 30% | 3 |
16-75 | 40% | 10% | 30% | 5 |
76-500 | 30% | 5% | 30% | 8 |
500-1,000 | 25% | 5% | 30% | 10 |
1,000+ | 15% | 5% | 30% | 15 |
Notes: | |
* | Plant Types = Shade Tree, Evergreen Tree, Ornamental Tree, Shrub, Perennial, Ornamental Grass |
# | The overall number of trees and shrubs required for a site shall be comprised of not less than 30% evergreen, and 70% deciduous, plus or minus 5%. |
^ | Unless otherwise noted. |
c.
All other specifications shall conform to the American Nursery and Landscape Association, and "American Standard for Nursery Stock (ANSI Z60.1-2014)", as amended, published by the American Association of Nurserymen at the time of installation, and the recommended practices of the International Society of Arboriculture.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
d.
The Development Services Department shall be notified in writing if a plant substitution is needed due to the lack of availability during construction. The plant substitution shall have the same essential characteristics of the board approved plan species. See Section 6-305C3 Changes to Approved Landscape Plan.
e.
Existing trees and vegetation within a required landscape zone which are deemed healthy based on a tree survey completed by a certified arborist may be counted toward the total plant material requirements. If existing trees and shrubs do not fully meet the standards for the type of landscape zone required, additional vegetation shall be planted.
f.
Areas within landscape bufferyard or corridors not planted with trees or shrubs must be maintained as live landscaping. The clustering of trees and shrubs is encouraged in these areas. Only small trees, small shrubs and flowers may be planted in raised containers.
g.
The minimum depth of topsoil applied to new residential subdivisions, commercial areas and parks shall be six inches. All plant material shall be planted with a minimum of six inches of organic soil.
h.
Organic mulch shall be installed under trees, shrubs, and throughout planting beds to a recommended depth of three inches, in accordance with the recommended practices of the International Society of Arboriculture. Mulch should be pulled away at least four inches away from the bases of trees and shrubs. Mulch should not be piled up against the trunk of a tree (i.e. "volcano mulching") and should extend to the drip line of the tree's branches. Colorized mulch is not permitted.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
i.
All sod shall be clean and reasonably free of weeds, pests or diseases. Grass seed shall be in conformance with U.S. Department of Agriculture rules and regulations and applicable Illinois state seed laws. All dormant seeding will require the use of an erosion control blanket (North American Green S150 or equal).
j.
All plant material shall be installed free of disease and in a manner than ensures the availability of sufficient soil and water to sustain healthy growth, and shall be planted in a manner which is not intrusive to utilities or pavement.
7.
Time for Installation of Required Plantings.
a.
All landscaping, including mulching and seeding shall be completed in accordance with the approved landscape plan and site plan prior to issuance of an occupancy permit and prior to release of any letter of credit for the site. This shall apply to all types of developments.
b.
The Village may issue a temporary occupancy permit until June 1 of the following year if landscaping is delayed due to unusual conditions, such as drought, ice, over-saturated soil (deep mud), or inappropriate planting season for the planned species, unavailability of plant species, or other circumstances beyond the petitioner's control. If the developer has not posted a letter of credit that includes landscaping costs for the property, the petitioner must provide the Village with a letter of credit to ensure the installation of the remaining landscape material.
c.
All parkway trees are required to be planted by June 1 of the year following issuance of the occupancy permit for any single family home. Single-family detached dwellings shall complete all landscaping, including grass, within one year of the date of issuance of a temporary occupancy permit for that dwelling.
d.
All bufferyard and common area landscaping for residential developments shall be completed in accordance with the approved site plan at the time that 80% of the development is completed or within the next planting season following occupancy, whichever comes first. If the development is built in phases, then the landscaping shall be completed as 80% of each phase is completed or within the next planting season following occupancy, whichever comes first.
e.
The developer or property owner shall contact the Development Services Department for a final landscape inspection upon completion of landscape installation. The Development Services Department shall notify the developer or property owner of any deficiencies.
F.
Maintenance and Preservation.
1.
General Maintenance Standards.
a.
The plantings in any landscaped area must be properly maintained in order for the landscaped area to fulfill the purposes for which it was established.
b.
The obligation for continuous maintenance is binding on the petitioner who received landscape plan approval, to any subsequent property owner(s) or any other parties having a controlling interest in the property.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
c.
Continuous maintenance includes, but is not limited to, the removal of weeds; mowing; trimming; edging; cultivation; reseeding; plant replacement; appropriate fertilization; spraying; control of pests, insects and rodents by nontoxic methods whenever possible; watering/irrigation and other operations necessary to assure normal plant growth. The maintenance, repair, and replacement of all landscaping materials and barriers, including refuse disposal areas, walls, fences and other amenities upon their acceptance is also included.
d.
Continuous maintenance also includes all requirements set forth in the Village of Orland Park Code of Ordinances, Title 5, Chapter 7 "Property Maintenance Code".
e.
The replacement of any dead or dying plant materials or plant materials supporting less than 50% healthy leaf growth shall be replaced annually in compliance with the approved landscape plan.
f.
Areas of a parcel not covered by structures or pavement shall be planted with live landscaping.
g.
In the event that any vegetation or physical element functioning to meet the standards of this section is severely damaged due to an unusual weather occurrence or natural catastrophe, the owner shall have one year or one growing season, whichever is sooner, to replace or replant.
h.
Property owners are responsible to repair or replace any and all areas damaged by seasonal snow removal to a condition compliant with the approved landscape plan on file with the Village within year or one growing season of the damage, whichever is sooner.
i.
All landscape materials shall be protected from damage by vehicles or pedestrians that could reduce the viability of the plant materials. This includes maintaining landscape materials in a natural manner that precludes shaping or over-pruning of plant materials.
j.
A parkway shall be maintained by the adjacent property owner unless an agreement for maintenance has been reached with the Village. See Village of Orland Park Code of Ordinances Tree Management Program, Title 3, Chapter 6 for additional parkway tree maintenance requirements.
k.
At the time a developer turns over a subdivision to a homeowners association, the developer shall be responsible for replacing all dead plant material which was planted within the prior two years. If a homeowner association has been responsible for maintenance during that period for over one year, the developer shall not be responsible for replacing poorly maintained plants. Examples of poor maintenance include over pruning, excessive weeds, improper trimming, diseases from lack of attention, cracking, leaning, or other problems associated with damage from snow plowing and mowing.
2.
Naturalized Landscaping Area Monitoring and Management Standards. Naturalized landscaping areas need management on a regular basis after installation. Naturalized landscaping areas are most often planted as the landscape perimeter for a stormwater detention area, although not limited to just these areas. Site specific conditions influence the type and frequency of management needed. See Section 6-305E3e for Letter of Credit requirements for naturalized landscape areas.
a.
Landscape Plan. A landscape plan shall be submitted for all projects where naturalized landscaping is included. See Section 6-305E Landscape Plan for landscape plan requirements.
b.
Monitoring and Management Plan. A near and long-term Monitoring and Management Plan (M&M Plan) is an integral component to ensuring proper long-term management of naturalized landscapes. When required, a Monitoring and Management Plan shall be submitted with a corresponding landscape plan for Village review and approval and shall coincide with the Maintenance Plan approved with a WMO Permit.
(1)
The Village document, commonly referred to as "Monitoring and Management Plan for Naturalized Vegetation Areas and Detention Basins", as amended, shall be used as a template for the completion of a Monitoring and Management Plan. Minor edits to this template may be made by the petitioner; however, the final text of the Monitoring and Management Plan shall be approved by the Development Services Department. The following are minimum components of a Monitoring and Management Plan:
(A)
The names, addresses, contacts, and telephone numbers of the owner(s).
(B)
The names, addresses, contacts, and telephone numbers of the party or parties legally responsible for operations and maintenance.
(C)
If long-term management will be provided by a public agency, the Monitoring and Management Plan is to include written documentation by the public agency that they will accept such responsibility, including associated capital expenses.
(D)
If long-term management will be provided by a property owner, business or an association, the Monitoring and Management Plan is to include a copy of the terms to demonstrate that the agreement is recorded for all lots.
(E)
A description and/or plan drawing indicating the location of permanent access (public and private), overland flow paths, control structures, etc.
(F)
A list and schedule indicating how and when inspections and maintenance are to be performed, including both routine and infrequent maintenance tasks.
(G)
A list of general tasks or activities that are prohibited within the basin (e.g., dumping of yard waste or debris; replacement of approved vegetation with non-approved materials; construction or placement of structures; pesticide application, fertilizer application, mowing other than for meeting specific management goals; etc.).
(H)
Documentation of the estimated routine and non-routine expenses and dedicated source(s) of funding for continued inspection, operation, and maintenance.
(I)
A Homeowners Association (HOA)/Business Owners Association (BOA) shall include language in the governing documents authorizing for collection of fees for the naturalized landscape maintenance and outlining the process by which corrective actions will be taken and enforced.
(J)
Written acknowledgment that any amendment to the covenants and restrictions that alters the site beyond the original condition must have prior Village approval.
c.
Single-Family Residential Naturalized Landscaping. Single-family residential properties that include naturalized landscaping areas that exceed 12 inches in height are exempt from the letter of credit requirements detailed in Section 6-305E3e, Letter of Credit, although a landscape plan is still required. The following conditions apply to naturalized landscaping on single-family residential properties:
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5857]
(1)
A property owner shall apply to the Development Services Department and receive a written approval of the landscape plan prior to the installation of the naturalized landscaping.
(A)
The application shall include a plat of survey and a site plan of the single-family lot drawn to scale on a sheet not less than 8 1/2 inches by 11 inches, which contains: the location of property lines; location of structures, fences, existing drainage patterns, and paved areas; location of each natural landscaping area; a list by scientific and common name of species intended to be planted and maintained within each area; and the setback distance of each naturalized landscape area that will be located near any property line. Any proposed soil amendments and levels of shade and sunlight should also be included on the plan.
(2)
(Reserved)
(3)
It shall be permitted to grow native plants that exceed 12 inches in height within a natural landscaping area, including ferns, grasses, sedges, rushes, forbs, shrubs and trees, in lieu of turf grass lawn in designed and managed natural landscape areas.
(4)
Natural landscaping shall be permitted in rear or side yards only, and set back at a minimum of three feet of any property line. No setback shall be required where the natural landscaping is separated from adjacent lots by fencing or continuous shrub of three feet or more in height, or where the natural landscape area abuts permitted naturalized landscaping on an adjacent lot.
(5)
Naturalized landscaping may occupy a maximum 30% of the total existing open space within the side or rear yards of a single-family residential property.
(6)
It is not the intent of this section to allow vegetated areas to be unmanaged, overgrown, a health hazard or a breeding ground for fauna known to create a safety or health hazard. Plant species that are defined as noxious and/or invasive by the Illinois Department of Natural Resources, Midwest Invasive Plant Network, or Illinois Invasive Species Council do not come within the protection of this section.
(7)
If the naturalized landscape installation would affect natural drainage or involve earthwork or affect capacity of neighboring retention or detention facilities, then a land development review application shall be submitted as per the provisions of Title 5 of the Village's Land Development Code.
(8)
Upon installation of a naturalized landscape area, the site shall be inspected by a Village inspector or designee to verify compliance with the approved landscape plan. After a successful inspection, the property owner will be provided with a letter from the Village certifying that the naturalized landscape has been inspected and meets the criteria of this section. Subsequent inspections shall be performed annually by the Village or designee, or as determined by the Development Services Department.
(9)
Permission for single-family residential natural landscaping may be revoked with cause, such as failure of the owners to manage the areas or to respond to notices of creation of a nuisance or violation of the weed control ordinance.
3.
Tree Preservation Standards.
a.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to establish high preservation standards for all public and private properties within the Village, protect the Villages natural qualities and heritage, continue its reputation as an extension of the Forest Preserves, benefit the public at large as an asset to the neighborhoods, and become a source of identity and pride to the community. In addition to these high standards, this preservation ordinance specifically strives to accomplish the following:
(1)
Prevent soil erosion and sedimentation;
(2)
Reduce storm water runoff, replenish aquifers, and eliminate the costs associated with correcting the above;
(3)
Assist in the absorption of excess carbon dioxide in the atmosphere;
(4)
Create a sound buffer to noise pollution;
(5)
Provide protection against natural elements such as the sun, wind and rain;
(6)
Provide habitat for birds, which in turn, assists in the control of insects;
(7)
Protect and increase property values; and
(8)
Conserve and enhance the Village's environment, especially its natural setting, and to protect the habitat of its existing wildlife.
b.
Responsibility for Compliance. The following actions require tree removal permits. No Village official, unless the tree is a safety hazard, shall issue a permit provided herein in violation of the requirements of this section.
(1)
The removal of any heritage tree, defined as any healthy tree that is 24 inches in diameter, or greater, measured four feet from the ground, from any lot, developed or undeveloped;
(2)
The removal of any tree from a parkway;
(3)
The removal of any tree, in good or poor condition, from a conservation or tree preservation easement. Easements are legal recorded agreements tied to property most often shown on a plat of survey and/or plat of subdivision;
(4)
The removal of any tree from utility owned property or non-residential utility easement;
(5)
The removal of any tree from any property, commercial, institutional, office, industrial or multifamily residential, with an approved landscape plan.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017] |
c.
Fines.
(1)
Failure to obtain a tree removal permit prior to removing trees will result in a fine of $200 per inch of tree caliper that shall be levied against that entity primarily responsible for said tree removal. Each subsequent act of unauthorized tree removal by the same entity shall result in a 50% increase over the previous fine levy. This is in addition to the required tree mitigation. Trees removed without a tree removal permit must also be replaced per the replacement standards set forth in Section 6-305F3f Tree Replacement Standards.
(2)
Permits for the removal, relocation or replacement of trees covered herein shall be obtained by submitting an application, on a form prescribed by the Development Services Department, pursuant to the standards set forth in this section.
d.
Tree Pruning.
(1)
Tree pruning, done in order to remove dead branches or to 'limb up' the tree is permitted without a permit. If limbed up, a tree should be pruned gradually so that an unbranched trunk of a tree is never more than 1/3 the total height of the tree.
(2)
Tree topping, or the removal of the tree central leader, is not permitted on any parkway tree, heritage tree, or conservation easement tree.
(3)
No more than 25% of a single tree's canopy shall be removed in any one year.
(4)
All trees must be installed and trimmed to ensure that branches shall not obstruct the view of any street intersection and so that there shall be a clear space of eight feet above the surface of the street or sidewalk.
e.
Tree Protection.
(1)
During the development of a property, or the relocation/removal of permitted trees, the owner of the property shall be responsible for the erection of any and all barriers or protective guards necessary to protect any existing or installed vegetation from damage both during and after construction.
(2)
Trees to be preserved during the development of the property shall be protected during construction by a fence around the drip line of each tree to prevent compaction of soil and other damage to the tree by equipment or materials. No excess topsoil, construction materials, debris, or chemicals are allowed within the protected drip line of each tree. In addition, no parking of vehicles, on-site offices, or machinery is allowed inside the protected dripline. All refueling, maintenance, lunch, break and burning areas are to be located away from all protected trees.
(3)
Wherever a change of ground grading is planned, the trees to be preserved shall be protected by a retaining wall, placed at the drip-line so as to preserve the existing grade for the roots.
(4)
Wherever a change of grading is planned, the topsoil shall be preserved for the new landscaping to be installed.
(5)
When trenching alongside existing trees is unavoidable, the trench must be one foot for every one inch tree caliper, as measured four feet above grade, away from the base of the existing tree to be preserved.
(6)
Construction pruning and root pruning of trees directly impacted by construction may be required for preservation of existing trees. These measures must be indicated on the tree preservation plan or the submitted application for permit.
f.
Tree Replacement Standards.
(1)
Size. All trees that are four inches in diameter, measured four feet from the ground shall be replaced as detailed in Table 6-305.F.3.f.1(A) - Native Illinois Tree Replacement Standards or Table 6.305.F.3.f.1(B) - Non-Native Illinois Tree Replacement Standards pursuant to Village approval.
Table 6-305.F.3.f.1(A) - Native Illinois Tree Replacement Standards | ||
|---|---|---|
TREES NATIVE TO ILLINOIS | ||
CANOPY TREES | ||
Diameter of Removed Trees | Number of Replacement Trees Required per Every (1) Tree Removed | |
4" to 12" | 2 trees at 2.5" or 1 tree at 4" | |
13" to 23" | 4 trees at 2.5" or 2 trees at 4" | |
24" or greater | 6 trees at 2.5" or 3 trees at 4" | |
EVERGREEN TREES | ||
Height of Removed Trees | Number of Replacement Trees Required | |
6' to 10' | 2 trees at 6' or 1 tree at 10' | |
10' to 14' | 4 trees at 6' or 2 trees at 10' | |
14' or taller | 6 trees at 6' or 3 trees at 10' | |
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
Table 6-305.F.3.f.1(B) - Non-Native Illinois Tree Replacement Standards | |
|---|---|
TREES NON-NATIVE TO ILLINOIS | |
CANOPY TREES | |
Diameter of Removed Trees | Number of Replacement Trees Required per Every (1) Tree Removed |
4" to 12" | 1 tree at 2.5" |
13" to 23" | 2 trees at 2.5" or 1 tree at 4" |
24" or greater | 3 trees at 2.5" or 2 trees at 4" |
EVERGREEN TREES | |
Height of Removed Trees | Number of Replacement Trees Required |
6' to 10' | 2 trees at 6' or 1 tree at 10' |
10' to 14' | 2 trees at 6' or 1 tree at 10' |
14' or taller | 3 trees at 6' or 2 trees at 10' |
(2)
Exempt Species. The species listed in Table 6-305.F.3.f.2 are exempt from tree mitigation requirements.
Table 6-305.F.3.f.2 - Species Exempt From Tree Mitigation Requirements |
|---|
Species Exempt From Tree Mitigation Requirements |
Acer ginnala - Amur Maple |
Acer negundo - Box Elder |
Acer platanoides - Norway Maple |
Acer pseudoplatanus - Sycamore Maple |
Acer saccharinum - Silver Maple |
Ailanthus altissima - Tree-of-Heaven |
Albizia julibrissin - Silktree |
Alnus glutinosa - European Alder |
Aralia elata - Japanese Angelica Tree |
Berberis thunbergii - Japanese Barberry |
Betula pendula - European White Birch |
Broussonetia papyrifera - Paper Mulberry |
Elaeagnus angustifolia - Russian Olive |
Elaeagnus umbellata - Autumn Olive |
Euonymus alatus - Winged Euonymus |
Frangula alnus - Glossy Buckthorn |
Fraxinus spp. - Ash |
Koelreuteria paniculata - Golden Rain Tree |
Ligustrum sinense - Chinese Privet |
Lonicera maackii - Amur Honeysuckle |
Maclura pomifera - Osage Orange |
Morus alba - Mulberry |
Paulownia tomentosa - Princesstree |
Phellodendron amurense - Amur Corktree |
Pinus nigra - Austrian Pine |
Pinus sylvestris - Scots Pine |
Pinus taeda - Loblolly Pine |
Populus alba - White Poplar |
Populus deltoides - Cottonwood |
Prunus avium - Sweet Cherry |
Pyrus calleryana - Callery Pear |
Rhamnus spp. - Buckthorn |
Robinia pseudoacacia - Black Locust |
Salix spp. - Willow |
Sorbus aucuparia - European Mountain Ash |
Ulmus pumila - Siberian Elm |
Viburnum lantana - Wayfaring Tree |
(3)
Trees with a condition rated as 'Poor' or 'Dead' on a tree survey completed by a certified arborist are also exempt from mitigation requirements.
(4)
The owner of a site with landscaping that is unhealthful (i.e. spaced too closely) may be permitted to plant replacement trees in the parkway or elsewhere in the Village, if approved by Development Services Department.
(5)
Cash in Lieu.
(A)
If required mitigation trees, or any other tree required by Code, cannot be provided on the site, the petitioner shall pay cash in lieu of tree replacement in the amount of $400 for each 2.5 inch caliper deciduous canopy tree or eight foot evergreen tree to the Village's Tree Preservation and Green Infrastructure Account. Such a fee in lieu of mitigation must be approved by the Development Services Department and can only be used when replacement on site is not possible. The quantity of trees requiring mitigation does not count towards a reduction in the quantity of trees or landscaping required by this section.
(B)
The maximum cash in lieu amount for projects less than 10 acres in area is $50,000. The maximum cash in lieu amount for projects greater than 10 acres in area is $100,000. Any cash in lieu amount above the set maximum amount will be waived by the Village. A 10% reduction of Tree Mitigation cash in lieu amount will awarded if said fee is paid in full before or at time of final landscape plan approval.
(6)
Tree Preservation and Green Infrastructure Account. The Tree Preservation and Green Infrastructure Account shall be used to support Village-initiated tree planting and green infrastructure projects located on public property within the Village of Orland Park and shall be administered by the Development Services Department. This account shall be used only for tree preservation and green infrastructure projects approved by the Village Board.
(7)
Tree Preservation Credit. A credit of $150 per caliper inch will be applied towards a project's tree mitigation fee for every healthy (fair to good) native tree preserved on site. Preservation credit shall be for the preservation of native Illinois trees only, or as determined by the Development Services Department. A Tree Preservation Credit shall never exceed the tree mitigation fee amount. Adherence to an Village approved Tree Preservation Plan shall be required for projects awarded tree preservation credit. A line item in the amount of the tree preservation credit will be applied to a project's letter of credit, which will be reduced to zero after written verification from a Certified Arborist that the preserved tree(s) are still in good to fair condition at least one year after issuance of a project's certificate of occupancy. Preservation credit shall not be applied towards any other fee other than tree mitigation fees. [Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
g.
Heritage Tree and Parkway Tree Removal.
(1)
All heritage trees and parkway trees shall be replaced per the replacement standards set forth in Section 6-305F3f Tree Preservation Standards. The number of replacement trees may be limited by what can be reasonably accommodated within the available lot area, but any reduction in mitigation requirements must be approved by the Development Services Department.
(2)
A heritage tree that is dead or diseased may be removed without replacement if the tree is certified as dead or diseased by a certified arborist, to be retained by the homeowner, and with issuance of a tree removal permit.
(3)
A parkway tree that is dead or dying may be removed without replacement if the tree is confirmed as dead or diseased by the Development Services Department or Public Works Department and with issuance of a tree removal permit.
h.
Procedures to Obtain a Tree Removal Permit For New Development.
(1)
Tree Mitigation Plan. Developers of any site for any use other than a single family home seeking a site plan or landscape plan approval shall submit a Tree Mitigation Plan with the petition for development. A tree mitigation plan shall include:
(A)
A tree survey showing the location, edge of dripline, species, diameter at breast height (DBH) and condition of every tree four inches or larger, measured from 4.5 feet from the ground, on the property. The survey shall distinguish existing trees which are proposed to be destroyed, relocated, replaced, preserved at their present location. The Development Services Department may require that the tree survey exclude those portions of the site which it determines will not be affected by the development activity.
(B)
A tree mitigation report that highlights the quantity, diameter at breast height (DBH) and condition of trees to be removed and the quantity and caliper size of the required replacement trees pursuant to the replacement standards set forth in Section 6-305F3f Tree Replacement Standards.
(2)
A tree survey and tree mitigation report, collectively known as a Tree Mitigation Plan, will be reviewed and approved by the Development Services Department through the landscape plan review process. Approval of a Tree Mitigation Plan shall be granted only if the Development Services Department finds that all reasonable efforts have been undertaken in the architectural layout and design of the proposed development to preserve existing trees and to otherwise enhance the aesthetic appearance of the development by the incorporation of trees in the design process. Relocation or replacement of trees may be required as a condition of approval in accordance with the criteria set forth in this section. No tree removal shall take place until a Tree Mitigation Plan has been approved by the Development Services Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
i.
Procedures to Obtain a Tree Removal Permit for Single Family Homes and Existing Development.
(1)
All others requesting a tree removal permit shall fill out a tree removal permit application prescribed by the Development Services Department prior to its removal or relocation. The applicant shall provide the following information:
(A)
Information on the type of tree and the size of the tree under consideration;
(B)
Reason(s) for the tree(s) removal/relocation;
(C)
Photograph(s) of the condition and location of the tree in question;
(D)
At least one full scale photo of the tree(s) showing its surrounding environment. Any photographs supporting the reason(s) for relocation/removal should be included;
(E)
A copy of the plat of survey for the property showing the location of the existing building(s) and outlining the location of the existing tree(s) in question. If the tree location/removal involves existing or proposed utilities, driveways, structures, easements or other pertinent site features, these should also be drawn in to scale. Plans may be drawn by property owners; and
(F)
A description of the tree(s) to be planted to replace any removed trees.
(2)
Approval of a tree removal permit shall be granted only if the Development Services Department finds that all reasonable efforts have been undertaken in the architectural layout and design of the proposed development to preserve existing trees and to otherwise enhance the aesthetic appearance of the development by the incorporation of trees in the design process. Relocation or replacement of trees may be required as a condition of approval in accordance with the criteria set forth in this section. No tree removal shall take place until the issuance of a tree removal permit.
(3)
If the Development Services Department determines that the scope of the tree removal exceeds the provisions of this section, the applicant must supply the information listed in Section 6-305F3h Procedures to Obtain a Tree Removal Permit for New Development.
j.
Final Inspection.
(1)
No final certificate of occupancy or letter of credit release shall be issued until the relocation or replacement of trees, or payment of any outstanding tree mitigation fees, as required by the approved mitigation plan or tree removal permit, has been completed and the final landscape inspection approval has been given by the Development Services Department. Trees relocated from one portion of the site to another which do not survive transplanting shall be replaced with a suitable replacement tree as specified by the Development Services Department. Should the Department determine that, due to the time of the year that the certificate of compliance and occupancy is requested, the relocation or replacement of trees should be deferred until a more suitable time, a certificate of compliance and occupancy may be issued provided that:
(A)
The letter of credit is renewed in an amount to cover the remaining landscaping to be installed.
(B)
If a project does not have a letter of credit with the Village, the applicant(s) provides the Development Services Department with a cash deposit or bond in the amount equal to the cost of the relocation or replacement of trees;
(C)
The applicant completes all required tree relocation or replacement within the time frame specified by the Development Services Department. The cash deposit or bond will be returned to the applicant provided that all work is completed within the established time frame.
[Amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
(2)
Should the applicant fail to comply with the above item, the Development Services Department may elect to use the cash bond or letter of credit to hire a landscaper to complete the required tree relocation or replacement. Excess cash deposit, letter of credit or bond funds, if any, will then be returned to the applicant.
k.
Exceptions.
(1)
In the event that any tree shall pose a threat to one's health, safety or property and require immediate removal without formal Village approval (e.g. a tree which has been blown over or struck by lightning), verbal authorization may be given by the Development Services Department and the tree removed without obtaining a written permit as herein required. Such verbal authorization shall later be confirmed in writing by the Department.
(2)
All state approved and governmental plant or tree nurseries and botanical gardens shall be exempt from the terms and provisions of this section, but only in relation to those trees which are planted and grown for the sale or intended sale to the general public in the ordinary course of business or for some public purpose.
(3)
A tree removal authorization may be issued when a tree, due to natural circumstances, is dead or irreversibly declining, is in danger of falling, is too close to existing structures so as to endanger such structures, interferes with utility services, creates unsafe vision clearance, or constitutes a health hazard. Such trees may be removed only after the Development Services Department or Public Works Department has verified that such a condition exists.
(4)
A tree removal authorization may be issued when a tree removal is necessary to observe good forestry practice such as the number of healthy trees a given parcel of land will support or when such removal is in accordance with a documented landscape management plan.
l.
Civil Remedies. In addition to any other remedies provided by this section the Village shall have the following judicial remedies available for violations of this section or any permit condition promulgated under this section.
(1)
The Village may institute a civil action in a court of competent jurisdiction to establish liability and to recover damages for any injury caused by the removal of trees in contravention of the terms of this section.
(2)
The Village may institute a civil action in a court of competent jurisdiction to seek injunctive relief to enforce compliance with this section to enjoin any violation hereof; and to seek injunctive relief to prevent irreparable injury to the trees and/or properties encompassed by the terms of this section.
G.
List of Recommended Plant Species.
LIST OF RECOMMENDED PLANT SPECIES | ||
|---|---|---|
Common Name | Botanical | Cultivar(s) |
CANOPY (SHADE) TREES | ||
Bald cypress | Taxodium distichum | |
Beech, American | Fagus grandifolia | |
Beech, European | Fagus sylvatica | |
Buckeye, Ohio | Aesculus glabra | |
Cherry, black | Prunus serotina | |
Coffeetree, Kentucky | Gymnocladus dioica | |
Elm | Ulmus spp. | |
Filbert, Turkish Corylus colurna | ||
Ginkgo (male only) | Ginkgo biloba | Autumn gold |
Fairmount | ||
Lakeview | ||
Princeton sentry | ||
Hackberry, common | Celtis occidentalis | |
Hickory, bitternut | Carya cordiformis | |
Hickory, shagbark | Carya ovata | |
Honey locust (thornless) | Gleditsia triacanthos var. inermis | Green glory |
Imperial | ||
Majestic | ||
Shademaster | ||
Skyline | ||
Hornbeam, European | Carpinus betulus | |
Horse chestnut, common | Aesculus hippocastanum | |
Larch, common | Larix decidua | |
Linden, littleleaf | Tilia cordata | Chancellor |
Glenleven | ||
Greenspire | ||
Olympic | ||
Linden, Redmond | Tilia euchlora | Redmond |
Linden, silver | Tilia tomentosa | |
London Plane Tree | Platanus x acerifolia | |
Maple, black | Acer nigrum | Greencolumn |
Maple, Freeman | Acer x freemanii | Autumn blaze |
Morgan | ||
Maple, red | Acer rubrum | Armstrong |
Autumn flame | ||
Columnare | ||
Red sunset | ||
October glory | ||
Maple, sugar | Acer saccharum | Green mountain |
Wright Brothers | ||
Oak, bur | Quercus macrocarpa | |
Oak, English | Quercus robur | |
Oak, pin | Quercus palustris | |
Oak, red | Quercus rubra | |
Oak, swamp white | Quercus bicolor | |
Oak, white | Quercus alba | |
Tulip tree | Liriodendron tulipifera | |
Zelkova, Japanese | Zelkova serrata | |
EVERGREEN TREES | ||
Douglas fir | Pseudotsuga menziensii | |
Pine, eastern white | Pinus strobes | |
Pine, Limber | Pinus flexilis | |
Pine, Japanese white | Pinus parviflora | |
Pine, Scotch | Pinus sylvestris | |
Spruce, Colorado | Picea pungens | |
Spruce, Norway | Picea abies | |
Spruce, Serbian | Picea omorika | |
Spruce, Black Hills | Picea glauca | |
ORNAMENTAL/SMALL TREES | ||
Birch, river | Betula nigra | |
Birch, white | Betula platyphylla | Whitespire |
Buckeye, red | Aesculus pavia | |
Chokecherry, common | Prunus virginiana | |
Crabapple, flowering | Malus spp. | |
Dogwood, Kousa | Cornus kousa | |
Fringetree, white | Chionanthus virginicus | |
Hawthorn, cockspur | Crataegus crusgalli var. inermis | |
Hawthorn, Washington | Crataegus phaenopyrum | |
Hophornbeam, American | Ostrya virginiana | |
Hornbeam, American | Carpinus caroliniana | |
Magnolia, saucer | Magnolia x soulangiana | |
Magnolia, star | Magnolia stellata | |
Maple, hedge | Acer campestre | Marmo |
Maple, miyabi | Acer miyabe | |
Maple, tartarian | Acer tataricum | |
Pagoda tree, Japanese | Sophora japonica | Regent |
Plum, wild | Prunus americana | |
Redbud, eastern | Cercis canadensis | |
Serviceberry, Allegheny | Amalanchier laevis | |
Serviceberry, apple | Amelanchier x grandiflora | |
Serviceberry, downy | Amelanchier arborea | |
Serviceberry, Saskatoon | Amelenchier alnifolia | |
Tree lilac, Japanese | Syringa reticulata | Morton |
Zhang Zhiming | ||
Ivory Silk | ||
LARGE DECIDUOUS SHRUBS | ||
Amorpha, indigobush | Amorpha fruticosa | |
Buttonbush, common | Cephalanthus occidentalis | |
Clethra, summersweet | Clethra alnifolia | |
Cotoneaster, hedge | Cotoneaster | |
Cotoneaster, Peking | Cotoneaster acutifolius | |
Cotoneaster, spreading | Cotoneaster divaricatus | |
Dogwood, cornelian cherry | Cornus mas | |
Dogwood, gray | Cornus racemosa | |
Dogwood, pagoda | Cornus alternifolia | |
Dogwood, Redosier | Cornus sericea | Baileyi |
Isanti | ||
Dogwood, tatarian | Cornus alba | |
Elderberry | Sambucus canadensis | |
Filbert, American | Corylus americana | |
Filbert, Turkish | Corylus colurna | |
Forsythia, border | Forsythia x intermedia | |
Forsythia, greenstem | Forsythia viridissima | Meadowlark |
Northern sun | ||
Sunrise | ||
Hydrangea | Hydrangea spp. | |
Lilac | Syringa spp. | |
Ninebark, common | Physocarpus opulifolius | |
Sumac, smooth | Rhus glabra | |
Sumac, staghorn | Rhus typhina | |
Viburnum, American cranberry | Viburnum trilobum | |
Viburnum, arrowwood | Viburnum dentatum | Autumn jazz |
Chicago lustre | ||
Viburnum, blackhaw | Viburnum prunifolium | |
Viburnum, burkwood | Viburnum x burkwoodii | |
Viburnum, European cranberry | Viburnum opulus | |
Viburnum, lantanaphyllum | Viburnum x rhytidophylloides | |
Viburnum, nannyberry | Viburnum lentago | |
Viburnum, wayfaringtree | Viburnum lantana | |
Weigela, old fashioned | Weigela florida | |
Winterberry, common | Ilex verticillata | |
Witchhazel, common | Hamamelis virginiana | |
Witchhazel, vernal | Hamamelis vernalis | |
SMALL EVERGREEN TREES | ||
Arborvitae | Thuja occidentalis | Techny |
Hemlock, Canadian | Tsuga canadensis | |
Juniper, upright | Juniperus spp. | |
SMALL DECIDUOUS SHRUBS | ||
Alpine currant | Ribes alpinum | Green mound |
False Indigo | Baptisia x bicolor | |
Bayberry | Myrica pennsylvanica | |
Chokeberry, black | Aronia melonocarpa | |
Chokeberry, red | Aronia arbutifolia | Brilliantissima |
Cotoneaster, cranberry | Cotoneaster apiculata | |
Cotoneaster, creeping | Cotoneaster adpressus | |
Cotoneaster, rockspray | Cotoneaster horizonalis | |
Forsythia, greenstem | Forsythia viridissima | Bronxensis |
Kerria, Japanese | Kerria japonica | |
New Jersey tea | Ceonothus americanus | |
Rose | Rosa spp. | |
Spiraea spp. | Spiraea spp. | |
St. Johnswort | Hypericum kalmianum | |
St. Johnswort, shrubby | Hypericum prolificum | |
Stephanandra, cutleaf | Stephanandra incisa | Crispa |
Sumac, gro low | Rhus aromatica | Gro low |
Viburnum, dwarf cranberry | Viburnum trilobum | Compactum |
Viburnum, dwarf Korean | Viburnum carlesii | Compactum |
Viburnum, judd | Viburnum x juddii | |
Viburnum, sargent | Viburnum sargentii | |
SMALL EVERGREEN SHRUBS | ||
Boxwood | Buxus koreana x sempervirens | Glencoe |
Green gem | ||
Green mountain | ||
Green mound | ||
Green velvet | ||
Winter gem | ||
Boxwood, common | Buxus sempervirens | |
Boxwood, littleleaf | Buxus microphylla | |
Juniper, Chinese | Juniperus chinensis | Kallays compacta |
var. sargentii Glauca | ||
var. sargentii Viridis | ||
Sea green | ||
Juniper, creeping | Juniperus horizontalis | Bar Harbor |
Blue chip | ||
Blue rug | ||
Hughes | ||
P.C. Youngstown | ||
Pine, mugo | Pinus mugo var. mugo | |
Rhododendron | Rhododendron spp. | Northern lights |
P.J.M. | ||
Yew, dense | Taxus x media | Densiformis |
Tauntonii | ||
Hicksii | ||
GROUNDCOVERS AND VINES | ||
Ajuga | Ajuga reptans | |
Barren strawberry | Waldsteinia ternata | |
Boston ivy | Parthenocissus tricuspidata | |
Clematis | Clematis spp. | |
Common periwinkle | Vinca minor | |
Fleeceflower | Polygonum reynoutria | |
Ginger, wild | Asarum canadense | |
Hydrangea, climbing | Hydrangea anomola ssp. petiolaris | |
Pachysandra, Japanese | Pachysandra terminalis | |
Purpleleaf wintercreeper | Euonymous fortunei | Coloratus |
Sedum | Sedum spp. | |
Virginia creeper | Parthenocissus quinquefolia | |
UNACCEPTABLE TREES | ||
All Ash (green, white, blue and all their varieties) | Fraxinus spp. | |
Austrian pine | Pinus nigra | |
Black locust | Robinia spp. | |
Boxelder | Acer negundo | |
Buckthorn | Rhamnus frangula | |
Cottonwood, Eastern | Populous deltoides | |
Mulberry | Morus spp. | |
Osage orange | Maclura pomifera | |
Russian olive | Elaeagnus angustifolia | |
Siberian Elm | Ulmis pumila | |
Silver maple | Acer saccharinum | |
Tree of Heaven | Ailanthus altissima | |
Willow | Salix spp. | |
[Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
§ 6-306 Off-Street Parking and Loading Requirements.
A.
Purpose.
1.
In order to reduce the visual impact of large residential and nonresidential parking areas, to minimize the adverse effects of off-street parking on adjacent properties, and to ensure the proper development of parking areas throughout the Village, off-street parking and loading spaces for every use shall be provided in accordance with the standards established in this section.
2.
For any off-street parking area required under this section, and for any public parking lot, garage, and storage area operated on a commercial basis, an off-street parking management plan shall be submitted as part of site plan review.
B.
Required Number of Off-Street Parking Spaces.
1.
Except as otherwise provided in Subsection B2 below, each principal use on a parcel shall be provided with the number of off-street parking spaces indicated for that use in Table 6-306(B).
2.
In the event that the number of parking spaces listed on Table 6-306(B) cannot be placed on the parcel in accordance with these regulations to accommodate a parking area, the Development Services Department may authorize up to a 20% reduction in the total number of parking spaces required on the lot. The Development Services Department may issue such an authorization only upon the request of the applicant and only upon determining that the reduction in the number of required parking spaces will not unreasonably increase parking congestion along public streets or in parking areas located on nearby lots.
[Ord. 4373, 6-2-2008; amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
3.
In the event that an applicant demonstrates that a new use, whether in an existing building or new construction, will require more parking spaces than the number allocated under Table 6-306(B), the Development Services Department may authorize up to a 20% increase in the total number of parking spaces permitted on the lot. Any request exceeding a 20% increase in the total number of parking spaces permitted on the lot shall be a variance or modification pursuant to a special use. The Development Services Department may issue such authorization only upon the request of the applicant and only upon determining that the new use will attract more vehicles than the parking lot could otherwise accommodate.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996; amended by Ord. 4373, 6-2-2008; Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
4.
In the event that an applicant demonstrates that fewer parking spaces are needed to serve the use at the time of permit application, the Development Services Department may authorize a reduction in the amount of parking spaces and reserve additional land for potential use as parking spaces at a future time.
[Ord. 4373, 6-2-2008]
5.
When the required number of off-street parking spaces computed according toTable 6-306(B) results in a fractional number, the number of required parking spaces shall be determined as follows: any fraction up to and including 1/2 shall be disregarded and fractions over 1/2 shall require one parking space.
6.
If a use is not listed in Table 6-306(B), The Development Services Department shall determine the number of off-street parking spaces that shall be required.
Table 6-306(B) | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Land Use | Required Number of Parking Spaces* | ||
RESIDENTIAL USES: | |||
Congregate Elderly Housing | 0.5 per resident + 1 per staff person | ||
Dwellings - detached, including Fee Simple Lot and Common Ownership | 2 per dwelling unit | ||
Dwellings - multifamily, including condominiums and apartments | 2 per dwelling unit | ||
Dwellings - townhouses and rowhouses | 2 per dwelling unit + 0.5 per bedroom over 2 bedrooms | ||
Residential units above retail or commercial establishments | 2 per dwelling unit + retail spaces as required by ordinance | ||
COMMERCIAL USES: | |||
Animal hospitals, pounds, and boarding | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Automobile/Car washes | 3 stacking spaces per stall + 1 per employee | ||
Automobile repair with outside storage (maximum of 10 vehicles) | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Automobile sales and rentals | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Automobile service stations | 1 per pump + 1 stacking space per pump + 1 per 500 square feet of commercial space | ||
Cemeteries | 1 per each full time employee + required spaces for offices | ||
Conference Centers | 1 per 4 seats | ||
Commercial retail building footprint up to 5,000 square feet in floor area | 1 per 250 square feet + 4 stacking spaces per drive through lane [Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012] | ||
Commercial retail building footprint 5,001 to 50,000 square feet in floor area | 1 per 250 square feet + 4 stacking spaces per drive through lane [Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012] | ||
Commercial retail building footprint exceeding 50,000 square feet in floor area | 1 per 250 square feet + 4 stacking spaces per drive through lane | ||
Composting facilities | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Day care centers and day care homes | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Dry-cleaning and laundry processing stations | 1 per 500 square feet | ||
Excavating and recycling services | 1 per employee | ||
Facilities handling hazardous materials | 1 per employee | ||
Financial Institutions | 1 per 300 square feet + 3 stacking spaces per drive through lane | ||
Food Processing Plant | 1 per employee | ||
Funeral parlors | 1 per 200 square feet | ||
Golf Courses | 6 per green + 1 per employee on the peak shift | ||
Health clubs and fitness centers | 1 per employee + 1 per 200 square feet | ||
Hotels, Motels and Extended Stay | 1 per sleeping room | ||
Indoor Recreational Facilities | 1 per 200 square feet | ||
Nurseries and greenhouses | 1 per 400 square feet | ||
Nursing homes | 0.25 per resident + 1 per staff person | ||
Offices (general) | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Offices (medical or dental clinics with no overnight stay) | 1 per 200 square feet [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822] | ||
Personal service establishment | 1 per 200 square feet | ||
Restaurants and banquet halls | 1 per 100 square feet | ||
1 per 200 square feet for carry-out [Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010] | |||
Restaurants, Fast Food | (Drive In) 1 per 100 square feet + 7 stacking spaces per drive through lane [Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010] | ||
Stadium or arena | Parking spaces equal in number to 33% of the capacity in persons | ||
Swimming Pools | 1 per 75 square feet of water area | ||
Tennis or Racquet Court | 3 per court | ||
Theatres | 1 per 3 seats | ||
Wholesale Establishments | 1 per 1,000 square feet | ||
CIVIC AND INSTITUTIONAL USES | |||
Boarding Schools, Seminaries and Convents | 1 per 1,000 square feet | ||
Community Centers, Clubs and Lodges | 1 per 300 square feet | ||
Colleges and Universities | 1 per classroom + 1 per 3 students | ||
Government Uses, including offices, and incubator and research facilities | Fire/Police: 1 per 500 square feet | ||
Libraries: 1 per 400 square feet | |||
Post Offices: 2 per station + 4 per service bay | |||
Offices: 1 per 300 square feet | |||
Hospitals | 1 per 2 hospital beds + 1 per each full-time employee | ||
Medical/Institutional uses including surgery centers, out patient centers, testing facilities and research laboratories | 1 per 200 square feet [Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822] | ||
Museums, Civic and Cultural Centers | 1 per 1,000 square feet | ||
Parks (public) | Ballfields/Picnic Areas: 10 per acre | ||
Swimming: 1 per 75 square feet of water area | |||
Tennis/Racquet Court: 3 per court | |||
Places of worship within 300 feet of a residential use | 1 per 4 sanctuary seats or 1 space per each 12 feet of bench length (if no seating, 1 space per 60 square feet of sanctuary space) + spaces required for other uses | ||
Private Schools and Instructional Facilities for arts, athletics and vocational training | 2 per classroom + 1 per 2 students | ||
Schools - Elementary, Middle, Junior High | 1.5 per classroom | ||
Schools - High | 1 per classroom + 1 per 5 students | ||
INDUSTRIAL, MANUFACTURING AND STORAGE | |||
Light Industry and Assembly | 2 per 1,000 square feet -OR-1 per each employee on the largest shift (whichever is greatest) | ||
Office Warehouse and Flex Space | 1 per 300 square feet office space + 1 per 1,000 square feet of warehouse space. | ||
Manufacturing | 1.25 per 1,000 square feet -OR-1 per each 0.75 employees on the largest shift (whichever is greatest) | ||
Petroleum Storage Facilities | 1 per employee | ||
Warehouses or Distribution Establishments | 1 per 1,000 square feet | ||
TRANSPORTATION AND UTILITIES | |||
Public Utility Structures | 1 per 2 employees | ||
Utility Substations | 1 per employee | ||
Wireless Communication Facilities | 1 service space | ||
[Ord. 3949, 11-1-2004; amended by Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006; amended by Ord. 4535, 1-18-2010; amended by Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010; amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
NOTES: | ||
*- | Requirements based on square feet mean square feet of gross building floor area, except as otherwise indicated. [Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] | |
- | Requirements based on the number of seats or students mean the number that is the design capacity of the building. | |
- | Requirements based on the number of staff or employees mean the maximum number of staff or employees on one shift, as certified by the applicant. | |
**- | If no on-street parking is allowed, every dwelling unit must provide 2.5 spaces, or a parking agreement must be provided with a parking lot within 500 feet of the dwelling units. [Ord. 2586, 6-6-1994] | |
*** | For any restaurants, banquet halls and fast food restaurants that have a special use as of the date of passage of Ordinance No. _____, the special use must meet either the required number of parking spaces set forth in the special use permit or the parking requirements passed in Ordinance No. _____, whichever is least restrictive. [Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010] | |
C.
Size of Required Parking Spaces and Aisles.
1.
Each required parking space shall cover a rectangle at least nine feet wide and 18 feet long as measured from the back of curb, as illustrated in Figure 6-306(C). The minimum required eighteen-foot length shall be greater where there is a wall or fence at the end of the parking space. The minimum required length may be up to two feet less if a strip of ground at least two feet wide exists of the space and a curb prevents a vehicle from driving onto the strip or hitting any fence or wall the edge of the parking area.
a.
Parking spaces for train stations shall cover a rectangle at least 8 1/2 feet wide and 18 feet long.
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011; amended by Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017] |
2.
Each required parking space shall have direct and unrestricted access to an aisle. The minimum width of said aisle is set out in Figure 6-306(C).
3.
The vertical clearance of each enclosed off-street parking space shall be a minimum of seven feet.
Figure 6-306.C(A) Required Parking Stall and Aisle Dimensions 1.tif.png "LD Figure 6-306C(A)1.tif") |
2.tif.png "LD Figure 6-306C(A)2.tif") |
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; 5-20-2024 by Ord. No. 5895]
D.
Spaces for the Handicapped.
1.
Except for single family dwellings, the number of spaces required under the provisions of Subsection B above shall include the following requirements for parking spaces for handicapped persons:
Figure 6-306.D(A) Required Parking Spaces
Total Number of Provided Off-Street Parking Spaces | Total Number of Accessible Spaces Required |
|---|---|
1-20 | 1 |
21-50 | 2 |
51-75 | 3 |
76-100 | 4 |
101-150 | 5 |
151-200 | 6 |
201-300 | 7 |
301-400 | 8 |
401-500 | 9 |
501-1,000 | 2% of total number |
1001+ | 20+ 1 for each 100 over 1,000 |
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
2.
Off-street parking spaces for the handicapped shall be designed as follows:
a.
All spaces for the handicapped shall have access to a curb-ramp or curb-cut when necessary to allow access to the building served, shall be located so that users will not be compelled to wheel behind parked vehicles, and shall be located the shortest possible distance between the parking area and the entrance to the principal building it serves.
b.
The total number of accessible parking spaces may be distributed among parking lots, if greater accessibility is achieved in consideration of such factors as anticipated usage, number and location of entrances and level of parking areas.
c.
Each parking space for the handicapped shall be at least 16 feet wide including an eight-foot wide access aisle. Adjacent accessible parking spaces shall be permitted to share an eight-foot wide common access aisle. However diagonal accessible parking spaces (e.g. 45°, 60°) shall not share an access aisle. Access aisles serving diagonal accessible parking spaces shall be located on the passenger side of each vehicle space. All access aisles shall blend to a common level with an accessible route and shall be diagonally striped. All parking shall comply with current Illinois ADA Accessibility regulations.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
Figure 6-306.D(B) Shared Access Aisle .tiff.png "LD Figure 6-306D(B).tiff") |
[Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
d.
Parallel parking spaces for the handicapped shall be located either at the beginning or end of a block, or adjacent to alley entrances. Curbs adjacent to such spaces shall be of a height which will not interfere with the opening and closing of motor vehicle doors.
e.
No accessible parking spaces shall be required if only attendant or valet parking is provided and is available at all times that the facility is open for public use. If accessible at-grade parking is available, at least one space for self parking of a vehicle with sensitive specialized control devices shall be provided.
f.
Each parking space for the handicapped shall be equipped with a sign which complies with 625 ILCS 5/11-301, as amended, and shall meet the requirements of Sign R7-8, U.S. Department of Transportation Standard and the Illinois Department of Transportation. Signs shall bear the internationally accepted wheelchair symbol and shall be vertically mounted on a post or a wall at the front center of the parking space, no more than five feet horizontally from the front of the parking space, and set a minimum of four feet from finished grade to the bottom of the sign.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996] |
E.
Location of Required Parking.
1.
Required off-street parking spaces accessory to residential dwellings shall be located on the same lot as the use served.
2.
Required off-street parking spaces accessory to nonresidential districts shall be located within 1,000 feet of the use served, except for spaces accessory to overnight accommodations, which shall be within 300 feet of the use served.
3.
No parking spaces accessory to a use in a nonresidential district may be located in a residential district, unless a special use permit is obtained in accordance with Section 5-105. Off-street private parking and municipal parking lots may be permitted with a special use permit provided they are completely within 500 feet of the boundary of a BIZ, OOH, MFG, COR, VCD or ORI district.
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011]
4.
Where these regulations allow shared parking between uses on different lots, all such off-street parking areas shall be located no more than 500 feet from the use they are intended to serve.
5.
One recreational vehicle or utility or haul trailer may be parked in a driveway, provided it is located at least five feet from a side, rear, or front lot line, and not less than 10 feet from an adjoining residential building.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; amended by Ord. 4373, 6-2-2008; Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
6.
Except as otherwise provided herein, no commercial vehicle (e.g. truck) which either has a weight in excess of 8,000 pounds, including vehicle or maximum load, or which exceeds 21 feet in length, eight feet in width or nine feet in height may be parked on either streets or alleys. However, commercial vehicles may be parked for a reasonable period of time necessary to pick up or deliver property, or necessary to install or assemble such delivered property or to prepare such property for loading and removal. The overnight parking of such vehicles shall not be permitted in any setback.
7.
Front Setbacks:
a.
Passenger automobile parking is permitted in a front setback on a private driveway serving detached and attached dwellings, but shall not be considered as satisfying the off-street parking requirements for such uses as required by these regulations, unless there are a minimum of two off-street parking spaces located elsewhere on the lot.
b.
Off-street parking spaces for nonresidential uses may not be located in the front and corner-side building setbacks between the building and the right-of-way. However, parking spaces may locate no closer than 10 feet from the right-of-way provided that they are to the side of the building.
[Ord. 4273, 6-2-2008]
c.
No parking shall be permitted in the front setback for any use located in the Old Orland Historic (OOH) District.
8.
Side Setbacks:
a.
Passenger Automobile parking is not permitted in any required side setback in a residential district. Passenger automobile parking is permitted in the driveway of the required corner side yard setback with a twenty-foot minimum driveway length, excluding right-of-way and sidewalks. No open off-street parking serving a residential use in a non-required side setback shall be located nearer than five feet to a principal residential building.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5856]
b.
Parking may be permitted in the side setback of a nonresidential district. However, where the nonresidential district abuts a residential district, parking shall not be permitted in the side setback.
c.
Parking may be permitted in the side setback of a lot that abuts a railroad right-of-way.
9.
Rear Setbacks:
a.
Passenger Automobile parking is permitted in any rear setback of a lot with a detached garage on the driveway, but not in the rear if the house has an attached garage, subject to the exceptions and requirements of Subsection E9b.
b.
In a nonresidential district, when a rear setback is adjacent to a residential district, no parking shall be permitted within 20 feet of a residential district.
F.
Shared Parking.
1.
In order to reduce the total number of parking spaces which would otherwise be required according to Subsection B above, joint use of up to 50% of required parking spaces may be permitted for two or more uses located on the same or adjacent parcels. In order to qualify for a joint use reduction, the owner of the parking lot and the owner(s) of adjacent uses must demonstrate that the shared parking will not create a parking shortage during peak hours.
2.
Any sharing of required parking spaces by uses located on different parcels shall be guaranteed by a legally binding written agreement between the owner of the parking area and the owner of any use located on a different parcel and served by the parking area that is approved by the Village Attorney.
3.
In the event that joint use of parking spaces becomes inappropriate, in the opinion of the Development Services Department, after a shared parking program has been implemented, the agreement in Subsection F2 above shall be set aside. The required number of off-street parking spaces shall be computed and provided according to the provisions of Subsection B, above.
G.
Parking Lot Barriers. Peripheral barriers, such as curbs, walls, or fences, shall be located along the perimeter of parking lots, garages and vehicle storage areas, except at entrances and exits. These parking barriers shall be designed and located to prevent parked vehicles from extending beyond property lines and from hanging over any sidewalk or other pedestrian path. All barriers shall be designed and located in accordance with the standards set out in Section 6-305.
[Ord. 4373, 6-2-2008]
H.
Bicycle parking.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
1.
Bicycle parking shall be required at the following rates:
a.
The following uses shall provide bicycle parking at the rate of 10% of the motor vehicle parking spaces provided or as approved by Development Services: mixed-use developments, multifamily dwellings, civic and cultural centers, community centers, clubs and lodges, government uses, including government offices, business incubator facilities, instructional facilities for arts, athletics and vocational training, indoor and outdoor recreational facilities, libraries, museums, parks and recreation, public and private schools.
b.
No more than 30 bicycle parking spaces shall be required for any use.
2.
Motor vehicle storage spaces shall not be counted as parking spaces in this section.
3.
Bicycle racks shall be securely anchored to the ground and allow the bicycle to be secured in at least two places, preventing it from tipping over, and shall provide multiple points of locking to secure both the frame and one or both wheels. Spaces will not be counted toward the requirement if a bicycle cannot be secured in two places. Bicycle racks shall accommodate a variety of bicycle types and sizes. The inverted-U or similar style is required.
4.
A minimum of 25% of required bicycle parking spaces shall be provided no more than 50 feet from the entrance to the user it is serving, and clearly visible.
5.
Bicycle racks shall be installed in conformance with the minimum spacing requirements shown in Figure 6-306.H.1.
Figure 6-306.H.1  |
I.
Maintenance. All parking areas shall be kept in a dust-free condition at all times.
J.
Number, Size and Location of Loading Spaces.
1.
Any loading space and any area required for maneuvering a vehicle into and out of the loading space shall be located entirely on the same lot as the use it serves. The unenclosed loading space shall not be located on any public right-of-way or other lot, and shall be oriented away from the street fronting the lot.
2.
No loading space for vehicles over two tons capacity shall be closer than 50 feet to any residential district, unless it is completely enclosed by either building walls or a uniformly painted solid fence or wall which is not less than six feet in height.
3.
No loading space or dock may be located within the required front setback. Completely enclosed loading spaces may face a public street, provided the garage door is kept closed at all times and during loading and unloading operations. Vehicles waiting for loading or unloading shall not park or be stored within the required front setback.
4.
Off-street loading spaces may be permitted obstructions in rear setbacks, so long as they are not closer than 50 feet from the nearest building or structure.
5.
Unless otherwise provided by these regulations, a required loading space shall be at least 12 feet in width by at least 25 feet in length, exclusive of aisles and maneuvering space, and shall have a vertical clearance dependent on the floor area of the establishment, as displayed in Table 6-306(J)a.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5858]
6.
Loading spaces shall be provided on the basis of the floor area of the establishments they serve, as indicated in Table 6-306(J)a.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5858]
Table 6-306(J)a | |||
|---|---|---|---|
SCHEDULE OF LOADING REQUIREMENTS | |||
Floor Area of Establishment (square feet) | Required Number | Minimum Size (feet) | Minimum Vertical Clearance (feet) |
0-10,000 | 1 | 12 x 25 | 12 |
10,001-25,000 | 2 | 12 x 25 | 12 |
25,001-40,000 | 3 | 12 x 25 | 15 |
40,001-100,000 | 4 | 12 x 25 | 15 |
Over 100,000 | 5* | 12 x 25 | 15 |
NOTES: | |
* | Plus one additional space for every 50,000 square feet of floor area over 150,000. |
K.
Restriction on Use of Off-Street Parking and Loading Spaces. The storage of merchandise, materials, or motor vehicles, and/or the repair of motor vehicles or any other kind of equipment, is prohibited in all off-street parking and loading areas, including required and not required spaces. Temporary storage units as regulated by Section 6-304C12 shall be permitted.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
L.
Configuration of Off-Street Parking and Loading Ingress and Egress.
1.
Ingress and egress to and from off-street parking and loading spaces shall be provided by means of clearly limited and defined entrance and exit drives which lead from public rights-of-way to clearly limited and defined maneuvering lanes which in turn provide access to individual off-street parking or loading spaces.
2.
Layout configurations which require backing directly onto an arterial street are prohibited.
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011] |
3.
On arterial roadways, the number of access points shall be limited to one, unless a competent traffic engineering study determines that site access would be improved by additional access points. The minimum space between access drives shall be based on roadway speed and not on speed type and shall be determined by the Department of Development Services.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
4.
Wherever practicable, access drives shall be shared by several uses. Such uses shall be jointly responsible for the maintenance and landscaping of the drive.
M.
Truck Trailer Parking. One truck trailer shall be allowed for every 20,000 square feet of building, excluding those parked in a loading dock, limited to side and rear setbacks and no closer than 30 feet to the property line. These trailers shall be screened year-round from adjacent public right-of-way and residences with adequate landscaping/berming.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000] |
N.
Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Parking Standards.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
1.
Vehicle to Grid (V2G) Parking Standards. V2G refers to the system of communication between electric or plug-in hybrid vehicles and the power grid to sell demand response services by either delivering electricity into the grid or by throttling their charging rate. Such vehicles are often either battery electric vehicles (BEV) or plug-in hybrid electric vehicles (PHEVs). BEVs and PHEVs displace the use of petroleum fossil fuels, improve transportation fuel efficiency and reduce greenhouse gas emissions. Since most vehicles are parked the majority of the time, BEV or PHEV batteries could be used to let electricity flow from the vehicle to the power lines and back, registering potential energy savings to utilities per vehicle. As BEVs and PHEVs become more main-stream, the purpose of this subsection is to regulate vehicle to grid (V2G) land uses and associated technologies.
a.
Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSE). EVSE are the plug-in or power control stations (e.g. electric vehicle battery chargers) that allow BEVs and PHEVs to re-charge batteries. EVSE technologies must meet and comply with the most up to date provisions of the National Electrical Code for Level 2 conductive power stations and be approved by Underwriters Laboratories. One EVSE power station will be permitted per parking space.
b.
Electric Utility Interface and Screening. ComEd shall be contacted to determine appropriate grid interconnection and interfacing, including metering policies. All associated and ancillary equipment, batteries, devices, structures or support(s) for EVSE shall be screened from the public right-of-way with low native landscaping. Cables, wires and other transmission conduits or lines, with the exception of the actual EVSE to vehicle plug/adapter cable, providing connections from the EVSE to the electrical distribution point or to buildings or non-vehicle batteries must be installed underground.
c.
EVSE Ports. EVSE ports are two or more EVSE power control stations/parking spaces aligned adjacent to each other. These typically are associated with specific parking spaces in a parking lot or structure. In parking lots EVSE ports can have canopies to protect the EVSE power stations from weather, provide adequate lighting for safety and convenience, and provide a platform for collocated renewable energy conversion systems to produce on-site energy. Two types of EVSE ports are permitted through an administrative review. EVSE ports may not locate between the building and street.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012]
(1)
Utility Public Charging Port (UPCP). A UPCP is an EVSE port established in a publicly owned and maintained parking lot by either the electrical utility that services the area (ComEd) or the local government. UPCPs shall be permitted in all zoning districts.
(2)
Private Charging Port (PCP). A PCP is an EVSE port established in a privately owned and maintained parking lot by the private property owner or property management company. A PCP is permitted in R-4, VC, BIZ, COR, MFG, ORI and OS District parking lots. Commercial and multi-family PCPs do not typically require canopies for Underwriters Laboratories approved charging equipment. However, providing shelter over charging equipment to protect from rain or snow fall is permitted.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
d.
Location of EVSE and EVSE Ports. EVSEs must be located in accessible locations in parking lots near electrical distribution points/transformer boxes (typically within 40 feet) and/or on light poles in parking lots for commercial properties or, for multi-residential properties, near a PHEV/BEV tenant's electrical meter for appropriate grid connectivity and metering.
e.
V2G Parking Only Spaces. V2G parking spaces shall meet the requirements for standard parking spaces as outlined in this section. In addition to these requirements, the EVSE shall be centered at the top of the parking space and protected by either stopping blocks, in the absence of curbs, or curbs. V2G parking only spaces may be used by regular automobiles if no other parking spaces are available.
f.
V2G Parking Requirements. V2G parking requirements are voluntary. If V2G parking is proposed, there shall be one V2G parking space per the first 30 required parking spaces and one V2G space for every 10 required parking spaces thereafter.
g.
Overnight V2G Parking in Parking Lots. Overnight parking in V2G parking spaces and lots is not permitted for recreation vehicles (10:00 p.m. to 10:00 a.m.). Overnight V2G parking is permitted for non-recreation PHEVs/BEVs in publicly accessible parking lots via permit parking.
§ 6-307 Signs.
[Amended by Ord. 5316, 8-6-2018; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019; Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020; by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 1-20-2025 by Ord. No. 5977]
A.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to establish equitable regulations and promote excellence in design for communication through signage within the Village of Orland Park. These regulations were developed with the following intentions:
1.
To preserve and promote the public health, safety, and welfare through the reasonable, orderly, and effective display of all signs.
2.
To confirm that signs may cause harm to the public by creating obstructions, providing distractions to motorists, displacing alternative land uses, decreasing property values and aesthetics, and endangering the safety of person and property.
3.
To establish the Village's substantial and compelling interest in regulating signs in a manner as to reduce the effects and impacts signs have on the public health, safety, and welfare.
4.
To preserve property values within the Village by regulating and directing the design, location, construction, and maintenance of signs.
5.
To protect the Village's physical appearance by encouraging a sense of aesthetic appreciation for the visual environment and compatibility with the surroundings.
6.
To support the Village's economy by recognizing the need for adequate site identification and maintaining effective communication between signs and the public.
7.
To protect the general public, pedestrians, and motorists within the Village by assuring the design, location, construction, and maintenance of signs allow safe navigation and travel throughout the Village and ensure signs do not create distractions, obstructions, and hazards.
8.
To enhance the physical appearance of site identification to be in harmony with the visual character of the Village and for the signage to be an integral part of the aesthetic of the site and be cohesive with the architectural style of associated buildings.
9.
To encourage signs that support adopted Village guidelines, standards, and plans or the principles within said documents.
B.
Applicability. The regulations within this section apply to all properties within the Village's municipal boundaries except for those properties owned, used, leased, or controlled by the Village. Village signage on Village property is exempt due to the inherent public purpose of such messaging and sign copy. All signs on the exterior of a property, building, or structure, and interior signs visible from exterior windows are subject to the regulations within this section.
C.
General Standards.
1.
Village Codes. Signs shall meet all applicable Village codes, including the Building Code, as amended from time to time.
2.
Interpretation. All regulations within this section shall be interpreted by the Development Services Department. An interpretation may be appealed to the Plan Commission for a final decision.
a.
Conflict. In the event of a conflict within this section and/or between this section and any provision within another Village Code, the most restrictive regulation shall apply.
b.
Substitution Clause. To the extent the regulations of this section 6-307 permit commercial signs, such regulations are also to permit non-commercial signs.
c.
Minimum and Maximum. All provisions herein shall be interpreted as maximum allowable regulations unless otherwise noted.
d.
Measurement and Calculation.
(1)
Sign Face Area. The sign face area (SFA) shall be the entire area of the sign face(s) on an individual wall, ground, or other type of sign. The area of a sign face shall be determined by calculating the area within a single continuous perimeter encompassing the entire advertising copy or art designed to attract attention. The area within the single continuous perimeter shall be calculated by determining the area of the smallest measurable square, circle, rectangle, or triangle within the single continuous perimeter, including the background. For ground signs with multiple faces: when two identical ground sign faces are placed back to back so that both faces cannot be viewed from any point at the same time, and when such sign faces are part of the same sign structure, the sign face area shall be the area of one side of the sign. In all other circumstances, the sign face area of a ground sign shall be the total sign face area of all sign faces on the ground sign. The background color of a wall sign is included within the measurement of sign face area for wall signs unless otherwise considered an architectural feature by the Development Services Department.
 Wall Signs |
 Ground Signs |
(2)
Sign Height (Ground Sign). A ground sign shall be measured vertically from the adjacent average natural grade to the top of the sign. The measurement includes the full height of the sign, including the base or support structure and any design element surrounding or enclosing the sign face.
.tiff.png "LD Sign Height (Ground Sign).tiff") |
(3)
Roof Signs. The roof is measured from grade to the highest point of the roof line, parapet, or fascia of the building. Signs shall be located below this point.
(4)
Tenant Frontage. The tenant frontage is measured horizontally between the limits of the tenant's leasable space.
 |
(5)
Clearance. Sign clearance is measured vertically from grade to the bottom of the sign.
 |
(6)
Window Signs. The sign face area of window signs shall be measured by individual windows.
 |
3.
Accessory Structure/Use. Signs shall be accessory structures/uses and shall not be principal structures/uses. As such, all signs must be accessory to an occupant of the land (or development) on which the sign is located.
4.
Distractions, Obstructions, and Hazards. Signs shall not cause distractions, obstructions, or hazards and shall abide by the following requirements:
a.
Legibility. All letters and characters on each sign shall be legible from the public right-of-way and/or the parking spaces closest to the sign. The edges of the letters and characters shall be cleanly defined, unfaded, and maintain a clear contrast with the background.
b.
Conflict with Traffic and Pedestrian Signs. Signs shall not conflict with traffic or pedestrian signs. Signs and/or illumination shall not resemble emergency lighting or signals.
c.
Ingress/Egress. No sign shall be erected so as to prevent free ingress to or egress from any door or window, or any other point of access into a building required by the Village Building Code or Fire Protection District regulations, or any amendments thereto, nor shall any sign be erected so as to impair access to the roof of a building.
d.
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA). No sign shall be erected so as to obstruct accessibility requirements per the Illinois Accessibility Code, Village Building Code, and any amendments thereto.
e.
Construction and Attachment. All signs shall be designed and constructed as required in the Village Building Code and other applicable Village ordinances, as amended from time to time. Signs shall be securely attached to a wall, structure, or the ground at all times.
f.
Line-of-Sight. Signs shall not cause visibility obstructions.
5.
Location.
a.
Public Property. Signs shall not be erected on public property, including the public right-of-way, except for Governmental Signs per Section 6-307D1a(1).
b.
Private Property. Signs may be located within private property lines on the premises identified by the signs. For multi-tenant and/or multi-story buildings, wall signs shall be located within the tenant's lease lines.
c.
Parkways. Signs shall not be erected within parkways, except for Governmental Signs per Section 6-307D1a(1).
d.
Drainage. Signs shall not be constructed in a manner that negatively impacts drainage.
e.
Utility Poles. Signs shall not be located on public or private utility poles.
f.
Sidewalks and Paths. Signs shall not be erected so as to obstruct sidewalks or paths.
g.
Parking Spaces. Signs shall not be erected so as to obstruct parking spaces.
h.
Loading Areas. Signs shall not be erected so as to obstruct loading areas.
i.
Trees and Landscaping. Signs shall not be attached to trees or other landscaping.
j.
Required Setback. All ground signs shall be set back a minimum of five feet from property lines, drive aisles, parking spaces, loading areas, sidewalks, and paths.
6.
Materials.
a.
Permanent Signs. Permanent signs shall be constructed of materials that can withstand the elements in an outdoor environment. Acceptable materials for permanent signs include, but are not limited to: acrylic, polycarbonate, marine grade plywood (MDO), aluminum, or aluminum composite materials (ACM). The base of a sign shall be constructed of brick, stone, concrete, or a similar masonry material. Similar permanent sign materials may be approved by the Development Services Department.
b.
Temporary Signs. Temporary signs may be constructed of materials including, but not limited to: paper (interior window signs only), cloth, canvas, vinyl, wallboard, wood, or metal. Similar temporary sign materials may be approved by the Development Services Department.
7.
Illumination. Internally or externally illuminated signs shall be permitted unless otherwise noted, provided that the sign meets the following requirements:
a.
Signs shall be illuminated only by steady, stationary, shielded, or shaded light sources directed solely at, or directly behind, the sign or the sign may be internally lit.
b.
Signs may be illuminated on their front-face or halo-lit but cannot be both.
c.
The glowing effect of halo-lit signs shall only be white in color. Logos are not exempt from this requirement.
d.
Changes in illumination shall only occur a maximum of one time within a twenty-four-hour period.
e.
Exposed reflective-type bulbs, strobe lights, or incandescent lamps shall not be used on the exterior surface facing public right-of-way of any sign.
f.
Illuminated signs shall produce no more than thirty foot candles of illumination when measured four feet from the sign.
g.
Whenever external illumination is used for a sign, the source of light shall be located, shielded, and directed in such a manner that the light source is not visible from a public right-of-way or private residence.
h.
Illumination shall comply with the exterior lighting standards within Section 6-315 of the Land Development Code.
i.
All electrical fixtures, devices, circuits, conduits, raceways, or similar features must be installed and maintained in compliance with the current electrical code adopted by the Village. Conduits and other components of a sign illumination system must be designed as an integral part of the overall sign structure and shall be obscured from public view.
8.
Maintenance. The owner of a sign shall be required to maintain the sign, the sign structure, and its surrounding landscaping, if applicable, in a neat and attractive condition and in compliance with the following standards:
a.
General. The sign and sign supports must be kept painted to prevent rust, rot, or deterioration. If a sign becomes rusted, rotted, or deteriorated the sign must be immediately repaired or replaced. Painting, repainting, cleaning, or other normal maintenance and repair of a sign (not exceeding 50% of the value of the sign) for which a permit has been previously issued is allowed without a permit, provided that the sign is not otherwise modified in any way.
b.
Damage. If a sign is damaged it shall be repaired within two weeks of the reported date of the damage.
c.
Landscaping. Landscaping at the base of ground signs shall be regularly maintained.
d.
Animals. Signs shall be free of nesting animals.
e.
Restoration After Wall Sign Removal. When a wall sign is removed from the facade of a building and replaced with a new sign, the facade shall be restored to like new condition. Previous sign mounting holes and the like shall be filled and painted to match the facade and ghosting images shall be removed. The facade shall be cleaned and/or repainted if necessary in order to match the existing condition of the building.
9.
No Discrimination Against Non-Commercial Signs or Speech. The owner of any legal sign may substitute non-commercial copy within the allowable sign face area of the sign in lieu of any other commercial or non-commercial copy in accordance with the following:
a.
The substitution of copy must adhere to all applicable Village codes and may be executed without any additional approval or permitting from the Village.
b.
The purpose of this provision is to prevent any inadvertent favoring of commercial speech over non-commercial speech, or favoring of any particular non-commercial message over any other non-commercial message.
c.
This provision does not create a right to increase the total amount of signage on a parcel or allow the substitution of an off-site commercial message in place of an on-site commercial message.
D.
Procedures.
1.
Permit Requirement. A permit shall be obtained through the Development Services Department prior to the installation or display of any sign.
a.
Exemptions. The following signs meeting the criteria within Section 6-307D1a. are exempt from the requirement to obtain a sign permit. Such signs shall meet the Appearance Standards within Section 6-307F1b unless determined inapplicable by the Development Services Department.
(1)
Governmental Signs. Governmental signs incidental thereto for identification, information, directional, or public safety purposes erected or required by governmental bodies, or authorized for a public purpose by any law, statute or ordinance, such as traffic control signs and legal notices, including those located in the public right-of-way.
(2)
Address Sign. An address sign is required for each property/tenant space and shall be installed in compliance with the Building Code and Fire Code and any amendments thereto.
(3)
Sign on Residential Property. One non-illuminated sign is allowed per residential property, provided that:
(A)
The sign meets all General Standards within Section 6-307C of the Land Development Code;
(B)
The sign is no larger than four square feet in area (total of all sign faces visible from the public right-of-way);
(C)
The sign(s) shall be set back a minimum of five feet from all property lines, walks/paths, and access drives;
(D)
The sign(s) shall not exceed three feet in overall height when measured from grade; and
(E)
The sign is not above the roof line when located on a building.
(4)
Political Campaign Signs. In accordance with 65 ILCS 5/11-13-1-12, as amended from time to time, political signs meeting the following requirements are allowed:
(A)
The sign(s) shall meet all General Standards within Section 6-307C of the Land Development Code;
(B)
The sign(s) shall be located on private properties with permission from the property owner;
(C)
The sign(s) may be Yard (Pin) Signs or a type of allowable sign,
(D)
The sign(s) shall be set back a minimum of five feet from all property lines, walks/paths, and access drives;
(E)
The sign(s) shall not exceed five feet in overall height when measured from grade;
(F)
The sign shall not be installed above the roof line when located on a building; and
(G)
The total sign face area (for all signs combined) allowed per property shall be in accordance with the following table:
Land Area/Location | Maximum Allowable Total Sign Face Area (all signs combined) |
|---|---|
Less than 1 acre and not located on a major/minor arterial road or major collector road | 6 square feet |
Less than 1 acre and located on a major/minor arterial road or major collector road | 40 square feet |
1 to 10 acres | 40 square feet |
Greater than 10 acres | 64 square feet |
(5)
Real Estate Signs. Sign(s) meeting the following requirements shall be permitted on real property which is actively being offered for sale or lease:
(A)
The sign shall meet all General Standards within Section 6-307C of the Land Development Code;
(B)
The sign shall be set back a minimum of five feet from all property lines, walks/paths, and access drives;
(C)
One sign is allowed per frontage along a public right-of-way;
(D)
Sign(s) shall be removed no later than seven days after the close of the transaction of the sale or rental;
(E)
The sign shall not be installed above the roof line when located on a building;
(F)
The maximum sign height shall not exceed six feet when located on the ground in a residential zoning district or 10 feet in a non-residential or mixed-use zoning district; and
(G)
The maximum sign face area (for each sign) shall be in accordance with the following table:
Land Area/Location | Maximum Allowable Sign Face Area (per sign) |
|---|---|
Less than 1 acre and not located on a major/minor arterial road or major collector road | 6 square feet |
Less than 1 acre and located on a major/minor arterial road or major collector road | 40 square feet |
Greater than 1 acre | 40 square feet |
(6)
Replaceable Copy. Changing of the sign copy or message on a manual changeable sign.
(7)
Window Signage. Changes in the copy of window signage, provided that it does not cover more than 50% of any single window. Window signs shall be located on the interior side of the window and shall not be located on spandrel glass.
 |
(8)
Historical Marker/Integral Signs. Such signs shall have a maximum sign face area of six square feet and meet all General Standards within this section.
(9)
Flags. Flags on flagpoles are allowed, provided that the flag and flagpole are in compliance with Section 6-302C12 of the Land Development Code.
(11)
Business Status Sign. One sign may be displayed near the entrance to the business on the inside of a window or door, provided that the sign is no greater than four square feet in area. Such sign may be internally-illuminated with a steady, motionless light source.
(12)
Outdoor Bulletin Boards. One bulletin board shall be allowed per tenant, provided that the sign is no greater than four square feet in area and is attached to the exterior wall within six feet of the entrance to the building.
(13)
Sandwich Boards/A-Frames. Sandwich boards/A-frames are allowed in accordance with the following provisions:
(A)
The sign meets all General Standards within Section 6-307C. of the Land Development Code, except sandwich boards may be located on private sidewalks provided that a minimum of 36 inches is clear for pedestrians;
(B)
One sandwich board/A-frame is allowed per tenant;
(C)
The sign shall be constructed of wood or aluminum and not plastic;
(D)
The sign face area shall not exceed a maximum of seven square feet per side;
(E)
The height shall not exceed a maximum of 54 inches tall;
(F)
The sign shall be located within 15 feet of the tenant's entrance to the building;
(G)
The sign shall be securely anchored to withstand weather conditions; and
(H)
The sign shall not be displayed outdoors while the business is closed.
(14)
Branding Without Copy. Brand elements without sign copy do not require a sign permit but instead shall be reviewed administratively by the Development Services Department through an Appearance Review and/or approval of Elevations. Murals and public art shall be considered branding without copy, provided such signs do not contain any commercial messaging, advertising, logos, or business identification messages.
(15)
Window Displays. Shall be allowed provided that prohibited signage is not within the window display. Window displays shall not cover more than 50% of any single window.
(16)
Incidental Signs and Miscellaneous Information Signs. Small signs, not exceeding four square feet in area, displayed on private property for the purposes of providing general site-specific information, instructions, directives, safety information, or restriction to the public. Incidental signs shall not include commercial advertising intended to be viewed off the premises on which the sign is located.
2.
Permit Application. An application for a sign permit must be submitted to the Development Services Department on forms furnished by the Department. The Applicant must provide information to determine if the proposed sign is allowed under this Code and other applicable laws, regulations, and ordinances. Village Staff will review the application to determine if the proposed sign is permissible. The Applicant shall pay a sign permit fee in accordance with Title 5, Chapter 2 of the Village Code, as amended from time to time, when the permit is issued to the Applicant.
3.
Installation. Signs shall not be installed unless a valid sign permit has been issued for a sign or a sign meets the criteria for exemption from the permit requirement. A sign with a valid sign permit must be installed within six months of permit issuance or else the permit becomes invalid. Signs shall be installed per the approved drawings and any supplementary information provided in the sign permit application.
4.
Removal. The Village reserves the right to require removal of signs, at the owner's expense, in the following circumstances:
a.
When a sign is erected without a valid permit;
b.
When a permit is invalidated or revoked;
c.
When a permit for a temporary sign has expired;
d.
When a sign becomes obsolete and no longer identifies a bona fide business conducted or a product sold on the premises where said sign is located. Such sign shall be removed immediately by the owner, agent, or person having the beneficial use of the building, structure, or property upon which said sign may be found.
(1)
If the sign to be removed is located on a multi-panel ground sign, the obsolete panel must be completely replaced with a blank panel consistent in color with other existing panels.
(2)
If the sign to be removed is within a fixed cabinet on a facade, the obsolete panel must be completely replaced with a blank panel consistent in color with other existing panels or the entire cabinet must be removed and the facade must be restored.
e.
When any sign is deemed unsafe, insecure, or a danger to the public, or has been constructed, erected, or maintained in violation of the provisions of this section, the Development Services Department shall give written notice to the permittee thereof requesting removal of the sign. If the permittee fails to remove or alter the structure so as to comply with the standards herein set forth within five days after such notice, the Development Services Department may declare such sign to be a public nuisance and remove such sign at the owner's expense. The Village may immediately remove illegal signs located within the public right-of-way.
5.
Noncompliance. When a sign is not in compliance with an approved permit or the provisions of this section the Village shall issue citation(s) to the owner of such sign and/or the owner of the premises on which the sign is located.
E.
Sign Types. The following sign types are expressly allowed or prohibited within the Village. Sign types are defined within Section 6-307K of the Land Development Code. In the event that a proposed sign is not classified as allowable or prohibited the Development Services Department shall determine if the sign will be allowed.
1.
Allowable Signs.
 |
a.
Types of Wall Signs.
(1)
Wall Sign (Permanent).
(2)
Channel Letters (Permanent).
(3)
Cloud Sign (Permanent).
(4)
Push-Thru Letters (Permanent).
(5)
Halo-lit Sign (Permanent).
(6)
Awning Sign (Permanent).
(7)
Canopy Sign (Permanent).
(8)
Projecting Sign (Permanent).
(9)
Window Sign (Permanent or Temporary).
(10)
Banner Sign (Temporary).
2.
Prohibited Signs. Except as specifically provided otherwise within Section 6-307 of the Land Development Code, the following signs and displays shall be strictly prohibited throughout the Village:
 |
a.
Any sign which constitutes a hazard to public health or safety, including dangerous construction or sight obstructions, as determined by the Development Services Department.
b.
Signs which by color, location, or design resemble or conflict with traffic control signs or signals.
c.
Signs which contain advertising matter which is untruthful, objectionable, or obscene, as determined by the Development Services Department.
d.
Signs which emit an audible sound, odor, or visible matter such as smoke.
e.
Signs which contain radio/microwave transmitters.
f.
Abandoned or obsolete signs, including the posts or other supports therefor, that are no longer being properly maintained by the owner of the sign.
g.
Commercial signs on a vehicle for the purposes of advertising a product or service, or for identifying or calling attention to a business or activity located on or off the premises, where said vehicle is parked on the public right-of-way, adjacent to or near the right-of-way, is not used for daily operations or during the regular course of business, or is not licensed, insured, or operational. Commercial signs displayed on vehicles used for the daily operations of a business are permitted provided that said vehicles must be parked or stored on private property in a location farthest away from the public right-of-way or in the least visible location from the public right-of-way, as determined by the Development Services Department.
h.
Any signs or attention getting devices visible from the public right-of-way that rotate, revolve, or have any visible moving parts or that gives the appearance of movement, including, but are not limited to: searchlights, electronic screens, spinners, streamers, balloons (other than temporary inflatable signs with a valid permit), and other similar devices, or ornamentation designed for purposes of attracting attention, promotion or advertising, unless otherwise provided for in this section. However, such signs may be permissible and exempt from permit requirements if the sign or attention getting device is:
j.
Off-Premise Signs.
k.
Roof Signs.
l.
Electronic Changeable Signs, or signs that feature blinking, flashing, or holograms.
m.
Yard (Pin) Signs, except Political Signs may be Yard (Pin) Signs.
n.
Feather/Flag Signs.
o.
Pennants.
p.
Signs which are painted directly onto any exterior wall of any building or structure.
q.
Signs which are incorporated directly into a ground surface, including tiles and pavers.
r.
Signs or displays which contain bare, unshielded lights or tubes (including neon) which are visible from a public right-of-way or a private residence unless otherwise provided for in this section. The use of unshielded LED rope lights or tube lights may be permitted as an architectural accent on non-residential properties directly abutting Interstate 80, subject to the rules and regulations of Section 6-315.
s.
Displays of lights along property lines, sales areas, doors, windows, edges of a building, or similar.
F.
Permanent Signs.
1.
Appearance Standards.
a.
Review. Signs shall be reviewed administratively for appearance by the Development Services Department.
b.
Standards.
(1)
Every sign shall be designed as an integral architectural element of the building, structure, or site to which it principally relates.
(2)
The colors, materials, and lighting of the sign shall be harmonious with the building, structure, and/or site to which it principally relates.
(3)
Every sign shall have appropriate scale and proportion in its design.
(4)
No more than two colors shall be used on a single letter or character. Logos shall be exempt from this regulation.
(5)
Decorative light fixtures complimentary to the architecture of the building shall be used for external illumination.
(6)
Projecting signs shall include durable mounting hardware that is attractive and is an integral part of the sign design. Guy wires and extension poles are prohibited.
(7)
Sign panels with internal illumination shall have opaque backgrounds so that only the sign copy is illuminated.
(8)
Wall Signs:
(A)
Shall be centered within the tenant's frontage unless otherwise deemed aesthetically appropriate by the Development Services Department. Effort shall be made to not conflict with the architectural elements of the building facade.
(B)
Wall signs upon multi-tenant structures shall be mounted in accordance with an established center line.
(C)
Background color is included within the measurement of sign face area for wall signs unless deemed appropriate as an architectural feature by the Development Services Department.
(D)
All raceways shall be of a color that matches the facade behind the sign.
(9)
Ground Signs:
(A)
For monument signs, the sign base shall be at least 75% of the width of the sign face.
(B)
For dual post signs, each post shall be at least 15% of the total width of the sign.
(C)
The ground sign's materials shall match the materials on the principal structure.
(D)
Panels on multi-tenant ground signs must have a uniform background and text color. Fonts may vary by tenant. Logos are exempt from the color requirements.
 |
(E)
Landscaping shall be provided around the base of all ground signs in accordance with Section 6-305D7 of the Land Development Code.
2.
Permanent Sign Regulations by District. Signs shall be permitted in accordance with the regulations by Sign District within the subsequent tables. The following terms are used in the tables in order to further explain or abbreviate the sign regulations.
ROW | Right-of-Way |
SF | Square Foot/Square Feet |
SFA | Sign Face Area |
GFA | Gross Floor Area |
RES | Residential |
NON-RES | Non-Residential |
a.
Sign District #1: Residential. The following signs shall be allowed in Residential Zoning Districts (E-1, R-1, R-2, R-2A, R-3, R-3A, R-4, and RSB) with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department.
Sign District #1 - Residential Zoning Districts | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Wall Sign/Channel Letters/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters | RES | 2 SF | 1 per tenant frontage; maximum of 2 | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • Shall not extend more than 18" from the facade |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • Shall not extend more than 18" from the facade | ||
Awning Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10% of visible surface area of awning | 1 per tenant awning | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Awnings shall be located above windows or doors; • Signage not permitted on valance | ||
Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of canopy | 1 per tenant canopy | 24" | • Canopy and attached signage must have a minimum 8' clearance | ||
Projecting Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance; • Shall be located below second story windows; • Maximum projection: 5' | ||
GROUND | Monument Sign/Dual Post Sign | RES | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 32 SF | 1 per entrance from ROW | 6' | • May be located within a public landscape median with Village approval; • If illuminated, the sign shall only be externally illuminated • Prohibited for individual single-family lots |
NON-RES | 40 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | Monument: 10'; Dual Post: 6' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • For multi-tenant signs, tenant panels shall cover no more than 80% of the allowable SFA | ||
OTHER | Under Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 6 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance | ||
Manual Changeable Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 25% of the ground sign SFA | 1 | — | • Shall be installed within a ground sign | ||
b.
Sign District #2: Commercial. The following signs shall be allowed in Commercial/Office Zoning Districts (BIZ, COR, VCD, LSPD, RMC, and ORI) with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department. This Sign District excludes those properties within Sign District #3.
Sign District #2 - Commercial Zoning Districts | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Wall Sign/Channel Letters/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters | RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per ROW frontage | — | • Only allowed on multi-family buildings with more than 10 dwelling units; • Shall not extend more than 18" from the facade |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • The combined SFA of all signs shall not exceed the allowable SFA per frontage; • Shall not extend more than 18" from the facade | ||
Awning Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10% of visible surface area of awning | 1 per tenant awning | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Awnings shall be located above windows or doors; • Signage not permitted on valance | ||
Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of canopy | 1 per tenant canopy | 24 inches | Canopy and attached signage must have a minimum 8' clearance | ||
Projecting Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance; • Shall be located below second story windows; • Maximum projection: 5' | ||
GROUND | Monument Sign | RES | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 32 SF | 1 per entrance from ROW | 6' | • May be located within a public landscape median with Village approval; • If illuminated, the sign shall only be externally illuminated |
NON-RES | GFA < 350,000 SF: 40 SF; GFA 350,000-500,000 SF: 100 SF; GFA > 500,000 SF: 125 SF | 1 per ROW frontage; Lot frontage > 300': 1 additional sign allowed along that frontage | GFA < 500,000 SF: 10'; GFA > 500,000 SF: 18' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • For multi-tenant signs, tenant panels shall cover no more than 75% of the allowable SFA | ||
Dual Post Sign | RES | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 32 SF | 1 per entrance from ROW | 6' | • May be located within a public landscape median with Village approval; • If illuminated, the sign shall only be externally illuminated | |
NON-RES | 40 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | 6' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • Tenant panels shall cover no more than 75% of the allowable SFA | ||
OTHER | Under Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 6 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance | ||
Manual Changeable Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 25% of the ground sign SFA | 1 | — | • Shall be installed within a ground sign | ||
c.
Sign District #3: Eastern 159th Street Corridor. The following signs shall be allowed on properties directly adjacent to 159th Street between 71st Court and 94th Avenue with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department.
Sign District #3 - Eastern 159th Street Corridor | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Wall Sign/Channel Letters/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters | RES | 1 SF per dwelling unit; maximum of 40 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | — | • Only allowed on multi-family buildings with more than 10 dwelling units; • Shall not extend more than 18 inches from the facade |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • The combined SFA of all wall signs shall not exceed the allowable SFA per frontage; • Shall not extend more than 18 inches from the facade | ||
Awning Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10% of visible surface area of awning | 1 per tenant awning | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Awnings shall be located above windows or doors; • Signage not permitted on valance | ||
Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of canopy | 1 per tenant canopy | 24" | • Canopy and attached signage must have a minimum 8' clearance | ||
Projecting Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance; • Shall be located below second story windows; • Maximum projection: 5' | ||
GROUND | Monument Sign | RES | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 32 SF | 1 per entrance from ROW | 6' | • May be located within a public landscape median with Village approval; • If illuminated, the sign shall only be externally illuminated |
NON-RES | GFA < 350,000 SF: 64 SF; GFA > 350,000 SF: 100 SF | 1 per ROW frontage; Lot frontage > 300': 1 additional sign allowed along that frontage | 18' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • Tenant panels shall cover no more than 80% of the allowable SFA | ||
Dual Post Sign | RES | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 32 SF | 1 per entrance from ROW | 6' | • May be located within a public landscape median with Village approval; • If illuminated, the sign shall only be externally illuminated | |
NON-RES | 40 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | 6' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • For multi-tenant signs, tenant panels shall cover no more than 80% of the allowable SFA | ||
OTHER | Under Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 6 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance | ||
Manual Changeable Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 25% of the ground sign SFA | 1 | — | • Shall be installed within a ground sign | ||
d.
Sign District #4: Industrial. The following signs shall be allowed in the Industrial Zoning District (MFG) with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department.
Sign District #4 - Industrial Zoning District | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Wall Sign/Channel Letters/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • Shall not extend more than 18 inches from the facade | ||
Awning Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10% of visible surface area of awning | 1 per tenant awning | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Awnings shall be located above windows or doors; • Signage not permitted on valance | ||
Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of canopy | 1 per tenant canopy | 24 inches | >• Canopy and attached signage must have a minimum 8' clearance | ||
Projecting Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | Prohibited | |||||
GROUND | Monument Sign/Dual Post Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 40 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | 10' | • Signs shall be spaced at least 75' apart; • For multi-tenant signs, tenant panels shall cover no more than 80% of the allowable SFA | ||
OTHER | Under Canopy Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | Prohibited | |||||
Manual Changeable Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 25% of the ground sign SFA | 1 | — | • Shall be installed within a ground sign | ||
e.
Sign District #5: Old Orland Historic District. The following signs shall be allowed in the Old Orland Historic District (OOH) with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department.
Sign District #5 - Old Orland Historic District | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Wall Sign/Channel Letters/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters | RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per ROW frontage | — | • Only allowed on multi-family buildings with more than 10 dwelling units; • Shall not extend more than 18 inches from the facade |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | • Shall not cover any part of a window; • The combined SFA of all signs shall not exceed the allowable SFA per frontage; • Shall not extend more than 18 inches from the facade; • For multi-story or multi-tenant buildings, tenant sign location is subject to review by the Development Services Department | ||
Awning Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10% of visible surface area of awning | 1 per tenant awning | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Awnings shall be located above windows or doors; • Signage not permitted on valance | ||
Projecting Sign | RES | Prohibited | ||||
NON-RES | 10 SF | 1 per tenant entrance | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall be located near the tenant entrance; • For multi-story or multi-tenant buildings, tenant signs must be located over or within 2 feet of the first floor pedestrian door access to the building; • Maximum 3' projection; • Shall not be internally illuminated | ||
GROUND | Monument Sign/Dual Post Sign | RES | Prohibited | |||
NON-RES | 20 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | 5' | • For multi-tenant signs, tenant panels shall cover no more than 75% of the allowable SFA • Wood posts are permitted for dual post signs subject to review by the Development Services Department | ||
3.
Permanent Sign Bonuses. Nonresidential land uses within Sign District #2, #3, and #4 shall be eligible for the following sign bonuses in addition to the allowable signage within Section 6-307F2 of the Land Development Code:
a.
Bonuses for Sign Face Area for Wall/Channel Letter/Cloud Sign/Push-Thru Letters/Halo-lit Signs. The following bonuses shall apply to the calculation for SFA for the aforementioned sign types. Bonuses for Tenant Gross Floor Area may apply to any valid tenant frontage. Bonuses for Building Setback from Public Right-of-Way shall only apply to signs installed on the tenant frontage(s) eligible for the bonus. Bonuses for building setback from a public right-of-way may include a private right-of-way internal to a planned development. Note: The maximum formula for SFA is 2 square feet per linear foot of tenant frontage where the sign will be installed.
Tenant Gross Floor Area | Sign Face Area Bonus |
|---|---|
25,000 - 50,000 square feet | + 0.25 square foot per lineal foot of tenant frontage |
> 50,000 square feet | + 0.50 square foot per lineal foot of tenant frontage |
Building Setback from Public Right-of-Way | Sign Face Area Bonus |
|---|---|
150' - 300' | + 0.25 square foot per lineal foot of tenant frontage |
> 300' | + 0.50 square foot per lineal foot of tenant frontage |
b.
Bonuses for Quantity of Wall/Channel Letter/Cloud/Push-Thru Letter Signs. The following bonuses shall apply to the allowable quantity of the aforementioned sign types. The total SFA of all wall signs shall not exceed the allowable SFA.
Tenant Gross Floor Area | Sign Quantity Bonus |
|---|---|
15,000 - 50,000 square feet | + 2 Signs |
> 50,000 square feet | + 4 Signs |
c.
Monument Sign Bonuses for Sign Height. Additional sign height shall be allowed for monument signs directly adjacent to a right-of-way where a road construction project increased the elevation of the roadway. The base of the monument sign may be increased to allow for the sign to be a maximum of 10 feet above the street elevation of the nearest point of the adjacent roadway pavement. The sign face shall not extend below the street elevation.
 |
G.
Temporary Signs. The following Temporary Signs shall be allowed with a valid temporary sign permit from the Development Services Department, subject to compliance with the following regulations.
1.
General Regulations for all Temporary Signs.
a.
Sign Type. As outlined in Section 6-309G2, temporary signs for residential and non-residential uses shall be limited to temporary wall signs (banners), temporary ground signs (dual post sign/banner), and grand opening signs. All temporary signs are subject to the General Standards listed in Section 6-307C and Procedures listed in Section 6-307D.
b.
Number. A maximum of one temporary sign shall be permitted for and displayed by the same business, establishment, or single residential lot at any one point in time.
c.
Duration. Unless as otherwise provided in the regulations of this section, no more than six permits for temporary signs shall be issued for a business, establishment, or residential use located on the same lot within one calendar year. A temporary sign permit shall be valid for a maximum period of seven days. A temporary sign displayed for less than seven days constitutes a one-week period. Such permits may be issued in any combination not to exceed six permits per calendar year for a total of 42 days running concurrently.
d.
Durability and Maintenance. All temporary signs must be properly maintained while displayed and be able to withstand all weather elements. All temporary signs must remain in good condition during the display period. Throughout the display period, corrective action must be taken immediately should there be any problems with the appearance, condition or maintenance of the sign and/or support hardware.
e.
Removal. All temporary signs shall be removed within 24 hours after the expiration of a sign permit or time period approved on the permit.
2.
Regulations by Temporary Sign Type.
a.
Temporary Wall Signs (Banners).
(1)
Sign Face Area. For non-residential uses, the maximum sign face area for a temporary wall sign shall be one square foot per linear foot of tenant frontage. For residential uses, the maximum sign face area for a temporary wall sign shall not exceed 25 square feet.
(2)
Number. For non-residential uses, a maximum of one temporary wall sign shall be permitted for each tenant frontage. For residential uses, a maximum of one temporary wall sign shall be permitted per right-of-way frontage.
(3)
Location. Temporary wall signs shall not extend above the roofline or parapet wall of a building and shall not cover any part of a window or door. All temporary wall signs shall maintain a minimum eight foot clearance measured vertically from grade to the bottom of the sign. For non-residential uses, temporary wall signs shall be centered within the tenant's frontage unless otherwise approved by the Development Services Department.
b.
Temporary Ground Signs (Dual Post Signs/Banners).
(1)
Sign Face Area. For non-residential uses, the maximum sign face area for a temporary ground signs shall be one square foot per linear foot of tenant frontage. For residential uses, the maximum sign face area for a temporary ground sign shall not exceed 25 square feet.
(2)
Number. For non-residential uses, a maximum of one temporary ground sign shall be permitted for each tenant frontage. For residential uses, a maximum of one temporary ground sign shall be permitted per right-of-way frontage.
(3)
Height. For non-residential uses, the maximum height for a temporary ground signs shall be eight feet. For residential uses, the maximum height for a temporary ground signs shall be five feet.
3.
Extensions for Display Period. The Development Services Department may extend the allowable duration of display for temporary signs in the following circumstances:
a.
Grand Opening Signs. One additional temporary grand opening sign may be granted for a maximum of 14 days after a new business opens for the first time at a physical location within the Village and receives a Certificate of Occupancy per calendar year. A grand opening sign must be applied for and erected within 60 days immediately following the issuance of a full or temporary Certificate of Occupancy.
(1)
Permitted Sign Types. Temporary wall signs (banners), temporary ground signs (dual post signs/banners), and temporary inflatable signs shall be permitted sign types for grand opening signs.
(2)
Requirements for Temporary Inflatable Signs. Inflatable signs shall only be displayed or erected through an approved temporary grand opening sign permit. One temporary inflatable sign is permitted per lot. Inflatable signs which move or give the appearance of moving are prohibited, as provided in Section 6-307E2. Inflatables may not be mounted on the roof of a building or structure.
b.
Special Events. The Development Services Department may extend the allowable duration of display of temporary signs for special events with an approved special event permit issued by the Village. A letter requesting additional display time must be submitted as part of the temporary sign permit application. All temporary signs associated with a special event permit shall be erected no earlier than two weeks before the date of the special event and shall be removed within 24 hours after date of the special event.
c.
Temporary or Seasonal Use. The Development Services Department may extend the allowable duration of display of temporary signs for temporary or seasonal uses approved by the Village. A letter requesting additional display time must be submitted as part of the temporary sign permit application. A temporary sign for a temporary or seasonal use shall extend no longer than the duration of the use. A temporary or seasonal use shall mean a new business at a physical location within the Village that plans to operate for a specific period of time, which is typically less than 90 days. Examples include, but are not limited to, temporary offices, carnivals, and holiday-related retail sales. Such use must be properly permitted/licensed by the Village.
Temporary Signs | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Sign Type | Tenant Land Use | Maximum Sign Face Area | Maximum Number of Signs | Maximum Sign Height | Additional Regulations | |
WALL | Banner | RES | 25 SF | 1 per ROW frontage | — | • Minimum 8' clearance; • Shall not extend above the roofline or parapet wall of a building • Shall not cover any part of a window or door • Shall be centered within the tenant's frontage unless otherwise approved by the Development Services Department |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | — | |||
GROUND | Dual Post Sign/Banner | RES | 25 SF | 1 Per ROW frontage | 5' | — |
NON-RES | 1 SF per linear foot of tenant frontage | 1 per tenant frontage | 8' | |||
H.
Special Areas of Control. The following signs shall be allowed with a valid permanent sign permit from the Development Services Department.
1.
Construction Site Signs. Sign(s) meeting the following requirements shall be permitted for sites with an active building permit on file with the Development Services Department:
a.
The sign(s) shall meet all General Standards within Section 6-307C of the Land Development Code;
b.
The sign(s) may be made of temporary or permanent materials;
c.
The sign(s) shall be set back a minimum of five feet from all property lines, walks/paths, and access drives unless installed on construction fencing;
d.
One sign is allowed per frontage along a public right-of-way;
e.
Sign(s) shall be displayed no earlier than 30 days before construction begins and removed no later than seven days after issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy and/or completion of construction;
f.
The sign(s) shall not be installed above the roof line when located on a building, be greater than six feet in height when located on the ground, and/or exceed the height of the construction fence if installed upon said fence; and
g.
The maximum sign face area shall be in accordance with the following table:
Land Area/Location | Maximum Allowable Total Sign Face Area (all signs combined) |
|---|---|
Less than 10 acres | 12 SF per acre; maximum of 40 SF |
Greater than 10 acres | 64 SF |
2.
Model Home Signs. Sign(s) meeting the following requirements shall be permitted on real property which is registered as a model home site with the Development Services Department:
a.
The sign shall meet all General Standards within Section 6-307C of the Land Development Code;
b.
The sign shall be set back a minimum of five feet from all property lines, walks/paths, and access drives;
c.
The sign shall be located on the ground;
d.
One sign is allowed per frontage along a public right-of-way;
e.
The maximum sign height shall not exceed six feet when located on the ground; and
f.
The maximum sign face area for each sign shall be no larger than 40 square feet.
3.
Gas Station Signs. On premises where gasoline is dispensed:
a.
Each side of a service station island containing gasoline pumps shall be permitted a maximum of two permanent signs meeting the following requirements:
b.
Each gas station canopy shall be permitted one canopy sign per right-of-way frontage. The gross surface area of such sign shall not exceed 20% of the gross surface area of the canopy to which the sign is to be affixed. Said canopy signage shall not extend above or below the canopy.
4.
Directional Signs.
a.
Directional Signs, if deemed necessary by the Development Services Department in the interest of public safety, shall be permitted in accordance with the following requirements.
Gross Floor Area | Maximum Sign Face Area Per Sign | Maximum Sign Height |
|---|---|---|
< 350,000 SF | 10 SF | 4' |
350,000 - 500,000 SF | 24 SF | 7' |
> 500,000 SF | 70 SF | 9' |
b.
Permanent off-site directional signs may be permitted for medical facilities and senior housing facilities if located in a non-residential area and within 1,000 feet of the facility.
c.
Temporary off-site directional signs may be permitted for special events as determined by the Development Services Department.
d.
The allowable quantity of directional signs shall be determined by the Development Services Department.
e.
Directional signs must be located a minimum of one foot from any lot line.
f.
The name of a business or logo may be included on a directional sign, provided that the name and logo shall not exceed 50% of the surface area of the sign. No other commercial message is permitted.
5.
Drive-Through Accessories. Drive-Through Accessories shall meet the requirements of Section 6-302K of the Land Development Code.
I.
Nonconforming Signs. Signs existing at the time of the enactment of this section, or any amendment thereto, or at the time of annexation of the property on which they are located and not conforming to the provisions of this section, shall be regarded as nonconforming signs. Nonconforming signs shall be of two types: legal nonconforming or illegal nonconforming.
1.
Legal Nonconforming Signs. Nonconforming signs that were lawfully permitted by the Village shall be considered legal nonconforming signs. The following activities are allowed for legal nonconforming signs and may require a permit from the Development Services Department:
a.
Ordinary Repair and Maintenance. Normal maintenance and incidental repair are allowed for legal nonconforming signs, provided that any repair or maintenance shall, whenever possible, eliminate or reduce any nonconformity. The allowable scope of repair and maintenance for legal nonconforming signs includes:
b.
Change in Display of Sign Content. The periodic changing of tenant's sign panels or the renewing of copy that has been made unusable by ordinary wear and tear, weather, or accident is allowed on legal nonconforming signs. All new panels within nonconforming signs shall be designed to meet current Appearance Standards per Section 6-307F1.
2.
Illegal Nonconforming Signs. Nonconforming signs that do not have a valid permit on file with the Village shall be considered illegal nonconforming signs.
J.
Severability. If any portion of this document is to any extent invalid, illegal, or incapable of being enforced, such term shall be excluded to the extent of such invalidity, illegality, or unenforceability; all other terms hereof shall remain in full force and effect.
K. AVERAGE NATURAL GRADE CALENDAR YEAR FRONTAGE, TENANT SIGN SIGN FACE SIGN FACE AREA SIGN, ADDRESS SIGN, AWNING SIGN, BANNER SIGN, BILLBOARD SIGN, BOX (CABINET) SIGN, CANOPY SIGN, CHANNEL LETTER SIGN, CLOUD SIGN, DIRECTIONAL SIGN, DUAL POST SIGN, ELECTRONIC CHANGEABLE SIGN, FEATHER/FLAG SIGN, FLAG SIGN, GROUND SIGN, HALO-LIT SIGN, INFLATABLE SIGN, INTEGRAL SIGN, MANUAL CHANGEABLE SIGN, MARQUEE SIGN, MONUMENT SIGN, OFF-PREMISES (OUTDOOR ADVERTISING) SIGN, OUTDOOR BULLETIN BOARD SIGN, PENNANT SIGN, PERMANENT SIGN, POLITICAL SIGN, PORTABLE SIGN, PROJECTING (BLADE) SIGN, PUSH-THRU LETTERS SIGN, ROOF SIGN, SANDWICH BOARD (A-FRAME) SIGN, TEMPORARY SIGN, UNDER CANOPY SIGN, WALL SIGN, WINDOW SIGN, YARD (PIN) WINDOW DISPLAY
Definitions. In the event of a conflict within this section and within Section 2-102 (Definitions) of the Land Development Code the definitions herein shall apply.
When measuring sign height, the average natural grade shall mean the average grade measured 10 feet in every direction from the sign location.
The time between January 1 and December 31.
The horizontal distance between a tenant's lease lines along a facade facing a public right-of-way, private access drive, and/or parking lot serving the business. Tenant Frontage shall not include frontage along outdoor sales areas and accessory structures.
Any object, device, display, or structure, or part thereof, which is used primarily to advertise, identify, display or direct or attract attention to an object, person, establishment, product, service, event or location by any means including, but not limited to: words, letters, figures, designs, symbols, fixtures, colors, motion, illumination or projected images, which are visible beyond the boundaries of the lot, parcel, or tenant space on which they are situated or visible from any public thoroughfare or right-of-way. This includes, but is not limited to, wall signs, ground signs, window signs, awning or canopy signs, marquees, manual changeable signs, message boards, illuminated signs, moving signs, temporary signs, portable signs, pennants, banners, streamers or any other attention-getting device, flag, or other display, whether affixed to a building or erected elsewhere on the premises. The term "sign" excludes those features of a building which are an integral part of the building's architecture, design, and structure (i.e. an "architectural feature") as determined by the Development Services Department. Murals and public art shall not be considered signs if the work of visual art does not contain any commercial messaging, advertising, logos, or business identification messages.
That part of the sign which is or can be used to identify, to advertise, to communicate information, or for visual representation which attracts the attention of the public for any purpose. This shall include any background material, panel, trim, color, and direct or self-illumination that differentiates the sign from the building, structure, backdrop surface, or object upon or against which it is placed. This shall not include any portion of the support structure for the sign, provided that no message, symbol, or any of the aforementioned sign face criteria is placed on or designed as part of the support structure.
The entire area of a sign face measured in square feet.
A sign displayed for the purpose of identifying the address of the property.
Signage that exists on an awning.
A temporary sign with or without characters or illustrations applied to cloth, flexible plastic, or fabric of any kind, with no rigid material as a backing. A Banner Sign is typically installed on the wall of the tenant space, mounted in the ground, or securely attached to an existing ground sign.
See Off-Premise (Outdoor Advertising) Sign.
A sign which contains all of the advertising copy within an enclosed cabinet (typically a standard geometric shape such as a rectangle) and is mounted to a wall. Box Signs have a translucent or opaque back-lit panel with sign copy enclosed within a frame or cabinet. An internally-illuminated logo separate from other sign copy shall not constitute a Box Sign.
A sign constructed or affixed to a permanent portion of a building that serves as a canopy over the space below. A canopy is an integral part of the building that uses similar materials, whereas an awning is more temporary in nature and build.
A sign comprising individual letters that are independently mounted to a wall or other surface and have a covered face with internal illumination. Channel letters may be non-illuminated.
A sign with a single cabinet that is not a typical geometric shape but instead follows the curvature of the lettering or artwork on the sign. A Cloud Sign is distinguished from a Box (Cabinet) Sign by the shape of the sign and the outer edges forming a cloud around the lettering or artwork on the sign. Typically the background of this type of sign is non-illuminated but the lettering is illuminated.
A sign designed to provide direction to motorists or pedestrians into, out of, and within a site, including signs marking parking lot entrances and exits, loading zones, drive-through lanes, and features of a similar nature. Such signs typically include arrows and identify locations rather than advertising copy and/or logos. Pavement markings shall not constitute a directional sign.
A ground sign that utilizes two posts or columns that are used to mount the sign in the ground.
Signage that features changeable text and/or illustrations, using computer software or other technology to automate the delivery schedule of the messages.
A temporary ground sign typically taller than it is wide, made of non-rigid material, and attached to a pole.
A sign attached to a pole on one side of the sign.
Any sign supported wholly or in part by some structure other than the building or buildings housing the use to which the sign pertains. Ground signs shall also include monument, dual post, and other freestanding signs.
A type of sign where an internal light source illuminates the wall or mounting surface behind the sign creating a glowing effect.
A sign that requires air pressure to maintain its volume.
Names of buildings, dates of erection, monumental citations and commemorative tablets or other information that is carved into stone, concrete, or similar material or made of bronze, aluminum or other permanent type construction and made an integral part of the structure.
A sign or portion thereof with characters, letters, or illustrations that can be changed or rearranged manually without altering the face or surface of the sign.
A manual changeable sign with a surrounding cache of light bulbs. Typical marquee signage is found at the entry to theaters.
A two-sided sign attached to a permanent foundation or decorative base and not attached or dependent on support from any building, pole, posts, or similar uprights.
A sign providing display space for general commercial advertising not related to the premises on site at which the sign is located; commonly referred to as "billboards".
A cabinet attached to the wall of a structure at a pedestrian level for the purpose of displaying periodically-changing messages printed on paper or other similar materials inside the cabinet. Such messages may include announcements, advertisements, or information about a business such as a menu or a brochure of services.
A series of triangular non-rigid signs that exist on a string or band.
Any sign or advertising display composed of durable materials intended to exist for the duration of time that the use or occupant is located on the premises.
Temporary signs that announce or support political candidates, parties, issues, or causes in connection with any national, state, or local election.
Any sign that is not permanently attached to the ground, a structure, or a building and which is designed to be easily transported or relocated to another location.
A sign, other than a wall sign, which projects (usually perpendicularly) from and is supported by a wall of a building or structure.
A sign with individually illuminated acrylic letters and/or a logo that appear to be pushed through the sign's opaque background panel/cabinet.
A sign erected, constructed, supported or maintained in whole or part upon or above the highest point of the roof line, parapet, or fascia of the building. For buildings with a hip, gambrel, or gable roof this would be above the eave line; for mansard roofs, this would be above the deck line for the roof, and for flat roofs it would be above the edge of the wall.
Portable and relatively lightweight signage constructed to stand independently, not mounted or affixed to its location. This sign is fabricated as an A-frame, which is characterized by having two boards connected together at the top. The boards may have signage on one or both sides.
A banner, pennant, poster or advertising display constructed of less durable materials and that appears to be intended to be displayed for a reasonable short or definite limited period of time. If the sign display area is permanent but the message displayed is subject to periodic manual changes, that sign shall not be regarded as a Temporary Sign.
A sign that is attached to the underside of a canopy.
Signs mounted on the wall of a building that are parallel to the face it is mounted on. Wall signs may be illuminated or non-illuminated and are typically three-dimensional. Wall signs include but are not limited to sign types such as channel letters, cloud, and push-thru. Signs on canopies, awnings, and windows may also be considered wall signs.
Signs or graphics with or without copy that are adhered to a window.
A temporary sign made of non-durable materials that are typically staked in the ground by metal or plastic supports.
Graphics, digital images, or displays of products without copy located within the interior of the building that are not located on the surface of a window but are visible through a window or other opening. Window displays are used to project a message to potential outside viewers.
§ 6-308 Design Standards.
A.
Purposes. The following are the purposes of the architectural design standards set forth in this section:
1.
To create an architectural identity and to avoid monotonous similarity or inappropriateness in exterior design and appearance of property;
2.
To promote the orderly and harmonious growth of the Village, and to protect and enhance land values, investments, and the general welfare of the citizens of the Village;
3.
To protect and to stabilize the general appearance of buildings, structures, landscaping, and open space areas throughout the Village;
4.
To insure adequate light, air and privacy for property throughout the Village;
5.
To encourage and promote acceptability, attractiveness, cohesiveness and compatibility of new development so as to maintain and improve the established standards of property values throughout the Village; and
6.
To aid prospective contractors, architects, designers and developers in preparing their project plans for review by the Village.
B.
Applicability. The design standards shall apply to single family residential developments of seven units or more and to all other types of developments, including privately and publicly owned properties, except for those developments located in the Old Orland Historic (OOH) District.
C.
Administration.
1.
An applicant for development approval shall submit a site plan, exterior elevations, and such other data deemed necessary by the Department of Development Services to evaluate a proposed architectural design, along with an application for development approval, as required by Sections 5-101 (General Procedures) and 5-106 (Appearance/Site Plan Review).
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
2.
Final plans and elevations shall be drawn to scale and shall indicate the nature and extent of the work proposed.
3.
The Department of Development Services shall develop graphic illustrations of the standards set forth in this section. The Department shall also ensure that development within the district complies with the guidelines established in the Old Orland Historic District Guidelines, as amended from time to time, copies of which shall be kept on file in the Department's offices.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
4.
The review of architecture and site plans provided for in this section is intended to be only a part of the whole review procedure laid out in these regulations. Approval of architectural design does not in any way signify final approval of any portion of any project.
D.
Pre-Application Conference. An applicant for architectural design approval may request in writing that the Department of Development Services hold an informal pre-application conference to review the preliminary architectural design of a proposed development. This pre-application conference may be conducted concurrently with the pre-application conference provided for in Section 5-101A and shall be conducted pursuant to the same terms and conditions set forth in that section.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
E.
Review. The Development Services Department shall review the complete application for appearance review in conjunction with site plan review provided for in Section 5-106. Recommendations of the Department shall be based upon the criteria set forth in Subsections F through O, below.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
F.
Building and Structure Design.
1.
Buildings and structures shall be consistent with the established neighborhood character and with any adjacent residential property.
2.
Building materials shall be selected for suitability to the type of buildings and the design in which they are used. Buildings shall use the same materials, or those which are architecturally harmonious, for all building walls and other exterior building components that are wholly or partially visible from public ways.
3.
Building materials shall be of durable quality. Inappropriate materials or building methods, and those which will produce inconsistency with the structure and architecture of the building, shall be avoided.
4.
Brick or other masonry materials shall be used for all sides of all nonresidential development and shall be installed per Village Building Code specifications. At a minimum:
a.
For single story structures, anchored brick, stone or similar masonry materials as approved by Development Services Department shall extend from the adjacent grade to the top of the window that is highest on the subject facade, with minor accents allowed in place of masonry subject to meeting building codes.
b.
For two or three-story structures, anchored brick, stone or similar masonry materials as approved by Development Services Department shall extend from the adjacent grade to the top of each story with minor accents allowed in place of masonry subject to meeting building codes.
c.
For structures four stories or more in height anchored brick, stone or similar masonry materials as approved by Development Services Department shall extend from the adjacent grade to the top of the first three stories, with minor accents allowed in place of masonry subject to meeting building codes. Village approved non-masonry materials may be used only on the uppermost story of structures that are four stories or more in height. See Village Code Title 5 Chapter 1 Section 501.3.2 Exception B. for additional requirements.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
No mansard roofs shall be permitted. Brick shall not be painted, except if approved under an Appearance Review. If an Appearance Review denial is appealed to Plan Commission, resulting in permission to paint a masonry surface, paint and painting procedure specifications shall be submitted to the Development Services Department for review and approval prior to initiation of any masonry paint-related work. |
[Ord. 2462, 10-18-1993; amended by Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000; Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; Ord. 506, 11-18-2016; Ord. 5312; 7-16-2018]
5.
All residential dwelling units shall contain face brick or stone on not less than 50% of exterior walls and shall contain face brick or stone on 90% of each first floor elevation or ground levels of such units. All materials for the remaining ground level wall surfaces shall be approved by the Building Director. All materials used shall be compatible as a group and with the surrounding structures.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994, amended by Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
a.
Exceptions. Existing residential developments constructed where original buildings were of non-masonry exterior finishes may permit the use of other code approved materials under the following conditions:
(1)
Where the building's total floor area is not being increased by more than 50% of the existing building's floor area;
(2)
Where the building's 50% floor area allowance is regarded as the total combined floor areas of all additions made to the residence within a forty-eight-month consecutive time period;
6.
Building materials should be selected with special attention to energy conservation. Materials and colors that reduce the consumption of gas and electricity should be used wherever possible.
7.
Building components, such as windows, doors, eaves, and parapets, shall have good proportions and relationship to one another.
8.
While it is recognized that color is a very subjective matter and that creativity should not be stifled, colors should nonetheless be used harmoniously and with some restraint. Color schemes should consider and respect the character and quality of structures in the area. Excessively bright or brilliant colors should be used only for accent. Materials and colors should withstand the weather well over a twenty-five-year period.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
9.
Architectural style should be appropriate to the Chicago area and evaluation of a project shall be based on the quality of design and its relationship to surroundings. The design of structures should display a sensitivity to the best aspects of the character, quality and scale of those structures already existing in the area of a proposed project.
10.
Monotony of design shall be avoided, however styles should be complementary and should relate to indigenous architecture. In residential districts no two detached single family dwellings of substantially similar or identical front elevation or facade shall be constructed or located on adjacent lots. Said changes may be major or minor changes.
a.
Major Changes. One major change and color change shall constitute a substantial change:
(1)
Roof treatment - hip, gable, 25% or greater change in slope.
(2)
Location of garage entry - side and front.
(3)
Type of brick treatment - extended porticos, etc.
(4)
Material treatment - full brick vs. half-and-half.
(5)
Overall facade - mediterranean vs. colonial, for example.
(6)
Brick arches.
(7)
Brick bay projections.
(8)
Balconies.
b.
Minor Changes. Three minor changes constitute a substantial change:
(1)
Vertical or horizontal siding.
(2)
Colors of materials.
(3)
Door treatment - garage and entry.
(4)
Window styles - casements, bows and double hung.
(5)
Shutter treatment.
(6)
Ornamental treatment - lighting fixture location, or posts and fascia.
(7)
Reversing plan.
(8)
Garage door design.
(9)
Brick wing arms.
11.
On commercial buildings, facades greater than 100 feet in length must incorporate recesses and projections along at least 20% of the length of the facade. Windows, awnings, and arcades must total at least 60% of the facade length abutting a public street.
12.
Color, texture, and material module elements should be repeated horizontally and/or vertically on commercial buildings.
13.
Each commercial building must have a clearly defined, highly visible customer entrance with features such as canopies or porticos, arcades, arches, wing walls, and integral planters.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996]
14.
Commercial and industrial buildings shall vary architectural design elements in rooflines and include brick/masonry up to the tops of the windows.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
15.
Except for single family residential homes, the architectural design of street facing building facades shall have the appearance of a primary facade and include transparency in the form of full or clerestory windows.
[Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
16.
Unless otherwise approved by Development Services, ground-level storefront elevations facing a public right-of-way or parking lot serving the business shall:
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
Maintain no less than 65% transparent glass in the area measured from 2' - 6" above interior finished floor to 8'-0" above interior finished floor along elevations. Areas of transparency shall provide a minimum visibility of five feet into the interior during business hours.
b.
Discreetly blend areas of opaque storefront with the building materials and architecture.
c.
Provide back-of-house doors with the same design standard as pedestrian entrances.
G.
Relationship of Buildings to Site.
1.
The height and scale of each building shall be compatible with its site and adjoining buildings and neighboring development. In residential districts (E-1, R-1, R-2, R-3, R-4 and RSB), the height shall not vary by more than 14 feet from adjacent structures.
2.
The site shall be planned to accomplish a desirable transition with the streetscape and to provide for adequate planting, pedestrian movement and parking areas.
H.
Relationship of Building and Site to Adjoining Area.
1.
Adjacent buildings of different architectural styles shall be made compatible by such means as screens, site breaks and materials.
2.
Attractive landscape transition to adjoining properties shall be provided.
3.
Harmony in texture, lines and masses shall be required.
4.
Buildings shall have similar scale to those in the surrounding area.
I.
Utility Services. Newly installed utility services, and service revisions that are necessitated by exterior alterations, shall be located underground.
J.
Screening.
1.
Service areas, utility areas, loading areas, storage areas, mechanical equipment, overhead doors, trash collection and recycling areas, and other potentially unattractive places shall be completely screened from view on all sides so that no portion of such areas are visible from streets, drives, and adjacent properties. Screening shall be accomplished by the use of walls, fencing, landscaping, or a combination of measures. Screening shall be equally effective in the winter and the summer seasons. Screening shall be architecturally compatible with the principal building in terms of design type, materials, and colors. Wherever possible, mechanical equipment shall be contained within buildings or shall be roof-mounted per Code requirements.
2.
Ground-based mechanical equipment shall be located in rear or interior side yards. All ground-based mechanical equipment, including, but not limited to, heating, ventilating, and air-conditioning units (HVAC), shall be fully screened from public view in accordance with the screening regulations of this section.
3.
Roof-mounted mechanical equipment shall be fully screened from view by parapet walls, the roof structure, architectural elements, or an alternative screening structure. The height of the screening shall be equal to or taller than the height of the tallest point of the mechanical equipment installed on the building. Such screening shall be constructed of building materials that match the principal structure to blend in with and complement the architecture of the building. New buildings and structures shall be designed to provide a parapet wall or other architectural building element that is equal to or taller than the height of the tallest point of the mechanical equipment installed on the building. Screening walls shall be architecturally consistent with the structure and match the existing structure's paint, finish, and trim detail.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020] |
K.
Parking Areas. Parking areas shall comply with the provisions of Section 6-305 (Landscape and Tree Preservation) and 6-306 (Off-Street Parking and Loading Requirements) of these regulations and shall be treated with decorative elements, building wall extensions, plantings, berms or other innovative means so as to largely screen parking areas from view from public ways. All non-residential parking areas shall include concrete curbing along pavement edges.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
L.
Lighting. Outdoor lighting, where provided, should enhance the building design and the adjoining landscape. Lighting standards, fixtures and all exposed accessories shall comply with the provisions of Section 6-104 (Bulk Regulations), Section 6-307 (Signs), Section 6-315 (Exterior Lighting), and Section 6-407 (Lighting) of these regulations, and shall be of a design and size that are harmonious with the design of the building and adjacent areas. If external spot or flood lighting is used, the light source should be shielded and restrained in design. Excessive brightness, flashing lights, and brilliant colors shall not be permitted.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
M.
Miscellaneous Structures. Miscellaneous structures located on private property, public ways, and other public property, including light standards, utility poles, newspaper stands, bus shelters, plants, traffic signs and signals, benches, guardrails, rockeries, retaining walls, mailboxes, awnings, tensile canopies and fire hydrants shall be designed to be part of the architectural concept of design and landscape. Materials shall be compatible with buildings, scale should be appropriate, and colors should be in harmony with nearby buildings and surroundings, and proportions shall be attractive.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
N.
Landscape and Site Treatment.
1.
Landscape treatment shall be provided in a manner so as to enhance architectural features, strengthen vistas and important axes, and provide shade. Spectacular effects shall be reserved for special locations only. All landscaping design shall comply with Section 6-305 (Landscape and Tree Preservation) of these regulations.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
2.
Where natural or existing topographic patterns contribute to the beauty and utility of a development, they shall be preserved and developed. Modification to topography shall be permitted only where it contributes to good appearance.
3.
Grades of walk, parking spaces, terraces, and other paved areas shall provide an inviting and stable appearance for walking, and if seating is provided, for sitting.
4.
Unity of design shall be achieved by repetition of certain plant varieties and other materials, and by correlation with adjacent developments.
5.
Plant material shall be selected for interest in its structure, texture and color, and for its ultimate growth. Plants that are indigenous to the area and plants that will be hardy, harmonious to the design, and of good appearance shall be used.
6.
In locations where plants will be susceptible to injury by pedestrian or motor traffic, they shall be protected by appropriate curbs, tree guards, or other devices, wherever possible. Where building sites limit planting, the placement of approved trees or shrubs in parkways or paved areas shall be encouraged.
7.
In areas where general planting will not prosper, other materials such as fences, walls, and paving of wood, brick, stone, rocks, and gravel shall be used.
8.
Parking areas and traffic ways shall be enhanced with landscaped spaces containing trees or tree groups. Shrubs shall be used only where they will not obscure vision and will not require excessive maintenance.
9.
In locations other than parking areas, shrubbery shall be used with restraint.
O.
Signs.
1.
Signs shall be designed to comply with Section 6-307 (Signs) of these regulations. Materials used in signs shall have good architectural character and shall be harmonious with both building design and the surrounding landscape.
2.
Signs shall have good scale in their design and in their visual relationship to buildings and surroundings.
3.
Colors shall be Used Harmoniously and with Restraint. Excessive brightness and brilliant colors shall be avoided.
4.
Lighting shall be Harmonious with the Design. If external spot or floor light is used, it shall be arranged so that the light source is shielded from view.
5.
Wall signs shall be part of the architectural concept. Size, color, lettering, location, and arrangement shall be harmonious with the building design, and shall be compatible with signs on adjoining buildings. Signs shall have good proportions.
6.
Ground signs shall be designed to be compatible with the architecture of the building. The same criteria applicable to wall signs shall apply to ground signs.
7.
Identification signs of a prototype design shall conform to the criteria for wall and ground signs.
§ 6-309 Historic Preservation Standards.
[Section deleted by Ord. 4210, 12-18-2006. The content of this section was incorporated into new sections for the Village Center District (6-212) and the Old Orland Historic District (6-209).]
§ 6-310 Fences.
B.
Prohibited Fences.
1.
Dangerous Fences. The following types of dangerous or hazardous fences shall not be permitted to be either erected or maintained within the Village:
a.
Barbed wire fences, except for utility substations;
b.
Electrical fences;
c.
Spiked fences;
d.
Fences with broken glass or other sharp points imbedded;
e.
Any other type of fence that could result in injuries to persons climbing on or over such fences; and
f.
Fences that are leaning in such a manner that an angle of 15° or more is produced when measured from the vertical;
2.
Temporary Fences. The following temporary fences shall not be permitted within the Village:
a.
Any temporary fence that remains in place for longer than six months.
b.
Any temporary fence located around the lot perimeter, except as permitted by the Village for construction or demolition.
c.
Snow fences (wooden or plastic), except for use as construction fencing or to direct snow drifts.
d.
Silt and erosion control fences, except for the purposes of erosion control during construction and soil stabilization.
[Ord. 4738, 6-18-2012] |
3.
Other Perimeter Fences. The following fences shall not be permitted to be either erected or maintained within five feet of property lot lines within the Village:
a.
Aluminum board fences (or similar metal board);
b.
Bramble/wicker fences;
c.
Cloth-based fences;
d.
Mesh fences (metal, plastic or otherwise);
e.
Netted fences;
f.
Shake fences;
g.
Slat based fences;
h.
Reed fences;
i.
Rod fences; and
j.
Wire fences (except chain link for residential properties).[Ord. 4926, 9-15-2014]
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010] |
C.
General Construction Requirements.
1.
Every fence to be erected within the Village shall be designed and constructed to resist and withstand a wind pressure of at least 20 pounds per square feet of the gross proposed area of the fence, less any openings from any angle of approach.
2.
All fence posts used in the construction of a fence shall be buried in the ground to a depth of at least 1/3 of the total length of said fence post.
3.
All fence parts, anchors, and shavings of wood or other organic materials shall be treated with a chemical treatment to protect them from deterioration when they are placed in or upon the ground.
4.
Alterations to the existing grade level preceding the use of a fence for the purpose of altering the height of the fence shall not be permitted.
5.
No fence shall be constructed in such a manner as to impede or alter the natural or engineered surface water drainage of the property upon which the fence is constructed or any adjoining property. A fence shall be installed three inches above the ground as measured from grade to bottom of fence panel to allow for natural surface water drainage. Exceptions may be made for open-style fences. Fences located in overland flow routes may have additional requirements pertaining to height above ground and being an open fence style in order to maintain stormwater flow as determined by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
6.
If a fence is to be painted, it shall be painted with a non-lead base paint.
7.
The finished side of all fences shall face the street and neighboring properties.
[Ord. 4610, 12-20-2010] |
D.
General Maintenance Requirements. Structurally maintain fences in good repair, as originally designed and installed, and as depicted and approved on a fence permit.
E.
Design, Location and Height Requirements of Fences in Residential Districts.
2.
In all residential districts, an ornamental fence may be erected on a premise anywhere, as long as it is entirely within the property where the permit is issued, including the front yard past the building line and the front and side yard past the building lines in the case of corner lots. The height of such fences shall not exceed four feet and such fences shall be an open-style fence consisting of wrought iron, galvanized steel, aluminum, powder coated, vinyl, wood or similar materials that does not block vision to an extent greater than 40% per lineal foot (60% open), and shall not include chain-link or wire fences or fences of similar construction.
[Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012; amended by Ord. 4996, 6-15-2015; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
3.
Intermittent ornamental components such as decorative metal posts, masonry bases, columns, and caps are allowed as part of ornamental fences, but must comply with the open/closed ratio prescribed in Section 6-310E2 above for each 10 feet length of fence. These intermittent elements are permitted to exceed the allowable fence height by up to 12 inches.
4.
Open fences that do not block vision to an extent greater than 40% per lineal foot (60% open) shall be permitted past the front setback line if there is a patio in the front setback. Such fences shall not exceed five feet in height, and shall extend only to the perimeter of the patio. Patio location shall comply with accessory structures regulations listed in Section 6-302.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
5.
Fences located in the rear or side yards in single family residential districts shall be regulated as follows:
a.
All perimeter fences shall be located behind the front building line.
b.
Perimeter fences located in the side or rear yards not facing a public right of way shall be of any material and design allowed in Section 6-310B and C, shall not exceed six feet in height, and may be located all the way up to the property line.
c.
Perimeter fences located in the side yard facing a public right of way (corner side yard, rear corner side yard) shall be of any material and design allowed in Section 6-310B and C, but shall not exceed six feet in height and must be setback a minimum of five feet from the corner side property line.
d.
Ornamental open-style perimeter fences located in the side yard facing a public right of way (corner side yard, rear corner side yard) consisting of wrought iron, galvanized steel, aluminum, powder coated, vinyl, wood or similar materials that does not block vision to an extent greater than 40% per lineal foot (60% open), shall be allowed as close as 12 inches from corner side property line as long as maximum height does not exceed five feet. Such fences shall not include chain-link or wire fences or fences of similar construction.
e.
Perimeter fences may be required to be setback further from the property line if after review by the Development Services Inspector, if it is determined that the sight lines will be blocked by the fence.
f.
Perimeter fences are permitted to be installed back to back. If a fence is installed so that an area exists between the property line and the fence, it is the responsibility of the property owner on whose property the fence is located to maintain said area.
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
6.
The following table summarizes the fence regulations listed in sections 1 through 4 above:
Table 6-310.E.5 | ||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Front Yard | Side Yard | Corner Side Yard (Side Yard Facing Public Row) | Rear Yard | Rear Yard Facing Public Row | Maximum Height | |
Minimum Required setback from property line | ||||||
All types of fences allowed by code. (See LDC 6-310,B,C) | Not Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | 6 feet |
N/A | 0 feet | 5 feet | 0 feet | 0 feet | ||
Open Style Ornamental Fences (60% open) | Not Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | 5 feet |
N/A | 0 feet | 1 feet | 0 feet | 0 feet | ||
Open Style Ornamental Fences (60% open) | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | Allowed | 4 feet |
0 feet | 0 feet | 0 feet | 0 feet | 0 feet | ||
[Amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017]
7.
All fences in the Old Orland Historic District shall be white picket fences and shall not exceed a height of five feet.
8.
Private fences and entry features must be located wholly on private property.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998] |
9.
Subdivision entryway features may not exceed nine feet in height.
[Ord. 3199, 11-16-1998] |
10.
Perimeter fences may be erected in side and rear setbacks behind the front building line around multi-family residential uses. Perimeter fences may be allowed in front yards when the front setback abuts arterial and major collector streets. Perimeter fences around a single multi-family development must be uniform in design, type, color and height.
[Ord. 4769, 12-3-2012]
11.
In all residential districts, no fence shall be permitted to be constructed on a vacant lot unless said lot is immediately adjacent to a lot improved with a residential principal structure under common ownership with the vacant lot.
a.
Said fence must enclose both lots so as not to create a physical barrier between the two lots.
b.
Said fence must be located at or behind the front building line of the principal structure on the adjacent improved lot.
c.
The authority herein granted shall expire within one year following the date on which ownership of either of the adjacent lots is separated from the other, unless the owner of the vacant lot receives a building permit and initiates construction of a principal structure on the vacant lot during that one-year period.
[Ord. 5336, 9-17-2018]
F.
Design and Height Requirements of Fences in Nonresidential Districts.
2.
Fences that are erected to separate residential and nonresidential properties shall meet the buffering requirements set forth in Section 6-305.
3.
Fencing required with Liquor Sales: At least 50% of the boundaries of any outdoor seating area on private property that will serve liquor shall be delineated, but not required to be fully enclosed, by a fence, wall, landscaping or similar barrier not less than 24 inches in height and not greater than 48 inches in height. A fence, wall, landscaping or similar barrier not less than 24 inches in height and not greater than 48 inches in height shall also be provided to distinguish between neighboring outdoor seating areas, where applicable. Additional protection may be required based upon the relationship between an outdoor dining seating area and the abutting vehicle zone. See the Village Code for additional regulations associated with the use of a public sidewalk for outdoor dining purposes.
[Amended by Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013; Ord. 5017, 8-17-2015]
G.
Fences That Screen Parking Lots. Any fences erected to screen parking lots shall meet the buffering requirements set forth in Section 6-305.
H.
Swimming Pool Barrier/Fences. Fences surrounding swimming pools, spas or other outdoor accessory structures that contain water shall be at least five feet in height. (See Section 2-102 Definitions "Swimming Pools" and Section 6-310.1 Swimming Pools). When pools are located on corner lots, and on a side or rear yard that abuts an adjacent public right-of-way, said pools shall be entirely screened from view via a six-foot-tall opaque fence.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
1.
Permits Application and Approval: A swimming pool or accessories thereto shall not be constructed, installed, enlarged or altered until plans/documents have been submitted and a permit has been obtained from The Village Code Official for construction of a Swimming Pool Barrier (fencing etc.). Section 6-310A of this Code shall regulate pool permits and construction.
a.
"Public Swimming Pool" Barrier/Fence Permit. A Village permit for fencing of a "Public Swimming Pool" will require an approval by county or state authorities having jurisdiction over "public swimming pools". These permit approvals shall be obtained before applying to the code official for a permit. Certified copies of these approvals shall be filed as part of the supporting data for the permit application.
b.
Land Owner Responsibility. Every swimming pool permit application shall include a letter signed by the land owner, acknowledging the responsibility of required site barrier with the intent of protecting the public from access during all times of construction and final use of the pool.
2.
Construction Plans and Owners Responsibility. A swimming pool permit application must include details and design for the construction of a pool and a pool "barrier" (fences walls or enclosures) for the protection of the public of at least five feet in height. A separate required fence barrier permit may be submitted with a letter signed by the land owner as referenced in Subsection H1a of this section.
a.
Above Ground Pool structure as a barrier. Where an aboveground pool structure is used as a barrier or where the barrier is mounted on top of the pool structure, and the means of access is a ladder or steps, then the ladder or steps either shall be capable of being secured locked or removed to prevent access, or the ladder or steps shall be surrounded by a barrier which meets the requirements of a "Barrier". When the ladder or steps are secured, locked, or removed, any opening created shall not allow the passage of a 2 inch (102 mm) diameter sphere.
b.
Deck, Handrail and Guardrail construction adjacent to a swimming pool must comply with the Village Building Code (5-1-13) See Village diagram of "Typical Pool Decks For Above Ground Pools" using stairs with a deck for an example. This is available from the Building Department.
3.
Barrier Construction. Enclosure barriers shall be constructed so as to prohibit the passage of a sphere larger than two inches in diameter through any opening or under the fence. Fences shall be designed to withstand a horizontal concentrated load of 200 pounds applied on a one-square-foot area at any point of the fence.
a.
Fences that are constructed of wood shall be protected against decay with openings no more than two inches horizontally, or solid masonry or wrought iron with openings of no more than two inches horizontally, or shall be constructed of minimum number 14 gauge woven wire mesh corrosion-resistant fence material with maximum two-inch diamond openings or openings not larger than two inches horizontal by four inches vertical. Basket weave fences are prohibited. All fence posts shall be decay or corrosion-resistant.
b.
A temporary "barrier" (fence, wall enclosure) may be installed to protect the public from access to the site during construction. If a temporary barrier is used during construction, the temporary barrier must be least four feet - zero inch in height and structurally designed to resist access from unauthorized persons using the specifications referenced for Barrier Construction. (See Subsection H1a of this section)
c.
A fence, barrier or enclosure wall shall be part of the pool permit application.
4.
Gates to such fences shall be self-closing and self-latching. Latches shall be placed four feet above grade, or shall otherwise be made inaccessible from the outside to small children.
5.
Proper safety procedures for temporary fencing must be taken during pool installation. A permanent fence must be installed within 21 days after pool is filled with water and must comply with Section 6-310H1, 2 and 3 of this section.
[Ord. 4125, 4-17-2006]
I.
Waterfowl Barriers. Waterfowl barriers are horizontal or vertical fences of two or more posts and baling twine, poly-twine wire, heavy monofilament fishing line, or ordinary string/rope strung between posts that may not exceed 18 inches in height. Private waterfowl barriers shall be entirely placed on private property, six inches from the lot line, and only along those lot lines that parallel a pond or other water body. Waterfowl barriers shall be allowed on a temporary basis during peak waterfowl migration months from August 15 to November 15 in the fall and from February 15 to May 15 in the spring.
[Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
§ 6-310.1 Swimming Pools.
[Entire section revised by Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; Ord. 4132, 4-17-2006; Entire section moved from Section 6-302 by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
A.
Swimming Pools.
1.
General Permit, Plan and Site Requirements.
a.
Permit(s). Every swimming pool hereafter constructed, installed, altered, maintained, removed or demolished shall comply with all applicable provisions of this section. No person shall construct, erect or alter an inground swimming pool without having obtained a building permit. Pool inspections, shall be as provided for in the Village Code (5-1-13), prior to the use of a pool:
(1)
State and County Approvals. Construction of a "Public Swimming Pool" will require an approval by county or state authorities having jurisdiction over "public swimming pools". These permit approvals shall be obtained before applying to the code official for a permit. Certified copies of these approvals shall be filed as part of the supporting data for the permit application.
b.
Plans and Specifications. Applications for permits for swimming pools shall be accompanied by plans and specifications in duplicate and in sufficient detail showing the following:
(1)
Survey and Site Plan. A recent plat of survey and a site plan showing lot lines, easements if any, pool area plan and elevations with dimensions all drawn to scale of not less than one-eight inch to the foot.
(A)
Proposed Final Site Grade Engineering. Site engineering plans must be submitted to The Village by a State of Illinois licensed engineer. Proposed plans shall include grade topographies for; established streets, drainage easements and proposed finished grades. The design shall be to approved engineered storm drainage elevations.
(B)
Engineering Design Approval. Before a pool permit can be issued, The Village Engineering Department must approve proposed grading plans prior to the issuance of any swimming pool before a pool permit issuance. Drainage easements shall be verified and conform to recorded engineering grade elevations.
(C)
Final "As Built" Location and Topography. After completion and before the use of a swimming pool, an "As Built" plan must be submitted by an Illinois licensed professional engineer. The final site grade elevations must conform to engineering drainage and location standards.
(2)
Location and Setbacks. Swimming pools shall be allowed in rear and side yards only with a minimum of 10 feet from side and rear lot lines. Pools placed within a side yard shall not be located within 25 feet of a front yard. If any part of the pool structure, pool deck or required pool fencing encroaches on a recorded easement and damage results when the easement is used for its stated purposes, then repair of said damage is the sole responsibility of the homeowner. Pools shall conform to the following conditions:
(A)
Pools within a side yard shall not be located within 25 feet of a building front yard setback.
(B)
No part of the pool shall be allowed within the minimum required side yard building setback of each zoning district.
(C)
Exterior pools shall provide a minimum 48 inches clear access distance around the pool from other structures located on the lot.
(D)
Glass and glazing near a pool shall meet the requirements of the Village Building Code for glass in hazardous locations.
(E)
The maximum total lot coverage including the pool area must comply with the applicable zoning district requirement.
(F)
Swimming pool fence and barrier enclosures shall comply with Section 6-310H of this Code.
(G)
The minimum side yard set back to the edge of the pool (water) shall not be less than 10 feet - zero inch.
(3)
Fences and Barriers. A swimming pool permit application must include details and design for the construction of a pool "barrier" (fences walls or enclosures) for the protection of the public. A separate required fence permit may be submitted with a swimming pool permit application provided a signed letter is received from the land owner acknowledging the responsibility of required site barrier protection during and after construction. See Section 6-310H "Swimming Pool Fences" of this Code for fence regulations. A separate fence permit is not required for spas and hot tubs with a lockable safety cover that complies with ASTM F 1346. In the event of abandonment, such barriers must remain with the swimming pool, hot tub or spa and must comply with the provisions of this section.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
(4)
Lot Coverage. The maximum lot coverage including the pool areas shall be calculated and submitted with plans for each pool permit application. This calculation shall comply with requirements of the applicable zoning district.
(5)
Electrical Service. New residential construction service location shall be on the side (side yard) of all buildings. Wiring locations above, below or near a pool shall conform to the Village Electrical Code (Village Code 5-3). "JULIE" shall be called for locations of electrical service wires before excavation.
2.
Location and setbacks.
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653[1]]
a.
In-ground pools.
(1)
In-ground pools and above-ground appurtenances are permitted within the side and rear yards with a minimum of 10 feet from side and rear lot lines.
(2)
Pools within a side yard shall not be located within 25 feet of a building front yard setback.
(3)
No part of the pool and above-ground appurtenances shall be allowed within the minimum required side yard building setback of each zoning district.
(4)
Exterior pools shall provide a minimum 48-inch clear access distance around the pool from other structures located on the lot.
(5)
Glass and glazing near a pool shall meet the requirements of the Village Building Code for glass in hazardous locations.
(6)
The maximum total lot coverage, including the pool area, must comply with the applicable zoning district requirement.
(7)
No portion of the swimming pool or its above-ground appurtenances shall be located within any existing easement.
(8)
Swimming pool fence and barrier enclosures shall comply with § 6-310.H of this code.
(9)
In side and rear yards of corner lots, and in side or rear yards that are adjacent to a public right-of-way, in-ground pools shall be screened from view via a six-foot-tall, opaque fence constructed of wood, vinyl, or masonry. Fences must abide by the rules and regulations as prescribed in § 6-310.
b.
Above-ground pools.
(1)
Above-ground Pools and above-ground appurtenances shall be allowed within the rear yard only with a minimum of 10 feet from side and rear lot lines.
(2)
Exterior pools shall provide a minimum 48-inch clear access distance around the pool from other structures located on the lot.
(3)
Glass and glazing near a pool shall meet the requirements of the Village Building Code for glass in hazardous locations.
(4)
The maximum total lot coverage, including the pool area, must comply with the applicable zoning district requirement.
(5)
Swimming pool fence and barrier enclosures shall comply with § 6-310.H of this code.
(6)
In rear yards of corner lots, and in rear yards that are adjacent to a public right-of-way, above-ground pools shall be screened from view via a six-foot-tall, opaque fence constructed of wood, vinyl, or masonry. Fences must abide by the rules and regulations as prescribed in § 6-310.
(7)
Above-ground pools shall not be less than four feet from other structures.
(8)
No portion of the swimming pool or its above-ground appurtenances shall be located within any existing easement.
[1]
Editor's Note: This ordinance also repealed former Subsection A., Definitions.
3.
In-ground swimming pools.
a.
Applications for permits for In-ground swimming pools shall be accompanied by plans and specifications in duplicate and in sufficient detail showing the following:
(1)
The "General Permit, Plan and Site Requirements" of Items 1.a., 1.b. and Definitions Item 2. of this section above shall apply to Inground Ground Swimming Pools.
(2)
Pool dimensions, depths and volume in gallons.
(3)
Type and size of filter systems, filtration and backwash capacities.
(4)
Pool piping layout, with all pipes and valves shown, and types of materials to be used.
(5)
The rated capacity of the pool pump in gallons per minute, and its working head at filtration and backwash flows.
(6)
The size and type of waste disposal system.
(7)
Location and type of waste disposal system.
(8)
Type and location of walk and fence construction as required. All swimming pools, appurtenances, water supply and drainage systems shall be constructed in conformity with approved plans. If deviation from such plans is desired, a supplementary plan shall be filed with the Village and all work shall stop until the supplementary plan has been approved.
b.
Design and Construction.
(1)
Pools shall be constituted of concrete, steel or other approved materials, and shall have an impervious finish which provides an easily cleaned surface.
(2)
Swimming pools shall be engineered and designed to comply with all applicable provisions of the building ordinances of the Village of Orland Park including those ordinances relating to the specific materials used where not in conflict with this ordinance. A temporary private residential swimming pool shall be engineered and designed to withstand all anticipated forces to which it will be subjected. Wood shall not be used at or below grade as an integral part of the structure of both types of residential swimming pools. All wood used in swimming pool structures shall be protected against deterioration.
(3)
The bottom surface shall be smooth, to facilitate cleaning, and shall slope to the main drain. The slope of the bottom of any part of a pool in which the water is less than five feet in depth shall not be more than one foot in each 10 feet. The maximum slope where water is five feet or more in depth shall not exceed one foot in two feet.
(4)
The side and end walls of a pool shall present a smooth finish and shall be vertical to a depth of at least six feet. The pool walls may be vertical for 30 inches from the water level below which the wall may be curved to the bottom with a radius at any point equal to the difference between the depth, at that point, and 30 inches. The slope of the pool walls to a depth of six feet shall not be more than one foot horizontal in six feet vertical.
(5)
Swimming pools shall be designed to withstand the water pressure from within and to resist the pressure of the earth when the pool is empty, to a pressure of 2,200 pounds per square foot.
c.
Recirculation and Filtering.
(1)
Every pool shall be equipped with a recirculating system capable of filtering the entire contents of the pool in eight hours.
(2)
Filters shall be capable of maintaining the clarity of the water to permit the ready identification, through an eight foot depth of water, of a disc two inches in diameter, which is divided into four quadrants in alternate colors of red and white.
(3)
Sufficient surface area shall be provided in pressure type filters (sand or diatomaceous earth) to filter pool contents in eight hours or less at a maximum rate of three gallons per square foot per minute. In vacuum type filter-aid filters, the filtration rate shall not exceed two gallons per square foot per minute. The quality of the filters shall be such that under normal operating conditions backwashing for cleaning purposes shall not be necessary more frequently than once every four days for pressure sand filters and once every two days for pressure or vacuum diatomaceous earth filters.
(4)
All pressure filters shall be equipped with influent and effluent pressure gauges to determine the pressure differential and frequency of cleaning. All other filters shall be equipped with at least one pressure, vacuum, or compound gauge, as applicable, which shall be positioned in such a way as to determine the differential across the filter and the need of cleaning.
(5)
All pressure filter systems shall be equipped with an air release at the high point in the system. Each sand filter shall be provided with a visual means of determining when the filter has been restored to original cleanliness.
(6)
Operating instructions shall be posted on every filter system. All valves shall be properly designated, indicating their purpose.
(7)
The filters, and their installation and operation, shall conform to the requirements of the National Swimming Pool Institute "Minimum Standards for Residential Pools".
(8)
The recirculating pump shall have a sufficient capacity to discharge the volume of water required for the required turnover of the pool against the maximum head in the recirculation system. The pump shall be capable of backwashing pressure sand filters at a rate of 15 gallons per square foot of filter area. An approved hair and lint strainer, except on vacuum type filters, shall be provided on the suction side of the recirculating pump. Hair and lint catchers shall be so designed that they can be easily dismantled for cleaning and inspection. The basket of the strainer shall be non-corrosive; shall not have openings more than one-eighth inch in width or diameter; and have the area of strainer openings not less than five times the cross-sectional area of the inlet pipe.
d.
Pool Piping.
(1)
The piping shall be sized to permit the rated flow for filtering and cleaning without exceeding the maximum head available from the pump at the flow.
(2)
Where the water velocity exceeds 10 feet per second, calculations shall be provided to verify correct operation with the pump and piping provided.
(3)
The recirculating piping and fittings shall meet the following requirements:
(4)
Valves with full size ports shall be installed throughout the system and on the main suction line in an accessible place.
e.
Inlets, Outlets and Make-up Water.
(1)
Inlets. The recirculation inlets shall be so located as to produce uniform circulation of water throughout the pool. The inlets shall discharge at a minimum depth of 10 inches below the pool overflow level, and a minimum of one recirculation system inlet shall be provided for every 615 square feet of surface area of the pool.
(2)
Make-up Water. Every pool shall be equipped with facilities for adding make-up water as needed. There shall be no physical connection between the water supply line and the pool system. If the make-up water is added directly to the pool, the outlet shall be at least six inches above the upper rim of the pool, and if it discharges to a surge or balancing tank, the outlet shall be at least six inches above the rim of the tank. If a hose connection from a sill cock or the plumbing fixture is to be used for supplying make-up water, then an approved in-line vacuum breaker or back flow preventer shall be installed between the sill cock or control valve at the fixture and hose connection.
(3)
Outlet. A main outlet shall be provided at the deepest point in every pool, for recirculating and for emptying the pool. If the pool is more than 30 feet in length, multiple outlets shall be provided and spaced not more than 30 feet apart, nor closer than four feet to any wall. One outlet shall be provided for each 800 square feet of surface or area. All pool drain outlets shall be equipped with gratings having an effective or net area of not less than 10 times the area of the outlet pipe. The grating shall be of such a design that they cannot be readily removed by bathers. The recirculating piping shall be so arranged that the pool can be emptied to the sewer through a six-inch air gap. No direct connection shall be made to the sewer. Pools shall be equipped with facilities for completely emptying the pool and the discharge of the pool water, if to the sewer system of the Village, shall be at a rate not exceeding 250 gallons per minute.
f.
Overflow Gutters.
(1)
A pool with a water surface area of 800 square feet or more shall be provided with overflow gutters on all vertical walls and extending around the entire perimeter of the pool.
(2)
The overflow gutter shall be of the open, roll-over, or semi-recessed type with a smooth finish and a level lip.
(3)
The gutter shall be at least four inches deep and shall pitch at least one-quarter inch per foot to the drain.
(4)
Drains shall be spaced at least every 20 feet in the gutter and shall have at least two inch connections to the drainage system.
(5)
The drainage system shall have an indirect connection to the sewer, with at least a six inch air gap.
(6)
Satisfactory proof shall be furnished to the Village Building Director that adequate run off capacity will be obtained by other arrangements or modifications in gutter design proposed for use in closed or reverse flow systems of recirculation.
g.
Skimmers.
(1)
On pool surface area up to 500 square feet at least one skimmer; 500 square feet to 800 square feet two skimmers; 800 square feet to 1,100 square feet three skimmers; and 1,100 square feet to 1,500 square feet four skimmers. Skimmers shall be located at least 30 feet apart.
(2)
The skimming device shall be built into the pool wall and shall develop sufficient velocity on the pool water surface to induce floating oils and wastes into the skimmer from the entire pool area.
(3)
The piping and other parts of a skimming system shall be designed for a total capacity of at least 80% of the required filter flow of the recirculation system, and no skimmer shall be designed for a flow-through rate of less than 30 gallons per minute or 3.75 gallons per minute per lineal inch of water.
(4)
The skimmer weir shall be automatically adjustable and shall operate freely with continuous action to variations in water level over a range of at least four inches.
(5)
An easily removable and cleanable basket or screen through which all overflow water must pass shall be provided to trap large solids.
(6)
The skimmer shall be provided with an automatically controlled equalizer pipe to prevent air lock in the suction line. The equalizer pipe shall be not less than two inches in diameter and be located at least one foot below the lowest overflow level of the skimmer. The automatically controlled valve or equivalent device shall remain tightly closed under normal operating conditions of the skimmer, but shall automatically open when the skimmer becomes starved and the water level drops below the lowest overflow level of the skimmer.
h.
Water Supply and Conditioning.
(1)
All water used in connection with the filling and operation of a private residential swimming pool or a public swimming pool shall come from the Village of Orland Park water distribution system or from the private wells now used for said purpose existing on the effective date of this ordinance; provided, however, that if a private residential swimming pool shall be constructed as herein provided in a part of the Village not served by the Village water distribution system, a private well may be used.
(2)
The source of water supply to all pools shall be equipped with approved backflow protection.
(3)
Over-the-rim filling spouts shall not be permitted unless located under a diving board or installed in a manner approved by the Director of the Building Department.
(4)
Equipment shall be provided for disinfection through the use of an effective germicide and algicide (such as high test calcium hypochlorite or sodium hypochlorite) and shall allow for pH factor control. Any disinfection method using materials other than chlorine compounds shall be subject to the approval of the Building Department.
(5)
Disinfection equipment shall be capable of maintaining a disinfectant of 0.5 parts per million.
(6)
The disinfectant shall be introduced into the recirculation system ahead of the filters.
(7)
Gaseous chlorination systems shall not be used for private residential swimming pools.
i.
Electrical Equipment.
(1)
All electrical work shall comply with Article 680 of the National Electric Code currently enforced by the Village.
(2)
All electrical work must be performed by Registered Electrical Contractors. No work is to be started before Building Permit is approved and issued.
(3)
All work must be inspected before any enclosures of any type are made.
(4)
All equipment used must bear Underwriters Laboratories (UL) label or other nationally recognized testing agencies and inspected before installation.
(5)
Reinforcing rods, ladders, diving boards and all non-current conveying metal parts in swimming pool area must be grounded with #8 copper wire using approved clamps and lugs that will require a tool for installation or removal.
(6)
An unbroken #12 green insulated copper wire shall be used for grounding to distribution panel. Grounding of all equipment related to swimming pool such as deck boxes, transformers, filters, heaters must be grounded and visible for inspection.
(7)
The use of metallic raceways will not satisfy the requirements for grounding.
(8)
Rigid steel conduit from pool boxes to distribution panel shall be of ample size to accommodate wiring as per code requirements.
(9)
Only 12 volt underwater light shall be used and it must bear UL label or other nationally recognized testing agency label. Light and transformer wiring shall be of ample capacity to carry current no smaller than #10 copper. Distance must be considered for determination of any voltage drop.
(10)
Deck box must be elevated no less than eight inches from deck of the pool, and no less than four feet from edge of the pool of sufficient size to accommodate all wiring. These boxes shall be so located as to avoid any tripping or damage hazard and it is recommended to be installed under diving board or some permanent structure such as fences, benches, observation tower, or similar structures with approved raceway to be of copper or brass or other corrosion resisting metal of threaded type fittings. Junction boxes shall have provisions for effective grounding by using threaded brass screws and lugs.
(11)
Service drop conductors or any other open overhead wiring shall not be located above swimming pool, surrounding area 10 feet horizontally from pool edge, diving observation tower, or other similar structures.
j.
Steps or Ladders.
(1)
At least two means of egress in the form of steps, ladders, or step holes shall be provided for each private swimming pool.
(2)
At least one means of egress shall be located at the deep end and one at the shallow end of the pool.
(3)
Treads of steps, ladders, or step holes shall be constructed of non-slip material and shall be at least three inches wide for their entire length.
(4)
Ladders or step holes shall have handrails on both sides.
k.
Heaters and Boilers. Swimming pool heaters and boilers, when installed, shall comply with applicable requirements of the American Standards Association (ASA), American Gas Association (AGA), American Society of Mechanical engineers (ASME), Underwriters' Laboratories (UL), or other nationally recognized testing agencies.
l.
Walks.
(1)
The pool shall have an unobstructed walk area not less than three feet wide and extending entirely around the pool.
(2)
The walk area shall be constructed of impervious material and shall have a non-slip surface.
(3)
The walk shall be sloped away from the pool at a pitch of at least one-quarter inch per foot.
m.
Diving Boards. No diving board or platform more than three feet above water level shall be installed for use in connection with any private residential swimming pool. No diving board shall be permitted over any portion of the pool that is less than seven feet in depth.
n.
Water Drainage.
(1)
Water drained from the pool shall not be discharged to the sewer system during periods of rain or storms. At no time shall the rate of drain water discharge exceed a flow of 250 gallons per minute.
(2)
Water drained from the pool shall not be drained over an adjacent owner's property but must be drained to streets with curb and gutters or to street drainage ditches, provided it is transported from the street right-of-way line to the street with a closed header, hose or pipeline. Any prohibited drainage shall constitute a nuisance.
o.
Cleanliness and Health.
(1)
All swimming pools shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition and all equipment shall be maintained in a satisfactory operating condition during periods when such pools are in use.
(2)
No swimming pool shall be used, kept, maintained or operated in the Village of Orland Park if such use, keeping, maintaining or operating shall be the occasion of any nuisance, danger to life, or detriment to health.
p.
Water Condition.
(1)
The water in a swimming pool shall be conditioned so that the pH is between 7.2 and 7.6 at all times.
(2)
A chlorine residual of between 0.5 ppm and 2.0 ppm as free available chlorine shall be maintained whenever swimmers are present in the pool. At no time shall the chlorine residual be less than 0.5 ppm combined.
(4)
The water shall be free of any organic materials.
q.
Protective Covering. A suitable substantial protective cover shall be provided and installed over all private residential swimming pool surfaces during the non-swimming season.
r.
Presence of Swimmer. A responsible adult shall be present at all times that private residential swimming pools are in use.
s.
Life Saving Equipment. Every private residential swimming pool shall be equipped with one or more throwing ring buoys not more than 15 inches in diameter and having a 3/16 inch manila line, or other line as approved by the Building Director, attached to a length equal to the diameter or width plus the maximum depth of the pool but not more than 60 feet total, and one or more light but strong poles with blunted ends and not less than 12 feet in length, for making reach assists or rescues. Life saving equipment, as required by the Director, shall be provided and maintained so as to be immediately available for use.
t.
Abandoned Pools. Unused pools on residential premises not occupied or dwelt in for periods of 30 days or more shall be completely drained or equipped with an approved pool cover (at minimum it must be a mesh safety cover). Abandoned pools shall be removed or filled to the grade of adjacent land. Such unused or abandoned pools shall not create an attractive nuisance. They shall not become a breeding ground for mosquitos. Such unused or abandoned pools not treated in the manner prescribed in this section shall be deemed a public health and safety hazard.
[Amended by Ord. 4839, 9-16-2013]
u.
Infectious Disease. It shall be unlawful for any person having an infectious or contagious disease to use any swimming pool, and no person in charge of any pool shall knowingly permit such use.
4.
Above-Ground Swimming Pools.
a.
Applications for permits for swimming pools shall be accompanied by.
(1)
Lot or plot plan showing lot lines, easements if any, and location of pool. Swimming pools shall be allowed in rear yards only with a minimum of 10 feet from side and rear lot lines. If any part of the pool structure, pool deck or required pool fencing encroaches on a recorded easement and damage results when the easement is used for its stated purposes, then repair of said damage is the sole responsibility of the homeowner.
[Ord. 3354, 4-17-2000]
(2)
Type and location of fence construction as required.
b.
Recirculation and Filtering.
c.
Inlets, Outlets and Make-up Water.
(1)
There shall be no physical connection between the water supply line and the pool system. If the make-up water is added directly to the pool the outlet shall be at least six inches above the upper rim of the pool. If a hose connection from a sill cock or the plumbing fixture is to be used for supplying make-up water, then an approved in-line vacuum breaker or back flow preventer shall be installed between the sill cock or control valve at the fixture and hose connection.
d.
Skimmers.
(1)
The skimming device shall be built into the pool wall and shall develop sufficient velocity on the pool water surface to induce floating oils and wastes into the skimmer from the entire pool area.
(2)
The piping and other parts of a skimming system shall be designed for a total capacity of at least 80% of the required filter flow of the recirculation system, and no skimmer shall be designed for a flow-through rate of less than 30 gallons per minute or 3.75 gallons per minute per lineal inch of water.
(3)
The skimmer weir shall be automatically adjustable and shall operate freely with continuous action to variations in water level over a range of at least four inches.
(4)
An easily removable and cleanable basket or screen through which all overflow water must pass shall be provided to trap large solids.
f.
Water Drainage.
(1)
Water drained from the pool shall not be discharged to the sewer system during periods of rain or storms. At no time shall the rate of drain water discharge exceed a flow of 250 gallons per minute.
(2)
Water drained from the pool shall not be drained over and adjacent owner's property but must be drained to streets with curb and gutters or to street drainage ditches, provided it is transported from the street right-of-way line to the street with a closed header, hose or pipeline. Any prohibited drainage shall constitute a nuisance.
g.
Cleanliness and Health.
(1)
All swimming pools shall be maintained in a clean and sanitary condition and all equipment shall be maintained in a satisfactory operating condition during periods when such pools are in use.
(2)
No swimming pool shall be used, kept, maintained or operated in the Village of Orland Park if such use, keeping, maintaining or operating shall be the occasion of any nuisance, danger to life, or determent to health.
h.
Water Condition.
(1)
The water in a swimming pool shall be conditioned so that the pH is between 7.2 and 7.6 at all times.
(2)
A chlorine residual of between 0.5 ppm and 2.0 ppm as free available chlorine shall be maintained whenever swimmers are present in the pool. At no time shall the chlorine residual be less than 0.5 ppm combined.
i.
Abandoned Pools. Unused pools on residential premises not occupied or dwelt in for periods of 30 days or more shall be completely drained or equipped with an approved pool cover. Abandoned pools shall be removed or filled to the grade of adjacent land. Such unused or abandoned pools shall not create an attractive nuisance. They shall not become a breeding ground for mosquitos. Such unused or abandoned pools not treated in the manner prescribed in this section shall be deemed a public health and safety hazard.
j.
Infectious Disease. It shall be unlawful for any person having an infectious or contagious disease to use any swimming pool, and no person in charge of any pool shall knowingly permit such use.
[The swimming pool section was moved from 6-302.1 to 6-301.1 by Ord. 4574, 7-6-2010]
§ 6-311 Wireless Communication Facilities and Satellite Dishes.
[Amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 4442, 12-15-2008; Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; Ord. 5336, 9-17-2018; 2-4-2025 by Ord. No. 5984]
A.
Purpose and Intent. To ensure the health, safety and welfare of the residents of the Village, all wireless communication facilities in the Village must comply with the following standards and regulations.
B.
Definition. Wireless communication facility means infrastructure such as antenna, support structures, equipment, accessory buildings, parking, and other uses associated with and ancillary to wireless communication transmission.
C.
Exceptions. Dish antennas less than one meter in diameter, private residence antennas, and private residence amateur radio equipment are not regulated by this Code section.
D.
Authorization. No Person, firm, partnership, corporation, trust or other legal entity shall install or modify a wireless communication facility without obtaining Village authorization as described below.
E.
Application.
1.
An application or petition submitted to the Development Services Department for a wireless communication facility will require an administrative review for wireless communication collocations, or a special use permit for new monopoles or utility sub-stations (e.g. communication shelters). See Section 5-101 General Procedures, Requirements and Regulations for process details. The following required documentation must be submitted as part of any petition:
a.
As-built plat of survey of the subject lot showing the exact location and dimensions of the proposed wireless communication facility;
b.
Complete description of the proposal.
c.
A scaled elevation drawing showing all proposed visible equipment.
d.
Structural plans and a structural analysis report prepared and stamped by a licensed Structural Engineer. No approvals or permits shall be issued until all engineering reviews have been completed and approved by the Village. All plans must meet all applicable building codes and current industry standards.
e.
Letter of authorization from the property owner.
2.
No project shall be constructed without meeting all required building codes and obtaining necessary building permits.
F.
General Standards of Wireless Communication Facilities.
1.
Wireless communication facilities shall whenever and wherever possible collocate on existing vertical infrastructure (e.g. towers, buildings etc.) and use stealth techniques and technologies to minimize their visual and physical presence on a tower or building and shall employ methods that blend wireless infrastructure into the surroundings so that they are not visible or noticeable, particularly from neighboring rights-of-way, parks and single family homes. Wireless communication facilities must minimize or avoid whenever possible any adverse aesthetic and visual impacts to the land, property, building or tower on which they locate and neighbor.
2.
Landscaping and opaque fences shall be used to mitigate the effects of any ground equipment and/or utility sub-stations per the design standards for new freestanding wireless communication facilities of Section 6-311G3g below.
3.
Wireless communication facilities shall comply with all site and structural requirements as outlined in the Land Development Code unless otherwise stated in this Code section, and shall be compatible in terms of architecture and site design with the surrounding neighborhood.
4.
No equipment shall be operated so as to produce noise above 45 dB as measured from the nearest property line of the lot on which the wireless communication facility is located.
5.
Wireless communication facilities shall not be artificially lighted or marked except as required by law.
6.
The color and materials of wireless communication facilities shall blend with the surrounding environment for visual harmony and to reduce physical masses. This may include matching or complementing building colors and facades, rooftop units or infrastructure, and/or more generally the sky.
G.
Location and Standards of Wireless Communication Facilities.
1.
Wireless communication facilities may collocate as a permitted use via administrative review on existing vertical infrastructure such as towers (e.g. existing lattice towers and monopoles), utility transmission towers (with ComEd approvals), and on water towers provided they do not include accessory buildings like shelters, which are considered utility sub-stations. Monopoles and existing legal non-conforming lattice towers hosting collocations shall be allowed a single increase in height of not more than 50 feet over the original tower height via administrative review to accommodate collocations. If a tower is existing legal non-conforming because it is within 500 feet of a residential building, the height shall not be increased. Water tower collocations shall be allowed a single increase in height of not more than 50 feet over the first collocation, which is considered the original height.
a.
Placement of additional equipment on a non-conforming structure shall not be considered an expansion of the non-conformity provided all building code safety and structural requirements are met.
2.
Wireless communication facilities may collocate as a permitted use via administrative review on non-residential buildings outside of the Old Orland Historic District and on non-landmarked buildings using stealth techniques and technologies provided they do not include accessory buildings like shelters, which are considered utility sub-stations. The collocation shall not increase the height of the building more than 15 feet in any zoning district and shall meet all building code and structural requirements.
3.
Wireless communication facilities may locate as a new freestanding monopole via a special use permit on any non-residential parcel located in the VC Village Center District, BIZ General Business District, MFG Manufacturing District, COR Mixed Use District or ORI Mixed Use District, or on institutional parcels in any zoning district provided proximity requirements to residential buildings are met.
a.
The parcel must meet the minimum lot size requirement of the zoning district in which it will be located.
b.
Freestanding wireless communication facilities must meet all setback requirements of the zoning district in which they will be located.
c.
Freestanding wireless communication facilities can not be located in the required landscape buffers of the zoning district in which they will be located.
d.
Freestanding wireless communication facilities must be a minimum of 500 feet from any residential building.
e.
Freestanding wireless communication towers shall be no taller than 100 feet.
f.
All new wireless communication towers shall be self-supporting monopoles, except for towers installed by and used for government purposes. Lattice towers may be allowed for government uses when necessary. Guyed towers are prohibited. All towers shall be constructed with at least one release point so as to bend and fold over on themselves when necessary and meet current industry standards for engineering.
g.
The base and ground equipment of new freestanding wireless communication facilities shall be screened with an eight-foot tall solid, opaque fence enclosure constructed of either wood or neutral colored (e.g. non-white) vinyl material. The base and ground equipment enclosure shall be landscaped using Type 2 Bufferyard requirements as outlined in Section 6-305, "Landscape and Tree Preservation," of this Code. If the required bufferyard cannot be accomplished due to spatial constraints, other incremental improvements or a fee in lieu of landscaping may be required to mitigate the visual impact to the surrounding area.
h.
Existing on site vegetation shall be preserved or enhanced where possible, and disturbance of existing topography shall be minimized, unless such disturbance would reduce the visual impact on the surrounding area.
4.
A special use permit shall not be granted for a new freestanding wireless communication facility unless one or more of the following reasons is found to support it:
a.
The planned wireless communication equipment would exceed the structural capacity of an existing or approved tower or structure within the search radius, as documented by a qualified and licensed professional structural engineer, and the existing or approved tower or structure cannot be reinforced, modified, or replaced to accommodate the planned or equivalent equipment at a reasonable cost;
b.
The planned wireless communication equipment would cause interference impacting the usability of other existing or planned wireless infrastructure, as documented by a qualified and licensed professional engineer, and the interference cannot be prevented at a reasonable cost;
c.
Existing or approved towers and structures within the search radius cannot accommodate the planned wireless communication equipment at a height necessary to function reasonably, as documented by a qualified and licensed professional engineer.
5.
Freestanding wireless communication towers and accessory structures shall avoid environmentally sensitive areas and historically, culturally, or architecturally significant areas and their associated view-sheds.
6.
New freestanding wireless communication facilities not within the jurisdiction of the Village of Orland Park but within the 1 1/2 mile extraterritorial jurisdiction of the Village of Orland Park shall fully comply with the standards and regulations of this section concerning proximity to residential lots.
7.
A small wireless facility (as defined in Section 3-10-3 of Ordinance Number 5314 entitled "An Ordinance Amending The Municipal Code Of The Village Of Orland Park Relative To The Permitting, Regulation And Deployment Of Small Wireless Facilities") shall be a permitted use in all rights-of-way in any zoning district established by Section 6-101 of this Land Development Code and a permitted use on private property in the BIZ General Business, MFG Manufacturing and ORI Mixed Use Office, Research and Industrial Districts. In addition, to the extent of any conflicts or inconsistencies between the provisions of this Subsection G and the provisions of said Ordinance Number 5314, the provisions of Ordinance Number 5314 shall govern and control.
H.
Removal of Facility.
1.
The Village, through proper legal procedures, may require the owner of a wireless communication facility or owner of the land where the facility is located to remove it upon occurrence of any of the following events:
2.
The Village reserves the right to retain the authority to remove a freestanding wireless communication facility when the above events occur and when the owner and/or the land owner do not comply with these regulations. The facility and all associated ancillary equipment, batteries, devices, structures or supports for that system will be removed at the owner's and/or land owner's expense and the costs of removal shall be a lien against the property. The owner shall be notified via a violation notice and must comply within 60 days from the time of notification.
§ 6-312 Congregate Elderly Housing.
The Land Development Code of the Village of Orland Park, as amended, is hereby further amended to delete Section 6-312, "Congregate Elderly Housing" in its entirety.
[Ord. 4647, 5-16-2011]
§ 6-313 Pollution Control Standards.
A.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to ensure that industrial, research, and other business activities are good neighbors to adjoining properties by controlling the emission of noise, odors, glare, vibration, smoke, dust, liquid wastes, radiation, radioactivity, and similar pollutants. Accordingly, this section sets forth performance standards and conditions with which the Village expects the construction and operation of industrial, research, and other business activities to comply. In many cases, the relation of a prospective use to all of these standards cannot be judged properly at the time that a building permit is issued or some other form of development approval is granted. In such cases, the recipient of the permit or approval should note that these performance standards, like all the other provisions of these regulations, are continuing obligations and that all industrial, research and other business uses shall be expected to operate in compliance with these standards. Any land use which fails to comply with these standards shall be in violation of these regulations.
B.
General Standards and Measures of Compliance.
1.
All uses shall be conducted so as to preclude any nuisance, hazard or commonly-recognized offensive condition or characteristics of the use, including the creation or emission on other properties of dust, gas, smoke, noise, fumes, odors, vibrations, particulate matter, chemical compounds, toxic matter, fire, explosions, electrical disturbance, heat, glare, or excessive night illumination. At any time before or after a building is used or occupied, the Director of the Building Department may require that adequate control measures be provided in accordance with the requirements or standards of the appropriate state or federal government agency responsible for regulating that condition or pollutant, in order to protect the public health, safety, comfort, convenience and general welfare from any such nuisance, hazard, condition or pollutant.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
2.
Federal and state environmental regulations may also apply to one or more of the features governed by the standards in Subsection C, below. It is not the intent of this section to supersede or replace those federal or state regulations. Rather, the intent is for the standards of this section to supplement and complement any applicable federal and state regulations. If any standards herein conflict with an applicable federal or state standard, then the federal or state standard shall control.
C.
Performance Standards. All uses and structures permitted in Article 6, Part I (Districts) of these regulations shall meet the following standards, except as otherwise provided by these regulations:
1.
Noise. Noise shall be muffled so as not to become objectionable at or beyond the property line due to intermittent beat frequency, shrillness, or intensity. Each land use shall conform to the noise standards set forth from time to time by the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency.
2.
Vibration. No activity or operation shall cause or create earthborne vibrations that are discernible at or beyond the property line to the human sense of feeling for three minutes or more duration in any one hour.
3.
Smoke. Smoke emissions shall not exceed the maximum limits established by the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency.
4.
Dust and Other Particulate Matter. Solid or liquid particulate matter shall not be emitted at any point in a concentration exceeding 3/10 grains per cubic foot of the conveying gas or air.
5.
Gases. Fumes or gases shall not be emitted at any point in concentrations or amounts that are noxious, toxic, corrosive, or in excess of any applicable maximum limits established by state or federal regulations.
6.
Toxic Matter. Each land use shall conform to the toxic matter standards set forth from time to time by the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency.
7.
Odors. Odors from any use shall not be discernible at or beyond the property line. Each land use shall conform to the odorous matter standards set forth from time to time by the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency.
8.
Fire and Explosion Hazards. All operations shall be carried out in accordance with the Village's Fire Code and with reasonable precautions against fire and explosive hazards.
9.
Glare. Direct or reflected glare, such as from floodlights or high temperature processes, and as differentiated from general illumination, shall not be visible at or beyond the property line.
10.
Radiation and Radioactivity. Operations shall cause no radiation or radioactivity at or beyond the property line which exceeds any applicable standards or regulations established by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission or by other federal or state agencies or laws.
11.
Electrical Radiation. Any electrical radiation shall not at any point adversely affect or interfere with any operations or equipment other than those of the person, company or other entity emitting the radiation. Avoidance of adverse effects or interference from electrical radiation by appropriate single or mutual scheduling of operations shall be permitted.
12.
Wastewater and Industrial Wastes. All wastewater and industrial wastes shall be treated and disposed of in such a manner as to comply with the water quality standards applicable to the classification assigned to the receiving waters by the State of Illinois. Approval by the State of Illinois of all plans for waste disposal facilities shall be required before the issuance of any building permit.
13.
Storage Tanks. All storage tanks which are placed above or below the ground shall be designed and installed so as to prevent the infiltration of their contents into groundwater or surface waters, and to comply with all applicable state regulations.
D.
Effects of Concurrent Operations on Different Properties. The sum total of the effects of concurrent operations on two or more parcels measured at any property line shall not be greater or more offensive to the senses than the standards contained in this section. Compliance with the provisions of this section may occur by independent or mutual changes in operational levels, scheduling of operations, or other adjustments.
§ 6-314 Environmental Technology Standards.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 4594, 10-18-2010; Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
A.
Purpose of Environmental Technology Standards. The purpose of this section is to establish meaningful standards for the design, installation, operation, and maintenance of sustainable technologies and renewable energy sources throughout the Village. The Environmental Technology Standards strive to promote and accomplish the following:
1.
Encourage sustainable energy production from local renewable energy sources.
2.
Promote sustainable building design, energy efficiency, conservation, and best management practices in residential, commercial, and industrial buildings.
3.
Facilitate energy cost savings and economic opportunities for residents and businesses in the Village.
4.
Ensure that all Environmental Clean Technology (ECT) projects within the Village are safe and any potentially adverse effects on the community are minimized.
5.
Preserve the aesthetics of the zoning districts in the interest of property values, public health, safety, and the general welfare of the Village by ensuring ECT projects are compatible with the character and appearance of the site, adjacent structures, and surrounding area.
B.
Environmental Clean Technology Review and Approval Process. The following outlines the review and approval process required for installing an Environmental Clean Technology (ECT). ECTs include, but are not limited to, renewable energy systems such as Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS), Solar Energy Systems (SES), and Geothermal Energy Systems (GES). Unless otherwise noted in these regulations, all ECT projects shall be subject to the following review and approval process:
1.
Application. Except for residential flush-mounted rooftop solar panels, all petitioners seeking to construct or install an ECT must submit a complete appearance review application to the Development Services Department concurrently with a building permit application. ECT projects accessory to buildings or structures in the Old Orland Historic District or an Orland Park Landmark shall submit a complete certificate of appropriateness (COA) application to the Development Services Department concurrently with a building permit application. All ECT projects shall be reviewed in accordance with the regulations of this section.
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5859]
2.
Administrative Review. Per this subsection, the following ECT projects shall be reviewed and approved administratively via an appearance review by the Development Services Department, in accordance with Section 5-106 (Appearance Review):
[Amended 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5859]
3.
Review at a Public Meeting. The following ECT projects shall require a review at a public meeting at the Plan Commission, followed by a review at the Development Services, Planning, and Engineering Committee meeting, and with final review and approval at a Village Board meeting:
a.
Wind Energy Conversion Systems (WECS).
4.
Public Notifications. Notification to all owners of record of residential uses within 300 feet of an ECT project is required prior to an ECT review at a public meeting at the Plan Commission. The petitioner shall be responsible for sending a notice of the proposed ECT project via certified mail, with return receipt requested, at least 15 to 30 days in advance of the Plan Commission meeting. If no residential uses are located within the 300-foot buffer, notices are not required for the review at Plan Commission. The notice shall be titled "Environmental Clean Technology Review Notice" and shall include the date, time, and place of the Plan Commission meeting, the contact information of the Development Services Department, and a description of the type of ECT system proposed for the property. It is the petitioner's responsibility to submit a notarized affidavit to staff prior to or at the Plan Commission meeting confirming that all requirements listed above have been met.
5.
Historic Landmarks or Properties in the Old Orland Historic District. ECT projects accessory to a contributing structure in the Old Orland Historic District or an Orland Park Landmark shall require a Certificate of Appropriateness (COA) review by the Plan Commission, Committee, and Board of Trustees. ECT projects accessory to a non-contributing structure in the Old Orland Historic District shall require approval of an administrative Certificate of Appropriateness (COA) review by the Development Services Department.
6.
Permit Required. All required building permits shall be obtained through the Development Services Department prior to the installation or construction of any ECT. No ECT shall be constructed, installed, or altered without first obtaining approval and issuance of a building permit.
C.
Solar Energy System (SES) Regulations.
1.
General Requirements. A solar energy system shall at all times be incidental and subordinate to a permitted use on the same parcel or lot, and shall comply with the following standards:
a.
Accessory Use. Solar energy systems are accessory to the primary use on a property in all zoning districts. Accessory solar energy systems may be building-mounted, building-integrated, or freestanding.
b.
On-Site Use. A solar energy system shall provide power for the principal and/or accessory use of the property on which it is located and shall not be used for the generation of power for the sale of energy to other users. Excess power generated by a solar energy system and not needed for on-site use may be provided back to the local utility company.
c.
Code Compliance. Solar energy systems must comply with all applicable building, electrical, fire, and safety code requirements adopted by the Village, as amended, and all other regulatory and utility agencies.
d.
Required Permits. The owner/operator of a solar energy system shall obtain approval and issuance of all necessary permits required by the Development Services Department and from outside agencies.
e.
Solar Access. Owners of solar energy systems are solely responsible for negotiating with other property owners in the vicinity for any desired solar access easements to protect access to sunlight. Refer to Section 6-404E for information on Solar Access Easements.
f.
Glare. Solar energy systems shall be placed so that concentrated solar radiation or glare is not directed onto nearby properties, roadways, or public right-of-ways. If the solar energy system installation creates an adverse impact to the public or neighboring properties, the property owner will be required to take measures to mitigate the impact or block the glare. Such measures may include screening or landscaping, or the relocation or removal of the solar energy system.
g.
Screening. Solar energy systems shall be screened from view from streets, public rights-of-way, and adjacent properties. Screening may include walls, fences, or landscaping. Rooftop screening shall not be required for roof-mounted systems that are flush-mounted parallel to the pitch of the roof and provided that all regulations of this section are met. All systems shall comply with the design standards and requirements provided in Section 6-308 (Design Standards).
h.
Electrical Wiring. All cables and wiring associated with a solar energy system shall be located underground, routed through the building, or contained within conduit that complements the colors and materials of the principal or accessory structure. All power transmission lines, cables, and wires connecting a freestanding system to any other structure on the property must be located underground. All wiring visible from the street, public right-of-way, or adjacent residential properties shall be hidden from view and shall be routed inside the building or structure.
i.
Maintenance. Solar energy systems must be maintained in good repair and in operable condition at all times. The owner of a solar energy system shall maintain such system in a safe and attractive manner, including replacement of defective parts, painting, cleaning, and other acts that may be required for the maintenance and upkeep of the function and appearance of the system. The ground upon which the solar energy system is located shall be maintained in an orderly manner, such that it is free of debris, tall grass and weeds, and any associated structures shall retain quality in appearance. If a system becomes inoperable or damaged, operations must cease and be promptly remedied.
j.
Abandonment and Decommissioning. If a solar energy system remains nonfunctional, abandoned, or inoperable for a period of 12 consecutive months, the owner/operator shall repair and make operable or remove the system within 90 days of notice by the Village. Upon removal of the system, the site shall be returned to its original condition. The Village shall be authorized to remove a solar energy system when the above events occur and/or when the owner/operator does not comply with the regulations of this section. The solar energy system will be removed at the expense of the owner/operator and the costs of removal shall be a lien against the property.
k.
Historic Landmarks or Properties in the Old Orland Historic District. All solar energy systems permitted in the Old Orland Historic District or on Orland Park Landmarks require a Certificate of Appropriateness (COA) review per Sections 5-110 and 6-209, in addition to any other required approvals, prior to the submission of a building permit. Solar energy systems accessory to a contributing structure in the Old Orland Historic District or an Orland Park Landmark shall require a COA review by the Plan Commission, Committee, and Board of Trustees. Solar energy systems accessory to non-contributing structures in the Old Orland Historic District shall require approval of an administrative COA review by the Development Services Department. All solar energy systems shall conform to the Secretary of the Interior's Standards for Rehabilitation and Illustrated Guidelines on Sustainability for Rehabilitating Historic Buildings. In addition to all other regulations outlined in this section, solar energy systems shall meet the following requirements:
(1)
Solar energy systems shall be designed, sized, and located to minimize impacts to the character, historic building fabric, and architectural integrity of the site, building, or structure.
(2)
Solar energy systems shall not damage, obscure, or result in the removal of architectural features, historic materials, or other resources that characterize the property. Solar collectors should be installed on new construction, non-historic building additions, or secondary and accessory structures.
(3)
To the greatest extent possible, solar panels shall not be located on street-facing walls or roofs. All efforts should be made to minimize visibility from streets, public rights-of-ways, and adjacent properties by locating solar collectors on rear-facing elevations, below and behind parapet walls, or on accessory structures.
(4)
Roof-mounted systems in the Old Orland Historic District or on Orland Park Landmarks shall be permitted so long as they are flush-mounted parallel to the pitch of the roof, setback from the roof edge, and colored to match the surrounding roof materials.
(5)
Freestanding systems shall be fully screened from view from streets, public rights-of-way, and adjacent residential properties. Placement and design should not detract from the historic character of the site or destroy resources that characterize the property.
l.
Exemptions. The following shall be exempt from obtaining an ECT review and approval as detailed in Section 6-314B, provided that all other code and permit requirements are met:
(1)
Solar collectors less than one square foot in size that provide power for an individual light fixture and are integrated into the design of that light fixture, rather than as a separate connected mechanical device. Such systems include temporary solar pathway landscape enhancement lights and small-scale wall-mounted fixtures.
(2)
Solar collectors used as a power source for governmental signs.
2.
Building-Mounted Systems. A building-mounted solar energy system may be roof-mounted, wall-mounted, or building-integrated on a principal building or accessory structure, in accordance with the following conditions:
a.
Roof-Mounted Systems.
(1)
Location. Where feasible, solar collector units shall be consolidated into one central area on the roof, rather than scattered in multiple groups on the roof. Solar collector panels shall not be attached to chimneys.
(2)
Setback. No part of a roof-mounted system shall extend beyond the edge of the roof, the parapet wall, or the exterior perimeter of the structure on which it is mounted. Solar collector panels shall meet all building and fire code setbacks required by the Village Code, as amended.
(3)
Quantity. A rooftop may be covered by as many collectors or arrays as may be spatially and structurally feasible, provided that systems shall not impede the required maintenance areas around mechanical equipment and meet all Village Code requirements.
(4)
Flat Roofs. On flat roofs, a solar energy system shall be completely screened from view from streets, public right-of-ways, and neighboring properties in accordance with Section 6-308J (Screening). Solar energy systems may be angled to achieve maximum sun exposure, but shall not exceed eight feet in overall height or extend above the building parapet, whichever results in less height. In no instance shall any part of the system extend beyond the edge of the roof or the highest point of the parapet or screening wall. Parapet walls, screening walls, and other screening methods may be waived by the Development Services Department if all parts of a solar energy system are completely screened from view from streets, public right-of-ways, and neighboring properties.
(5)
Pitched Roofs. On pitched roofs, a solar energy system shall be flush-mounted parallel to the pitch of the roof and shall not project higher than 12 inches from the roof surface at any point. No portion of the solar energy system shall extend beyond the ridgeline of the roof, the roof eaves, or the vertical extension of the exterior wall.
b.
Wall-Mounted Systems.
(1)
Location. Only building-integrated or flush-mounted systems shall be permitted on street-facing facades or primary building elevations. Systems that are not building-integrated or flush-mounted shall be permitted on elevations facing the rear and interior side yards.
(2)
Projection. Wall-mounted systems may project up to five feet from a building facade.
(3)
Setback. Wall-mounted systems may project into a side or rear setback, but shall be no closer than five feet to the side or rear property line.
(4)
Height. A building-mounted solar energy system may not extend above the highest point of the roofline or parapet wall of the building which the solar energy system is affixed to.
c.
Building-Integrated Systems. Building-integrated solar energy systems are built into and contained within building materials such as roofing, windows, skylights, awnings, canopies, parking lot canopy shade structures, and similar architectural components. Building-integrated systems shall be permitted on all building facades and accessory structures provided the building component in which the system is integrated meets all required setbacks for the district in which the building is located. Exterior walls and finish materials shall comply with the masonry and building material requirements listed in Section 6-308 (Design Standards) and the Village Code, as amended.
3.
Freestanding Systems. Freestanding solar energy systems shall comply with the following conditions:
a.
Location. Freestanding solar energy systems shall only be permitted in the rear and interior side yard. No part of a freestanding system shall extend into a utility, water, sewer, or other type of easement.
b.
Setback. All parts of a freestanding solar energy system shall be set back at least 10 feet from the interior side and rear property line. Freestanding systems shall also be located at least 10 feet from all primary and accessory structures, including swimming pools with attached decks.
c.
Screening. Freestanding systems shall be fully screened from view from streets, public rights-of-way, and adjacent properties. Screening may be achieved through the use of walls, fences, or landscaping.
d.
Height. The maximum height of a freestanding solar energy system shall be six feet, measured from the average grade at the base of the pole to the highest edge of the system when oriented at maximum vertical tilt.
e.
Size. The overall surface area of the solar collectors shall be limited to a total of 200 square feet.
f.
Lot Coverage. A freestanding solar energy system shall be exempt from lot coverage calculations provided that the soil under the collector is not compacted or is maintained in vegetation or a pervious surface. The solar energy system shall not obstruct storm water flow.
D.
Geothermal Energy System (GES) Regulations. A Geothermal Energy System (GES) is a central renewable heating and cooling exchange system that uses heat generated beneath the earth's surface to heat or cool buildings via underground or underwater systems that pump heat energy into a building or vice versa.
 |
Figure 1: Geothermal energy system types include: 1)Vertical loop systems that reach deep into the earth; 2)Horizontal loop systems that stay near the surface but are below the frost line; 3)Slinky loop systems that maintain a moderate depth and increase the length/capacity of the system on a compact lot; 4)Pond loop systems that sink geothermal cables into detention ponds; and 5)Open loop systems (not pictured) that are cables in the ground. |
1.
Geothermal Heat Pump System (GHPS). Geothermal heat pump energy systems (GHPS), or ground source heat pumps, are installed indoors and underground via a system of looped coils or piping and invisible after installation and are permitted in all zoning districts via an ECT Review, subject to these regulations.
a.
Depth. GHPS loop fields, coils, piping or other similar and associated underground infrastructure must be below the frost line. A geotechnical and engineering study is required to determine appropriateness and depth on a case by case basis.
b.
Setbacks. GHPS loop fields, coils, piping or other similar underground infrastructure shall not encroach into public right-of-ways, ComEd transmission easements and right-of-ways, access roads, natural gas, fuel and other pipeline easements, floodplains, wildlife habitats and navigable waters of the United States. GHPS may be built up to the property line and, upon acquiring a geothermal access easement or similar agreement, encroach under neighboring properties to acquire an efficient scale or tonnage for heating and cooling in a building or site. GHPS must maintain a minimum distance of 10 feet from existing storm water, sewer and water main utilities, and 20 feet from neighboring buildings or structures (except parking lots).
c.
Ground Source Subsidence. GHPS shall not cause underground subsidence to the subject or neighboring properties during installation or any time thereafter. Subsidence is the process of pit or sag formations in the earth's crust due to undermining or trenching and filling of the surface and sub-surface. Correction of subsidence is the responsibility of the GHPS owner.
2.
Irrigated Geothermal Heat Pump Systems. Irrigated geothermal heat pump systems consist of any system which uses a thermal exchange using ground water, surface water, heat pipes or tubes and are installed in and access underground aquifers (ground water) or storm water detention/retention basins (surface water) and are permitted in the BIZ, COR, MFG, ORI, R-4 and VCD zoning districts via an ECT Review, subject to these regulations.
a.
Depth. Loop fields, coils, pipes or other similar and associated underground/underwater infrastructure must be below the frost line and a minimum of eight feet below the normal water line of a detention/retention basin. Also, see Section 6-314D1a.
b.
Width and Setbacks. Loop fields, coils, piping, tubing or other similar underwater system shall not extend above the surface of the normal water line of a storm water detention/retention basin. Such systems must maintain a minimum distance of 10 feet from existing storm water infrastructure, such as culverts, and sewer utilities.
c.
Detention/Retention Basin Volume Displacement. Loop fields, coils, pipes or other similar underwater infrastructure shall not displace the volume of a storm water detention/retention basin without providing necessary compensational storage.
3.
Small Scale Geothermal District Heating. Geothermal district heating technology may be used in non-residential and multi-family home developments to heat multiple buildings on a single site, such as office campuses and condo and townhome developments and between building owners.
4.
General Requirements.
a.
Access. A GES shall access the earth's thermal energy below grade and shall not be visible from the public right-of-way or neighboring properties. Access to neighboring properties may be granted by property owners via Geothermal Access Easements and Geothermal Sharing Agreements.
b.
Tree Removal. Tree removal for a GES is not permitted. GES technology permits vertical thermal systems that can avoid trees and other planted areas.
c.
New Construction Mitigation. New construction that impacts a GES must move the GES to a new location not impacted or bury it deeper than the impacted depth, subject to these regulations.
d.
Geothermal Access Easement. See Land Development Code Section 6-404F.
e.
Geothermal Sharing Agreement. A geothermal sharing agreement may be prepared between property owners to preserve and protect geothermal energy access. Property owners may share a GES under mutual terms, conditions and agreements. Such an agreement may include: optimizing GES field sizes and well depths; provisions for shared access, transmission and use; provisions for heat and coolant exchange and transmission rates; relocating a GES; expanding a GES to increase capacity for multi-building district heating; and provisions for subsidence control.
f.
Accessory Use. Geothermal energy systems are accessory uses to the primary or principal use on a property or district in all zoning districts.
g.
Design and Permitting. The design of the GES shall conform to applicable industry standards. The necessary building permits shall be obtained for a GES per the Village Building Code (e.g. electrical, plumbing, mechanical etc.). All wiring and heating components shall comply with the latest applicable version of the National Electric Code (NEC) and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) as amended by the Village.
[Amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020] |
E.
Wind Energy Conversion System (WECS) Regulations. A WECS consists of a wind turbine and blades (nacelle and rotor), one tower, support system and associated controls and conversion electronics for the purpose of converting kinetic energy from the wind into electrical energy. WECS have a wide range of rated capacities from less than one (<1) kilowatt (kW) to 1.5 megawatts (MW) and can have a height of up to 250 feet.
The following regulations apply to the four classes of WECS recognized by the Land Development Code: Residential Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (RESWECS), Mini Wind Energy Conversion Systems (MINIWECS), Small Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (SWECS), and Utility Scale Wind Energy Conversions Systems (UWECS).
Lattice or guyed WECS towers are not permitted for any WECS type or in any zoning district. The exception to this rule includes lattice towers under 30 feet, towers with a rotor diameter of five feet or less, and towers that generate power for pond aerators or farm well pumps.
 Figure 2: Wind turbine diagram |
1.
Residential Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (RESWECS). Residential Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (0 kW to 10 kW) are accessory uses mounted directly on residential rooftops and are permitted via an ECT Review in the E-1, R-1, R-2, R-2A, R-3, R-3A, and R-4 zoning districts, subject to these regulations. In OOH Historic District, a Certificate of Appropriateness is required per Sections 5-110 and 6-209. Freestanding WECS are prohibited in residential districts.
 Figure 3: Examples of wall-mounted and roof-mounted Residential Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (RESWECS) |
a.
Height. RESWECS shall not increase the height of a building by more than 12 feet from the roofline and shall not be attached to chimneys. The maximum height of building with a roof-mounted RESWECS is set forth in Table 6-314.E.1.a.
Table 6-314.E.1.a | |
|---|---|
Zoning District | Maximum Height Permitted w/RESWECS |
E-1, R-1 | 47 feet |
R-2, R-2A, R-3, R-3A | 42 feet |
R-4 | 64 feet |
OOH | 47 feet |
2.
Mini Wind Energy Conversion Systems (MINIWECS). Mini Wind Energy Conversion Systems (0 kW to 10 kW) are accessory uses mounted directly on buildings or are freestanding towers. MINIWECS are permitted via an ECT Review in the BIZ, COR, MFG, and ORI zoning districts, subject to these regulations.
Only MINIWECS mounted on buildings are permitted in the VCD district.
MINIWECS are intended to provide a small scale application of wind technologies on non-residential properties in the Village. They are adaptable systems that can easily be retrofitted onto existing infrastructure and provide opportunities for distributed energy generation without large monopoles, turbines, new infrastructure or much visual or acoustic impact.
MINIWECS such as those in Figure 4 demonstrate rooftop turbines for non-residential and mixed-use buildings. Horizontal "aeroturbines" usually require a minimum amount of rooftop square footage to obtain the necessary capacity and need open spaces that are not blocked by rooftop mechanicals, parapets or other potential wind obstructions. Large, wide and tall rooftops are appropriate locations for horizontally-oriented turbines. Stand-up (vertical) roof-mounted turbines that extend higher than the roofline are more adaptable as it can be raised vertically to access wind above any potential obstructions.
.tiff.png "LD Roof-Mounted MINIWECS(1).tiff") .tiff.png "LD Roof-Mounted MINIWECS(2).tiff") Figure 4: Examples of MINIWECS roof-mounted turbines oriented horizontally and vertically |
MINIWECS can also on occasion be freestanding renewable energy systems as depicted in Figure 5. Mixed-use districts are often diverse areas that can accommodate this infrastructure. In Figure 5, the monopole stands among mixed-use and multi-family residential structures.
 Figure 5: Example of a freestanding MINIWECS monopole turbine |
Figure 6 demonstrates concepts to utilize existing vertical infrastructure for MINIWECS distribution. Mounted on parking lot or street light poles, MINIWECS can take advantage of height and wide-open spaces. Such infrastructure can offset the energy used to light parking lots or streets at night or to generate power to sell back to the utility and reduce peak energy demand.
In some cases, existing light poles may not structurally accommodate wind turbines. Such light poles will have to be re-built to accommodate the extra height and wind loads associated with turbines. The re-built systems would be MINIWECS with parking lot or street lights rather than street lights with MINIWECS. Such a conversion would be a collocation since the new infrastructure would replace similar infrastructure.
 Figure 6: Examples of locating MINIWECS turbines onto existing infrastructure, such as parking lot or street light poles |
a.
Height. The maximum height of a MINIWECS shall not exceed fifty-five (55) feet from ground level to the top of the rotor blade.
3.
Small Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (SWECS). Small Scale Wind Energy Conversion Systems (10 kW to 100 kW) can be accessory uses. They are freestanding towers and are permitted via a site plan and elevation review in the E-1 and VCD zoning districts for institutional uses only, and BIZ, COR, MFG and ORI zoning districts, subject to these regulations. A Special Use Permit is required when a SWECS is within 300 feet of a residential use. All residential uses within 300 feet must be notified.
SWECS are more intense than MINIWECS. They are intended for a higher capacity of energy output. SWECS tend to be larger in scale and can often be incorporated into site plans and building designs. In Figure 7, SWECS with parallel rotation to the ground are spread across parking lots and green spaces. SWECS shown in Figure 7 are recommended in more commercial areas and open places like parking lots, plazas, and common areas.
 Figure 7: Examples of SWECS with parallel rotation to the ground |
In Figure 8, an on-site SWEC is shown in the more familiar and traditional wind turbine appearance. SWECS like these are typically associated with a higher rated energy output. These systems are for on-site energy production and are usually net-metered with the utility. They are not recommended in dense settings. Appropriate locations for such SWECS are in MFG or ORI districts where there is an industrial scope and scale.
 Figure 8: Example of a SWECS with horizontal axis rotator blades |
a.
Height. The maximum height of a SWECS shall not exceed 120 feet to the top of the rotor blade. The Development Services Department may grant additional height upon request and justification.
4.
Utility Scale Wind Energy Conversions Systems (UWECS). Utility Scale Wind Energy Conversions Systems (100 kW to 1.5 MW) are free standing utility-owned towers and permitted via special use in the MFG and ORI zoning districts, subject to these regulations. UWECS may locate with a special use within 150 feet of Interstate 80. UWECS are not permitted in OS, OOH, E-1, R-1, R-2, R-2A, R-3A, R-4, VCD, BIZ, and COR zoning districts or within 500 feet of a residential use.
UWECS are intended only for utility companies like ComEd. UWECS, also known as wind farms as shown in Figure 9, are often located on large parcels and stretch from a few acres to multiple square miles. There are only a few areas that may be suitable for a UWECS in Orland Park and they must locate near transmission lines to be effective.
 | .tiff.png "LD Figure 9 Examples of UWECS solar farms(2).tiff") |
Figure 9: Examples of UWECS solar farms | |
UWECS are not permitted to locate within 500 feet of residential uses due to their scale. Height is often determined by surrounding obstructions and prevailing wind patterns. The height of these turbines, however, is often no greater than some existing wireless communication/cell towers, water towers and radio antennas.
Setbacks from specific land uses typically mitigate visual and acoustic impacts of turbines. They tend to be no more of a nuisance than wireless communication towers.
a.
Height. The maximum height of a UWECS shall not exceed 200 feet from ground level to the top of the rotor blade. The Development Services Department may grant additional height subject to the findings of a wind energy analysis.
5.
General Requirements.
a.
Setbacks. A WECS must be located a minimum distance equal to 1.1 times the total height from any property line in a non-residential zoning district. In a residential zoning district, a WECS must locate according to the established building setbacks and cannot locate between the front or corner side building facade and the street.
b.
Spacing Parameters and Wind Accessibility. The following are spacing parameters and requirements for freestanding WECS towers and collocated WECS equipment:
(1)
A WECS tower must be located a minimum distance of 20 feet from any principal structure(s) on a parcel.
(2)
Collocated WECS equipment must be located a minimum distance of five rotor lengths from non-WECS mechanical, electronic, telecommunication or other equipment on a tower, building or other structure.
(3)
Multiple WECS on a site must be spaced a minimum distance equal to five rotor lengths, based upon the size of the largest rotor, from adjacent WECS.
 Figure 10: Diagram depicting the required rotor length measured as the length of the blade plus the diameter of the nacelle or nose of the turbine. All wind turbine types must be spaced a minimum distance equal to five rotor lengths. |
c.
Safety. The following are minimum safety requirements for WECS:
(1)
All WECS must have a manual and automatic braking system device capable of halting operation to prevent damage in high winds.
(2)
For freestanding towers, the structural engineer shall prescribe at a minimum two 5/8-inch diameter ground rods installed to a depth of eight feet.
(3)
Non-RESWECS must be designed to withstand a minimum wind velocity of 100 miles per hour, with an impact pressure of 40 pounds per square foot.
(4)
All WECS structures including towers, buildings and their related foundations, footings, anchors and electrical connections must meet the requirements of the Village Building Code and be engineered by a licensed structural engineer and meet all necessary engineering code related requirements.
(5)
The minimum distance between the ground and any protruding blades utilized on a WECS shall be 20 feet as measured at the lowest point of the arc of the blades.
(6)
Wind turbines must meet the most recent AWEA Small Wind Turbine Performance and Safety Standards and the International Electrotechnical Commission IEC 61400 standards. Turbines must be certified by the Small Wind Certification Council or other certification program recognized by the American Wind Energy Association.
d.
Security. All WECS ground equipment (e.g. batteries, boxes, etc.) shall be enclosed within a lockable six-foot high fence enclosure constructed of either wood or non-white vinyl material, or in a masonry utility building. All climbing apparatuses affixed to a WECS must terminate 12 feet above the ground.
e.
Electromagnetic Interference. No WECS shall cause electromagnetic degradation or radio frequency interference in performance of other electromagnetic radiators or receptors of quality and proper design.
(1)
The determination of degradation of performance, quality and proper design shall be made in accordance with best engineering practices as defined in the latest principles and standards of the American Institute of Electrical Engineers (AIEE), the Institute of Radio Engineers (IRE) and Electrical Industries Association (EIA). In case of conflict between these standards, precedence is given to the AIEE.
(2)
WECS shall use non-metallic rotor blades unless documentation is supplied from an appropriate testing laboratory certifying that a proposed metallic blade rotor will not cause electromagnetic interference.
(3)
Any ordinance that grants a WECS operation, whether special use or otherwise, may be repealed or revoked whenever electromagnetic interference from a WECS is evident.
f.
Interconnectivity and Transmission. SWECS and UWECS may connect to the electric transmission grid using the public right-of-way following the necessary permission from ComEd and compliance with the Village Code. Transmission conduits/lines providing connections to the grid or to buildings/batteries must be installed underground. RESWECS and MINIWECS shall provide power to the property on which it is located and shall not be used for the sale of energy to other users off site. Excess power generated by these may be sold to the grid. ComEd shall determine grid interconnection and net metering policies. Transmission lines and appurtenances may locate on public right-of-way or on any other real property provided the necessary licenses, easements, leases, rights-of-way or other similar land rights for access and maintenance are obtained.
g.
Sounds and Vibrations. A WECS shall be installed and operated such that sound pressure levels do not exceed the definitions of nuisance "noise" and "vibrations" as established by the Village Code. During short term events such as storms and utility outages, when WECS equipment can potentially create nuisance "noise" and "vibrations", a WECS may exceed the Village Code nuisance requirements if it cannot be manually shut down by the owner. In the event a full battery bank is causing a WECS to exceed Code noise and vibration requirements, the WECS must be shut off until the battery bank is depleted.
h.
Decommissioning. The Village, through proper legal procedures, may require the owner of a WECS or owner of the land where the WECS is located to remove the WECS upon occurrence of any of the following events:
(1)
The WECS was not constructed in accordance with the Village requirements;
(2)
The WECS has deteriorated from lack of maintenance;
(3)
The WECS has been inactive for a period of at least six months and shall be considered abandoned;
(4)
The WECS creates irresolvable electromagnetic interference;
The Village shall be authorized to remove a WECS when the above events occur and when the WECS owner and/or the land owner do not comply with these regulations. The WECS and all associated and ancillary equipment, batteries, devices, structures or supports for that system will be removed at the owner's and/or land owner's expense and the costs of removal shall be a lien against the property. |
i.
Letter of Credit or Other Security Method. SWECS and UWECS will require a letter of credit or other security method to assure for the proper construction of public improvements associated with the WECS. The letter of credit or other security method is determined according to Section 5-112 of these regulations.
j.
Signage, Lights, Colors and Other Advertisements. No letters, insignia, logos, flags, banners, balloons, ribbons, tinsel, streamers, pennants, reflectors, spinners or signs shall be affixed to a WECS. WECS shall not be lit and commercial lighting fixtures shall not be attached. WECS shall be painted white, gray or another non-reflective, unobtrusive color. The only advertising sign permitted on the WECS shall be a manufacturer's label, not exceeding one square foot in size.
l.
Test WECS. A Test WECS is permitted following a site plan and elevation review at Plan Commission and with formal approval by the corporate authorities of the Village. Test WECS must be dismantled within three years of installation and are subject to the requirements of Section 6-314E3 for SWECS or 6-314E4 for UWECS. For the purposes of this section, Test WECS are trial SWECS and UWECS that are designed solely to collect wind generation data and are subject to these regulations. RESWECS and MINIWECS are not permitted to have Test WECS status.
[Amended by Ord. 5476, 1-20-2020]
m.
Aviation Rules and Regulations. The proposed WECS must be in compliance with all Federal Aviation Administration regulations and shall comply with the notification requirements of the FAA.
F.
Biomass: Waste to Energy Strategies.
1.
On-site Commercial Composting. An on-site commercial composting facility is the portion of a site or facility that is used for composting of food scrap or food waste and is permitted in non-residential areas of the BIZ, COR, MFG, ORI and VCD zoning districts provided that they do not locate within 300 feet of a residential property, hospitals, primary and secondary school properties, and day-care centers.
a.
Setbacks. On-site commercial composting facilities must locate within the established building setbacks within the local zoning district.
b.
Enclosures and Screening. On-site commercial composting facilities shall be collocated within existing on-site waste collection enclosures and shall be screened by a fence constructed of either solid masonry, wooden or non-white vinyl fence materials and screened by native landscaping following the requirements of Section 6-302D of the Land Development Code. A composting container shall not exceed the size of the largest waste collection dumpster or container within the waste collection enclosure or an eight yard container, whichever is less.
c.
Composting Rules.
(1)
All food scrap or food waste must, by the end of each operating day, be processed and placed into an enclosed vessel in which air flow and temperature are controlled pursuant to Illinois Public Act 096-0418 (415 ILCS 5/3.330).
(2)
All food scrap or food waste must be covered in a manner that prevents scavenging by birds and animals and that prevents a visual, odor or other nuisance(s) at all times.
(3)
On-site commercial composting facilities shall not be located in storm water detention or stream setbacks.
(4)
On-site commercial composting facilities must be flood-proofed.
(5)
A regular schedule of on-site composting collection must be maintained. Compost cannot remain on site more than one week.
d.
Sale of Biomass and Biofuel. Commercial composting may be sold to biomass and or biofuel energy plants, biomass facilities, agricultural industries, distributors, etc. as a commodity.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
§ 6-315 Exterior Lighting.
A.
Purpose.
1.
Exterior lighting is used to illuminate residential, commercial, industrial and public uses; parking lots, sidewalks, signs, and other elements within the Village. When well-designed and properly installed, exterior lighting is very useful in improving visibility and safety, providing a sense of security, and complementing the character of the Village. If exterior lighting is not well-designed and properly installed it can be inefficient, cause glare, and create light trespass and sky glow. Light trespass falling over property lines can illuminate adjacent grounds or buildings in an objectionable manner. In order to insure that exterior lighting is well-designed with limited impacts on adjacent properties, the following requirements are set forth to control exterior lighting in both residential and non-residential zoning districts.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
2.
Standards and Requirements.
a.
Lighting Classes. The standards and requirements set forth in the following tables shall regulate and govern the use of, design of, construction or modification of any lighting system for the purpose of illuminating exterior areas including, but not limited to, signs, parking areas, buildings, landscaping, porches, and driveways. Each Lighting Zone is comprised of and defined by the correlated Land Uses listed in Table 6-315.2.a(A).
Table 6-315.2.a (A) - Lighting Classes by Land Use | |
|---|---|
Lighting Class 1 | Auto-Dealerships and Large Retail Centers (land area > 500,000 square feet) |
Lighting Class 2 | Manufacturing and Storage, Commercial, and Mixed Use |
Lighting Class 3 | Civic and Institutional, Multi-Family Residential, and Office |
Lighting Class 4 | Single-Family Residential |
(1)
Lighting Class 1. Land uses for Lighting Zone 1 include Auto Dealerships and Large Retail Centers (land area > 500,000 square feet).
Table 6-315.A.2.a.1(A) - Lighting Class 1 | ||
|---|---|---|
Foot Candles at Lot Line | Non-Residential to Non-Residential | 5.0 |
Non-Residential to Residential | 0 | |
Adjacent to Public Right-of-Way | 0.5 | |
Lumens Per Square Foot | Maximum lm/sf | 7.0 |
Internal Footcandles | Maximum fc level permitted | 40 fc |
(2)
Lighting Class 2. Land uses for Lighting Zone 2 include Manufacturing and Storage, Commercial, and Mixed Use.
Table 6-315.A.2.a.2(A) - Lighting Class 2 | ||
|---|---|---|
Foot Candles at Lot Line | Non-Residential to Non-Residential | 5.0 |
Residential to Residential | 2.0 | |
Non-Residential to Residential | 0 | |
Adjacent to Public Right-of-Way | 0.5 | |
Lumens Per Square Foot | Maximum lm/sf | 3.0 |
Internal Footcandles | Maximum fc level permitted | 15 fc |
(3)
Lighting Class 3. Land uses for Lighting Zone 3 include Civic and Institutional, Multi-Family Residential, and Office.
Table 6-315.A.2.a.3(A) - Lighting Class 3 | ||
|---|---|---|
Foot Candles at Lot Line | Non-Residential to Non-residential | 2.0 |
Residential to Residential | 1.0 | |
Non-Residential to Residential | 0 | |
Adjacent to Public Right-of-Way | 0.5 | |
Lumens Per Square Foot | Maximum lm/sf | 2.5 |
Internal Footcandles | Maximum fc level permitted | 10 fc |
(4)
Lighting Class 4. Land use for Lighting Zone 4 is Single-Family Residential.
Table 6-315.A.2.a.4(A) - Lighting Class 4 | ||
|---|---|---|
Foot Candles at Lot Line | Non-Residential to Non-Residential | 2.0 |
Residential to Residential | 0.5 | |
Non-Residential to Residential | 0 | |
Adjacent to Public Right-of-Way | 0.5 | |
Lumens Per Square Foot | Maximum lm/sf | 1.0 |
Internal Footcandles | Maximum fc level permitted | 10 fc |
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
b.
Luminaire Height, Setback, and Cutoff Degree. Table 6-315.A.2.b(A) below determines the required setback of a fixture based on the height of the luminaire and extent of its cutoff shielding. Setback is measured from adjacent lot lines. The maximum luminaire height allowed on private properties within the Village is 25 feet from grade. Any minor deviation from the regulations listed in Table 6-315.A.2.b(A) may be approved at the discretion of the Development Services Department. Luminaire height shall be rounded to the closest correlated height listed in Table 6-315.A.2.b(A) when determining required luminaire setback.
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019] |
Table 6-315.A.2.b(A) - Allowable Luminaire Height, Required Luminaire Setbacks, and Cutoff Degrees | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Luminaire Cutoff Degree | |||||
Full Cutoff | Cutoff | Semi-Cutoff | No Cutoff | ||
Luminaire Height (in feet) | 25 | 10 feet | 20 feet | 40 feet | Not Permitted |
20 | 8 feet | 16 feet | 32 feet | Not Permitted | |
15 | 6 feet | 12 feet | 24 feet | 30 feet | |
10 | 4 feet | 8 feet | 16 feet | 20 feet | |
5 | 2 feet | 4 feet | 8 feet | 10 feet | |
Required Setback (in feet) | |||||
[Amended by Ord. 5389, 3-4-2019]
c.
Standards for Luminaires under a Canopy (for non-residential uses). Luminaires mounted to the underside of a canopy, which provide overhead illumination, shall be recessed such that no part of the luminaire or the lamp shall extend below the exterior edge of the canopy.
d.
Standards for Patio Lighting (for non-residential uses).
(1)
Permitted Lighting. Permitted patio lighting shall include, but not be limited to lanterns, sconces, lighting posts, flameless torches, festoon or string lights, and pendant lighting.
(2)
Prohibited Lighting. All attention-seeking, blinking, flashing and color changing lights shall not be permitted.
(3)
Light Trespass. All patio lighting shall be contained to the extent of the property on which the patio is located.
e.
Standards for Architectural Accent Lighting - Unshielded LED Rope/Band Lighting. The illumination of commercial buildings with facades facing Interstate 80 is intended to highlight the Village's skyline and differentiate the geographical location of the community from that of surrounding municipalities. Architectural lighting of commercial buildings, when incorporated into a structure's overall design, will help to identify, complement, and aesthetically enhance the architectural attributes of the community. Unshielded LED rope or band lighting shall be permitted as an architectural building accent on buildings located on non-residential properties directly abutting Interstate 80, subject to the following rules and regulations:
(2)
Unshielded lighting shall only be constructed of LED ropes or bands.
(3)
Unshielded LED rope or band lighting shall be permitted on the south elevation of commercial buildings that have a minimum height of 30 feet or three stories, whichever is lower. Unshielded LED rope or band lighting shall not be permitted on the north elevation of buildings nor shall they be permitted on a facade located within 300 feet of a residential property.
(4)
Unshielded LED rope or band lighting shall only be installed horizontally on a building facade. Unshielded accent lighting to outline building elements, such as doors and windows, is prohibited.
(5)
Exterior lighting shall consist of continuous, non-blinking light sources that highlight a building facade or other architectural features, and in no way shall be used to spell out letters, names, symbols, or numbers.
(6)
A unified, consistent, and harmonious light design and color shall be applied to all eligible facades on a building. Individual tenants within a multi-tenant building shall not install different types, designs, or colors of unshielded LED ropes or bands.
(7)
Unshielded LED rope or band lighting shall be reviewed and approved administratively via an appearance review by the Development Services Department in accordance with Section 5-106 (Appearance Review) or by approval of Elevations in accordance with Section 5-101 (Development Review Procedures). A building permit shall be obtained through the Development Services Department prior to the installation or construction of any new lighting.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020] |
3. CANOPY CUTOFF
CUTOFF ANGLE ENTRANCE DRIVE LIGHTING EXTERIOR LIGHTING FIXTURE FLOOD OR SPOT LIGHT FOOTCANDLE (FC) FOOTCANDLE - HORIZONTAL MEASUREMENT (HFC) FOOTCANDLE - VERTICAL MEASUREMENT (VFC) FULL CUTOFF GLARE HEIGHT OF LUMINAIRE INCLUDING TOTAL HEIGHT ILLUMINATION SYSTEM LAMP LIGHT LOSS FACTOR LIGHT TRESPASS LIGHT, DIRECT LIGHT, INDIRECT LUMEN LUMINAIRE LUMINAIRE, CUTOFF TYPE NON-CUTOFF PATIO LIGHTING SEMI-CUTOFF TEMPORARY EXTERIOR LIGHTING WALL OR BUILDING MOUNTED FIXTURE
Definitions.
Any overhanging shelter or shade or other protective structure constructed in such a manner as to allow pedestrians or vehicles to pass underneath.
Intensity at or above 90° (horizontal) no more than 2.5% of lamp lumens, and no more than 10% of lamp lumens at or above 80°. (See Figure 6-315.A.3(A)).
Figure 6-315.A.3(A) - Luminaire Cutoff Overview (Figure for Illustrative Purposes Only) .tiff.png "LD Figure 6-315A3(A).tiff") |
The angle formed by a line drawn from the direction of light rays at the light source and a line perpendicular to the ground from the light source, above which no light is emitted.
Lighting produced solely for illumination of a drive entering into an establishment.
The illumination of an outside area or object by any man-made device that produces light by any means.
The assembly that houses the lamp or lamps and can include all or some of the following parts: a housing, a mounting bracket or pole socket, a lamp holder, a ballast, a reflector or mirror, and/or a refractor or lens.
Any light fixture or lamp that incorporates a reflector or a refractor to concentrate the light output into a directed beam in a particular direction.
A unit of illumination produced on a surface, all points of which are one foot from a uniform point source of one standard candle.
The measurement of footcandles utilizing a direct reading, portable light meter mounted in the horizontal position.
The measurement of footcandles utilizing a direct reading, portable light meter mounted in the vertical position.
Zero intensity at or above horizontal (90° above nadir) and limited to a value not exceeding 10% of lamp lumens at or above 80°. (See Figure 6-315.A.3 (A)).
Light emitting from a luminaire with an intensity great enough to reduce a viewers' ability to see, cause discomfort and, in extreme cases, cause momentary blindness.
The height of a luminaire shall be the vertical distance from the ground directly below the centerline of the luminaire to the lowest direct-light-emitting part of the luminaire. The total height shall be the height of the pole, including the base and any mounting arms or other attachments to which the luminaire is attached, as measured from the ground directly below the highest part of the pole or any of its attachments, to the top of the pole or luminaire, whichever the case may be.
The totality of the equipment installed to provide exterior lighting on a developed property. The illumination system shall include all building, canopy, pole and ground mounted luminaires including all wiring, circuitry, and other devices installed to create exterior lighting.
The component of a luminaire that produces the actual light.
A factor applied to lamps, which estimates the lumen output of a lamp sometime after installation. (For example, a lamp with an initial lumen rating of 10,000, which has a light loss factor of 0.7, is estimated to put out 7,000 lumens. A lamp with an initial lumen rating of 10,000, which has a light loss factor of 1.0, is estimated to put out 10,000 lumens.)
Any light that exists beyond the boundaries of the property on which its source is located.
Light emitted directly from the lamp, off a reflector or reflector diffuser, or through the refractor or diffuser lens of a luminaire.
Direct light that has been reflected or has scattered off of other surfaces.
A unit of luminous flux. One footcandle is one lumen per square foot. For the purpose of this section, the lumen value shall be the initial lumen output rating of a lamp.
A complete lighting unit consisting of a light source and all necessary mechanical, electrical, and decorative parts.
A luminaire containing elements such as shields, reflectors, or refractor panels that direct and cutoff a direct view of the light source at a cutoff angle.
No limitations on light distribution at any angle. (See Figure 6-315.A.3 (A)).
Any form of permanently installed lighting that is used for the sole purpose of patio illumination or decoration.
Intensity at or above 90° (horizontal) no more than 5% of lamp lumens and no more than 20% at or above 80°. (See Figure 6-315.A.3 (A)).
The specific illumination of an outside area or object by any man-made device that produces light by any means, consistent with the requirement for Temporary Uses in Subsection 6-304.
A fixture attached to an exterior wall, roof, or other exterior surface of a building. No wall mounted fixture shall be allowed to produce light trespass and shall be included in the calculation on photometric plans.
B.
Regulations and Procedures.
1.
Regulations.
a.
All public and private exterior lighting installed in the Village of Orland Park shall be in conformance with the requirements established by this section.
b.
The installation of, or the additional installation of, exterior lighting for aesthetic, safety or general purposes, may be required, as determined by the Development Services Department.
c.
All exterior lighting must be maintained and kept in proper working order.
2.
Procedures.
a.
Lighting Plan Required. A lighting plan is required for all non-residential uses in or adjacent to residential zoning districts, multiple family developments other than duplexes, commercial/retail, industrial, institutional, and public uses including uses developed by other units of local government.
At the time any exterior lighting is installed or substantially modified, a lighting plan shall be submitted to the Development Services Department in order to determine whether the requirements of this section have been met. A lighting plan shall be required for all special uses, planned unit developments, and requests for variations from the standards imposed in this section.
Where a lighting plan is required, said plan shall include the following:
(1)
A site plan showing pole locations, building mounted lights (e.g. wall-packs), bollard lights with schematic wiring layout and power source connection;
(2)
Specifications for luminaires and lamp types, poles, wiring, conduit and appurtenant construction including photographs or drawings of proposed luminaires. Manufacturer catalog sheets shall be provided in order to demonstrate specific style/type and dimensions of equipment;
(3)
Site-specific pole, luminaire, and foundation details including pole height, height of building mounted lights, mounting height and height of the luminaire;
(4)
Overall site plan inclusive of a fifty-foot perimeter which shall include buildings, luminaires and other structures sufficient to determine the total cutoff angle of all luminaires and their relationship to abutting parcels;
(5)
Initial Luminaire Lumens of all light sources proposed;
(6)
Photometric plans that shows the footcandle - horizontal measurement internal to the site and at the property lines. (Footcandle - horizontal measurements shall be taken along a horizontal plane at a height of 3.5 feet above the ground. Photometric plans shall be based on a light loss factor of 1.0.
(7)
Other information and data reasonably necessary to evaluate the required lighting plan pursuant to the request of the Development Services Department.
3.
Measuring Light Levels.
a.
Metering Equipment. Light levels of both direct and indirect light shall be measured in footcandles with a direct reading, portable light meter. Readings shall be taken only after the cell has been exposed long enough to provide a constant reading.
b.
Method of Measurement. Footcandle - horizontal measurements shall be taken along a horizontal plane at a height of 3.5 feet above the ground. If lighting metering levels are inconclusive on conformance to the above methods, the measurement will be taken by focusing the metering equipment directly at the light source.
4.
Exceptions.
a.
Public Roadway Lighting. Luminaires used for public roadway illumination by a public transportation agency are exempt from the requirements of this section but may be subject to the regulations of Federal, State or County agencies, or by other intergovernmental agreements.
b.
Entrance Drive Lighting. Luminaires used for the sole purpose of illuminating an access drive and other similar uses may be determined by the Director of Development Services to be exempted from certain illumination and other standards of the requirements of this section.
c.
Emergency Lighting. All temporary emergency lighting needed by the Police or Fire Departments or other emergency services, as well as all vehicular luminaires, shall be exempt from the requirements of this section.
d.
Recreational Facilities. Because of their unique requirements for nighttime visibility and their limited hours of operation, outdoor recreational facilities (public or private) such as, but not limited to, football fields, soccer fields, baseball fields, softball fields, tennis courts, golf driving ranges, auditorium areas and other similar uses as may be determined by the Director of Development Services are exempted from certain illumination and other standards as follows:
(1)
The uses set forth herein are specifically exempted from the maximum footcandle requirements - internal to the site. These uses are required to submit a lighting plan and shall be processed as special uses under the applicable procedures. These uses shall seek to meet the requirements for maximum footcandles at the property line or apply for a special use modification if they are unable to meet those requirements.
(2)
The uses set forth herein shall be exempt from the height requirements as set forth in this section. The Plan Commission and Village Board shall review the proposed pole heights during the special use permit review process.
e.
Temporary Uses. Non-residential temporary uses shall install temporary lighting using these standards as guides and obtain an electrical permit subject to Section 6-304B of these regulations.
C.
Prohibited Lighting.
1.
Flickering or Flashing Lights. The Village Board of Trustees shall permit no flickering or flashing lights unless authorized in a lighting plan approved as a special use or planned unit development.
2.
Searchlight and Laser Source Lights. No searchlights, laser source lights, or any similar high intensity light shall be permitted.
3.
High Intensity Discharge Lamps. No lamps that are classified as high intensity discharge are permitted, other than Metal Halide Lamps which shall be permitted.
4.
High Color Temperature Lamp. The correlated color temperature (CCT) of any exterior light shall not exceed 4100 K.
D.
Non-Conforming Uses.
1.
Luminaires lawfully in place prior to the date of this section but which do not conform to the requirements and standards of this section shall be considered legal non-conforming uses.
2.
Legal non-conforming luminaires that meet the performance standards for footcandle levels and screening requirements of this section but exceed the physical standards such as height or setbacks herein may continue and are not subject to amortization requirements unless they are part of an illumination system that is to be changed as follows:
a.
Illumination systems developed as part of a Planned Unit Development, Special Use, Annexation Agreement, Variation or other specific Village approval which, as of the date of these regulations, have an approved lighting plan and meet the performance criteria of their specific agreements but do not meet the requirements of this section shall be considered legal non-conforming uses and shall be brought into conformity with the criteria and standards set forth herein when the illumination system is to be completely replaced.
b.
Legal non-conforming illumination systems which were not part of a specific Village-approved lighting plan shall be brought into conformity with the criteria and standards set forth herein when the illumination system is to be replaced or modified by greater than 50% of its number of light fixtures, based on the total number of fixtures within the project limits.
c.
Legal non-conforming luminaires that exceed the footcandle standards and/or direct light or glare towards streets, parking lots, residences or property lines and result in a problematic or dangerous condition shall be shielded, redirected or otherwise modified to meet the requirements of this section.
§ 6-401 General.
Except as provided in Section 5-109, all subdivisions shall comply with the standards set forth in this Part and other applicable provisions of these regulations.
§ 6-402 Lot Standards.
A.
Insofar as practical, all side lot lines shall be at right angles to straight street lines or radial to curved street lines. For unusual shaped lots, the Village may require the subdivider or developer to submit building location plans.
B.
Except as otherwise part of a planned development, lot dimensions, area and setbacks shall comply with the requirements of Article 6 for the district in which the property is situated. In the case of property located in an unincorporated area of the county, lot dimensions, area and setbacks shall comply with the requirements of the Village's zoning district that is most similar to the county's zoning district in which the property is situated. All lots within the corporate boundaries of the Village shall be of the size required by the zoning district within which the lot is located. In no event shall any residential lot located within the Village's 1 1/2 mile extraterritorial jurisdiction be less than 10,000 square feet.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
C.
The area of each lot in an approved single family subdivision shall not include any street right-of-way, whether public or private right-of-way.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
D.
Lots shall not block any street extensions which are set forth in the Village's Comprehensive Plan.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
E.
All lots shall abut on a publicly dedicated street, private street or private access.
F.
Vehicular access from a residential street between or through a double frontage lot to a collector or arterial street is prohibited.
G.
Where lots front upon a cul-de-sac or curved road or street having a radius of 200 feet or less, the minimum width of the frontage of the lot may be measured at the building set back line, with width at said right-of-way line to be not less than 50% of the width required by these regulations, the width being measured on the chord of the street right-of-way line.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
H.
Lots facing upon major street intersections and at all other acute angle intersections shall have a minimum safe curb radius of 20 feet at the street corner as determined by the Village. Where grade separation structures are proposed at an intersection with a major street, the lots and required improvements shall be arranged to make adequate provision for such structure.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
I.
Lots abutting or including a water course, designated open space preservation area, drainage way, channel or stream shall have additional minimum width or depth in order to provide an adequate building site and provide the minimum usable area required in these regulations or the Zoning Ordinance for front, rear and side setbacks, outside of these areas of preservation.
§ 6-403 Block Standards.
A.
Residential Block Standards.
1.
The maximum length of a single family residential block shall be as follows:
District | Length |
|---|---|
R-4 Residential District | 1,000 feet |
R-3 Residential District | 1,000 feet |
R-2 Residential District | 1,200 feet |
R-1 Residential District | 1,800 feet |
E-1 Estate Residential District | 1,800 feet; blocks over 1,000 feet may require a pedestrian way or bikepath easement or right-of-way. [Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994] |
2.
No specific rule concerning the shape of blocks is made by these regulations, but blocks must fit easily within the platted area and their design must evidence consideration of lot planning, traffic flow, and public areas.
B.
Business and Industrial Block Standards.
1.
The maximum length of a block shall be as follows within the respective Zoning District:
District | Length |
|---|---|
MFG Manufacturing District | 1,300 feet |
COR Mixed Use District | 1,000 feet |
ORI Mixed Use District | 1,300 feet |
BIZ General Business District | 1,000 feet |
RSB Residential and Supporting Business District | 1,000 feet |
Blocks over 1,000 feet may require a pedestrian way or bikepath easement or right-of-way. [Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994] | |
2.
No specific rule concerning the shape of blocks is made by these regulations, but blocks must fit easily within the platted area and their design must evidence consideration of lot planning, traffic flow and public areas.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
§ 6-404 Easements.
A.
Utility Easements. Easements across lots or centered on rear or side lot lines shall be provided for utilities and street lighting, electronic cable, drainage or other public use, and shall be at least 10 feet wide. Easements shall be laid out so that proper continuity is provided from lot to lot and from block to block. Provisions for extensions of easements to adjacent areas shall be made by the Director of Engineering. Utility easements shall not be located in an area designated as an open space preservation area unless a one foot topographic location plan is approved by the Development Review Committee which shows all topography, trees, native vegetation and watercourses as well as the location of the proposed easements.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
B.
Storm Water Easement. Where a development is traversed by a water course, drainage way, channel or stream, a storm water easement or drainage right-of-way shall be provided which conforms substantially with the lines of such water course, has a width adequate for construction and maintenance, and which shall not interfere with a designated open space preservation area.
C.
Pedestrian/Bikepath Easement. Easements containing pedestrian ways or bikepaths must be a minimum of 12 feet in width, in accordance with Section 6-415, unless otherwise approved by the Director of Development Services.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
D.
Scenic Corridor Easements.
1.
Purpose. The purpose of the scenic corridor easement requirement is to protect natural corridors of land so that they remain undeveloped on each side of certain roads. The purpose is also to reduce traffic noise which may have a deleterious impact on residents within the vicinity. The requirement of scenic corridor easements shall serve to protect and maintain a rural/suburban atmosphere in certain sections of the Village and its 1 1/2 mile jurisdiction. The Corridor will also provide a refuge for native trees, shrubs and prairie plant life and an excellent natural buffer between more-developed areas.
2.
Provisions.
a.
A scenic corridor easement shall be depicted on the final plat of subdivision and shall constitute an easement in favor of the Village, the terms of which are as follows: All scenic corridor easements shall be kept in their natural condition. All significant natural vegetation shall be preserved and maintained and shall not be mowed, cultivated, sprayed or in any way disturbed, either by the Village, the developer, the owner upon whose lot the easement exists, or any other person, except vegetation which is unique and harmful to the health and welfare of the community or property owner, as determined by the Village, may be excised, controlled and/or destroyed in accordance with the written direction of the Village.
b.
Existing woodlands and hedgerows within the scenic corridor easement perimeter shall not be destroyed or, if no significant natural vegetation exists and where suitable top soil from road, lake or other excavation exists, berms may be constructed in accordance with the written instructions of the Village. Said instructions shall be prepared in accordance with the overall Comprehensive Plan of the Village and shall pay particular attention to the aesthetic aspects of the vicinity in which the berms are to be located. These berms, when approved by the Village, shall be planted with trees and shrubs and native wildflowers and prairie grasses. Non-native flowering plants and evergreen trees may be utilized if approved in writing by the Village. It is the intent of this subsection (D) that the vegetation, whether it be native and natural or whether it be planted in accordance with this subsection, shall constitute a suitable screen between the development of the lot upon which the scenic corridor easement exists and the adjacent road right of way to insure that evidence of human occupancy is minimal.
3.
Standards. On all property sought to be subdivided which is designated as Critical and Sensitive Areas on the Village's Comprehensive Plan and which lies adjacent to State, County, Township and Village streets, there shall be a 50 to 100-foot scenic corridor easement measured from the right of way, on either side of said roads.
4.
Development Plan. As a condition of approval of a final plat, a subdivider or developer shall submit a development plan of all scenic corridor easements, showing the dimensions thereof, the extent and nature of all significant natural vegetation, both forest and prairie, all berms sought to be constructed, the amount and size and type of all planting sought to be installed. Such plan shall be reviewed by the Director of Development Services with written comments being forwarded for consideration by the Plan Commission. The Plan Commission shall approve, disapprove or suggest whatever modifications are necessary in keeping with this subsection.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
E.
Solar Access Easement.
1.
Purpose. The purpose of a solar access easement is to protect solar accessibility between parcels of land so that solar sunlight/energy may be equitably maintained among the owners of all lots in a development or between owners of adjacent or neighboring lots. The purpose is also to promote all feasible means of energy conservation and all feasible uses of alternative energy sources. In regards to plant material, the Village encourages the planting and maintenance of trees and shrubs to create shading, moderate outdoor temperatures, and provide various economic and aesthetic benefits. However, there are certain situations in which the need for widespread use of alternative energy devices, such as solar collector panels, requires specific and limited controls on trees and shrubs.
2.
Solar Access Easement. A solar access easement may be recorded on plats of subdivision in accordance with the provisions of Section 5-112, specifically 5-112G3. Dedicated easements for solar access are for the purpose of assuring that each parcel or unit in the subdivision shall have the right to receive sunlight across adjacent panels or units in the subdivision for any SES, as defined by Section 6-314. In establishing such easements, consideration shall be given to feasibility, contour, configuration of the parcel to be divided, equitability and cost. Required easements shall not result in reducing allowable densities or the percentage of a lot which may be occupied by a building or a structure.
3.
Standards. As a condition of approval of a subdivision map, there may be imposed, in accordance with the provisions of Section 5-112 that the developer or subdividing applicant dedicate solar access easements. During the development review process, the Development Services Department and/or the Plan Commission shall specify the following:
a.
The standards for determining the exact dimensions and locations of such easements.
b.
Any restrictions on vegetation, buildings and other objects which would obstruct the passage of sunlight through the easement.
c.
The terms or conditions, if any, under which an easement may be revised or terminated.
d.
Solar access easements cannot be recorded against a property where the permitted development is taller than 40 feet or in the ORI, BIZ, COR and VC zoning districts.
[Ord. 4594, 10-18-2010] |
F.
Geothermal Access Easement.
1.
Purpose. The purpose of a geothermal access easement is to protect thermal accessibility between parcels of land so that the earth's thermal energy may be equitably maintained among the owners of all lots in a development or between owners of adjacent or neighboring lots. The purpose is also to promote all feasible means of energy conservation and all feasible uses of alternative energy sources. In regards to district heating, the Village encourages the utilization of existing geothermal energies to heat and cool buildings at a district scale such as a new multi-lot subdivision, to reduce the overall draw on fossil fuels for building heating. In some situations, in which geothermal/hydrothermal district heating systems are involved, development requires specific and limited controls for the preservation of the system.
2.
Geothermal District Heating Access Easement. A geothermal access easement may be recorded on plats of subdivision in accordance with the provisions of Section 5-112, specifically 5-112G3, for district heating purposes. Dedicated easements for geothermal access are for the purpose of assuring that each parcel or unit in the subdivision shall have the right to receive geothermal energy across adjacent parcels or units in the subdivision for any GES, as defined by Section 6-314. In establishing such easements, consideration shall be given to feasibility, contour, configuration of the parcel to be divided, equitability, subsidence and cost. Required easements shall not result in reducing allowable densities or the percentage of a lot which may be occupied by a building or a structure.
3.
Standards. As a condition of approval of a subdivision map, there may be imposed, in accordance with the provisions of Section 6-112 that the developer or subdividing applicant dedicate geothermal district heating access easements. During the development review process, the Development Services Department and/or the Plan Commission shall specify the following:
a.
The standards for determining the exact dimensions and locations of such easements.
b.
Any restrictions on vegetation, buildings and other objects which would regulate proximity to a GES.
c.
The terms or conditions, if any under which an easement may be revised or terminated.
[Ord. 4594, 10-18-2010] |
§ 6-405 Streets and Traffic Signals.
A.
Streets.
1.
General. Streets shall be installed by developers or owners as designated on the Transportation Element of the Village's Comprehensive Plan in accordance with the following criteria and as required by the Director of Engineering.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Traffic Studies. Traffic studies shall be required of all proposed residential developments of 50 dwelling units or more, for all commercial and industrial developments of 10,000 square feet of floor area or more and for businesses with drive-through facilities or as determined by the Director of Engineering. The traffic study shall be prepared by firms with demonstrated competence in traffic engineering and traffic studies related to development. The traffic study will be submitted to the Village for review.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Roadway Design Criteria.
a.
The minimum widths of right-of-ways for streets to be dedicated or established shall conform to standards set out in this section.
b.
Local streets shall be designed to evenly disperse traffic and minimize concentrations of through traffic.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
c.
Proposed streets which are in alignment or are a continuation of existing streets already named shall bear the name of such existing streets. A different name shall be used if a street is in the same alignment, but is discontinuous, unless that street has a numbered name. No street names may be used which will duplicate or be confused with the names of existing streets in the Postal District(s) serving Orland Park. Names of local origin are preferred.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
d.
If the tract of land proposed to be developed, or any part thereof lies adjacent to a highway over which the Department of Transportation of the State of Illinois, or the Counties of Cook and Will have jurisdiction with respect to maintenance and upkeep thereof and an entrance or entrances are desired from such highway to lots, streets, roadway or alleys in the proposed development, the developer shall submit a written permit application to the appropriate jurisdiction granting permission to construct such an entrance or entrances after preliminary plan approval by the Village Board. The developer shall obtain the written permission from the Village and all other appropriate jurisdictions for all required permits.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
e.
Proposed developments that are adjacent to existing development shall be designed to accept the alignment and corresponding widths of existing pavements. The Director of Engineering shall determine the proper adjustment where the widenings merge with the existing narrow pavement at the boundary of the property, and shall require the lanes to be painted to designate driving and parking lanes.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
f.
All street intersections and confluences must encourage safe traffic flow.
g.
The minimum standards for a street system based on functional design criteria shall conform to those set forth in Table 6-405(A)(2).
h.
Turn Lanes. The need for turn lanes shall be determined by a traffic study commissioned by the developer or as determined by Village staff. The traffic study shall use established standards of the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO).
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
i.
Stub Streets. Stub streets shall provide continuity between adjoining subdivisions, and shall not exceed 1,000 feet in length.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
j.
Perimeter Streets. If it is determined that a perimeter street is necessary, it shall be designed 30 feet in width, back-to-back of curb. Minimum right-of-way on the perimeter street shall be 46 feet. The street shall be constructed with a fifteen-foot parkway on the side of the street where development will be taking place. Upon development of the adjacent parcel, the adjacent developer will contribute an additional 14 feet of right-of-way along the perimeter street.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
k.
Access Control Standards. No more than one access on each major or minor arterial will be permitted unless a traffic study indicates that additional access points are necessary. The access point will be located, if possible, a minimum of 200 feet from the nearest intersection and the nearest curb cut. Shared access should be considered between adjacent parcels.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
l.
Transit Design Standards. Developments located near existing or planned commuter train stations and bus routes shall be designed in such a manner as to encourage pedestrian and bicycle linkage to these facilities. Pace Development Guidelines may be used as a resource for developments located along fixed route bus lines.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
m.
Cross-Access. Connections between adjacent developments shall be provided to facilitate traffic at locations determined by Village staff.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
4.
Alley Design Criteria. Alleys may be required in business, office and research, and industrial districts unless provisions are made for service access, such as off-street loading, unloading and parking, consistent with and adequate for the uses proposed. Public alleys shall be prohibited in residential areas except where topographic or other conditions may necessitate their use. The minimum width of an alley right-of-way shall not be less than 25 feet. The minimum alley pavement width shall be 20 feet. Dead end alleys are prohibited.
5.
Cul-De-Sac Design Criteria. Each cul-de-sac shall have a terminus of nearly circular shape with a minimum right-of-way diameter of 120 feet (Table 6-405 (A)(2). Each cul-de-sac, in single-family residence districts, shall be not more than 500 feet in length, measured along its center line from the center line of the street of origin to the end of its right-of-way. In multi-family residential areas, cul-de-sac streets shall not exceed 400 feet in length.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
6.
Full Streets. (Reserved)
Table 6-405(A)(2) | |||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Minimum Street Standards Based on Functional Design Criteria | |||||||||
Major and Minor Arterial* | Major Collector | Minor Collector | Local Street | Cul-De-Sac | |||||
6 LANE | 5 LANE | 4 LANE | 2 LANE | 4 LANE | 2 LANE | ||||
PAVED SECTION, BACK TO BACK OF CURB (FT.) | 91 | 67 | 67 | 30 | 51 | 40 | 36 | 24 to 30 | 90** |
MEDIAN WIDTH (FT.) | 16 | 16 | 16 | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A | N/A |
MINIMUM RIGHT-OF-WAY (FT.) | 120 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 100 | 80 | 60 | 120** |
MINIMUM CENTERLINE RADIUS (FT.) | 1,200 | 1,000 | 1,000 | 1,000 | 700 | 700 | 350 | 175 | 175 |
ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS: | |
1. | Sidewalks 5' in width are required on both sides of all public roads within subdivisions with an average lot size of one-half acre or less. |
2. | In certain locations, a bicycle path with a minimum width of eight feet shall be required in lieu of a sidewalk on one side of the road in conformance with the bikeways element of the Comprehensive Plan. |
3. | Left-turn lanes, right-turn deceleration lanes and traffic signals will be required when determined necessary. |
* | On State and County roads, geometric design standards of the State and County will prevail. |
** | Minimum diameter of bulb. |
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996]
B.
Pavements.
1.
General. The arrangement, character, extent, width, grade and location of all streets to be dedicated to the public, all parking lots, and all private streets shall be compatible and complimentary to existing and planned streets, to reasonable circulation of traffic within any development and adjoining lands, to topographical conditions, to runoff of storm water, to public convenience and safety, and in their relations to the proposed uses of the area to be served. All traffic intersections and confluences must encourage safe and efficient traffic flow.
2.
Design References. All pavements shall be designed and constructed in accordance with the following references as they apply:
a.
"Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition.
b.
"Manual for Structural Design of Portland Cement Concrete Pavement," Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition.
c.
"Manual of Instructions for the Structural Design of Flexible Pavements on Projects Involving MFT, FAS and FAUS Funds," Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition.
d.
"Design Manual," Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition.
e.
AASHTO design standards.
3.
Pavement Design Requirements. Pavement design shall relate to the street classification as set forth on the Official Map and as described in this section. The proposed roads indicated on the Official Map are desired to be eventually constructed, but their actual alignment will be decided upon when a preliminary plan is submitted to the Plan Commission and the Board of Trustees for review and approval. The classification of new streets, as well as variations to street classifications for a given street, shall be submitted to the Director of Engineering for review when the preliminary plan is submitted.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Table 6-405(B)(4) | |||
|---|---|---|---|
Table of Pavement Design | |||
Street Classification | Minimum Crown | Minimum Structural Number | |
Major arterial | 5"-2 lane | 4.0 | |
Minor arterial | 6"-3 lane | 4.0 | |
Non-residential collector | 6" | 3.0 | |
Local (Residential) | |||
1. | Major and Minor Collectors and local streets | 5" | 2.35 |
2. | Cul-de-sac | 8" | 2.35 |
3. | Private | 5" | 2.35 |
4. | Rural/Suburban | 5" | 2.35 |
Local industrial with parking | 6" | 3.68 | |
Local industrial with no parking | 5" | 3.68 | |
Frontage road (Dedicated) | 5" | 3.0 | |
4.
Pavement Construction Design. All new streets, public or private, shall be improved and constructed with pavement that complies with the requirements of this section as follows:
a.
Subgrade. All subgrade material shall have a minimum Illinois Bearing Ratio (IBR) of 3.0. All unsuitable subgrade material, including subgrade material having an IBR less than 3.0, shall be removed and replaced with a suitable fill material, or the pavement must be designed to compensate for the soil condition. The soil support IBR values selected for use by the engineer shall represent a minimum value for the soil to be used. Soil tests must be provided to verify suitability of subgrade material.
b.
Pavement Design. The pavement design standards shall conform to those set forth in Table 6-405(B)(4), Table of Pavement Design. A copy of all design assumptions and computations on which the proposed pavement design is based shall be submitted to and accepted by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Composite Pavement Strength.
(1)
The pavement shall be designed and constructed so as to obtain a fifteen-year service life with only minimal maintenance before a resurfacing is required.
(2)
Prior to the installation of the bituminous surface course, but after the installation of the binder course, the developer shall notify the Director of Engineering that he intends to surface the street. The Director of Engineering may obtain a Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation Program Report of the completed pavement improvements at developer's expense.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(3)
The Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation Program shall be performed according to the Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation Specification on file in the office of the Director of Engineering. The program shall generally embody the following testing/pavement evaluation techniques:
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(4)
The program shall evaluate the existing condition of the base and binder course in maximum 200-foot sections, and shall determine whether or not the pavement section with the addition of the surface course of design thickness will be projected to meet a fifteen-year pavement life or greater.
(5)
If the pavement section is projected to meet a life expectancy of 15 years or more, then the developer may proceed as indicated in Subsection B11d and e.
(6)
If the pavement section is not projected to meet a life expectancy of 15 years or more, then the report shall propose asphalt overlays in excess of the surface course design thickness or pavement reconstruction to bring the new pavement section to a fifteen-year life expectancy. The Director of Engineering shall evaluate the results of the report and shall inform the developer of any required pavement repair for each section. These repairs shall be completed before the final surface is applied.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(7)
The Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation Program shall not be considered valid unless the wearing service was applied during the same construction season. Any costs of additional Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation shall be paid in advance by the developer.
(8)
In the case of rigid pavements, the developer shall notify the Director of Engineering that he is ready for final inspection on the streets. The Village Engineer will obtain a Dynaflect Pavement Evaluation Program report of the complete improvements as outlined in Subsection B4c above.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
(9)
The program shall evaluate the existing condition of the pavement in 200-foot sections and shall determine whether or not the pavement section will be projected to meet a fifteen-year pavement life or greater.
(10)
If the pavement section is projected to meet a life expectancy of 15 years or more, then the developer will be so notified.
(11)
If the pavement section is not projected to meet a life expectancy of 15 years or more, then the report shall propose pavement reconstruction to bring the new pavement section to a fifteen-year life expectancy. The Director of Engineering shall evaluate the results of the report and shall inform the developer of any required pavement repair for each section.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Pavement Construction Materials. Pavement materials approved for street construction shall comply with the minimum requirements as tabulated in Table 6-405(B)(5), Table of Approved Street Pavement Construction Materials. Coefficients to be used for computing the pavement structural number are listed with these materials. The coefficients will yield the structural number when they are multiplied by the thickness of the materials (measured in inches).
Table 6-405(B)(5) | ||
|---|---|---|
Table of Approved Street Pavement Construction Materials | ||
Structural Materials | Strength Requirements | Structural Layer Coefficient |
M.S. *I.B.R. P.S.I. | ||
Bituminous Surface: | ||
Class I | 1700 | 0.40 |
Base Course: | ||
Aggregate, Type B | ||
Uncrushed | 50 | 0.10 |
Crushed (100%) | 80 | 0.13 |
Aggregate, Type A | 80 | 0.13 |
Waterbound Macadam | 110 | 0.14 |
Cement Aggregate, | 650** | 0.23 |
Bituminous Aggregate, Mixture | 900 - 1,900 | 0.24 - 0.33 |
Bituminous Mixture, Class I | 1,700 | 0.33 |
Portland Cement Concrete | 4,000*** | 0.50 |
Notes: | |
* | Marshall Stability |
** | 7-Day Design Compressive Strength |
*** | 28-Day Design Compressive Strength |
6.
Subgrade Preparation.
a.
The subgrade of all paved areas shall be graded and rolled in accordance with SSR and BC, Section 200. Embankment shall be placed and compacted in accordance with SSR and BC, Section 207.
b.
At least one Standard Proctor Density Test, performed in accordance with AASHTO T99, shall be taken in each embankment section, with the maximum distance between tests of 300 feet. One standard proctor density test shall be taken from each different source of borrowed material. The density tests must be submitted for review to the Director of Engineering. Upon review of these tests, an inspection of the subgrade shall be made by the engineer and a report of acceptable subgrade and preparation must be submitted to the Director of Engineering prior to placing any curb and gutter or base material.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
7.
Grading.
a.
Gradients of streets shall be a minimum of 1% where possible and in no case less than 0.7% and shall not exceed 7%, unless approved by the Village. Street grades shall be such as to provide natural surface drainage of storm water regardless of the presence of storm sewer facilities.
b.
Where the grade of the street warrants installation of vertical type curb and other special design of improvements because of right-of-way conditions, such as double inlets, the Director of Engineering is authorized to require such design.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
The minimum length of vertical curves shall be 100 feet for 1.5% difference of grade. For each additional 1% difference in grade over 1.5%, a fifty-foot increment shall be added to the length of a vertical curve. If the grade differential is less than 1.5%, a vertical curve is not required.
8.
Sight Distances. At points of intersection of proposed roads with existing roads, the minimum stopping sight distance indicated below for the legal speed limits shall be provided on existing roads. Clear visibility, at any point of movement along the road measured along the center line of the street, shall be provided for at least 350 feet on all major streets, 200 feet on collector and local streets, or as designated by an engineering study.
Legal Speed Limit (MPH)* | Minimum Stopping Sight Distance (feet) |
|---|---|
25-30 | 200 |
35-40 | 275 |
45-50 | 350 |
55 | 475 |
Notes: | |
* | If the Director of Engineering determines that the projected future legal speed limit established in accordance with the State of Illinois "Policy for Establishing and Posting Speed Limits" is higher than the existing legal speed limit, the higher speed limit shall be used to determine the minimum stopping sight distance. [Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653] |
9.
Curb and Gutter.
a.
Combination curb and gutter shall be constructed on both sides of all street pavements and shall comply with the requirements of Construction Standards Governing Public Improvements, as adopted by the Director of Engineering, and as updated from time to time.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
Two No. 4 reinforcing bars shall be placed continuously between expansion joints. Expansion joints shall be doweled and spaced no more than 60 feet on center and at tangent points of all radii. Control joints shall be provided at least 15 feet on center and shall consist of an actual saw cut, at least 1 1/2 inches deep. If curb machines are used, doweled sections are not required.
c.
Curbs installed by slip joint machines shall be allowed.
d.
[1]Unless otherwise directed by the Director of Engineering pursuant to IDOT standards, a barrier curb shall be provided on all major streets. All other streets shall be provided with curbs per latest Village standards. Depressed curbs shall be provided at all bike path and sidewalk crossings. Materials shall comply with those specified in § 6-406.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
[1]
Editor's Note: Former Subsection B.9.d, regarding flow testing, was repealed 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822. This ordinance also redesignated former Subsection B.9.e as Subsection B.9.d.
10.
Design of Pavement Thickness.
a.
The following minimum structural numbers and minimum pavement thickness shall be required in the design of pavements:
[Amended Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Flexible and Rigid Pavements | ||||
|---|---|---|---|---|
Flexible Pavements | Thickness* | |||
Minimum Structural Number | Binder Course | Surface | ||
2.00 to 3.00 | 2.25" | 1.50" | ||
3.01 to 3.99 | 3 1/2" | 1.50" | ||
4.00 and greater | 4" | 1.50" | ||
Rigid Pavements** | Thickness*** | |||
3.00 to 3.99 | 6" to 8" | |||
4.00 to 4.99 | 8" to 10" | |||
Notes: | |
* | Bituminous Concrete Binder and Surface Course, Class I (See Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, from the Illinois Department of Transportation.) |
** | Concrete pavement shall be reinforced with 6" x 6", #6 steel fabric. |
*** | Thickness shall be rounded up to the nearest 1/2 inch. |
b.
Flexible pavement materials can be used until November 1, weather permitting. Any work done after November 1, shall require written authorization from the Director of Engineering. Such authorization, if obtained, will not void the contractor's and the developer's guarantee on the work done.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Flexible pavements must set for a minimum of nine months, including a winter and a spring. After this setting period has passed, one pavement core per 900 lineal feet of measured pavement must be taken. A report must be submitted to the Director of Engineering that lists the thicknesses of base and binder courses and the type and condition of subgrade material as determined from the cores. If the results of the cores indicate pavement deficiencies, additional cores will be needed at intervals required by the Director of Engineering. All cores taken shall be numbered and delivered to the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
d.
Upon receipt of the report and cores, the Director of Engineering will review the report and will perform an inspection of the existing base and binder courses. All base and binder course failures will then be repaired to the Director of Engineering's satisfaction.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
e.
Upon completion of all construction within any development, the Director of Engineering will conduct a deflection test as specified in Subsection B4c above. All deficiencies outlined in the report shall be repaired as specified in the report and to the Director of Engineering's satisfaction prior to the installation of the final surface course.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
C.
Traffic Signals. The need for traffic signals will be determined by a traffic study commissioned by the developer or as determined the Village staff. The traffic study shall use established standards of the Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices (MUTCD), and the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
D.
Emergency Vehicle Access. Emergency vehicles access shall conform to the codes of the appropriate Fire District.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
E.
Fire Lanes. Fire lanes shall conform to the codes of the appropriate Fire District.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
F.
Exhibits. The most current Standard Detail Exhibits shall be applied to any improvements required by these regulations.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
G.
Street Identification Signs.
1.
The developer/property owner shall submit the list of street names approved by the Director of Engineering and a map for the installation of street identification signs immediately after the approval of engineering drawings.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
The Village shall order signs and mounting hardware in accordance with its present design standards. Identifications signs shall be installed as soon as work schedules and weather conditions permit after all the signs and mounting hardware are reserved. Signs shall not be installed until the first lift of pavement and street light poles are installed.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
3.
The Village shall invoice the contractor an amount equal to the cost of the signs and mounting hardware plus 25% for handling and installation of the signs. The developer/property owner shall make payment in full to the Village within 30 days of the date of the invoice.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014] |
§ 6-406 Sidewalks, Driveways, and Parking Lots.
A.
Sidewalks.
1.
General. Sidewalks shall be constructed by developers/property owners along all roads, except as otherwise provided in Section 6-406. If a road is planned for widening within five years of the date of final development approval, the developer/property owner shall provide security for sidewalk construction with the Village. All developments shall provide a sidewalk to connect buildings with public sidewalks, and must feature landscaping, benches and other such materials/facilities for no less than 50% of its length.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996]
2.
Public Roads.
a.
Sidewalks on both sides of a roadway shall be required for all arterial, collector and local streets in the Village of Orland Park. Sidewalks shall delineate the parkway of a right-of-way and shall be at a minimum five feet in width with eight feet of planting strip between the sidewalk and the roadway's back of curb. In the VC Village Center District and OOH Old Orland Historic District and those areas comprising the Downtown Planning District of the Comprehensive Plan (except for residential single family homes attached and detached), sidewalks may extend from building frontage to back of curb, respecting building setback requirements and may replace bufferyard requirements with appropriate applications of street trees (spaced according to parkway standards) and planter beds, as determined via an approved landscape plan, without variance to Section 6-305 Landscape and Tree Preservation.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016]
b.
Multi-use paths, such as bicycle paths, shall replace sidewalks in those areas of the Village indicated by the Comprehensive Plan's Recommended Bikeway System subject to review by the Engineering Department. Multi-use paths shall use IDOT standards in IDOT or County rights-of-way or be a minimum of eight feet wide with a maximum of four feet of planting strip between the path and the roadway's back of curb. In cases where paths terminate, provisions shall be made to loop the sidewalk and multi-use path network. In cases where the network is divided between off-street paths and on-street routes, provisions shall be made to safely transition from either medium and ensure continuity of travel.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Sidewalks or multi-use paths as identified by the Comprehensive Plan's Recommended Bikeway System, as reviewed by the Engineering Department, shall be required for arterial and collector rights-of-way on the perimeter of subdivisions or developments (e.g. sidewalks on roadways where the backs of properties front the right-of-way).
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
d.
Either sidewalks or multi-use paths per the Comprehensive Plan's Recommended Bikeway System are required on both sides of any roadway within a 1/4 mile radius of a school, park or public building, subject to review by the Development Services Department.
e.
New streets shall have sidewalks or multi-use paths per the Comprehensive Plan's Recommended Bikeway System on both sides of the right-of-way. When one side presents grade challenges or other development challenges that inhibit sidewalks or paths, such as the requirement for retaining walls, provisions shall be made to loop the sidewalk or path that would dead-end to the existing network (e.g. cross the street via signed and marked crosswalks and connect). For new streets that connect to existing streets with sidewalks or paths on one side of the right-of-way, provisions shall be made to loop the sidewalk that would dead-end on the new street to the network (e.g. cross the street via signed and marked crosswalks and connect).
f.
Sidewalks and multi-use paths per the Comprehensive Plan's Recommended Bikeway System, as reviewed by the Engineering Department, are required for streets and rights-of-way that are below standard widths. Such streets and rights-of-way shall be subject to review by the Engineering Department and shall consider such options as carriage walks, reduced parkways, bike lanes, woonerfs etc. to accommodate pedestrian and cyclist mobility.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Private Roads. The same sidewalk standards are required for private roads as for public roads, unless other design guidelines are applied for planned developments.
4.
Location. The location of sidewalks shall generally be one foot inside of the right-of-way. The location may be modified, depending on factors that include but are not limited to: relationship to drainage ditches, easements, Commonwealth Edison right-of-ways and towers, handicapped ramps, existing trees and landscaping, and topography.
5.
Construction. Sidewalk width shall be a minimum of five feet in width, subject to Director of Engineering approval. Thickness shall be a minimum of five inches reinforced with six inches by six inches wire mesh, or other reinforcement methods subject to approval of the Director of Engineering. All sidewalks at curb depressions shall include a detectable warning for the vision impaired consisting of truncated domes. The warning area shall begin six inches from the back of the curb and continue two feet in the direction of pedestrian travel for the entire width of the waking surface. The detectable warning shall also present a contrast in color from the adjacent sidewalk with integrally colored concrete or other means subject to Director of Engineering approval.
[Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998; amended by Ord. 4125, 4-17-2006; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
B.
Driveways and Driveway Aprons.
1.
Driveways Across Sidewalks and Parkways. No person, firm or corporation shall construct or alter any driveway over, across or upon any public sidewalk or parkway without first obtaining a permit from the Development Services Department. Where ingress and egress is to be made from adjoining real estate to a public street and where Section 6-306 requires off-street parking, such off-street parking shall be made accessible to the public street and the ingress and egress shall be made across the parkway and sidewalks by means of a driveway constructed in accordance with this section.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Permit Application. Application for a permit to construct a driveway shall be in writing, signed by the applicant, and filed with the Development Services Department. The application shall designate the location of the proposed driveway, the name and address of the applicant, the name and address of the owner of the property to be served by the proposed driveway, and the address of the applicant, if other than the owner, and a plat of survey indicating the driveway location and sizes proposed. In those instances where a driveway is required to comply with the requirements of Section 6-306, the permit application shall accompany the application for the issuance of a building permit authorizing the new building construction.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Permit Issuance and Fees. The Development Services Department shall issue a permit to construct a driveway provided that the permit application is complete and is in accordance with these regulations and that the permit fee has been paid.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
4.
Permit Revocation. All permits for driveways issued pursuant to this section may be revoked at any time without the consent of the permittee by order of the Board of Trustees and the Director of the Development Services Department. Upon such revocation, all rights granted under the permit shall be revoked, and the sidewalk, space, parkways and curbs shall be restored to their former condition, at the expense of the permittee or of the owner of the property served by the driveway at the time of such revocation.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Maximum Number. Single family residences shall be permitted to have only one driveway per lot except if the lot has a minimum lot frontage of 90 feet, then a circular driveway consisting of two drives may be allowed. All other uses shall be allowed the number of driveways as approved by the Board of Trustees upon recommendation of the Building Department. Any single family lot which has a driveway exiting on to an arterial or major collector street shall have a turn-around driveway.
[Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998]
6.
Widths and Lengths. The maximum width for driveways for single-family residences including circle drives shall be 10 feet at the sidewalk line and 16 feet at the curb; provided that, where a two-car or three-car garage is located within 30 feet of the property line, the driveway shall not exceed 20 feet at the sidewalk line or 26 feet at the curb, or 30 feet at the sidewalk line and 36 feet at the curb, respectively. No driveway shall encroach upon any portion of the parkway in front of the adjoining property. The maximum width of a driveway is applicable to the entire driveway length between the building line and sidewalk. Single-family residential driveway aprons shall have a maximum width of 10 feet for one-car driveways, a maximum width of 20 feet for two-car driveways, and a maximum width of 30 feet for three-car driveways, measured at the sidewalk, and shall flare to a maximum width of three feet to either side at the curbline. The maximum width of a driveway apron is applicable to the entire driveway length between the sidewalk and the street. The minimum driveway length shall be 18 feet, excluding right-of-way and sidewalks. No driveway shall encroach upon any portion of the parkway in front of the adjoining parkway. Driveways and driveway aprons also must adhere to construction specifications and requirements in Section 3-4-2F of the Village Code. The maximum width for driveways and driveway aprons for all other uses shall be as approved by the Board of Trustees upon recommendation of the Engineering Department.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999; Ord. 5061, 1-26-2016; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 12-18-2023 by Ord. No. 5856]
7.
Grades and Curbs. Driveways shall conform to the existing sidewalk grade. Where it is necessary to break the existing curb for the driveway opening, the curb and gutter shall be completely removed and a new section constructed or as approved by the Engineering Department. Each such driveway shall be constructed and maintained so as to permit free and unobstructed passage on, over or across the sidewalk and in such a manner as not to interfere with the proper drainage and safe grading of the streets. Each such driveway shall be so constructed and maintained that its surface at the point of crossing any sidewalk pavement shall be flush with the adjoining sections of such sidewalk.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
8.
Driveways Connecting to Arterial Streets. Driveways connecting to arterial streets must provide on site turn around.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
9.
Residential Shared Driveways Connecting to Streets. Up to three residential lots may share a single private driveway connecting to any street.
[Ord. 4880, 2-3-2014]
10.
Lots Fronting a Local Street and an Arterial. In subdivisions where lots front both a local street and an arterial street, no driveways shall be installed along the property line of the lot which fronts the arterial street.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
11.
Portland Cement Concrete Driveway Aprons. Portland Cement concrete driveway aprons shall be constructed according to the standards described in this section.
12.
All Other Driveway Aprons. Multi-family developments, business, office research, and industrial district driveway aprons shall be constructed with a ten-foot radius return unless otherwise required by the Engineering Department. Driveways shall not be closer than five feet to adjacent driveways at the curb line.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended by Ord. 3672, 8-5-2002; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
13.
Driveway Thickness. All residential driveways and driveway aprons shall have a minimum concrete thickness of five inches with six inch by six inch welded wired mesh or fiber mesh concrete additive and a granular bedding base of two inches.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
14.
New Driveway Aprons Abutting Existing Bike Trails, Sidewalks or Curbs. New driveway aprons abutting existing bike trails, sidewalks or curbs shall be constructed to meet the grade of such sidewalks or curbs. If necessary, the sidewalk shall be relocated to accommodate the maximum driveway apron slope. The location and grade for driveway aprons, when no adjacent sidewalks or curb and gutter exists, shall match the adjacent parkway. The minimum slope shall be 2%.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended by Ord. 5126, 9-19-2016]
15.
Driveway Side Setback Requirements for All Properties. Driveways shall be located at least one foot from the nearest side property line and shall not obstruct storm water flow. Shared driveways or driveways providing vehicular cross-access between adjacent parcels that are approved by the Village and/or established by agreement between the subject property owners shall be exempt from this one-foot side setbacks requirement. Driveways in a side yards associated with side loading garages shall comply with setback requirements of the applicable zoning district.
[Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
16.
Driveways and apron slope. The maximum grade for a driveway and driveway apron shall be 8%, unless otherwise approved by the Director of Engineering. An existing driveway having a slope greater than 8% may maintain the existing slope.
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
C.
Driveway, Driveway Apron, and Parking Construction.
1.
Concrete. Concrete driveways shall be constructed in compliance with the provisions of this section, so far as they are applicable and shall not be less than five inches thick, plus a two inch bedding for residential use and eight inches thick, plus a three inch bedding for multi-family, commercial and industrial property use. Expansion joints shall be used between the back of the curb and the driveway and between the sidewalk and the driveway.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
2.
Asphalt.
a.
Residential driveways shall be constructed in two courses and shall not be less than eight inches in thickness after compaction. The crushed stone base course shall be six inches in thickness and compacted until all voids are filled with finely crushed stone or sand. The asphalt surfaced course shall be 1.50 inches in thickness after compaction and shall be constructed of bituminous plant-mix Type B-4 or B-5 conforming to the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as prepared by the Illinois Department of Transportation, most recent edition.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
All other driveways, aprons and parking lots shall be constructed in two courses and shall not be less than 11 inches in thickness after compaction. All concrete driveways must be reinforced with a six inch by six inch welded wired mesh or fiber mesh concrete additive.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994] |
3.
Paver Bricks. Paver bricks must be set on a minimum of one inch of sand over a minimum of four inches of gravel, with a rigid edge restraint, and a minimum slope of 1/4 inch per foot, subject to approval by the Engineering Department.
[Ord. 3130, 5-18-1998]
D.
Sidewalk, Driveway, and Parking Lot Materials. [Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
All materials shall comply with the following standards of quality:
1. | Portland Cement: | ASTM C150 Type I, Normal |
ASTM C150 Type II, High-Early-Strength | ||
2. | Fine Aggregate: | ASTM C33, clean sand graded between #100 and #4 sieve limits. |
3. | Coarse Aggregate: | ASTM C33, uncoated crushed stone or washed gravel. |
Slag shall not be permitted. | ||
4. | Water: | Potable and fit to drink |
5. | Water-Reducing Admixture: | ASTM C494 Type A (normal) or Type D (retarder) |
6. | Air Entraining Agent: | ASTM C260 |
7. | Premolded Filler Strips: | ASTM D994 |
8. | Curing Compound: | ASTM C309, Type 2 (white, pigmented) |
9. | Reinforcement: | ASTM A615, Grade 40 |
E.
Concrete Quality.
1.
Ready-mixed concrete that complies with ASTM C94 shall be used for sidewalks, driveways, and driveway aprons. The concrete shall be supplied by a ready-mixed source which is inspected yearly by the Illinois Department of Transportation.
2.
Concrete mix shall be designed using the following data:
a.
Minimum compressive strength of 4,000 psi at 28 days.
b.
Minimum of six sacks of cement per cubic yard.
c.
Maximum size aggregate of one inch.
d.
Air entrainment of 6% +1%.
e.
Maximum slump of four inches.
f.
Maximum water content including moisture in the aggregate of six gallons per sack of cement.
g.
All concrete shall contain a water-reducing admixture with no reduction in cement content permitted.
F.
Subgrade Preparation. Where a fill condition exists, all topsoil and unsuitable material shall be removed. Subgrade shall be rolled or tamped before granular fill is placed. Fill shall be placed in six inch layers to the proper subgrade elevation. Side slopes of fill material shall not exceed one foot vertical to three feet horizontal. Where a cut condition exists, all top soil and unsuitable material shall be removed. Subgrade shall be removed to the proper elevation to allow sufficient width to accommodate the forms.
G.
Granular base. A granular base of two-inch minimum thickness on the prepared subgrade. The base shall extend the full width of the sidewalk or driveway apron. The granular base shall consist of CA6 aggregate conforming to the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as prepared by the Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
H.
Forms. Side forms shall be of lumber of not less than two inches nominal thickness or steel of equal rigidity. The minimum depth of the side forms shall be equal to the sidewalk thickness. No two inch by four inch lumber forms shall be permitted. Forms shall be held securely in place by stakes or braces with the top edge true to line and grade. The forms for the sidewalk shall be set so that the slab will have a fall of one inch vertical to four feet horizontal from the edge nearest the property line toward the edge farthest from the property line, except as may be otherwise directed by the Department of Code Enforcement.
I.
Expansion Joints. Expansion joints of the thickness specified below shall consist of a premolded filler strip with the top strip placed 1/4 inch below the surface of the sidewalk or driveway apron.
1.
One-Half Inch Thick Expansion Joints. Expansion joints 1/2 inches thick shall be placed between sidewalks and all structures which extend through sidewalks, such as light standards, traffic light standards, and traffic poles. One-half inch thick expansion joints shall also be provided at the junction of the driveway apron and the sidewalk and at the junction of the driveway apron and the curb.
2.
Three-Fourth Inch Thick Expansion Joints. Expansion joints 3/4 inches thick shall be placed at maximum intervals of 50 feet in sidewalks and where specified by the Department of Engineering. Where sidewalks are constructed adjacent to pavement or curbs that have expansion joints, the expansion joints in the sidewalk shall be placed opposite the existing expansion joints as nearly as practicable. Expansion joints shall also be placed where the sidewalk abuts existing sidewalks, between driveway pavement and sidewalk, and between sidewalk and curbs where the sidewalk abuts a curb.
J.
Placing and Finishing Concrete.
1.
The Department of Code Enforcement shall be notified when the subgrade has been finished. A minimum of three hours' notice shall be given prior to placing concrete. No concrete shall be placed until the subgrade has been inspected and approved by the Building Department.
2.
Materials should not be placed on ice or frozen subgrade.
3.
The subgrade shall be moistened just before the concrete is placed. The concrete shall be placed in successive batches for the entire width of the slab, struck off from 1/2 to 3/4 inch higher than the finished slab, tamped until all voids are removed and free mortar appears on the surface, thoroughly spaded along the edges, struck off to the true grade, and finished to a true and even surface with floats and trowels. The final troweling shall be done with a steel trowel, leaving a smooth, even surface. After the water sheen has disappeared, the surface shall be given final finish by brushing with a fine-hair broom. The broom shall be drawn across the sidewalk or driveway apron at right-angles to the edges of the slab, with adjacent strokes slightly overlapping, producing a uniform, slightly roughened surface with parallel marks.
4.
Control Joints.
a.
Sidewalks. Control joints shall be constructed at right angles to the center line of the sidewalk and shall extend 1/4 the depth of the sidewalk. They shall not be less than 1/8 inch nor more than 1/4 inch in width, and shall be edged with an edging tool having a 1/4 inch radius. All slabs shall be five feet long on any one side, unless otherwise ordered by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
Driveway Aprons. Control joints shall be constructed so as to divide the driveway apron into sections which are approximately square, with no side longer than 15 feet. The control joints shall be not less than 1/8 inch nor more than 1/4 inch in width, and shall be edged with an edging tool having a 1/4 inch radius. The minimum depth shall be 1 1/4 inch.
K.
Protection from low temperatures. After the first seasonal frost, concrete shall be protected from freezing in accordance with the Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as prepared by the Illinois Department of Transportation, latest edition. The developer shall be responsible for all concrete damaged by low temperatures, and any damaged concrete shall be removed and replaced by the developer at the developer's expense.
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
L.
Curing. Sidewalks and driveway aprons shall be cured by one of the following methods:
1.
Burlap shall be placed on the finished surface, saturated with water and covered with an impermeable covering.
2.
Polyethylene sheeting shall be placed as soon as the concrete has sufficiently hardened to prevent marring of the surface. The surface of the concrete shall be wet immediately before the sheeting is placed. The edges of the sheeting shall be weighted securely with a continuous windrow of earth or any other means satisfactory to the Building Department to provide an air tight cover.
3.
Specified curing compound shall be applied with brush, roller, or spray at the rate of one gallon for every 250 square feet of surface. Any of the above curing methods must remain in place for not less than six days.
M.
Backfill. After the concrete has been cured, forms shall be removed and the space near the edges of the sidewalk or driveway apron shall be backfilled to the required elevation with material approved by the Building Department. The material shall then be compacted until firm and the surface evenly graded.
N.
Disposal of Surplus Material. Surplus or waste material resulting from the sidewalk or driveway apron construction shall be disposed of by the developer.
O.
Control of Materials. The developer shall, when requested by the Village and at his expense, have a commercial testing laboratory prepare and test samples of delivered concrete. One set of tests shall be taken for the first 25 cubic yards, or fraction thereof, and one set of tests shall be taken for each additional 50 cubic yards. A set of tests shall consist of four standard cylinders (two shall be broken at seven days and two shall be broken at 28 days), one slump test and one air content test. The laboratory shall perform tests in accordance with recognized ASTM standards and shall submit written reports of such tests to the Director of Engineering for review.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
§ 6-407 Street Lighting.
A.
Street Lighting Standards. All developments shall meet the following minimum standards and the most current Standard Detail Exhibits for providing public street lighting:
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
1.
All developments shall submit public improvement and development plans that incorporate a proposed street lighting system to the Director of Development Services or designee. The street lighting plan shall show the location and direction of the pole and mast arm, and the proposed routing of the electric cable and duct.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
2.
An LED luminaire shall be placed at all intersecting public streets, which intersect with major county or state highways and/or major streets. Street lights shall be singularly controlled with photo control cells attached to, and shall be an integral part of, the luminaire. The control cell shall be similar to that manufactured by Precision, catalog no. P26-275, or current Precision equivalent.
3.
An LED luminaire shall be placed at all cross or "T" intersections and at the end of streets and culs-de-sac. An LED type luminaire shall be placed at mid block of all blocks, at a distance not to exceed 500 feet between installations. An LED type luminaire shall also be placed at all major curves in street alignment.
4.
Mounting height shall be 30 feet for all poles, except by approval from the Development Services Department.
5.
All electric cable shall be placed underground in a unit duct. Each light shall have a single feed from the light standard to the point of connection to Commonwealth Edison electric lines. The single feed shall run through an above grade secondary electrical pedestal disconnect (API 10x14 or approved equal). The feed disconnect should have a buss inline link with crimp terminals and Cooper-Bussman rubber boots (IA0512 or equal) in the disconnect pedestal. The feed line from Commonwealth Edison pedestal to the secondary disconnect pedestal shall be piped with rigid PVC conduit (schedule 40) with two 90° elbows.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
6.
For developments where there is limited access to individual Commonwealth Edison pedestals, the use of a centrally located lighting controller cabinet will be allowed. The controller shall be powered by one single point electric service at 120/240V, 10, 3 wire underground service. The lighting controls shall be installed within a ground mounted NEMA 3R, green-painted aluminum IDOT Type 3 locking cabinet. The individual light standards shall be connected to the lighting controller via alternating branch circuits. The control itself shall consist of a mechanically held contractor which is automatically controlled via a controller-mounted photocell with a manual "Hand-Off-Auto" switch and individual branch circuits. Various controls shall be as shown in the standard details at the end of this section.
7.
After completion of the street lighting system, all developments shall submit to the Director of Engineering or designee, a set of "As Built" drawings showing the routing of electric cable, mounting height, size length, luminaire size wattage and actual locations of each light standard, disconnect pedestal, and point of connection to Commonwealth Edison electric lines. The Director of Engineering or designee shall inspect the system for conformance to the standards set out in this document. The Director of Engineering or designee may accept the system after all the deficiencies are corrected.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
B.
Light Standards and Bracket.
1.
The complete standard shall be the type manufactured by the HAPCO Company or Valmont Industries, Inc., as shown the standard details, no exceptions. The pole size, bracket size, and applicable catalog/part numbers are to be clearly shown on the development plans and applicable catalog cut sheets are required. The mounting heights shall be 30 feet for all developments.
2.
Each light standard shall be a one-piece, seamless, round tapered tube of alloy 6063, hollow shaft, with attached bracket arm and all accessories described herein. The pole shall have a 0.188 inch wall thickness. The pole shall be fully heat-treated along its entire length post-welding of the base flange, to produce the required T6 temper.
3.
The metal pole foundations shall be in accordance with Sections 836 and 1070 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.
4.
Welding shall be done by the inert gas shielded metal arc method with consumable electrode. Aluminum alloy 4043 electrode shall be used.
5.
The base flange for the attachment of the shaft to the foundation shall be a one-piece cast socket of aluminum alloy 356. The flange shall be joined to the shaft by means of complete circumferential welds, externally at the top of the flange and internally at the bottom of the shaft tube. The bolt holes shall be capable of containing one inch anchor bolts with a specific bolt circle diameter of 11-1/2 inches. The base shall have an opening of such size as will permit easy entry of all conduit.
6.
An ornamental cap of aluminum alloy shall be provided with each shaft. The cap shall be fastened to the shaft by means of a stainless steel screw.
7.
The pole shaft shall include a four inch by six inch reinforced handhole centered 18 inches above the bottom of the shaft. Handholes are to be located 90° clockwise from the plane of the bracket arm as viewed from the top. The opening for the handhole shall be oval in shape and measure four inch by six inch, with the major dimension along the vertical axis. The hole in the shaft wall shall be reinforced with a frame of aluminum alloy 356-T6, which shall project slightly beyond the wall interior and be completely joined to the interior and exterior of the shaft with a fillet of which the minimum size shall be 5/16 inch. The opening shall be protected by a snug-fitting cover attached with two stainless steel hex head screws. The external contour of the reinforcing frame and cover shall be curved to conform to the roundness of the shaft. The cover shall have a surface finish similar to the shaft.
8.
Each pole shall contain an internal lug with a 3/8 inch diameter hole for the purpose of attaching a grounding connector.
9.
The bracket arm shall be the truss type of design with an upper and lower member joined near the luminaire end of the arm and braced with a vertical strut. The upper member shall be the continuous or wiring member and shall be a tapered tube that is ovalized at the pole shaft end, with the major dimension of the oval in the horizontal plane. Tube nominal wall thickness shall be 1/8 inch. The lower member shall be standard circular pipe. Both upper and lower members shall be attached to the pole shaft with 1/4 inch thick wrought, curved plates. Plates shall be welded to the members. The upper attachment shall be made with four 1/2 inch aluminum bolts, nuts and lock washers. The lower attachment shall be made with two 3/8 inch stainless steel bolts. Blind nuts shall be factory installed in the pole shaft. Wiring at the upper attachment shall be through a 1 1/4 inch diameter hole with appropriate grommet. The material of the main bracket members and their attachment plates shall be alloy 6063-T6. The bracket arm shall incorporate a two inch pipe size slip-fitter tenon at least six inches long.
10.
The bracket arm shall be of such length as will provide for the attaching of a light fixture 12 feet from the shaft at all pole locations, on all equipment and materials.
11.
A set of four threaded one inch-eight NC steel anchor bolts, minimum 40 inches in length, with a twelve-inch minimum length of hot-dipped galvanizing at the threaded end, shall be provided for anchoring the base to the concrete foundation. The bolts shall include a four-inch right-angle hook at the unthreaded end and six inches of thread on the threaded end. A galvanized nut, lock washer and flat washer shall be supplied with each anchor bolt. Four anchor bolt covers of aluminum alloy 43 and stainless steel screws for their attachment, shall be provided.
12.
All nuts, bolts and washers used in the assembly of the pole shall be 300 series stainless steel, except for anchorage hardware as indicated in the Light Standard Detail, and excepting the foundation anchor bolt hardware.
13.
The pole shaft shall be provided with a satin finish accomplished by mechanical rotary grinding. The bracket arms shall be provided with a satin etched finish. All materials shall be clean, free from dents and gouges. No surface preparation or painting of any type shall be performed on the assembly components at the time of installation.
14.
Raceway openings shall be free from burrs and rough edges that may injure the installer and the wiring. Openings and shall be fitted with a rubber grommet.
15.
In areas where breakaway devices are required, these devices shall be by means of breakaway couplings and aluminum shrouds or transformer bases as shown in the Standard Details.
C.
Luminaire, LED Type, Mast Arm-Mounted - Residential Public Roadway
Requirements for Typical Residential Public Roadways
Performance Criteria
LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS | ||
|---|---|---|
Maintenance | Tool-less, Entry Gasketed and Sealed and UL Listed for Wet Locations | |
Light Source and Drovers | RoHS and DLC Compliant | |
Operating Temperatures | -20°C to + 40°C | |
Internal Connections and Components | Preassembled and Prewired Using Modular Electric Connections | |
Minimum Life Expectancy | 50,000 Hours | |
Voltage Fluctuations | + or - 10% | |
Housing Finish Color | Gray, ASTM Rating of Six per D1654 after 1,000 Hours | |
Tenon Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) | 2" | |
Maximum Luminaire Weight (lb) | 75 lb. | |
Nominal Luminaire EPA (ft2) | 40 feet2 | |
Nominal Input Voltage (V) | 120V or 240V | |
ANSI Vibration Test Level | Level 1 (Normal) | |
Identification | External Labeling per ANSI C136.15 and 22 | |
Optics | Type 3, Flat Glass | |
Mounting Method | Swivel-Tenon/Mast Arm | |
Driver | Control Signal Interface | |
Nominal BUG Ratings | B3-U0-G3 | |
Make/Model of LED Light Source(s) | Cree, Philips, Lumiled, Nichia | |
Make/Model of LED Driver(s) | Advance, Philips or Equal | |
Dim-ability | [T] Dimmarble 7 pin photo cell receptacle | [ ] Not dimmable |
Electrical Immunity System Failure | No Possible Disconnect | |
Thermal Management | No Moving Parts | |
Warranty Period (yr) | 10 Year | |
Buy America Compliance | NEMA listed company (provide copy of compliance document) | |
Design Lights Consortium Compliance | Yes (Provided documentation verifying product listing or DLC's website) | |
PARAMETERS | |
|---|---|
Lamp Lumen Depreciation | 0.70 |
Initial Input Power (W) | 170W |
Maintained Input Power (W) | 170W |
Initial LED Drive Current (mA) | 530 min. |
Maintained LED Drive Current (mA) | 530 min. |
CCT (K) | 4000 |
S/P ratio | 0.9 |
D.
Luminaire, LED Type, Mast Arm-Mounted - Commercial Public Roadway.
LED Lighting Requirements for Commercial and Collector Public Roadways
Performance Criteria
LUMINAIRE REQUIREMENTS | ||
|---|---|---|
Maintenance | Tool-less, Entry Gasketed, Sealed and UL Listed for Wet Locations | |
Light Source and Drivers | RoHS and DLC Compliant | |
Operating Temperatures | - 20°C + +40° C | |
Internal Connections and Components | Preassembled and Prewired Using Modular Electrical Connections | |
Voltage Fluctuations | + or - 10% | |
Housing Finish Color | Gray, ASTM Rating of Six per D1654 after 1,000 Hours | |
Tenon Nominal Pipe Size (Inches) | 2" | |
Maximum Luminaire Weight (lb) | 75 lb. | |
Nominal Luminaire EPA (ft2) | 40 feet2 | |
Nominal Input Voltage (V) | 120V or 240V | |
ANSI Vibration Test Level | Level 1 (Normal) | |
Identification | External Labeling per ANSI C136.15 and 22 | |
Optics | Type 3, Flat Glass | |
Mounting Method | Swivel-tenon/Mast Arm | |
Driver | Control Signal Interface | |
Nominal BUG Ratings | B3-U0-G3 | |
Make/Model of LED Light Source(s) | Cree, Philips, Lumiled, Nichia | |
Make/Model of LED Driver(s) | Advance, Philips or Equal | |
Dim-ability | [T] Dimmable 7 pin photo cell receptacle | [ ] Not dimmable |
Electrical Immunity System Failure | No Possible Disconnect | |
Thermal Management | No Moving Parts | |
Warranty Period (yr) | 10 Year | |
Buy America Compliance | NEMA listed company (provide copy of compliance document) | |
Design Lights Consortium Compliance | Yes (Provide documentation verifying product listing on DLC's website) | |
PARAMETERS | ||
Lamp Lumen Depreciation | 0.63 | |
Initial Input Power (W) | 200W max. | |
Maintained Input Power (W) | 200W max. | |
Initial LED Drive Current (mA) | 530 | |
Maintained LED Drive Current (mA) | 530 | |
CCT (K) | 4000 | |
S/P ratio | 0.9 | |
E.
Foundation.
1.
Pole Foundation. Pole foundations shall be constructed with a reinforced concrete foundation with dimensions required by the type of soil as shown on the soil tests and borings. Standard Details indicate minimums for concrete foundation construction.
a.
Foundations shall include a cage made of #3 and #5 reinforcing bars. The cage shall be 16 inches in diameter. There shall be six #5 bars, five feet in length, welded to six #3 bars which shall be spaced 12 inches O.C. and shall be formed into a sixteen-inch diameter circle.
b.
Foundations shall also contain a 5/8 diameter by ten-foot length grounding rod which shall be attached to the internal grounding lug located within the pole by clamps suitable gauge electrical grounding wire.
c.
In areas where conventional concrete foundations cannot be utilized because of soil conditions or utility conflicts, the use of metal helical screw-in type foundations may be utilized with written approval from the Director of Engineering or designee. The Standard Details identify the minimums required.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Materials. The concrete shall be Class SI complying with Section 503 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. The reinforcement bars shall comply with Section 508 of the Standard Specifications. The raceway shall be a two-inch diameter straight conduit of rigid plastic.
3.
Construction Method.
a.
The foundation excavation shall be made by augering. The foundation shall be cast-in-place and allowed to cure for at least 14 days prior to erecting the light pole standard.
b.
Metal pole foundations shall be in accordance with Section 836 of the IDOT Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition.
F.
Electric Cable 600 Volt, Plastic Insulated Materials. The electric cable shall comply with the ASTM Standards (latest edition), Designation Number, and shall comply with the Insulated Power Cable Engineers Association Standards cited by the paragraph or table number in I.P.C.E.A. Pub. S-61-402 (latest edition).
1.
Conductors. The conductors shall be in accordance with Sections 817 and 1066 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition, and shall be a minimum of No. 10 AWG size using XLP or EPR in the light standard. When not within the light standard, the wire shall be a minimum of No. 6 AWG using XLP or EPR. Conductors of No. 8 AWG size, XLP or EPR - USE and smaller shall be stranded annealed copper wire, ASTM B-3 compliant. Conductors of No. 6 AWG size and larger shall be stranded annealed copper wire, ASTM B-8 compliant. Conductors shall be of different colors to designate hot and neutral wires. Preferred colors are black, red and white.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
2.
Fuses. The wiring in the light standard shall have a 10 amp in-line fuse, FNM-10, and shall use an inline breakaway fuse holder with crimp terminals and rubber boots. The neutral shall have a Bussman identified solid neutral fuse holder and crimp terminals with rubber boots.
3.
Unit Duct. The electric cable shall be in accordance with Sections 816 and 1066 of the IDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. The unit duct shall be one piece without splices. The unit duct may be formed by extruding it over the insulated conductors. The unit duct shall have a smooth inner bore which does not adhere to conductor insulation.
4.
Construction Methods. The electric cable shall be continuous (no splicing) between the service connection and disconnect pedestal, between the lighting controller and light standard, and between the disconnect pedestal and light standard, and shall be contained within the plastic unit duct. The duct shall extend one foot into the light standard and the cable shall be long enough for the splices to be withdrawn 18 inches from the pole handhole. All electric cable and cable unit duct shall be buried at a minimum depth of 30 inches below finished grade.
5.
Splicing of 600 Volt Cable and Wire (In Light Standard). This specification covers splicing of insulated electric cable and wire. Compliance with the ASTM Standards is required, as cited by the ASTM Designation Number.
6.
Taped Splices. Taped Splices are only allowed with prior approval from the Director of Engineering, or his designee. A taped splice shall mean a splice of pigtail construction made with a spring connector, rubber tape, and plastic/vinyl tape according to the following descriptions and construction methods:
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
Connector. The spring connectors shall be made of spring steel and zinc plated, or similar corrosion-resistant coating. The connectors shall employ the expandable spring principle and shall insure positive mechanical and electrical connection under all temperature and load conditions.
b.
Rubber Tape. The rubber tape shall be of 0.75 inch width and 0.030 inch thickness, ASTM D119 compliant.
c.
Vinyl-Plastic Tape. The vinyl tape shall be similar to that manufactured by 3M Corporation as SCOTCH Super 33+ Vinyl Plastic Electrical Tape. The vinyl tape shall be 0.75 inch width and 0.0070 inch thickness with an adhesive coating on one surface. The tape shall exhibit properties per ASTM D1000 and tape flammability resistance shall be per ASTM D568.
d.
Alternate Taped splice. A taped splice shall also mean a splice of pigtail construction made with a split-bolt connector wrapped in vinyl tape, followed by rubber tape, then finally with vinyl tape using the following criteria:
(1)
There shall be no exposed or bare electrical wire within the light standard, with the exception of the grounding cable. All exposed cable wire within a splice shall be fully taped.
(2)
Sufficient torque shall be exerted on the bolting assembly to ensure positive electrical connection under all temperature and load conditions.
(3)
No insulating paint of any type shall be allowed.
G.
Vibratory Plowing. The cable duct shall be directly buried by a vibratory plowing method to a minimum depth of 30 inches. Cable unit duct shall not be buried in excess of 48 inches.
1.
Directional Boring. All directional boring must be in accordance with IDOT Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, Sections 810 and 1088.
H.
Granular Trench Backfill. At locations indicated by the Director of Engineering or designee, a trench shall be constructed to accommodate the cable duct or unit. The trench shall be backfilled with granular material in accordance with Section 810 of the IDOT Standard Specification for Road and Bridge Construction, latest edition. The contractor or developer shall furnish the trench backfill material and shall appropriately dispose of all surplus backfill material.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
I.
Construction Methods. The trench shall be excavated to a depth no less than 30 inches and no greater than 48 inches, in a manner that prevents cave-in. Excavated material shall be withdrawn and placed a sufficient distance away to prevent excavated material from reentering the trench. The trench width shall be at least six inches. Where the cable duct enters the foundation or a rigid steel conduit, the bottom of the trench shall be shaped so as to provide a smooth directional run of the cable duct.
1.
The cable duct shall be placed in the bottom of the trench only after all existing loose granular material has been removed, and the trench area has been bedded with granular backfill material, as directed by the Director of Engineering or designee.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
The trench shall be backfilled by placing granular material in uniform layers no greater than six inches in depth (loose uncompacted measure). The granular material in each deposited layer shall be thoroughly in such a manner as to avoid damage to the cable duct and/or wiring.
3.
No granular material greater than two inches maximum dimension shall be allowed in any layer of the backfill placement.
4.
No sod, frozen material, or any foreign material which, by decay or otherwise, would cause settlement, shall be placed as backfill material. Undesirable "naturally occurring" materials such as, but not limited to, topsoil, clay lumps, broken concrete, shall not exceed 5% by weight in any one sample of backfill material.
5.
Any material excavated from the trench may be used as backfill provided it does not conflict with the above, and the material is approved by the Director of Engineering or designee. However, if the material in question has been excavated from the roadway area, replacement material must be granular trench backfill regardless of what material has been excavated from the trench.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
J.
Acceptance of Street Lighting System. Once the street lighting system has been initially installed according to the specifications set forth in this section, the Engineering Department and Public Works Department or designee shall, upon the request of the developer, inspect the system and prepare a list of items for repair (punch list) (commonly referred to as a "punch list"). The punch list shall be provided to the developer or their designee. When the appropriate repairs have been made, the Village shall accept the lighting system for luminaire maintenance only. The developer remains responsible for the lighting system and shall therefore be responsible for any damage due to construction, including cable hits and pole knock-downs. The Village shall accept the lighting system when the development is formally accepted in letter form, as written by the Engineering Department or designee.
[Amended by Ord. 5061, 1-18-2016; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
K.
See Infrastructure Specification Guidelines, which may be updated by the appropriate Village department from time to time.
[Added 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
§ 6-408 Sanitary Sewer System.
A.
General.
1.
All development, whether public or private, shall include provisions for the construction of sanitary sewers and appurtenances designed in accordance with this section. Developers shall use either the public sewer system or an alternative sewer system, certified by the agency or municipality with jurisdictional authority, provided that the development is proximate to a transmission line that has adequate capacity to handle such proposed development.
2.
All sanitary sewer improvements shall be installed in accordance with the material installation and testing requirements of the "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois," latest edition, unless otherwise modified in this section. Sanitary sewer improvements shall conform to all applicable requirements of the current Metropolitan Water Reclamation District of Greater Chicago ("MWRDGC") Watershed Management Ordinance ("WMO").
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
B.
Service Areas. All sewers shall be designed to accommodate an ultimate service area as defined by the Village Board of Trustees.
C.
System Extension. The size and location of proposed extensions to the existing sanitary sewer system shall be as approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
D.
Basic Design Standards.
1.
Design Flows.
a.
Design flows for single and multiple residential development shall be based upon full development of the service area with the population served, estimated as follows:
Type of Dwelling Unit | Number of Persons |
|---|---|
Studio | 1 |
1 Bedroom | 2 |
2 Bedroom | 3 |
3 Bedroom | 4 |
4 Bedroom | 5 |
The maximum daily per capita design flow shall be calculated using the formula: |
Q=500(P)1/5 |
Where: | ||
Q* | = | maximum design flow, in gallons per capita per day ("gpcpd") |
P | = | population served, in thousands |
* | Not to exceed 400 gpcpd or be less than 250 gpcpd | |
For undeveloped residential areas where the details of future developments are not known, design population (P) per acre may be estimated by the Director of Engineering. [Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
Design flows for non-residential developments shall be based on full development of service area with the maximum daily per capita design flow calculated as follows:
Type of Establishment | Unit | Average Flow in Gals/day/unit |
|---|---|---|
Shopping Center (without food service or laundries) | Employee | 0.10 gal/sq. ft. |
Store | Employee (1 shift) | 25 |
Office | Person (1 shift) | 25 |
Industrial | ||
- with showers | Person | 35 |
- without showers | Person | 25 |
Restaurant | Meal Served | 7 |
Theater | Per Seat | 5 |
Hotel | Per Guest | 100 |
Notes: | |
* | Quantities are exclusive of process water requirements which must be estimated and added. |
For nonresidential developments where the details of the development are not established, domestic design flows may be estimated by the Director of Engineering. Such flow estimate shall not relieve the owner or developer of the responsibility to provide adequate sanitary sewer capacity in order to meet any and all future requirements within the development. [Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Sewer Design Hydraulics.
a.
Sanitary gravity sewer mains shall be designed to provide design flow capacity, without surcharging, using typical Manning's formula:
Q = (A) (1.486/n) (R)2/3 (S)1/2 |
Where: | ||
Q | = | design flow in units of cubic feet per second ("cfs") |
A | = | area in units of square feet |
R | = | hydraulic radius in units of feet |
S | = | slope in units of feet per foot (dimensionless) |
n | = | roughness coefficient, independent on conduit material |
c.
Design mean velocity, flowing full, shall not be less than two feet per second or greater than 15 feet per second.
d.
Design flow shall include total allowable infiltration at any point based on 100 gallons per inch of diameter of sewer per mile per twenty-four day at any time for any section of the system.
e.
Minimum and maximum design slopes are found in Part F.3 and are per the MWRDGC WMO.
4.
Alignment. Sewers shall be laid straight in both horizontal and vertical planes between manholes, unless otherwise approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Sewer Size Changes. Sanitary sewers of different diameters shall join only at manholes. The invert elevations shall be adjusted to maintain a uniform energy gradient by matching the 0.8 depth points of different diameters.
6.
Sanitary Sewer Manholes.
b.
Where possible, sanitary sewer facilities shall be designed to avoid the use of a drop manhole. A drop manhole shall be provided for manholes with any pipe having a difference in invert elevation more than 72 inches above the invert of the sewers leaving such manholes. Small drops may be used in the event of utility conflicts, where approved by the Director of Engineering. The invert of the outlet pipe from a drop pipe must match the springline elevation of the precast manhole bench. All drop manholes must be precast with monolithic drop pipe assemblies.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Where flows and other conditions dictate, special manholes or junction chambers shall be designed and constructed.
d.
All manholes shall have a precast base.
e.
All sanitary sewer manholes will require the installation of external sealing such as "WrapidSeal™ Manhole Encapsulation System" or "Infi-Shield External Uni-band" or an approved equal.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
7.
Sewer Depth. Sanitary sewers shall be constructed at a minimum depth of eight feet and shall provide an outfall for all sanitary sewage within the existing and future ultimate service area, unless approved by the Director of Engineering. The eight-foot depth is intended to eliminate the service line separation deficiencies which commonly occur between sanitary sewer placed at six feet deep and water mains at five feet deep.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
8.
Lift Stations.
a.
Whenever possible, sanitary sewerage facilities shall be appropriately designed per this Code section so as to avoid the necessity of providing lift stations.
b.
Lift station and force main designs shall be submitted for review and approval to the Director of Engineering, the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency, and the Metropolitan Water Reclamation District of Greater Chicago.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Lift stations shall be of the single wet well type utilizing submersible pumps, and shall be comparable to other recently constructed lift stations within the service area of the Village.
d.
A stand-by internal combustion power source shall be provided for lift stations. The power source shall be natural gas-fueled for output rating less than 100 kW and shall be diesel-fueled for 100 kW and above.
As an alternate, the Director of Engineering may allow a dual connection to the power system as a method of providing stand-by power in cases where such an alternate would provide an equal degree of reliability, and also would provide an economy to the Village over the service life of the alternate stand-by power system. [Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
All stand-by power sources must be installed within a weatherproof building structure suitable to accommodate the power source, controls, alarm system and all other required appurtenances. The structure must be large enough to allow for servicing of all equipment and must meet all Village building codes.
e.
Force mains shall be designed and constructed of epoxy-lined ductile iron pipe or PVC pressure pipe ASTM 2241-SDR 21. A tracer wire shall accompany all force main piping installations for the purpose of future locating with an electronic locating device. A pipeline marker shall be installed above the force main every 400 feet and at horizontal bends in the pipe. The tracer wire shall terminate in an enclosure (typically a pipeline marker) with sufficient wire slack for connecting to an electronic locating device.
f.
A compatible telemetered alarm system shall be installed and connected to the Village's existing computerized reporting and alarm panel.
g.
The force main wet well shall be epoxy-lined after installation of the well structure itself and associated piping.
9.
Sewer Pipe Class. Sewer pipe class shall be determined by using ASTM rigid and flexible pipe design strength formulas.
10.
Sewer Pipe Bedding.
a.
Sewer pipe bedding shall, as a minimum, conform to the requirements established in Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Construction in Illinois, July 2009, and/or latest revision.
b.
Sewer pipe concrete cradle, arch, or full encasement shall be constructed whenever dictated by trench or embankment conditions as directed by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
E.
Material Specifications. All sanitary sewer system elements shall conform to the following specifications:
1.
Sewer and Service Connection Pipe.
a.
Reinforced concrete pipe - circular reinforcement, minimum Class 3, ASTM C76, with epoxy lining, 18 inches diameter and larger.
b.
Ductile iron pipe - ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C151), minimum thickness, Class 52 per ANSI A21.51 (AWWA C150), calcium aluminate cement-lined.
c.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) - ASTM D-3034, SDR 26 less than twenty-foot depth at final grade for sizes six inches through 12 inches inside diameter and AWWA C905, DR 25 for sizes 14 inches through 36 inches inside diameter.
d.
Polyvinyl Chloride Molecularly Oriented Pressure Pipe (PVCO) - ASTM F1483, AWWA C909 Class 150 for sizes six inches through 12 inches I.D. at 20 feet or greater depth.
e.
High Density Polyethylene Pipe (HDPE) for force main only - AWWA C906.
3.
Sewer and Service Connection Pipe Fittings.
a.
Ductile iron - ANSI A21.10 (AWWA C110).
b.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) - ASTM D-3034.
c.
Polyvinyl Chloride Molecularly Oriented Pressure Pipe (PVCO) requires ductile iron fittings meeting the specifications above.
Materials | Joints |
|---|---|
1. Reinforced Concrete Sewer Pipe (A.S.T.M. C-76) | A.S.T.M. C-361 |
2. Ductile Iron Pipe ANSI A 21.51 (AWWA 151-75) | ANSI 21.11 (AWWA C111) |
3. 6 inches diameter Sanitary Sewer Pipe ABS SDR 23.5 (services only) | ASTM D-2751 |
4. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) (ASTM D-3034) (SDR 26) | ASTM D-3212 |
Nothing herein shall constitute or imply an endorsement by the Village of any one material over another or an opinion by the Village regarding equality or superiority of the performance qualities of any of the above materials.
4.
Casing Pipes (Exhibit PC-01). Bituminous coated steel pipe - ASTM A120, 0.375 inches minimum thickness. All casing pipes shall utilize appropriate stainless steel spacers, per manufacturer's specifications, to support the sewer pipe as directed by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Manholes (Sanitary Manhole Standard Details SS-01, SS-02, SS-03).
a.
Precast Reinforced Concrete. ASTM C478 and ASTM C443 conforming to the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois, Sixth Edition July 2009 and/or latest revision.
b.
Sizes:
(1)
For sewer eighteen-inch diameter or less, manhole shall have a forty-eight-inch inside diameter.
(2)
For sewer twenty-one-inch to thirty-six-inch diameter, manhole shall have a sixty-inch inside diameter.
(3)
For sewer greater than thirty-six inch diameter, manhole shall be a minimum of 72 inches inside diameter and have an offset riser cone section of forty-eight-inch inside diameter.
c.
Adjustment.
(1)
Any frame adjustment shall use at least one rubber adjustment riser (Infra-Riser brand or approved equal) to establish the final seating surface of the structure frame. Any structure located within the paved roadway shall require the use of at least of one rubber riser, and, if necessary, said riser shall be of the tapered wedge-type in order to match the proposed cross-slope of the pavement surface.
(2)
No more than two rubber adjustment risers, with six inches total maximum adjusted height, shall be allowed per structure.
(3)
A frame adjustment less than three inches in height shall consist of only rubber riser(s). The minimum thickness of a rubber riser shall be one inch.
(4)
A frame adjustment greater than three inches in height shall use a minimum three inch precast concrete riser for the lower riser, and the final riser shall be rubber.
d.
Sealing. All mating surfaces of concrete adjustment riser(s), structure sections, and frames shall be sealed with an external seal. No mastic sealant, concrete mortar or epoxy mortar shall be allowed as a sealant for adjustment risers, structure sections or frames. A manhole encapsulation system or external sealing system, as approved by the Director of Engineering, shall be used.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
e.
Pipe and Frame Seals. All pipe connection openings shall be precast with resilient rubber water tight pipe to manhole sleeves or rubber boot seals.
f.
Connections. All sewer connections to existing manholes shall be "core-drilled" and rubber boot seals installed.
g.
Bottom Sections. All manhole bottom sections shall be monolithically precast including bases and invert flowlines.
h.
Drop Manholes. Drop manhole assemblies shall be monolithically precast with manhole barrel section. Refer to Drop Manhole Standard Details. SS-02, SS-03.
6.
Castings.
a.
Manhole Frame and Cover. Manhole frame and cover - 7" East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #1022Z1 with 1020A HD GS lid embossed with "SANITARY SEWER" and "VILLAGE OF ORLAND PARK," as shown on Sanitary Manhole Frame and Cover - Standard Detail No. SS-04.
b.
Pick Hole. All lids shall be cast with a concealed pick hole.
c.
Water Tightness. Where necessary to prevent entry of overland flow, a water tight frame and self-sealing lid shall be used, seven inches East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #1022Z1 PT4 (4 bolt lock down) frame and 1020A HD GS lid embossed with "SANITARY SEWER" and "VILLAGE OF ORLAND PARK," Sanitary Manhole Frame and Cover - Standard Detail No. SS-04 or as required by the Director of Engineering.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
F.
Design Flows.
1.
Average Daily Flow for Sanitary Sewer. Average daily flow for sanitary sewer shall be 100 GPCPD. Maximum design flow for sanitary sewer lines shall be determined by one of the following equations indicated below; provided, however, that the maximum design flow for sewer laterals need not exceed 400 GPCPD and the maximum design flow for sewer mains and trunks shall not be less than 250 GPCPD.
Equation No. 1: Q = 500 |
P1/5 |
Equation No. 2: Q = 100(1+14) |
(4+P) |
Where: | ||
Q | = | Maximum design flow in GPCPD |
P | = | Population in thousands |
2.
Minimum Size. No public sewer conveying raw sewage shall be less than eight inches in diameter.
3.
Design Slopes. Minimum and maximum slopes are tabulated below. The slopes are those that produce minimum and maximum velocities of 2.0 ft/sec. and 15.0 ft/sec. respectively, based on Kutter's formula, with n = 0.013 and the pipe flowing full, unless approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Sewer Size (inches) | Minimum Slope (percent) | Maximum Slope (percent) |
|---|---|---|
8 | 0.40 | 22.0 |
10 | 0.28 | 15.0 |
12 | 0.22 | 11.0 |
14 | 0.17 | 9.0 |
15 | 0.15 | 8.3 |
16 | 0.14 | 7.8 |
18 | 0.12 | 6.5 |
21 | 0.10 | 5.1 |
24 | 0.08 | 4.2 |
G.
Protection of Water Mains. Water mains shall be protected in accordance with the applicable Illinois Pollution Control Board Regulations and the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency, Division of Public Water Supplies, Technical Policy Statements. Wherever the sanitary sewer main, building service sewer, or any storm drain crosses a water main, a minimum 18 inches vertical separation shall be provided between the top of the lower pipe and the bottom of the upper pipe. If an eighteen inch vertical separation cannot be maintained, the sanitary or storm sewer shall be constructed of watermain quality pipe, for a minimum distance of 10 feet on each side of the water main. If storm or sanitary sewer crosses above a watermain and an 18 inches clearance cannot be maintained, both sewer and water pipes must be of the same pipe material as the watermain.
H.
Sewers in Relation to Streams.
1.
Location of Sewers on Streams.
a.
Cover Depth. The top of all sewers entering or crossing streams shall be at a sufficient depth below the natural bottom of the stream bed to protect the sewer line. In general, the following cover requirements shall be met:
(1)
One foot of cover is required where the sewer is located in rock.
(2)
Three feet of cover is required in other material. In major streams, more than three feet of cover may be required.
(3)
In paved stream channels, the top of the sewer line should be placed one foot below the bottom of the channel pavement. Concrete encasement may be required.
Note: Less cover will be approved only if the proposed sewer crossing will not interfere with the future improvements to the channel stream. |
b.
Horizontal Location. Sewers located along streams shall be located outside of the stream bed and sufficiently separated from the stream bank to provide for future remediation and to prevent siltation pollution during construction.
c.
Structures. The sewer outfalls, headwalls, manholes, gate boxes, or other structures shall be located so they do not interfere with the free discharge of flood flows of the stream. Watertight covers per Section 6-408E6c shall be required for manholes set at elevations below flood hazard elevations.
d.
Alignment. Sewers crossing streams should be designed to cross the stream as nearly perpendicular to the stream flow as possible and shall be designed without change in grade. Sewer systems shall be designed to minimize the number of stream crossings.
2.
Construction Requirements.
a.
Materials and Backfill. Sewers entering or crossing streams shall be constructed of calcium aluminate cement lined ductile iron pipe with mechanical joints; otherwise they shall be constructed so they will remain watertight and free from changes in alignment and grade. The backfill used in the trench shall be coarse aggregate, gravel, or other materials which will not cause siltation, pipe damage during placement, or chemical corrosion in place.
b.
Siltation and Erosion. Construction methods that will minimize siltation and erosion shall be employed as stated in Land Development Code Article 6-411 Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control. The design engineer shall include in the project specifications the methods to be employed in the construction of sewers in or near streams to provide adequate control of siltation and erosion.
3.
Aerial Crossings.
a.
Structural Support. Support for all joints shall be provided in pipes utilized in aerial crossings. The supports shall be designed to prevent frost heave, overturning and settlement.
b.
Freeze and Expansion Protection. Protection against freezing shall be provided. This may be accomplished through the use of insulation, and increased slope expansion jointing shall be provided between the aerial and buried sections of the sewer line.
c.
Flood Clearance. For aerial stream crossings the impact of flood waters and debris shall be considered. The bottom of the pipe should be placed no lower than the elevation of the 100-year (1% annual chance of occurrence) flood.
4.
Inverted Siphons. Inverted siphons shall have not less than two barrels with a minimum pipe size of six inches and shall be provided with the necessary appurtenances for convenient flushing and maintenance. The inlet and outlet structures shall have adequate clearances for cleaning, sufficient head shall be provided and pipe sizes shall be selected to ensure velocities of at least three feet/sec. for average flows. The inlet and outlet structures shall be designed so that normal flow is diverted to one barrel such that either barrel may be taken out of service for cleaning.
I.
Handling of Pipe. Sanitary sewer pipe shall be handled in a manner that will prevent damage prior to installation. Damaged or defective material on the job site shall be rejected and replaced to the satisfaction of the Director of Engineering. Methods of construction conducive to the damage of sewer pipe shall be corrected when called to the attention of the contractor. All pipe and fittings shall be examined by the contractor above grade before placement in the trench.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
J.
Laying of Pipe.
1.
Sanitary Sewer Pipe. Sanitary sewer pipe shall be laid true to line and grade as set forth in the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois, Sixth Edition (July 2009), and/or latest revision. Dirt or other foreign material shall be prevented from entering the pipe or pipe joint during handling or laying operations and any pipe or fitting that has been installed with dirt or foreign material in it shall be removed, cleaned, and relaid. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open end of the installed pipe shall be closed with a water tight plug or by other means approved by the Director of Engineering to ensure absolute cleanliness and avoidance of extraneous flows inside the pipe.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Laying of Pipe on Curves. The curvature of sanitary sewers is not allowed unless, in the opinion of the Director of Engineering, special circumstances dictate otherwise. Pipe required to be laid on curved alignment shall be joined in straight alignment and then deflected, joint by joint. Special care shall be taken in blocking the pipe, and in no case shall the degree of deflection exceed the manufacturer's recommendations for the respective pipe size, material and barrel length.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Sanitary Sewer Services. (Sanitary Service Riser SS-05 and SS-05-20): Sanitary sewer services shall be a minimum of six inches in diameter and connected to the sewer main with a manufactured wye at a minimum angle of 30° and a maximum angle of 45°. Sanitary sewer services shall be extended to the property line or building at a minimum gradient of 1%. Sanitary sewer service connections to sewer mains 12 feet or more in depth shall be constructed with a six inch tee and riser and backfilled with select granular material or encased in concrete at the option of the Director of Engineering. On a temporary basis, sanitary services may be terminated with a manufactured plug in which case the location shall be staked and an accurate record kept of the stub distance from the nearest downstream manhole along the sewer main. Sanitary sewer service connections to existing sewer mains shall be made with a dedicated tapping machine and the saddle shall be tightly secured to the existing sanitary sewer.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
An all stainless steel designed tee and/or wye saddle, per ASTM A240, with a large branch-side mat gasket and of two-piece construction, as approved by the Director of Engineering, shall be required by the Village for new construction.
4.
Depth of Pipe Cover. All pipe shall be laid to a minimum depth of eight feet measured from the proposed ground surface to the top of the pipe barrel unless specifically allowed otherwise under special circumstances by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Pipe Bedding. (Trench Section Sanitary Sewer Detail No. SS-06). Crushed gravel or crushed stone - ASTM C33. The only gradation allowed shall be 100% retained on a 3/8 inches sieve and 100% passing 3/4 inches sieve. Granular pipe bedding material or granular cradle shall be required on all sanitary sewers installed in the Village. Granular pipe bedding shall be a minimum of four inches in earth excavation and a minimum of six inches in rock excavation. The trench shall be backfilled with granular material to six inches over the top of the pipe. The granular material shall conform in gradation to Type B, of the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois, Sixth Edition (July 2009) and/or latest revision.
6.
Selection of Granular Backfill. All trenches for sanitary sewers falling under and within two feet of a proposed or existing paved surface shall be backfilled with select granular material conforming to only gradation Types A or B as listed in the Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois, Sixth Edition (July 2009) and/or latest revision. Selected granular backfill shall be placed in uniform layers not exceeding six inches (loose measure) and compacted with mechanical equipment to 90% of maximum density in accordance with AASHTO-99.
K.
Installation Requirements.
1.
No connection of any section of new sanitary sewer to an existing Village sanitary sewer is allowed until the Village approves the new sewer(s) for service.
2.
Sewer system design and construction shall in all respects be in accordance with the regulations of the MWRDGC and the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency. No construction shall commence until evidence of the approved permits from these agencies is filed with the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
The installation of sanitary sewer and appurtenances shall conform to the requirements of this section and the following:
4.
The installation of sewer service connections shall conform to the requirements of this section.
5.
Where the installation of a grease separator is required, the basin shall be exterior to the building where possible. However, should the establishment prefer to have an internal grease basin, it will be allowed if ample basin capacity can be provided. Basin capacity shall be dictated by applicable plumbing code(s).
6.
The contractor shall keep a record of the location of all sewer services by measurement to the nearest downstream manhole. Such records shall be delivered to the Director of Engineering at the completion of the work.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
L.
Inspection and Test.
1.
Cleaning. All sewers and appurtenances shall be high pressure cleaned prior to inspection and testing required by this section.
2.
Visual Inspection.
3.
T.V. Inspections.
a.
Upon completion of construction and prior to initiation of the maintenance guarantee period, a T.V. inspection shall be performed. Video and a written report of all television inspections shall be provided to the Village prior to the initial acceptance provided for by this section. The form of the report and video format shall be approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
Fees and costs connected with T.V. inspections shall be paid for by the developer or owner.
c.
All dips, cracks, leaks, improperly sealed joints, and departures from approved grades and alignment shall be repaired by removing and replacing the involved sections of pipe and manholes.
d.
All defects and corrective work required as the result of T.V. inspection shall be performed by the developer without delay. Upon completion thereof, the sewer shall be retested and such further inspection made as may appear warranted.
4.
Infiltration Testing.
a.
It is the intent of this section to secure a sewer system with a minimum amount of infiltration. The maximum allowable infiltration shall not exceed 100 gallons per inch of diameter of sewer per mile per twenty-four-hour day at any time for any section of the system. The joints shall be tight and any joint with visible leakage or leakage in excess of that specified above, shall be repaired at the developer's expense.
b.
The repair must be of a permanent nature and of a quality equal to new construction in conformance with the applicable specifications.
c.
Immediately after backfilling, the entire length of the sewer trench, including stubs, shall be inundated to normal ground water level or 18 inches above the top of sewer pipe, whichever is higher. At that time, infiltration tests shall be made to determine compliance with the allowable infiltration criteria. To measure the amount of infiltration, the contractor shall furnish, install, and maintain a V-notch shape crested weir in a metal frame tightly secured at the lower end of each sewer test section as directed by the Director of Engineering. The Director of Engineering shall check the infiltration by measuring the flow over such weirs. When infiltration is demonstrated to be within the allowable limits, the contractors shall remove such weirs.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
5.
Exfiltration Testing. If during the construction of the sewer system, the Director of Engineering determines that it is impractical to obtain a proper infiltration test, then a test for watertightness shall be made by bulkheading the manhole at the lower end of the section under test and filling the sewer with water to 18 inches above the top of the sewer in the manhole at the upper end of the section. Leakage will then be calculated as the measured amount of water added to maintain the above described level at a maximum allowable exfiltration rate of 100 gallons per inch of diameter of sewer per mile per twenty-four-hour day at any time for any section of the system.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
6.
Air Testing. All Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Polyvinyl Chloride Molecularly Oriented Pressure Pipe (PVCO) will require low pressure air testing meeting ASTM F1417. The Director of Engineering may require air testing for other pipe materials in accordance with ASTM C828.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
7.
Deflection Testing.
a.
All Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) and Polyvinyl Chloride Molecularly Oriented Pressure Pipe (PVCO) require deflection testing. The 5% deflection test for pipe sizes six to 15 inches in diameter is to be run using a nine-arm mandrel having a diameter equal to 95% of the base diameter of the pipe as established in ASTM D-3034. For pipe sizes 18 to 27 inches in diameter, the nine-arm mandrel size shall be 95% of the inside diameter and wall thickness dimensions shown in Table 1 of ASTM F-679, latest issue. The test shall be performed without mechanically pulling devices.
b.
The individual lines to be tested shall be so tested no sooner than 30 days after they have been installed.
c.
Wherever possible and practical, the testing shall initiate at the downstream lines and proceed towards the upstream lines.
d.
No pipe shall exceed a deflection of 5%. Where deflection is found to be in excess of 5% of the original pipe diameter, the contractor shall excavate to the point of excess deflection and carefully compact around the point where excess deflection was found. The line shall then be retested for deflection. If the deflected pipe fails to return to the original size (inside diameter) after the second test, the line shall be replaced accordingly to the standards set forth in this section.
M.
Exhibits. The most current Standard Detail Exhibits shall be applied to any improvements required by these regulations.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
N.
Acceptance of Sanitary Sewer System.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
1.
Once the sanitary sewer system has been completed according to the specifications set forth in this section, the Engineering Department shall, upon the request of the developer, coordinate inspection of the system with the Public Works Department and prepare a list of items for repair (punch list). The list shall be sent to the developer and when repairs have been made, the Village shall accept the system for operational use only. During the time after the acceptance by the Village for maintenance, the developer shall be responsible for any deficiencies identified within the system, including but not limited to sewer blockages, adjustment to manhole frames and leaking joints. Upon reaching approximately 80% development of building construction, the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department will reinspect the sanitary sewer system for any existing deficiencies and prepare a list of items for repair. The list shall be given or sent to the developer and when the repairs have been made to the satisfaction of the Village, the system shall be formally accepted by the Village in letter form sent to the developer.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
2.
All construction shall meet the requirements and acceptance procedures of the Metropolitan Water Reclamation District of Greater Chicago prior to the acceptance by the Village.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
O.
See Infrastructure Specification Guidelines, which may be updated by the appropriate Village department from time to time.
[Added 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
§ 6-409 Storm Sewers and Storm Water Detention.
[Ord. 3281, 8-16-1999]
A.
General.
1.
All development, whether public or private, shall include provisions for the construction of storm sewers and appurtenances designed in accordance with this section. Developers shall use either the public sewer system or an alternative sewer system, certified by an agency or municipality with jurisdictional authority, provided that the development is proximate to a transmission line that has adequate capacity to handle such proposed development.
2.
All development designated by the Director of Engineering shall include provisions for storm water holding facilities designed in accordance with this section. The storm water holding facilities should incorporate multiple uses where practicable.
The detention (dry pond), retention (wet pond), or depressional storage areas that are to be used as part of the drainage system for a property shall be constructed as the first element of the initial earthwork program. Any eroded sediment captured in these facilities shall be removed by the applicant before project completion in order to maintain the design volume of the facilities.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
3.
Storm sewer systems shall be installed in accordance with Section 600 of the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," and "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois," latest edition, unless otherwise modified in this section.
4.
Stormwater system designs should be in conformance with Illinois EPA stormwater permitting requirements. In particular, a state National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permit for Construction Site Activities is required for land disturbances of five or more acres. Permit requirements for a "stormwater pollution prevention plan" specifically reference the need for stormwater detention, vegetated swales and natural depressions, infiltration measures, and velocity dissipation devices to control runoff pollutants and to maintain predevelopment hydrologic conditions.
5.
All dry basins with volume control and best management practices (BMPs) must have a minimum of a four-inch underdrain or as required by the Director of Engineering.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
6.
In wet ponds natural landscaping is required to be planted at not less than five feet wide at the normal water line for a 4:1 slope.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
B.
Service Areas. All storm sewers, streams or channels shall be designed to accommodate all areas which naturally flow to the area of the development and also any additional areas which are planned to contribute to the drainage area as identified by the Director of Engineering. The drainage areas as designated shall be designed to not adversely impact the capacity of the downstream system.
C.
System Extension. The location of proposed extensions to the existing storm sewer system shall be approved by the Director of Engineering.
D.
Submittal Requirements.
1.
Drainage Plan. Each applicant shall submit the following information as required by the Director of Engineering, depending on development size. Properties smaller than 10 acres shall submit the Basic Drainage Plan. Properties larger than 10 acres shall comply with the submittal requirements of both the Basic Drainage Plan and the Advanced Drainage Plan. The applicant shall have a registered professional engineer certify on the drawings that all clearing, grading, drainage, and construction shall be accomplished in strict conformance with the drainage plan. The following information shall be submitted for both existing and proposed property conditions.
2.
Topographic Map. A topographic survey of the property at one foot contours under existing and proposed conditions, and areas upstream and downstream, necessary to determine off-site impacts of the proposed drainage plan. The map shall be keyed to a consistent datum specified by the Director of Engineering.
3.
Provide a narrative describing the existing conditions of the site, identifying previous permitting (if applicable), and requirements for meeting outside agency permitting, such as the MWRD Watershed Management Ordinance.
[Added 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822[1]]
[1]
Editor's Note: This ordinance also provided for the redesignation of former Subsection D.3 and 4 as Subsection D.4 and 5, respectively.
4.
Basic Drainage Plan. Mapping and descriptions, where relevant, of existing and proposed drainage system features of the property and immediate vicinity including:
a.
The banks and centerline of streams and channels;
b.
Shoreline of lakes, ponds, and detention basins;
c.
The limits of wetland areas;
d.
Any designated natural areas;
e.
Any proposed environmental mitigation features;
f.
Farm drains and tiles;
g.
Sub watershed boundaries within the property;
h.
Watershed soils classifications;
i.
The property's location within the larger watershed;
j.
Location, size and slope of stormwater conduits and drainage swales;
k.
Depressional storage areas;
l.
Delineation of upstream and downstream drainage features and watersheds which might be affected by the development;
m.
Detention and/or retention facilities;
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
n.
Roads and streets and associated stormwater inlets;
o.
Base flood elevation, and regulatory floodway where identified for the property; and
p.
Basis of design for the final drainage network components.
5.
Advanced Drainage Plan. The same information as required under the Basic Drainage Plan is required for properties larger than 10 acres along with the following additional information for the minor drainage system's design runoff event and the 100-year runoff event of critical duration:
a.
Elevations and maps of 100-year flooding;
b.
Cross section data for open channel flow paths and designated overland flow paths;
c.
Direction of storm flows;
d.
Flow rates and velocities at representative points in the drainage system; and
e.
A statement by the design engineer of the drainage system's provisions for handling events greater than the 100-year's runoff.
E.
Basic Design Standards. The following criteria should be used in evaluating and designing the drainage system. The underlying objective is to provide capacity to pass the ten-year peak flow in the minor drainage system and an overland flow path for flows in excess of the design capacity. Whenever practicable, all areas of the property must be provided an overland flow path that will pass the 100-year flow at a stage at least one foot below the lowest grade adjacent to the foundation in the vicinity of the flow path. Overland flow paths designed to handle flows in excess of the minor drainage system capacity shall be provided drainage easements. Street ponding and flow depths shall not exceed curb heights by more than one inch, except as allowed by the Director of Engineering.
1.
Drainage Area. The drainage area, in acres, used for design shall be the entire watershed service area tributary to the point in the drainage system under consideration. It shall include any tributary service area that may be outside the development.
2.
Rainfall Intensity. The rainfall data source for computations of hydraulic and hydrologic analysis shall be based upon Frequency Distributions and Hydroclimatic Characteristics of Heavy Rainstorms in Illinois and the latest rainfall data source approved by the Illinois State Water Survey (ISWS) shall be used. The average rainfall intensity used for design shall be selected from a Rainfall Intensity Duration curve, as follows:
a.
Underground storm sewer water conduits and swales shall be determined from the ten-year storm event curve.
b.
Surface streams and open channels shall be determined from the 100-year storm event curve.
c.
The elapsed duration time used in selecting a specific point on the rainfall intensity curve shall be equal to the time of concentration, defined as inlet time, plus the time of flow between the most distant inlet and the point in the system under consideration.
[Amended by Ord. 5564, 12-21-2020]
3.
Storm Sewer, Stream Improvement and Open Channel Hydraulics.
a.
Storm sewers, stream improvements and open channels shall be designed to provide design flow capacity using Manning's formula:
Q = (A)(1.486) (R2/3)(S1/2) |
n |
b.
Roughness coefficients (n) shall be as follows:
c.
Design mean velocity shall not exceed the following:
(1)
Storm sewers 10 feet per second.
(2)
Open channels, concrete or asphalt lining 10 feet per second.
(3)
Open channels, sodded five feet per second.
(4)
Storm sewer, including manholes, shall be constructed so that infiltration shall not exceed 1,300 gallons per inch diameter of sewer per mile per twenty-four-hour day at any time for any section of the system.
4.
Natural Stream Channels. Natural stream channels that are designated by the Board of Trustees for the Village of Orland Park shall be retained in lieu of either constructed open channels or enclosed storm sewer pipes. Natural stream channels shall be regulated by provisions in Section 6-411 and Section 6-412 of these regulations.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
5.
Man-made Open Channels.
a.
Constructed open channels that are not designated as natural stream channels, and that will be draining an area 80 acres or larger, may be provided on an optional basis in lieu of an enclosed storm sewer pipe.
b.
All constructed open channels that are not designated as natural stream channels located within a development or located on public property or easements adjacent to the development and other open channels within 150 feet of the development, shall be improved as follows:
(1)
Maximum slopes shall be six horizontal to one vertical.
(2)
An eight-foot wide bituminous concrete (IDOT Class I) pathway, suitable for use by maintenance vehicles, with a minimum thickness of six inches, shall be constructed a minimum of two feet above the normal water level. The far edge of the pathway shall be a minimum of one foot within the easement running along the open channel. The near edge of the pathway shall not be more than 10 feet from the edge of the normal water line.
(3)
A six-inch underdrain shall be constructed with a minimum cover of six inches along the flowline of all open channels.
(4)
An easement for drainage, access and municipal utilities, shall be provided along the open channel with a width adequate to include the area covered by an 100-year storm.
6.
Swales. All swales shall be sodded and limited to a maximum water depth of 12 inches. The maximum water depth shall be a minimum of one foot below the lowest opening of an adjacent foundation along the flow path. Maximum side slopes of swales shall not be steeper than six horizontal to one vertical.
7.
Alignment. Sewer shall be laid straight in both horizontal and vertical planes between manholes, unless otherwise approved by the Director of Engineering.
8.
Pipe Design Flows. Unless otherwise approved by the Director of Engineering, storm sewer pipes and open channels shall be designed to carry storm water runoff flows determined by the Rational Method using the formula:
Q = C i A |
Where: | ||
Q | = | runoff flow in units of cubic feet per second. |
C | = | runoff coefficient, characteristic of tributary drainage area in dimensionless units. |
A | = | tributary drainage area in units of acres. |
i | = | average rainfall intensity in units of inches per hour. |
a.
The runoff coefficient, C, is the ratio of runoff to rainfall and shall be assumed as follows:
(1)
All impervious areas (paved or hard surfaced areas of all types and buildings, inclusive of, but not limited to, patios, garage walks, stoned landscaped areas and pools), C shall equal 0.95.
(2)
All pervious areas (all areas not classified as impervious), C shall equal 0.45.
(3)
All bodies of water (wetlands, lakes, streams, and depressional storage areas), C shall equal 1.0.
b.
The runoff coefficient used in design shall be the weighted average for the proposed tributary watershed.
c.
Within a development, the runoff coefficient shall be computed assuming ultimate development. Where ultimate development plans are not available at the time of the design of the storm sewer system, a runoff coefficient shall be selected by the Director of Engineering, based on the zoning classification, knowledge of the specific development and the previous experience of the Village with similar developments. The area within the watershed, but outside the development, shall be computed for existing conditions, the runoff coefficient shall be approved by the Director of Engineering.
9.
Minimum Sewer Size.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
Storm sewer shall not be less than twelve-inch diameter except where existing storm sewer pipe is smaller in size downstream.
b.
Private storm sewer serving sump pumps and roof drains shall not be less than eight-inch diameter.
c.
Storm sewer service lines shall not be less than four inch diameter.
10.
Sewer Size Changes. Storm sewer of different diameters shall join only at structures. The invert elevations shall be adjusted to maintain a uniform energy gradient by matching the 0.8 depth points of the different diameter.
11.
Storm Water Inlets.
a.
Surface drainage inlets shall be provided so that surface water is not carried across any street intersections or parking lot drives. Surface runoff shall not extend a distance of more than 400 feet along the surface of the ground and shall not build up a flow of more than two cubic feet per second (with no more than 1.0 feet of head) in a ten-year storm before being intercepted by drainage inlets. Inlets shall discharge into storm sewers which shall not discharge into side lot or rear lot drainage ditches. Inlets shall be provided at all low points.
b.
Rear yard inlets having a minimum depth of two feet shall be provided where necessary.
12.
Storm Sewer Manholes.
a.
Manholes shall be located as follows:
(1)
At the termination of all sewers which do not terminate at an inlet.
(2)
Changes in direction, horizontal or vertical.
(3)
Changes in shape or pipe size.
(4)
Junctions with other storm sewers.
(5)
Access spacing shall be:
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Sewer Pipe Size (inches) | Maximum Interval (feet) |
|---|---|
10 to 24 | 350 |
27 to 36 | 400 |
42 to 54 | 500 |
60 or larger | 1,000 |
b.
Where flows and other conditions dictate, special manholes or junction chambers shall be designed and constructed.
13.
Sewer Depth. Storm sewers shall be constructed sufficiently deep so as to prevent freezing and provide an outfall for all storm water within the ultimate service area, both existing and future. The minimum cover shall be three feet.
14.
Sewer Pipe Class. Sewer pipe class shall be determined based upon the specifications of Section 603 of the "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction," latest edition.
16.
Building Drainage.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
a.
The point of discharge of sump pumps is allowed to be connected to storm sewer system for each building served, to the approved storm structure as shown on the Engineering Plans, unless approved otherwise. Storm sewer service lines from that point shall be provided to the storm sewer system. At no point shall a point of discharge be directly connected to a storm sewer pipe.
b.
Lots shall be graded in such a manner as to cause positive drainage away from the building up to lot line swales or ditches, which shall merge as quickly as possible and then discharge into a storm sewer. The route of flow of stormwater away from each building into swales, ditches and storm sewers to where it leaves the site shall be shown on the Engineering Plans.
c.
No lot shall be allowed to divert, modify, or change grade elevations from an approved engineering plan without written approval from the Director of Engineering.
17.
Vacant Lot Drainage. Positive drainage shall be established for each lot whether or not it is the owner's intention to construct a building on that lot.
18.
Stormwater Detention Facilities.
a.
Detention Basin (dry pond) Outlet Design. Backwater on the outlet structure from the downstream drainage system shall be evaluated when designing the outlet.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
b.
The volume of detention facilities shall be determined as follows: the maximum volume of storm water generated by the 100-year frequency storm, less the volume of storm water released through the outlet pipe at the calculated peak of the 100-year frequency storm. The design maximum storage to be provided in a detention basin shall be based on the runoff from the 100-year, twenty-four hour event and reservoir routing or equal. Detention storage shall be computed using hydrograph methods as described in this section. The Director of Engineering may designate an alternative design computation for detention storage.
c.
The outlet pipe(s) shall be designed to allow a maximum discharge of no more than 0.15 cubic foot per second per gross acre of development for a twenty-four-hour, 100-year storm event and shall include design to allow a maximum discharge of no more than 0.04 cubic foot per second per gross acre of development for a twenty-four-hour, two-year storm event. If the restrictor for the twenty-four-hour, two-year storm event is deemed too small for practical use by the Director of Engineering, the Director of Engineering will have the authority to determine an appropriate restriction method. Where a single pipe outlet or orifice plate is to be used to control discharge, it shall have a minimum diameter of four inches. If this minimum size permits release rates greater than those specified in this section, and regional detention is not a practical alternative, the Director of Engineering may require an alternative outlet design which shall utilize self-cleaning flow restrictors. If the receiving storm system is determined to be unable to accept the above calculated discharge rate, a lesser discharge rate may be required, as approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
d.
In order to prevent soil erosion and weed problems, "dry" detention basins must be landscaped including the establishment of a ground cover over all unpaved areas through sodding of native natural growth plant material or material as designated by the Director of Engineering. Such ground cover shall not be of a plant type which can be carried by water plow to aggressively invade other downstream lands or properties, and crown vetch shall be prohibited. Native natural plant growth may comprise a variety of techniques that employ in concert according to the needs of the site. Some of these include biologs, aquatic plants, wattles, natural native grasses, tri lok, and vegetated geogrids. Detention basins shall be designed so that the portion of their bottom area which is intended to be dry shall have standing water no longer than 72 hours for all runoff events less than the 100-year frequency storm.
Additional underdrain may be required at the discretion of the Director of Engineering. Pipe runs and spacing shall be designed to ensure good drainage. Detention facilities shall be designed so that the cross slope is at least 2%. The bottom of the facility shall be provided with an underdrain (minimum four-inch diameter perforated drain tile) covered on all sides with a minimum of six inches of crushed stone conforming to ASTM C33, Size No. 67. The underdrain shall be installed to drain the basin below grade during periods of low flow and shall connect to a storm sewer outfall pipe. Detention facilities shall be designed with side slopes not steeper than four horizontal to one vertical (4:1). The inflow storm piping system shall be constructed in such a manner so as to allow for "low" flows to bypass the basin.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
e.
Permanent retention ponds ("wet basins") shall be designed in accordance with Exhibit No. STS 13. Native natural plantings are recommended for shorelines and banks. Prior to the construction of the basin, soil testing must be done to determine the need for a clay or synthetic liner and to determine the minimum side slopes required to prevent soil erosion. In order to prevent shore erosion and muskrat digging or denning, a fiber mat or other acceptable material shall conform to any applicable State specifications. The slopes that are inundated by the storm water levels shall be covered with this fiber. Native natural plant growth is recommended and may comprise a variety of techniques according to the needs of the site. Some of these include biologs, aquatic plants, wattles, natural native grasses, tri lok, and vegetated geogrids. Ponds shall have a minimum of four foot horizontal to one foot vertical side slopes (4:1). All slopes that are 4:1 should be sodded. Slopes greater than 4:1 and bottoms of ponds may be hydro-seeded. Sediment basins are required in dry ponds. Access for maintenance purposes should be at least 15 feet wide at the top of the pond property starting at any point above the high water level. At the toe of the slope, a twelve-foot wide safety ledge sloped toward the shore at 4% shall be provided. See Exhibit STS 13. Beyond the safety ledge, the pond bottom shall slope at two horizontal to one vertical (2:1) down to the pond bottom elevation. The minimum pond bottom elevation shall be 15 feet below normal water level for a minimum of 25% of the surface area. Points of inflow to the pond shall be accessible to construction equipment for dredging as necessary. If retention facilities are designated for recreational purposes, appropriate consideration shall be reflected in the design for maintenance of fish life, boating, and safety. Wet basin ponds may be required to have aeration equipment installed to ensure adequate water quality.
[Ord. 2959, 11-18-1996; amended by Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
f.
Detention basins within the floodplain is strongly discouraged. However, the stormwater detention requirements of this ordinance may be fulfilled by providing detention storage within flood fringe areas on the project site provided the following provisions are met.
(1)
Development in a special flood hazard area (SFHA) shall require compensatory storage for 1.5 times the volume below the base flood elevation fill place in the SFHA. If a detention basin is placed in the SFHA, the release from the detention storage provided shall still be controlled consistent with the requirements of this section. The applicant shall demonstrate its operation for all streamflow and floodplain backwater conditions. Excavations for compensatory storage along watercourses shall be opposite or adjacent to the area occupied by detention. All floodplain storage lost below the ten-year flood elevation shall be replaced below the ten-year flood elevation. All floodplain storage lost above the existing ten-year flood elevation shall be replaced above the proposed ten-year flood elevation. All compensatory storage excavations shall be constructed to drain freely and openly to the watercourse.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
(2)
On stream Detention: On stream detention basins and detention basins located within the regulatory floodways are discouraged but allowable if they provide regional public benefits and if they meet the other provisions of this ordinance with respect to water quality and control of the two year and 100-year, twenty-four hour events from the development. If on stream detention is used for watersheds larger than one square mile, a Conditional Letter of Map Amendment approved by the Federal Emergency Management Agency is required prior to any construction and a Letter of Map Amendment from the Federal Emergency Management Agency is required prior to any building construction. The applicant will submit modeling to demonstrate that the design will not increase stage for any properties upstream or downstream of the property. Also, impoundment of the stream as part of on stream detention:
(A)
Shall not prevent the migration of indigenous fish species, which require access to upstream areas as part of their life cycle, such as for spawning,
(B)
Shall not cause or contribute to the degradation of water quality or stream aquatic habitat,
(C)
Shall include a design calling for gradual bank slopes, appropriate bank stabilization measures, and a pre sedimentation basin,
(D)
Shall not involve any stream channelization or the filling of wetlands,
(E)
Shall require the implementation of an effective nonpoint source management program throughout the upstream watershed which shall include at a minimum: runoff reduction BMPs; two year detention/sedimentation basins for all development; and a program to control nonpoint sources at the source for prior developments constructed without appropriate stormwater BMPs.
g.
Methods for Generating Runoff Hydrographs. Runoff hydrographs shall be developed incorporating the following assumptions of rainfall amounts and antecedent moisture.
(1)
Rainfall: Unless a continuous simulation approach to drainage system hydrology is used, all design rainfall events shall be based on the Illinois State Water Survey's Bulletin 70 or 71. The first quartile point rainfall distribution shall be used for the design and analysis of conveyance systems with critical durations less than or equal to 12 hours. The third quartile point rainfall distribution shall be used for the design and analysis of detention basins and conveyance system with critical durations greater than 12 and less than or equal to 24 hours. The fourth quartile distribution shall be used in the design and analysis of systems with durations greater than 24 hours. The first, third, and fourth quartile distributions described by Huff are presented in Table 37 of Bulletin 70. The SCS Type II distribution may be used as an alternate to the Huff distributions.
(2)
Antecedent Moisture: Computations of runoff hydrographs which do not rely on a continuous accounting of antecedent moisture conditions shall assume a normal antecedent moisture condition (2), unless otherwise directed by the Director of Engineering.
h.
Inlet and Outlet Orientation: To the extent feasible, the distance between detention inlets and outlets shall be maximized. If possible, they should be at opposite ends of the basin.
i.
Wetland and Dry Detention Basin Design: In addition to the other requirements of this ordinance, wetland and dry basins shall be designed to remove stormwater pollutants, to be safe, to be aesthetically pleasing and as much as feasible to be available for multiple uses.
Wetland and dry basins shall be designed so that the portion of their bottom area which is intended to be dry shall have standing water no longer than 72 hours for all runoff events less than the 100-year event. Underdrains directed to the outlet may be used to accomplish this requirement. Grading plans shall clearly distinguish the wet/wetland portion of the basin bottom from the dry portion.
j.
Velocity Dissipation: Velocity dissipation measures shall be incorporated into dry basin designs to minimize erosion at inlets and outlets and to minimize the resuspension of pollutants.
k.
Stilling/Sedimentation Basins: A stilling/sedimentation basin should be constructed at each major inlet to a wetland or dry basin. The volume of the basins should be at least 500 feet3 per acre of impervious surface in the drainage area. Side slopes of the basins shall be no steeper than four horizontal to one vertical and basin depths should be at least three feet to minimize resuspension of accumulated sediment.
l.
Overflow Structures: All stormwater detention basins shall be provided with an overflow structure capable of safely passing excess flows at a stage at least one foot below the lowest foundation grade in the vicinity of the detention basin. The design flow rate of the overflow structure shall be equivalent to the 100-year inflow rate, or as designated by the Director of Engineering.
m.
Stormwater runoff from areas tributary to the property shall be considered in the design of the property's drainage system. Whenever practicable, flows from upstream areas that are not to be detained should be routed around the basin being provided for the site being developed.
(1)
Upstream Areas Not Meeting Ordinance Requirements. When there are areas not meeting the storage and release rates of this ordinance, tributary to the applicant's property, regionalized detention on the applicant's property shall be explored by the applicant. The following steps shall be followed.
(A)
The applicant shall compute the storage volume needed for his property using the release rates of this section.
(B)
Areas tributary to the applicant's property, not meeting the storage and release rate requirements of this ordinance, shall be identified.
(C)
Using the areas determined in 2) above plus the applicant's property area, total storage needed for the combined properties shall be computed.
Allowable release rates shall be computed using the combined property areas. If tributary areas are not developed, a reasonable fully developed land cover, based on local zoning, shall be assumed for the purposes of computing storage.
(2)
Upstream Areas Meeting Ordinance Requirements. When there are areas which meet the storage and release rate requirements of this ordinance, tributary to the applicant's property, the upstream flows shall be bypassed around the applicant's detention basin, or be routed through the applicant's detention basin if this is the only practicable alternative.
n.
All storm water inflow pipes must be constructed to inverts that are at or above the normal water level in "wet basins".
o.
Setback for stormwater detention/retention facilities must meet requirements stated in § 6-305D.8.b(4).
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
p.
Streets or habitable structures that are built with adjoining detention facilities shall meet those vertical clearance requirements provided in the flood plain regulations of the Village and other applicable laws.
q.
Detention facilities designed and built in accordance with wetland mitigation plans approved by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers shall be maintained to meet those criteria. Interpretive signage may be required by the Village. Wetlands must also meet the criteria provided in Section 6-413 of these regulations.
Existing wetlands and depressional storage areas shall not be modified for the purposes of storm water detention unless it is demonstrated that the existing wetland is low in quality and/or the proposed modifications will maintain or improve its habitat and ability to perform beneficial functions.
(1)
Existing storage and release rate characteristics of wetlands and other depressional storage areas shall be maintained and the volume of detention storage provided to meet the requirements of this section shall be in addition to this existing storage.
(2)
The existing wetland shall be protected during construction by appropriate soil erosion and sediment control measures.
(3)
All runoff from the development shall be routed through a preliminary detention/sedimentation basin designed to capture the two year twenty-four-hour event before discharging into the wetland.
F.
Material Specifications. All storm sewer system elements shall conform to the following specifications:
1.
Sewer Pipe.
a.
Sump pump service connection and storm sewer extension (four inches and six inches) - ABS sewer pipe or PVC sewer pipe ASTM D2751, SDR35, or ASTM D3034, SDR35, or flexible plastic drain pipe.
b.
Concrete sewer pipe (10 inches diameter and smaller), minimum Class 3, ASTM C14.
c.
Reinforced concrete pipe (12 inches diameter and larger), circular reinforcement, minimum Class 3, wall B, ASTM C76.
d.
High-density polyethylene (HDPE) pipe (12" diameter to 60" diameter), ASTM D3350, ASTM F2648.
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
e.
Reinforced concrete arch culvert pipe - double line reinforcement, minimum Class 3, ASTM C506.
f.
Reinforced concrete elliptical culvert pipe - minimum class HE-III or VE-III, ASTM C507.
g.
PVC underdrain pipe (four inches, six inches, and eight inches) - ASTM D2729, SDR35.
2.
Sewer Pipe Joints.
a.
ABS pipe — ASTM C443.
b.
PVC pipe — ASTM D3212, push on type, except underdrain pipe which shall have solvent welded joints.
c.
Reinforced concrete pipe — ASTM C443. ("O" ring).
d.
Reinforced arch or elliptical pipe — ASTM C877.
e.
HDPE Pipe — ASTM F2648, ASTM F477, Fittings per ASTM F2306.
[Added 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Casing Pipes for Augered Sleeves. Steel pipe — ASTM A120, 3/8 inches minimum thickness.
4.
Manholes and Catch Basins. (Exhibit Nos. STS-01 and STS-02).
a.
Precast reinforced concrete — ASTM C478 and ASTM C443.
b.
Size. For sewer 18 inches diameter or less, manhole shall have a 48 inches inside diameter.
c.
Adjustment. No more than two precast concrete adjusting rings with six inch maximum height adjustment shall be allowed.
d.
Pipe and Frame Seals. All pipe connection openings shall be precast with resilient rubber water tight pipe to manhole sleeves or seals. External flexible water tight sleeves shall also extend from the manhole cone to the manhole frame.
e.
Bottom Sections. All bottom sections shall be monolithically precast including bases and invert flowlines.
5.
Inlets. (Exhibit No. STS 05).
a.
Precast reinforced concrete ASTM C478 and ASTM C443.
b.
Size. Inlets shall have 24 inches inside diameter and a maximum depth of four feet.
c.
Adjustment. No more than two precast concrete adjusting rings with six inch maximum height adjustment shall be allowed.
d.
Only one pipe connection is allowed and it shall be precast with resilient rubber water tight pipe to manhole sleeves or seals.
e.
Bottom Sections. All bottom sections shall be monolithically precast including bases and invert flowlines.
6.
Castings.
a.
Manhole frame and cover East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #1022Z3, 1020A HD.
b.
Manhole steps East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #8518.
c.
Six inch curb and catch basin inlet East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #1051Z3 and 1020M1 grate.
d.
Three inch inlet and catch basin inlet East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #7525Z Frame and 7525M grate.
e.
Yard inlet East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. #6527 grate.
7.
Crushed Granular Bedding. (Exhibit No. STS 11). Crushed gravel or crushed stone course aggregate ASTM C33, Size No. 67.
8.
Headwalls and Precast End Sections (Exhibit Nos. STS 08, STS 09). All pipes shall terminate at reinforced concrete headwalls or precast end sections.
G.
Inspection and Testing. General site grading shall not begin until the Project Engineer has certified in writing to the Village that any necessary detention facilities are in place and operational. The Director of Engineering or his representative will also conduct periodic inspections of the work in progress to be certain that the drainage system is being built as designed. If any violations of the provisions or requirements of this ordinance are noted during such inspections, the Director of Engineering shall notify the property owner in writing of the items needing correction. The property owner shall have 10 calendar days to make such corrections unless given a specific extension of time in writing by the Director of Engineering. Failure to complete such corrections within the specified time period shall constitute a violation of this ordinance.
1.
Cleaning. All sewers and appurtenances shall be cleaned prior to inspection and testing required by this section.
2.
Visual Inspection.
a.
All sewer and appurtenances shall be visually inspected by representatives of the developer during and following construction.
b.
Contractor must perform a high pressure jetting of sewer system in order to determine if any repairs must be made prior to lamping or testing.
c.
Sewers designed to be straight between manholes will be tested for straightness by flashing a light from manhole to manhole, lamping or by other suitable means.
3.
T.V. Inspections.
a.
Upon completion of construction and prior to initiation of the maintenance guarantee period, and upon recommendation of the Director of Engineering, a T.V. inspection shall be performed on the sections or portions of the sewer. Video tapes and a written report of all television inspections shall be provided to the Village prior to the initial acceptance provided for by this section. The form of the report and type and format of the video tape shall be approved by the Director of Engineering. T.V. Inspections and reports shall be completed for all storm systems and sanitary systems installed in the Village of Orland Park.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003]
b.
Fees and costs connected with T.V. inspections shall be paid for by the developer or owner.
c.
All dips, cracks, leaks, improperly sealed joints, and departures from approved grades and alignment shall be repaired by removing and replacing the involved sections of pipe.
d.
All defects and corrective work required as the result of T.V. inspection shall be performed by the developer without delay. Upon completion thereof, the sewer shall be re tested and such further inspection made as may appear warranted.
H.
Acceptance of Storm Sewers and Stormwater Detention.
1.
Once the storm sewer system has been completed according to the specifications set forth in this section, the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department shall, upon the request of the developer, inspect the system and prepare a list of items for repair (punch list). The list shall be given or sent to the developer and when repairs have been made, the Engineering Department and Public Works Department shall approve the system for operational use only. During the time after the approval by the Village for maintenance, the developer shall be responsible for any delinquencies incurred within the system, including but not limited to siltation within the pipe, manholes and inlets, adjustment to manhole frames and leaking joints. Upon reaching approximately 80% development of building construction, the Engineering Department and Public Works Department will reinspect the storm sewer system for any delinquencies which may have occurred and prepare a list of items for repair. The list shall be given or sent to the developer and when the repairs have been made to the satisfaction of the Engineering Department and Public Works Department, the Engineering Department shall approve the system.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
2.
All construction shall meet the requirements and acceptance by the Metropolitan Water Reclamation District of Greater Chicago prior to the acceptance by the Engineering Department and Public Works Department.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
3.
Maintenance of stormwater drainage facilities located on private property shall be the responsibility of the owner of that property in the case of a single-lot development and the combined responsibility of the property owners for developments with more than one lot. Before a permit is obtained from the Village, the applicant shall execute a maintenance agreement with the Village, guaranteeing that the applicant and all future owners of the property [propert(ies)] will maintain its stormwater drainage system. The maintenance agreement shall also specifically authorize representatives of the Village to enter onto the property for the purpose of inspections and maintenance of the drainage system. Such agreement shall be recorded with the Recorder of Deeds of Cook and/or Will Counties in Illinois as applicable. The maintenance agreement shall include a schedule for regular maintenance of each aspect of the property's stormwater drainage system and shall provide for access to the system for inspection by authorized personnel of the Village. The maintenance agreement shall also stipulate that if the Village notify notifies the property owner(s) in writing of maintenance problems which require correction, the property owner(s) shall make such corrections within 30 calendar days of such notification. If the corrections are not made within this time period, the Village may have the necessary work completed and assess the cost to the property owner(s).
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Subdivisions containing two or more lots shall establish a homeowners' association or similar governing body, which shall be responsible for all maintenance, repair, and/or replacement of the stormwater management system, including but not limited to: detention ponds, green infrastructure, and related stormwater management facilities located on and serving the private property. The property owners shall establish a dormant Special Service Area (SSA), including all properties that benefit from the stormwater management facilities. The purpose of the dormant SSA is to fund the Village of Orland Park's costs of maintaining, repairing and/or replacing the stormwater management facilities located in the subject property in the event that the homeowners' association or the owners of the property fail to maintain, repair and/or replace said stormwater management facilities as required.
I.
Penalties. Any person convicted of violating any of the provisions or requirements of this section of this ordinance shall be guilty of a misdemeanor and shall be subject to a fine of not more than $1,000. Each day the violation continues shall be considered a separate offense.
§ 6-410 Water Supply.
[Entire section amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
A.
General.
1.
All development shall include provisions for the construction of water distribution facilities complete with valves, fire hydrants, and other appurtenances designed in accordance with this section. As a minimum, the water distribution system shall provide a service connection(s) at the approximate mid-point of the front property line of each individual lot or parcel within the development. Where more than one building is located or planned on one lot or parcel of property, or when water main construction is required on the property for fire protection, the proposed construction shall also include all water main construction and appurtenances within the lot or parcel except service lines.
2.
Specification references made herein for manufactured materials such as pipe, hydrants, valves and fittings refer to designation of the American Water Works Association (AWWA) or of the American National Standards Institute (ANSI). Water distribution systems shall be constructed in accordance with the "Standard Specifications for Water and Sewer Main Construction in Illinois," latest edition, unless otherwise modified in this section.
B.
Basic Design Standards.
1.
System Extension.
a.
Extension to the water distribution system shall form a complete network extension or a part of a complete network extension that includes all primary mains, secondary mains, and gridiron mains, complementing the existing distribution system network.
b.
Primary mains are those mains that form the arterial portion of the system. Primary mains under construction within a development are further defined as mains that are 16 inches or larger. Primary mains within or adjacent to a development shall be sized and located in accordance with the Comprehensive Water System Study of the Village, latest edition. Secondary mains shall be sized, looped, and spaced as required for fire flows and shall have a minimum diameter of eight inches.
c.
Gridiron mains shall form a grid to supply water to the local fire hydrants and service lines. Gridiron mains shall have a minimum diameter of eight inches. Dead end water mains shall not be allowed.
d.
The proposed system extensions shall be arranged so that the service interruptions caused by a break in any main will be limited to 20 residential units or 1,000 feet in all non-residential areas. The maximum number of valves for a shutdown shall be three; four may be allowed in unique cases with the approval of the Village.
e.
Developer shall be required to extend water distribution system as determined by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Maximum Day Consumption. For purposes of water main design, maximum day consumption for water main design shall be based on the following table:
Type of Establishment | Unit | Maximum Day Consumption Gal/day/unit* |
|---|---|---|
Retail | (> 100,000 square feet) | 105 |
Retail | (< 100,000 square feet) | 65 |
Office | Person (1 shift) | 50 |
Industrial | Person (1 shift) | 75 |
Restaurant | Meal Served | 15 |
Theater | per Seat | 10 |
Hotel | per Guest | 210 |
Notes: | |
* | Quantities are exclusive of process water requirements which must be estimated and added. |
For other than residential developments, when the details of the development are not known, maximum day consumption and fire flow may be estimated by the Director of Engineering. Such estimate shall not relieve the owner or developer of the responsibility of providing adequate main capacity for any and all future needs within the development. [Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Head Losses. Head losses in relation to velocity in water mains shall be computed using the Hazen-Williams formula:
V = 0.318 (C)(R)0.63(S)0.54 |
Where: | ||
V | = | Velocity, in units of feet per second |
C | = | 100 |
R | = | Hydraulic radius, in units of feet |
S | = | Hydraulic gradient, in units of feet per foot |
4.
Main Capacity. Primary mains, secondary mains, and gridiron mains shall be sized to provide sufficient capacity to deliver the required fire flow plus the consumption at the maximum daily rate to all areas served by the proposed construction.
5.
Required Fire Flow and Pressure. A separate fire flow report shall be prepared that indicates that at selected locations, and at any other locations that may be selected by the Director of Engineering, the fire flows required, in excess of maximum daily consumptive demands, will be supplied using a "C" factor of 100, ignoring fittings, and with a minimum residual hydrant pressure of 20 psi. Required fire flow shall be computed as detailed in the "Guide for Determination of Needed Fire Flow," latest edition, published by the Insurance Services Office. Watermains shall be sized and set at grades to provide ISO fire protection flow rates. The developer shall bear the cost of the flow studies. Flow tests are to be performed to verify compliance with the guide.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
Type | Flow |
|---|---|
Single-Family Residential | 1,500 GPM @ 25 PSI |
Multi-Family Residential | 2,500 GPM @ 25 PSI |
Commercial - Industrial | 3,500 GPM @ 25 PSI |
6.
Fire Hydrant Spacing.
a.
Fire hydrants shall be installed so that the near corner of all construction on the site that could burn will not be further than 150 feet from a fire hydrant, and the maximum distance between fire hydrants shall be 350 feet. Fire hydrants shall be provided so as to provide the required fire flows to structures as described in the "Fire Suppression Rating Schedule," latest edition, published by the Insurance Services Office. Six inch main extensions serving hydrants shall not be more than 10 feet long. Where water transmission lines or off-site water lines are installed in existing right-of-ways or in existing easements, hydrants must be installed at 600-foot intervals.
b.
Fire hydrants shall be placed on private property when the Fire Chief determines that fire hydrants are at too great a distance to provide proper protection for multi-family, commercial or industrial properties. Easements shall be provided for all hydrants on private property.
c.
Fire hydrants shall be placed within 100 feet of all sprinkler and or standpipe siamese connections provided on buildings unless otherwise directed by the Fire District because of existing or proposed circumstances.
7.
Valve Spacing. A sufficient number of valves shall be provided so that a break or other failure will not affect more than 20 residential units or 1,000 feet of main in nonresidential areas. All valves three inches and larger must be installed in valve vaults.
C.
Material Specifications and Details. All water distribution system elements shall conform to the following specifications:
1.
Ductile Iron Pipe.
a.
Pipe class thickness - ANSI A21.50 (AWWA C150), minimum thickness, Class 52.
b.
Pipe - ANSI A21-51 (AWWA C151).
c.
Pipe lining - ANSI A21.4 (AWWA C104).
d.
Fittings - ANSI 21.10 (AWWA C110).
e.
Joints - mechanical and push-on, ANSI A21.11 (AWWA C111).
f.
Polyvinyl wrapping of all watermain is required.
g.
All tees, elbows, bends and reducers, shall utilize Megalugs© for joint restraints. Megalugs (joint restraints) shall be required to be installed in addition to concrete thrust blocks.
2.
Valves.
a.
Twelve inch and smaller - iron body East Jordan Flowmaster RW (resilient wedge), non-rising stem gate valves, counter clockwise to open, AWWA C515.
b.
Fourteen inch and larger - iron body, rubber seat, butterfly valve, Class 150B, counter clockwise to open, AWWA C504
c.
Joint end - mechanical, AWWA C111.
3.
Fire Hydrants. (Exhibit No. WM-06.).
a.
East Jordan Iron Works, Inc. Watermaster 5BR250 with brass liner, painted Safety yellow. AWWA C502.
b.
Valve size, 5 1/4-inch, counter clockwise to open.
c.
Nozzles, 2 at 2 1/2-inch, 1 at 4 1/2-inch, with threads conforming to National Standard Specifications.
d.
Frangible section (breakaway type) with the break line flange located one inch above finished grade.
e.
Hydrant to be installed with MJ swivel Tee with swivel MJ Gland. Auxiliary to be attached to fire hydrant and utilize six anodized cap sacrificial nuts.
f.
Hydrant Marker - Roden style.
5.
Air Release Valves. Apco, type 200A, two-inch or Valvematic.
6.
Corporation Stops. (Exhibit No. WM-08). Mueller H15000, one-inch minimum, AWWA C800.
10.
Concrete Thrust Restraints.
a.
Horizontal reactions - thrust restraints at all tees, plugged ends, hydrants, and bends between 11 1/4° and 90° shall conform to Exhibit No. WM-10.
b.
Vertical reactions - the engineer shall submit individual designs for each location and comply with AWWA C600, Section 3.8.
c.
Material - precast or poured Class X concrete.
d.
Where undisturbed earth is not available or not likely to be available to back up pressure type concrete thrust blocks, the engineer shall specify tie rods with or without anchor type concrete thrust blocks and submit design data for such specifications. Care shall be taken when pouring concrete so that the mix will not interfere with access to joints or with hydrant drainage. All tees, elbows, bends and reducers, shall utilize Megalugs© for joint restraints. Megalugs (joint restraints) shall be required to be installed in addition to concrete thrust blocks.
11.
Casing Pipes. Steel Pipe - 0.375 inches minimum thickness, bituminous coated, casing spacers are stainless steel, casing is to be sealed at both ends with a masonry cap and made water-tight.
12.
Valve Vaults. (Exhibit Nos. WM-01 and WM-02).
a.
Precast reinforced concrete - ASTM C478 and ASTM C443.
b.
Size. For -, eight inch, - and smaller diameter valves, valve vaults shall have a 60 inches inside diameter; for pressure connections and valves -10 inches and larger in diameter, valve vaults shall have a minimum 72 inches inside diameter or as required by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
Adjustment. No more than two precast concrete adjusting rings with six inch maximum height adjustment shall be allowed. Rubber adjusting rings shall be used for structures in pavement.
14.
Crushed Granular Bedding. (Exhibit No. WM-11). Crushed gravel or crushed stone course aggregate -ASTM C33, Size No. 67.
16.
PVC pressure pipe, requiring prior approval, in writing, by the Director of Engineering or Director of Public Works:
[Added 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
a.
Pipe class thickness: ANSI/AWWA C605.
b.
Pipe: four-inch to twelve-inch diameter ANSI/AWWA C900 (DR18/235 psi), fourteen-inch to forty-eight-inch diameter ANSI/AWWA C905 (DR18/235 psi).
c.
Fittings: ASTM D1784.
d.
Joints: mechanical joint AWWA C111/A21.11.
e.
All tees, elbows, bends and reducers shall utilize Megalugs© for joint restraints for use on PVC C900 pipe or C905 depending on size. Megalugs© (joint restraints) shall be required to be installed in addition to concrete thrust blocks.
f.
Reinforced tracer wire, as approved by the Director of Engineering or Director of Public Works, shall be required with installation.
D.
Installation Requirements.
1.
Environmental Protection Agency Permit. Water system design and construction shall in all respects be in accordance with the regulations of the Environmental Protection Agency, State of Illinois. No construction shall commence until a copy of a permit from this agency is filed with the Village.
2.
Installation. The installation of water mains and appurtenances, including services, shall conform to the requirements of this section and shall conform to AWWA C600.
E.
Water Service Line.
1.
Installation and Location. A water service line is a water pipe connected at the water main by a brass corporation stop or a ductile iron fitting. Such pipe is extended horizontally at right angles with the water main to the front line of a lot or single building which it is to serve. The service pipe shall be provided with a brass curb stop or gate valve at the mid-point between the curb and the sidewalk unless otherwise specified by the Director of Engineering. A cast iron curb box shall be installed over curb stops. A valve vault shall be provided for gate valves - three inches and larger. All water service lines shall be located at the approximate center of each lot at a minimum depth of five feet. A water service curb box that falls within a hard service area shall be relocated.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Meters.
a.
All meters shall be installed in a habitable area and shall be accessible for inspection and serviceable by the Village.
b.
All meters shall be per Village standard as determined by the Director of Development Services. Meter size shall be determined by the Director of Development Services. All meters less than 1.5 inches shall be installed by the Village. All meters greater than 1 1/2 inches shall be installed by a plumbing contractor at his expense. All meter installation shall comply with Village's codes and inspections. Residential meters shall have an AWWA approved ball valve at both ends. Both ball valves shall have female threads to accept male ends of meter couplings. Spread design shall be so only the meter and meter couplings will be between the two valves.
[Ord. 2680, 3-18-1996]
c.
All one inch meter settings shall have an AWWA approved ball valve at both sides. Both valves shall have female threads to accept male ends of meter couplings. Spread design shall allow only the meter and meter couplings to be between the two valves.
d.
All 1 1/2 inch meter settings shall have an AWWA approved ball valve at both sides. Both valves shall have male threads to accept female meter unions. Spread design shall allow only the meter and meter coupling unions to be between the two valves.
e.
All two inch and larger meter settings shall receive flanged type meters per Village standard. A high quality brass ball valve shall be located immediately adjacent to companion flanges.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
f.
All meter settings of three inch size and larger will be equipped with a by-pass system that shall be metered.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
g.
All meter settings require a remote reading device that is external to the meter location. Conduit or thinwall is required when necessary to facilitate installation and maintenance of the reading device. Conduit shall be placed so the reading device will be mounted near the gas meter, 18 inches to 36 inches above foundation.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
h.
At all water meter settings, an electrical jumper wire shall be installed so the meter may be removed without breaking continuity, or interfering with the maintenance of the metering equipment. The wire size shall be equal to, or greater than the neutral conductor of the largest service supplied to the building by the electric service provider. Ground wires should be located to service side of meter wherever possible.
i.
All special meter applications, including sprinkler systems, - back flow preventers, and fire systems, shall require special review and authorization by the Director of Development Services and Director of Public Works.
[Ord. 2860, 3-18-1996]
3.
Back Flow Prevention. Back flow prevention devices should be required in conformance with other applicable Village regulations.
4.
Water Service Connection Requirements.
a.
Residential and Commercial.
(1)
Each individual residential unit, except as noted below in 4.a.2, shall have a separate metered water service to each unit. The service line shall be individually tapped into the water main and extended into the unit without passing through the property of another unit. Location and placement of wiring conduit shall be determined by the Village Plumbing Inspector and installed by the contractor.
(2)
Multi-floor residential buildings can be served by one adequately sized water service line into a meter room. Inside the meter room, the service shall be manifolded to accept one meter per unit served and one meter for any common purpose water use. The manifold shall be constructed similarly to a single meter setting with padlock type valving device as approved by the Village Plumbing Inspector. A single meter for the entire building may be allowed in unique cases with the approval of the Director of Development Services and Director of Public Works.
(3)
Commercial, Industrial and Office type buildings shall be served by one adequately sized water service line into a meter room. If the units are individually owned (not leased or rented), inside the meter room, the service shall be manifolded to accept one meter per unit served and one meter for any common water purpose. The manifold should be constructed similarly to a single meter setting with padlock type valving device as approved by the Village Plumbing Inspector. If the building is singularly owned (units leased or rented) only one adequately sized meter will be allowed.
(4)
The meter room shall be accessible from a public area and constructed solely for water meter housing. A separate conduit shall be installed by the electrical contractor from each meter to a common point area on the building exterior. Location and placement of the wiring shall be determined by the Village Plumbing Inspector.
F.
Fire Service Line. All fire sprinklers shall be connected to the water system through a single water service line constructed in accordance with the requirements in this section and separated inside the building prior to meter.
G.
Water Main Protection. All water main, storm sewer and sanitary sewer construction shall meet the requirements of this section.
1.
Horizontal Separation.
a.
A water main shall be laid at least 10 feet horizontally from any existing or proposed storm or sanitary sewer line.
b.
Should local conditions prevail which would prevent a lateral separation of 10 feet, a water main may be laid closer than 10 feet to a storm or sanitary sewer provided the main is laid in a separate trench or on an undisturbed earth shelf located to one side of the sewer and at such an elevation that the bottom of the water main is a least 18 inches above the top of the sewer. In such cases, water main shall be laid with as much horizontal clearance for sewer as possible.
c.
If it is impossible to obtain proper horizontal and vertical separation as stipulated in Subsections G1a or b above, both the water main and the length of sewer between adjacent manholes shall be constructed of push-on or mechanical-joint ductile iron pipe, or pre-stressed concrete pipe and shall be pressure tested to assure water tightness before backfilling.
2.
Vertical Separation.
a.
Whenever a water main must cross house sewers, storm drains, or sanitary sewer, the water main shall be laid at such an elevation that the bottom of the water main is 18 inches above the top of the drain or sewer. This vertical separation shall be maintained for that portion of the water main located within 10 feet, horizontally, of any sewer or drain crossed. Said 10 feet is to be measured at the normal distance from the water main to the drain or sewer.
b.
Where conditions exist that the minimum vertical separation set forth in a subsection above cannot be maintained, or it is necessary for the water main to pass under a sewer or drain, one of the following two measures must be taken:
(1)
The water main shall be installed within a PVC carrier pipe and the carrier pipe shall extend on each side of the crossing until the normal distance from the water main to the sewer or drain line is at least 10 feet.
(2)
The involved sewer or drain shall be constructed from manhole to manhole with "O" ring pipe conforming to ASTM 361 or other pipe material which would conform to water main standards.
H.
Construction Requirements.
1.
Excavation.
a.
The trench shall be excavated so that the water main shall have a minimum of five feet six inches of cover. The trench for the pipe shall be excavated at least 12 inches wider than the external diameter of the pipe but not wider than the widths denoted on Exhibit No. WM-11.
b.
Bell holes of sufficient depth shall be provided across the bottom of the trench to accommodate the bell of the pipe, to provide sufficient room for joint making and to insure uniform bearing for the pipe.
c.
Where a firm foundation is not found to exist for the bottom of the trench at the required depth due to soft, spongy or other unsuitable soil, such unsuitable soil shall be removed for the full width of the trench or tunnel and replaced with well compacted unwashed gravel or an equal substitute, or crushed stone if such compacted material proves unsatisfactory. Where rock in either ledge or boulder formation is encountered, it shall be removed below grade and replaced with a well-compacted cushion of unwashed gravel having a thickness under the pipe of not less than eight inches.
2.
Sheeting and Bracing.
3.
Laying Water Main.
a.
The contractor shall keep the trench free from water while the water main is being placed and until the pipe joint has been sealed to the satisfaction of the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
b.
Adequate provision shall be made for the safety, storage and protection of all water pipe prior to actual installation in the trench. Care shall be taken to prevent damage to the pipe castings and coating, both inside and out. Provisions shall be made to keep the inside of the pipe clean throughout its storage period and to keep mud and/or other debris from being deposited therein. All pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned on the inside before placement of the pipe. Proper equipment shall be used for the safe handling, conveying and laying of the pipe. All pipes shall be carefully lowered into the trench, piece by piece, by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment, in such manner as to prevent damage to water main materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall water main materials be dropped or dumped into the trench.
c.
In making joints, all portions of the joining materials and the socket and spigot ends of the joining pipe shall be wiped clean of all foreign materials. The actual assembly of the jointing shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions and/or as directed by the Director of Engineering. During construction, until jointing operations are complete, the open ends of all pipes shall be at all times protected and sealed with temporary watertight plugs.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
d.
Polyvinyl encasement shall be installed around ductile iron pipe with a minimum overlap of 12 inches at each joint and sealed with approved polyvinyl compatible adhesive tape.
4.
Pipe Cutting.
a.
The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe.
b.
When machine cutting is not available for cutting pipe 20 inches in diameter or larger, the electric-arc cutting method shall be permitted, using a carbon or steel rod. Only qualified and experienced workmen shall be allowed to perform this work.
c.
The flame cutting of pipe by means of an oxyacetylene torch shall not be allowed.
5.
Trench.
a.
The trench bottom shall be flat and shall provide full bearing of the length of the pipe.
b.
Thrust blocks shall be used to prevent movement at all bends, tees, caps, valves and hydrants.
c.
Backfilling of the trench shall be accomplished by careful replacement of the excavated material after the pipe and the bedding material have been installed. Any pipe installed within two feet of a pavement edge or curb and gutter shall be backfilled to the top of the trench with granular material in compliance with Illinois Department of Transportation Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction.
6.
Fire Hydrant.
a.
Fire hydrants shall be placed as specified on engineering plans. All hydrants shall stand plumb, their pumper nozzle pointing normal to the road. They shall conform to the established grade, with the breakaway flange being between one to five inches above finished grade. All nozzles shall be at sufficient height above finished grade to provide free rotation of a standard hydrant wrench free and clear of any obstructions.
b.
A drainage pit two feet in diameter and two feet deep shall be excavated below each hydrant and filled completely with a minimum of one cubic yard of one inch river rock under and around the bowl of the hydrant and to a level six inches above the waste opening. No hydrant drainage pit shall be connected to a sewer.
c.
Hydrant leads are not allowed for extending the setback unless approved by the Director of Development Services and the Director of Public Works.
d.
Barrel extensions shall be provided as needed in order to provide sufficient height above finished grade to provide free rotation of a standard hydrant wrench free and clear of any obstructions and to provide a minimum 18 inches height above finished grade to the break-a-way flange. An extension shall not exceed a maximum of three feet.
e.
Front of hydrant shall be no closer than three feet to back of curb.
7.
Water Main Installation. During water main installation, to make a closure between two pipe ends, or between pipe end fittings, or between pipe end and valve, short lengths shall be used with proper connections or couplings. Repair sleeves shall not be used to make closures during new construction.
8.
Dewatering. Where water is encountered in the trench, it shall be removed during pipe-laying and jointing operations. Trench water shall not be allowed to enter the pipe at any time.
9.
Connections to Existing Mains. All connections to the Village water distribution system shall be made under full water service pressure unless otherwise approved by the Director of Development Services and the Director of Public Works at locations approved by the Director of Public Works.
I.
Pressure Test.
1.
As part of the construction, the water mains shall be pressure tested in accordance with this section.
2.
All newly laid pipes shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure of 150 pounds per square inch. Duration of each pressure test shall be for a period of not less than two hours. Each valved section of pipe shall be filled with water and the specified test pressure shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe. Before applying the specified test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe. All leaks shall be repaired until tight. Any cracked or defective pipes, fittings, valves, or hydrants discovered in consequence of this pressure test shall be removed and replaced and the test repeated until satisfactory results are obtained.
3.
All testing shall be done before the installation of service lines. Suitable means shall be provided for determining the quantity of water lost by leakage under the specified test pressure. Allowable leakage shall not be greater than that computed as follows:
L | = | (N)(D)(P) |
7400 |
L = Allowable leakage in gallons per hour |
N = number of joints in length of pipeline tested |
D = Nominal diameter of the pipe in inches |
P = Average test pressure during leakage test in pounds per square inch gauge. |
Leakage is defined as the quantity of water required to be supplied to the newly laid pipe necessary to maintain the specified leakage test pressure.
J.
Preliminary Flushing. Prior to chlorination, the main shall be flushed as thoroughly as possible with the water pressure and outlets available. Flushing shall be done after the pressure test is made. Because such flushing removes only the lighter solids, it cannot be relied upon to remove heavy material allowed to get into the main during pipe placement. If no hydrant is installed at the end of the main, a tap should be provided large enough to affect a velocity in the main of at least 2 1/2 feet per second.
K.
Disinfection.
1.
The preferred point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of the pipeline extension or any valved section of it and through a corporation stop in the top of the newly laid pipe. The injector for delivering the chlorine-gas into the pipe should be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the gate valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension.
2.
Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly laid pipeline during the application of chlorine-gas. The rate of chlorine mixture flow shall be in such proportion to the rate of water entering the pipe that the chlorine dose applied to the water entering the newly laid pipe shall be at least 50 ppm, or enough to meet the requirements during the retention period. This may require as much as 100 ppm of chlorine in the water left in the line after chlorination.
3.
Valves shall be manipulated so that the strong chlorine solution in the line being treated shall not flow back into the line supplying the water.
4.
Treated water shall be retained in the pipe long enough to destroy all spore-forming bacteria. This retention period shall be at least 24 hours. After the chlorine-treated water has been retained for the required time, the chlorine residual at the pipe extremities and at other representative points should be at least 25 ppm.
5.
In the process of chlorinating newly laid pipe, all valves or other appurtenances shall be operated while the pipeline is filled with the chlorinating agent.
6.
All water mains shall be disinfected and tested according to the requirements of the "Standards for Disinfecting Water Mains," AWWA C601, and as required by this section. All disinfection, as required by this section, shall be performed by an independent firm exhibiting experience in the methods and techniques of this operation, and shall be approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
L.
Final Flushing and Testing.
1.
Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the newly laid pipeline at its extremities until the replacement water, throughout its length shall, upon test, be approved as safe water by the Director of Engineering. This quality of water delivered by the new main should continue for a period of at least two full days as demonstrated by laboratory examination of samples taken from a tap located and installed in such a way as to prevent outside contamination. Samples should never be taken from an unsterilized hose or from a fire hydrant because such samples seldom meet current bacteriological standards.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
After disinfecting and flushing, a minimum of two water samples shall be collected by the contractor on two successive days, with notice given, so that the collection may be witnessed by the Director of Engineering. Bacteriological sampling and analysis of the samples shall be performed by a laboratory approved by the Illinois Department of Public Health and the Director of Engineering. Should the initial treatment result in an unsatisfactory bacterial test, the procedure shall be repeated until satisfactory results are obtained. The contractor or developer shall pay for the sampling and analysis. Results of the analysis shall be transmitted by the laboratory directly to the Director of Engineering. Test results shall indicate the date the sample was collected, the date the analysis was made, the exact locations at which samples were taken, the firm submitting the sample, and the project at which the samples were collected. Sufficient samples shall be collected in order to insure that the system is bacteriologically safe.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
3.
Village of Orland Park to operate valve.
M.
Exhibits. The most current Standard Detail Exhibits of water main standards must be applied to any improvements required by these regulations.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
N.
Acceptance of Water Supply.
[Amended by Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
1.
Once the water supply system has been completed according to the specifications set forth in this section, the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department shall, upon the request of the developer, inspect the system and prepare a list of items for repair (punch list). The list shall be given or sent to the developer and when repairs have been made, the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department shall accept the system for operational use only. During the time after the acceptance by the Village for maintenance, the developer shall be responsible for any delinquencies incurred within the system, including but not limited to water main leaks, adjustment to manhole frames and bent curb boxes. Upon reaching approximately 80% development of building construction, the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department will reinspect the water supply system for any delinquencies which may have occurred and prepare a list of items for repair. The list shall be given or sent to the developer and when the repairs have been made to the satisfaction of the Engineering Department along with the Public Works Department, the Engineering Department shall accept the system for the Village.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
2.
All construction shall meet the requirements and acceptance by the Illinois Environmental Protection Agency prior to the acceptance by the Engineering Department.
O.
See Infrastructure Specification Guidelines, which may be updated by the appropriate Village department from time to time.
[Added 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
§ 6-411 Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control.
A.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to conserve the land, water, air and other natural resources within the Village by establishing requirements for the control of erosion and sedimentation.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
B.
Objectives. The following guidelines shall apply for the planning, implementing, monitoring and maintenance of all development activity within the Village which disturbs stabilized soil allowing erosion and sedimentation to occur:
1.
Development shall be related to the topography and soils of the site so as to create the least potential for erosion. Areas of steep slopes where high cuts and fills may be required shall be avoided wherever possible, and natural contours shall be followed as closely as possible.
2.
Natural watercourses, existing trees, and conservation areas shall be retained and protected from erosion and sedimentation so that natural features and functions are maintained. Areas immediately adjacent to natural watercourses and which are planned to be left undisturbed shall be left undisturbed for a minimum of 50 feet from the natural water course, as measured from the bank of the perennial stream, the centerline of an intermittent stream, or the ordinary high water mark of a lake or pond, or 25 feet for an artificial detention/retention basin, as measured from the high water line level, whenever possible, and shall be governed by the regulations in Section 6-412.
3.
The smallest practical area of land should be exposed for the shortest practical time during development. Sediment control measures shall be installed prior to the commencement of any land disturbance.
4.
Disturbed areas shall be stabilized with temporary or permanent measures within seven calendar days following the end of disturbance activities.
5.
Perimeter protection, sediment basins, debris basins, desilting basins, or silt traps or filters shall be installed, and shall be maintained to remove sediment from run-off waters from land undergoing development and from undeveloped land.
6.
Provision shall be made to stabilize stormwater management systems that are functioning throughout construction. Temporary or permanent stabilization measures shall be installed at time of construction.
7.
Proper storm sewer inlet and outlet protection shall be in place and maintained throughout construction until permanent stabilization of the development has been completed.
8.
Provisions shall be made for the temporary or permanent stabilization of soil stockpiles within seven days of placement. Perimeter controls shall be placed around the base of the stockpile immediately. Stockpiles shall be graded to a safe slope within six months of deposit. Weeds and other vegetation above eight inches tall shall be cut back as needed.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
9.
Provision shall be made for the control of the deposit of sediment and debris from the development site onto streets, alleys and sidewalks at the end of each work day, or if a hazardous condition develops.
[Ord. 2570, 5-2-1994]
10.
All construction ingress and egress points shall have a stabilized construction entrance installed and maintained until permanent stabilization of the development has been completed.
11.
Sediment filtering devices shall be used for all dewatering activities.
12.
All waste including building materials and construction debris shall be placed in the appropriate receptacles.
13.
On-site pollutants such as building materials, building products, landscape materials, sanitary waste, fueling, and cleaning and maintenance areas shall be appropriately managed to minimize and discharge.
14.
Site development shall be in accordance with other Village ordinances and State law, and it shall not decrease the normal capacity of a flood plain by adding fill unless compensatory capacity is provided elsewhere.
15.
Erosion prevention measures in site development shall be implemented in phases on a time schedule so as to more effectively control potential conditions associated with the seasons (i.e., run off from the melting of snow).
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
C.
Soil Erosion Control Plan and Permit Requirements.
1.
Plan Requirements. A Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan shall be submitted with the Final Engineering Plans to be reviewed and approved by the Development Services Department. For single lots in established subdivisions a Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan shall be submitted for review and approval with the Building Permit Set and approved by the Development Services Department. The plan set shall include all of the guidelines outlined in Section 6-411B that pertain to the specific site conditions.
2.
Letter of Credit Requirements. When a Letter of Credit is required for the development, the erosion control measures approved in the Final Engineering plans shall be included in the Letter of Credit total. The amount of money earmarked for the erosion control measure will be held until final stabilization of the project is complete or until an authorized agent of the Development Services Department has approved a reduction or release.
3.
Permit Requirements. Implementation of the approved Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plan is required prior to the issuance of any Foundation Permits. Except as otherwise provided in this section, no person shall commence or perform any grading, stripping, excavating, or filling of land without having first installed the erosion and sedimentation control measures outlined in the approved Final Engineering Plan set or Building Permit set.
4.
Exceptions. A soil erosion control plan and permit shall not be required for any of the following:
a.
Agricultural use of land, including farming, the implementation of conservation measures included in a farm conservation plan approved by the Soil and Water Conservation District and community garden plans.
b.
Construction of conservation measures including, but not limited to, sod waterways, terraces, grade stabilization structures, berms and swales.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017] |
5.
Application for Permit. When development activity is planned and there are no soil erosion control plans, application for a soil erosion control plan permit shall be made by the owner of the property or his authorized agent to the Development Services Department on a form furnished for that purpose. Each application shall include certification that any land clearing, construction, or development involving the movement of earth shall be in accordance with the plans approved upon issuance of the permit. Each application shall include a certification by an Illinois registered professional engineer that the contour lines, current and proposed, and other technical contents of the plans are valid. When development is proposed as a part of a building permit for a part of the site, the applications may be combined, provided, that the information required under this section is submitted with the engineering drawings required for the building permit.
a.
Each application shall be accompanied by the following:
(1)
The name and address of the developer and owner;
(2)
The name, address and telephone number of any design consulting firm or engineer;
(3)
Identification of person(s) or entity which will have legal responsibility for maintenance or erosion control structures and measures after development is completed;
(4)
A vicinity sketch showing site acreage, site boundary lines, utilities and buildings presently located on the site, drains and roads on and within 1/2 mile of the site, intermittent and perennial streams and water bodies downstream within 1/2 mile of the site, and a legend and scale;
(5)
Proposed use of the site, including present development and planned utilization; areas of excavation, grading, and filling; proposed contours, finished grades, and street profiles; provisions for storm drainage, including the control of accelerated runoff, with a drainage area map and computations; existing trees and wooded areas; kinds and locations of utilities; and areas and acreage proposed to be paved, covered, sodded or seeded, vegetatively stabilized, or left undisturbed;
(6)
An erosion and sedimentation program showing or describing all the erosion and sedimentation control measures necessary to meet the objectives of this section throughout all phases of construction and necessary to meet the objectives at the completion of development of the site. The program may include erosion structures, temporary and permanent vegetation and other conservation measures; and
(7)
The proposed phasing of development of the site, including stripping and clearing, rough grading and construction, and final grading and landscaping. Phasing should identify the expected date on which clearing will begin, the estimated duration of exposure of cleared areas, and the sequence of clearing, installation of temporary sediment control measures, installation of storm drainage, paving streets and parking areas, and establishment of permanent vegetative cover.
b.
The Director of Engineering may waive specific requirements for the content of submission upon written finding that the information submitted is sufficient to show that the work will comply with the objectives and principles of this section and the standards contained in the Handbook incorporated by Subsection E1.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
6.
Time Schedules. In the event a site developer is unable to meet the phasing time schedules as contained in either the approved site development plans or the site development permit, the site developer shall submit, prior to missing the time schedule, an addendum to any plans or permit application stating in the addendum that scheduling will not be met and what, if any, additional measures will be taken.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018] |
D.
Fees. Fees for site development permits, when required by this section, shall be determined by the Village in accordance with Section 1-104 of these regulations.
E.
Operation Standards and Requirements.
1.
Handbook Adopted by Reference. The procedures and standards set out in the Illinois Urban Manual, as amended, and the Illinois Procedures and Standards for Urban Soil Erosion and Sedimentation Control, as amended, shall be applicable to all developments.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
2.
Inspections. Plans for grading work shall be maintained at the site during grading. In order to obtain the necessary grading inspections, the permittee shall notify the Development Services Department at least two full working days before the following inspection is to be made.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
3.
Responsibility. The permittee shall not be relieved of responsibility for damage to persons or property otherwise imposed by law, and the Village or its officers or agents shall not be made liable for such damage, by (1) the issuance of a permit under this section, (2) compliance with the provisions of that permit or with conditions attached to it by the Village, (3) failure of Village officials to observe or recognize hazardous or unsightly conditions, (4) failure of Village officials to recommend denial of or to deny a permit, or (5) exemptions from the permit requirements of this section.
4.
Special Precautions.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
If at any stage of the grading of any development site the Director of Engineering determines by inspection that the nature of the site is such that further work authorized by an existing permit is likely to imperil any property, public way, watercourse or drainage structure, the Director of Engineering may require, as a condition of allowing the work to be done, that such reasonable special precautions be taken as is considered advisable to avoid the likelihood of such peril. "Special precautions" may include, but shall not be limited to, a more level exposed slope, construction of additional drainage facilities, berms, terracing, compaction, cribbing, or installation of plant materials for erosion control. Said special precautions shall, as much as possible, reflect the standards contained in the Handbook.
b.
On large operations or where unusual site conditions prevail, the Director of Engineering or his designee may specify the timing of grading or may require that the operations be conducted in specific stages so as to insure completion of protective measures or devices prior to the advent of seasonal rains. Said specifications or requirements shall, as much as possible, reflect the standards contained in the Handbook.
5.
Coordination with Local Stream and Water Body Protection. Must occur with and meet the requirements of the Army Corps of Engineers, Illinois Department of Natural Resources, and the Village's Director of Engineering.
[Amended 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
6.
Major Amendments of the Site Development or Erosion and Sedimentation Control Plans. Major amendments of the site development or erosion and sedimentation control plans shall be submitted to the Development Services Department and shall be processed and approved or disapproved in the same manner as the original plans. Field modifications of a minor nature may be authorized by the Development Services Department by written authorization to the permittee.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
F.
Expiration of Permit. Each permit shall expire and become null and void if the work authorized by such permit has not been commenced within six months, or work is not completed by a date which shall be specified in the permit; except that the Director of Development Services may, if the permittee presents satisfactory evidence that unusual difficulties have prevented work being commenced or completed within the specified time limits, grant a reasonable extension of time if written application is made before the expiration date of the permit.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
G.
Effect on Other Permits. The granting of a permit under the provisions of this section shall in no way affect the owner's responsibility to obtain the approval required by any other statute, ordinance, or regulation of any state agency or subdivision thereof, or to meet other Village ordinances and regulations.
§ 6-412 Local Stream and Waterbody Protection.
A.
Purpose. The purpose of this section is to promote the health, safety and general welfare of the present and future residents of the Village and downstream drainage areas by providing for the protection, preservation, proper maintenance, and use of public and private watercourses, lakes and ponds. It is specifically not the intent of this section to duplicate or in any way conflict with any regulations adopted by the U.S. Army Corps of Engineers.
B.
Objectives. This section is specifically adopted to achieve the following objectives:
1.
To prevent flood damage by preserving storm and flood water storage capacity;
2.
To maintain the normal hydrologic balance of streams, ponds, lakes, and groundwater by storing and filtering wet season runoff in floodplains and wetlands and releasing it slowly to the stream to maintain dry season stream flow;
3.
To manage stormwater runoff and maintain natural runoff conveyance systems, and minimize the need for storm sewer construction and drainageway modification;
4.
To improve water quality both by filtering and storing sediments and attached pollutants, nutrients, and organic compounds before they drain into streams, lakes or ponds and by maintaining the natural pollutant assimilating capabilities of streams, lakes, ponds and floodplains;
5.
To protect shorelines from soil erosion;
6.
To protect fish spawning, breeding, nursery and feeding grounds;
7.
To protect wildlife habitat;
8.
To preserve areas of special recreational, scenic, or scientific interest, including natural areas and habitat of endangered species;
9.
To maintain and enhance the aesthetic qualities of developing areas; and
10.
To encourage the continued economic growth of the Village which depends in part, on an adequate quality of water, a pleasing natural environment, and recreational opportunities in proximity to the Village.
C.
Boundary. The procedures, standards and requirements contained in this section shall apply to all lots within water bodies and streams, and to all lots identified wholly or in part on the stream and waterbody map adopted by the Board of Trustees, as amended from time to time.
D.
Development Activities in Wetlands and Special Flood Hazard Areas (SFHA) from Streams, Lakes and Ponds.
[Amended by Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; Ord. 3070, 10-20-1997; Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; Ord. 5221, 9-18-2017; Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
1.
No development (except as provided in Subsection D2) may occur within the SFHA without approved mitigation and in no case shall be less than 50 feet from a natural watercourse or water body, as measured from the top of bank of the perennial stream, the center line of an intermittent stream, or the ordinary high water mark of a lake or pond, or 25 feet for a detention/retention basin, as measured from the high water level.
2.
The following activities are permitted within the minimum setback area only if, as a practical matter, they cannot be located outside the SFHA and/or setback and meet all federal, state, county, and Village's engineering requirements that apply. Such modification shall be approved only after preparation of a report prepared by a qualified professional and approved by the Director of Engineering. The report shall note that the modification will not adversely affect water quality; destroy, damage, or disrupt a high-quality aquatic resource; adversely affect drainage and/or stormwater retention capabilities; lead to unstable earth conditions; create erosion hazards or be materially detrimental to any other property in the area of the subject property or to the Village as a whole, including the loss of open space or scenic vistas:
a.
Minor improvements, such as walkways, benches, footbridges, observation decks and docks;
b.
The maintenance, repair, replacement and reconstruction of existing highways and bridges, electrical transmission and telecommunication lines, poles, and towers; and
c.
The establishment and development of public and private parks and recreation areas, outdoor education areas, historic, natural and scientific areas, game refuges, fish and wildlife habitat improvement projects, game bird and animal farms, wildlife preserves and public boat launching ramps.
3.
Only limited filling and excavating necessary for the development of public boat launching ramps, swimming beaches, or the construction of park shelters or similar structures shall be permitted. The construction and maintenance of roads necessary for these permitted uses shall be allowed only on a very limited basis and where no alternate location outside of the setback area is available.
4.
Land surface modification within the minimum setback shall be permitted for the purpose of constructing stormwater drainage swales between the developed area of a lot (including a storm-water detention facility on the lot) and a stream, lake or pond.
5.
An applicant for a special use permit must stabilize any areas left exposed after land surface modification with vegetation normally associated with the affected stream, lake or pond. The planting of native riparian vegetation is recommended as the preferred stabilization measure. Other techniques shall be used only when and where vegetation fails to control erosion. One alternative is rip-rap, using natural rock materials where practicable, installed on eroding bank areas in a manner that provides interstitial space for vegetative growth and habitat for macroinvertebrates and other stream organisms. (Exhibit No. STS-13) Lining of the stream channel bottom shall not be permitted.
6.
Access to property located near a stream, lake or pond or related environmentally sensitive area, shall be minimized when such access would adversely affect such area.
7.
Silt or sediment basins shall not be installed within a perennial stream channel or a waterbody. However, such basins may be installed within an intermittent stream channel.
E.
Local Stream and Water Body Protection Plan.
1.
A local stream and water body protection plan shall be prepared for any proposed development within all or part of a stream or water body corridor, as identified by the Army Corps of Engineers, Illinois Department of Natural Resources, or the Village, and shall indicate:
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; 7-17-2023 by Ord. No. 5822]
a.
Dimension and area of parcel;
b.
Location of any existing and proposed structures;
c.
Location of existing or proposed on-site sewage systems or private water supply systems;
d.
Location of any perennial stream and its banks, the center line of any intermittent stream, and any lake or pond as delineated by its ordinary height water mark;
e.
Location of setback lines;
f.
Location of 100-year floodplain limits;
g.
Location of existing or future access roads;
h.
Specifications and dimensions of areas proposed for wetland alterations;
i.
Additional outside agency permitting required;
j.
Appropriate details and sequence of construction if work impacting a stream and/or water body is proposed;
k.
An assessment of the potential impact of the proposed development activity on the stream, lake or pond including, but not limited to, loss of flood storage potential, loss of habitat, changes in species diversity and quantity, impacts on water quality, increases in human intrusion and impacts on associated streams, lakes or ponds or downstream sensitive areas; and
l.
Such other information as reasonably requested by the Director of Engineering.
2.
The developer shall present evidence that demonstrates that the proposed development shall not endanger health and safety, including danger from gas, electricity, fuel, short-circuiting, grounding, igniting or electrocuting, and the obstruction or diversion of flood flow. The developer shall also show that the proposed development will not substantially reduce natural floodwater storage capacity, destroy valuable habitat for wildlife, adversely affect ground water resources, or increase stormwater runoff velocity so that water levels on other land are substantially raised or the danger from flooding increased.
F.
Geologic and Soil Characteristics Report. The site proposed for development shall be investigated to determine the soil and geologic characteristics. A report, prepared by a registered professional engineer experienced in the practice of geological and soils mechanics, shall be submitted with each application for development within an environmentally sensitive area. This report shall include a description of soil type, stability of surface and subsurface conditions. Any area which the investigation indicates to be subject to geologic or soil hazards shall not be subjected to development unless the engineer can demonstrate conclusively that these hazards to the area can be overcome.
G.
Hydrologic Controls. A hydrologic control plan that, in part, describes the hydraulic characteristics of nearby watercourses, prepared by a registered professional engineer experienced in civil engineering, shall be submitted with each application for development. Unless otherwise provided in this section, the following restrictions, requirements and standards shall apply to all development:
1.
Natural open channel drainageways shall be preserved; and
2.
Runoff from areas of concentrated impervious cover (e.g., roofs, driveways, streets, patios, etc.) shall be collected and transported to a natural drainageway with sufficient capacity to accept the discharge without undue erosion or detrimental impact. Vegetated drainage swales are preferred over conveyances constructed of concrete or other manufactured materials.
H.
Site Grading and Excavation.
1.
A grading and excavation plan, prepared by a registered professional engineer trained and experienced in civil engineering shall be submitted with each application for development and shall include the following unless a site development plan that includes grading and excavation components has been or submitted in accordance with Section 5-106 of these regulations:
a.
Property contours at one foot intervals;
b.
Details of the existing terrain, trees and woodlands, and drainage pattern;
c.
Dimensions, elevation and contours of grading, excavation and fill;
d.
A description of methods to be employed in disposing of soil and other material that is removed from allowable grading and excavation sites, including the location of the disposal site if on the property;
e.
A schedule showing when each stage of the project will be completed, including the total area of soil surface to be disturbed during each stage, and estimated starting and completion dates. The schedule shall be prepared so as to limit to the shortest possible period the time soil is exposed and unprotected. In no case shall the existing natural vegetation be destroyed, removed or disturbed more than 15 days prior to initiation of the improvements; and
2.
Unless otherwise provided in this section the following restrictions, requirements and standards shall apply to all construction:
a.
Every effort shall be made to develop the site in such a manner so as to minimize the alteration of the natural topography;
b.
No grading, filling, cleaning, clearing, terracing or excavation of any kind shall be initiated until final engineering plans are approved and the application is approved by the Director of Engineering; and
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
c.
The depositing of any excavation, grading or clearing material within a stream, lake or pond shall be prohibited.
3.
In addition to locating all site improvements on the subject property to minimize adverse impacts on the stream, lake or pond, the applicant shall install a berm, curb, or other physical barrier during construction, and following completion of the project, where necessary, to prevent direct runoff and erosion from any modified land surface into the stream, lake or pond. All parking and vehicle circulation areas should be located as far as possible from any stream, lake or pond.
4.
The Village may limit construction activity in or near a stream, lake or pond to specific months and to a maximum number of continuous days or hours in order to minimize adverse impacts. The Director of Development Services may also require that equipment be operated from only one side of a stream, lake, or pond in order to minimize bank disruption. Other construction techniques, conditions, and restrictions may be required in order to minimize adverse impacts on streams, lakes or ponds and on any related areas not subject to development.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
I.
Vegetation and Revegetation.
1.
To minimize erosion, stabilize the streambank, protect water quality, keep nutrients out of the water, maintain water temperature at natural levels, preserve fish and wildlife habitat, screen man-made structures, and preserve aesthetic values of the natural stream, lake or pond, a natural vegetation strip shall be maintained along the edge of the natural watercourse or waterbody. Within required setbacks from a natural watercourse or waterbody, a natural vegetation strip shall extend landward 25 feet, as measured from the top of bank of the perennial stream, the centerline of an intermittent stream, the ordinary high water mark of a lake or pond. Refer to the Stormwater Management Area Landscape in Section 6-305 for vegetation requirements adjacent to artificial detention/retention basins.
[Amended by Ord. 5312, 7-16-2018]
2.
Within the natural vegetation strip, trees and shrubs may be selectively pruned or removed for harvest of merchantable timber, to achieve a filtered view of the stream, lake or pond from the principal structure and for reasonable private access to the stream, lake or pond. Said pruning and removal activities shall insure that a live root system stays intact to provide for streambank stabilization and erosion control.
3.
A landscape plan, prepared by a professional landscape architect, shall be submitted with each application for development and shall contain the following:
4.
The landscape plan will be evaluated according to:
a.
The character and size of the proposed development and potential for adverse impact on the stream, lake or pond;
b.
The width of the stream;
c.
The topography of the area;
d.
The type and stability of the soils;
e.
The type and density of the existing vegetation; and
f.
The existence of diseased trees or trees in danger of falling.
J.
Watercourse Relocation and Minor Modifications.
1.
Watercourse relocation or modification is generally not permitted because these activities are not usually consistent with the purposes of this section. Under unusual circumstances, relocation and minor modification may be permitted as a special use where:
a.
Off-site hydrological conditions are causing erosion, flooding and related problems; or
b.
On-site soil and geological conditions are resulting in unstable conditions that pose hazards to life, health, and existing development; and
c.
A mitigation plan is prepared and approved by the Village Board of Trustees which results in a watercourse habitat equal to or better than the original condition.
2.
Channelization shall not be permitted, except for an area within the right-of-way and within 50 feet of the right-of-way of any roadway that crosses a watercourse.
3.
Modification of watercourses as a convenience for site design purposes shall not be permitted. Stream modification, when permitted, shall be subject to the following conditions and restrictions:
a.
Water quality, habitat, and storm water retention must be significantly improved by the modification and no significant habitat area may be destroyed;
b.
The amount of flow and velocity of a stream shall not be increased or decreased as the stream enters or leaves a subject property unless this reflects an improvement over previous conditions in terms of reduced flooding, reduced erosion, or enhanced low-flow conditions; and
c.
Prior to diverting water into a new channel, a qualified professional approved by the Director of Engineering inspects the stream modification and issues a written report to the Director of Engineering that the modified stream complies with the requirements of this section.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
4.
Stream relocation shall be permitted in accordance with a stream relocation plan which provides for:
a.
The creation of a natural meander pattern, pools, ripples, and substrate;
b.
The formation of gentle side slopes (at least three feet horizontally for one foot vertically), including installation of erosion control features;
c.
The utilization of natural materials wherever possible;
d.
The planting of vegetation normally associated with streams, including primarily native riparian vegetation;
e.
The creation of spawning and nesting areas wherever appropriate;
f.
The re-establishment of the fish population wherever appropriate;
g.
The restoration of water flow characteristics compatible with fish habitat areas, wherever appropriate;
h.
The filling and revegetation of prior channel;
i.
The proposed phasing plan specifying time of year for all project phases; and
j.
Plans for sediment control.
5.
Stream channel armoring in the form of bulkheads, rip-rap or other materials or devices shall not be permitted except in accordance with the following:
a.
Significant erosion cannot be prevented in any other way and the use of vegetation will not sufficiently stabilize the shoreline or bank;
b.
The bulkhead, rip-rap or other device will minimize the transmittal of wave energy or currents to other properties; and
c.
The change in the horizontal or vertical configuration of the land is kept to a minimum.
6.
Culverts shall not be permitted in streams except in accordance with following:
a.
Where a culvert is necessary for creating access to a property (convenience in order to facilitate general site design is not to be considered);
b.
The culvert allows passage of fish inhabiting the stream, and accommodates the 100-year storm, except where a restricting culvert is desirable as part of an overall stream and flood management plan; and
c.
The culvert shall be maintained to be free of debris and sediment to allow free passage of water and, if applicable, fish.
K.
Ownership and Control. The Village shall require an applicant to submit a proposed plan of ownership and control of the local stream and water body area. The Board of Trustees shall approve the proposed plan prior to the Board of Trustees' approval of the development, provided that the applicant has demonstrated that the proposed ownership and control will adequately protect the local stream and water body area in accordance with the standards of these regulations. Methods of ownership and control may include, but are not limited to, homeowner association covenants, Village management plans or private protection plans.
L.
Stream Channel and Waterbody Development Permit.
1.
Except as otherwise provided in this section, to ensure that proposed development can be carried out which is compatible and harmonious with the natural amenities of the stream channel area and with surrounding land uses, no person shall commence development within the minimum setback area without first having obtained a Stream Channel and Waterbody Development Permit. A request for a permit shall be submitted to and approved by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
No permit shall be issued unless the applicant submits engineering data, surveys, site plans and other information as the Village may reasonably require in order to determine the effects of such development on the affected land and water areas. The permit shall not be approved by the Director of Engineering unless:
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
a.
The development will not detrimentally affect or destroy natural features such as streams, lakes, ponds, and forested areas, but will preserve and incorporate such features into the development's site design;
b.
The location of natural features and the site's topography have been considered in the designing and citing of all physical improvements;
c.
Adequate assurances have been received so that the clearing of the site of top soil, trees, and other natural features before the commencement of building operations will occur. Only those areas approved for the placement of physical improvements may be cleared;
d.
The development will not substantially reduce the natural retention storage capacity of any stream, lake or pond, thereby increasing the magnitude and volume of flood at other locations;
e.
The soil and subsoil conditions are suitable for excavation and site preparation and the drainage is designed to prevent erosion and environmentally deleterious surface runoff; and
f.
The development will be free from offensive noise, vibration, smoke, dust and other particulate matter, odorous matter, fumes, water pollution, and other objectionable influences.
3.
No structure shall be constructed, altered, enlarged or otherwise created or moved, nor shall there be any clearing or removal of natural ground cover and/or trees in connection with site preparation for construction, immediate or future, within the sensitive area for any purpose unless a permit is granted subject to the provisions of this section.
4.
Dumping, filling, mining, excavating, dredging, or transferring of any earth material within the area is prohibited unless a special use permit is granted. However, normal gardening, farming and housekeeping activities shall not be affected.
5.
No ponds or pools shall be created and no other alterations or improvements shall be allowed in the sensitive area for recreational uses, storm water management, agricultural uses, or as scenic features, unless a special use permit is granted.
M.
Permit Exceptions. The permit provisions of this section shall not apply to:
1.
Emergency Work Necessary to Preserve Life Or Property. When emergency work is performed under this section, the person performing it shall report the pertinent facts relating to the work to the Village within 10 days after commencement of the work and shall thereafter obtain a special use permit and shall perform such work as may be determined by the Director of Engineering to be reasonably necessary to correct any impairment such emergency work may have caused to the water conveyance capacity of the watercourse; and
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
2.
Work consisting of the operation, repair, or maintenance of any lawful use of land existing on the date of adoption of these regulations.
N.
Effect on Other Permits. The granting of a permit under the provisions of this section shall in no way affect the owner's responsibility to obtain the approval required by any other statute, ordinance, or regulation of any state agency or subdivision thereof, or to meet other Village ordinances and regulations.
O.
Expiration of Permit. Each permit shall expire and become null and void if the work authorized by such permit has not been commenced within six months, or work is not completed by a date which shall be specified in the permit; except that the Director of Development Services may, if the permittee presents satisfactory evidence that unusual difficulties have prevented work being commenced or completed within the specified time limits, grant a reasonable extension of time if written application is made before the expiration date of the permit.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
§ 6-413 Wetlands Protection.
A.
General.
1.
The nontidal wetlands of the Village of Orland Park are indispensable and fragile natural resources with significant development constraints due to flooding, erosion, and soil limitations. In their natural state, nontidal wetlands serve man and nature. They provide habitat areas for fish, wildlife, and vegetation, water-quality maintenance and pollution control, flood control, shoreline erosion control, natural resource education, scientific study, open space, and recreation opportunities.
2.
A considerable number of these important natural resources have been lost or impaired by draining, dredging, filling, excavation, building, pollution, and other acts. Piecemeal or cumulative losses may, over time, destroy remaining wetlands. Damaging or destroying nontidal wetlands threatens public safety and the general welfare.
3.
It is therefore necessary for the Village to ensure maximum protection for nontidal wetlands by discouraging development activities in nontidal wetlands and those activities at adjacent upland sites that may adversely affect nontidal wetlands and to encourage restoration of already degraded or destroyed systems.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995]
B.
Purpose.
1.
It is the policy of the Village of Orland Park to encourage or require planning to avoid or minimize damage to nontidal wetlands wherever prudent or feasible; to require that activities not dependent upon a nontidal wetland location be located at upland sites; to allow nontidal wetland losses only when such losses are in the public interest and after all practicable measures have been applied to reduce those losses to the unavoidable minimum; to provide for compensation in the form of nontidal wetland restoration or creation to offset further losses.
2.
Furthermore, any activities in a wetland must not threaten public safety or cause nuisances by:
a.
Blocking flood flows, destroying flood storage areas, or destroying storm barriers, thereby raising flood heights or velocities on other land and increasing flood damages;
b.
Causing water pollution through any means, including location of wastewater disposal systems in wet soils; unauthorized application of pesticides, herbicides, and algacides; disposal of solid wastes or stormwater runoff directly into a wetland site; or creation of unstabilized fills;
c.
Increasing erosion; or
d.
Increasing runoff of sediment and stormwater.
3.
In addition, it is the policy of the Village not to permit activities in or affecting nontidal wetlands that could destroy natural wetland functions important to the general welfare by:
a.
Decreasing breeding, spawning, nesting, wintering, feeding, or other critical habitat for fish and wildlife, including rare, threatened, and endangered plant and animal species and commercially and recreationally important wildlife;
b.
Interfering with the exchange of nutrients needed by fish and other forms of wildlife;
c.
Decreasing groundwater recharge capability;
d.
Destroying sites needed for education and scientific research as outdoor biophysical laboratories, living classrooms, and training areas;
e.
Interfering with public rights in waters and recreation opportunities for fishing, boating, hiking, birdwatching, photography, camping, and other similar activities in nontidal wetlands; or
f.
Destroying aesthetic and property values.
C.
Applicability.
1.
This section shall apply to all lands in or within 50 feet of a nontidal wetland located within the jurisdiction of the Village of Orland Park. Areas shown on the Village of Orland Parks Comprehensive Plans? Environmental Areas Mapping Wetlands Map as wetlands are presumed to be nontidal wetlands consistent with the definition thereof. This official Wetlands Map shows the general location of nontidal wetlands and should be consulted by persons contemplating activities in or near nontidal wetlands before engaging in regulated activity.
2.
The actual boundaries of non-tidal wetlands shall ordinarily be determined by the applicant through the performance of a field survey applying the nontidal wetland definition. The Wetlands Map is to be used as a guide to the general location of nontidal wetlands. The applicant is required under Section 6-413D1 of this ordinance to show a Wetland District boundary on a scaled drawing submitted as part of the permit application. Evidence documenting the results of the boundary survey may be required by the Director of Engineering.
[Amended 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
D.
Permit requirements.
[Ord. 3837, 12-1-2003; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]
1.
No regulated activity in or within 50 feet of a nontidal wetland may be conducted without a permit from the Director of Engineering and full compliance with the terms of this ordinance and other applicable regulations. All activities that are not permitted as of right or as special permit uses shall be prohibited.
2.
Notwithstanding the provisions of this ordinance or any other law to the contrary, the Director of Engineering may issue a temporary nontidal wetlands permit through oral or written authorization, provided a written permit application is received within five days, if he or she deems that an unacceptable threat to life or severe loss of property will occur if an emergency permit is not granted. The emergency permit may be terminated at any time with out process upon a determination by the Director of Engineering that the action was not or is no longer necessary to protect human health or the environment.
3.
To guide restoration and creation actions should a violation occur, the Director of Engineering shall have the power to order the violator to develop a plan as described in Section 6-413G2 of this ordinance for the approval of the Director of Engineering. Field verification of absence or existence of wetland areas, in the form of a wetland report checklist, shall be provided for approval of the Director of Engineering.
E.
Uses by Right in a Nontidal Wetland.
1.
The following uses shall be allowed as a right within a nontidal wetland to the extent that they are not prohibited by any other ordinance or federal, state or local law and provided they do not require structures, grading, fill, draining, or dredging except as provided herein or authorized by special permit:
a.
Conservation or preservation of soil, water, vegetation, fish, shellfish, and other wildlife;
b.
Outdoor recreational activities, including fishing, birdwatching, hiking, biking, boating, horseback riding, swimming, and canoeing;
c.
The harvesting of wild crops, such as marsh hay, ferns, moss, wild rice, berries, tree fruits, and seeds in a manner that is not injurious to natural reproduction of such crops and provided the harvesting does not require alteration of nontidal wetland by changing existing nontidal wetland water conditions or sources, tilling of soil, or planting of crops;
d.
Forestry practices limited to the thinning and harvesting of native timber in accordance with a forest management plan that incorporates best management practices approved by the Cook County Forest Preserve District pursuant to its current regulations.
e.
The continued cultivation of agricultural crops, provided no nontidal wetlands are subject to cultivation where no such use existed five years prior to the effective date of application.
f.
Education, scientific research, and nature trails;
2.
Special Permit Uses in a nontidal Wetland. Regulated activities other than those specified in Section 6-413E1 may not be conducted except upon application to the Development Services department and issuance of a special use permit.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
F.
Standards and Procedures for Special Use Permits.
1.
Procedures. Application for a special use permit to conduct a regulated activity shall be made to the Development Services Department on forms furnished by that office. All special uses must be established in nontidal wetlands as special uses in accordance with the procedures and standards set forth in Section 5-105I of this Code. Permits shall ordinarily be valid for a period of one year from the date of issue and shall expire at the end of that time unless a longer period is specified by the Director of Development Services upon issuance of the permit. The request for renewal of a permit shall follow the same form and procedure as the original application except that the Director of Development Services shall have the option of not holding a hearing if the original intent of the permit is not altered or extended in any significant way.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
2.
Standards. The Village Board, after according consideration to the comments of the general public, other affected municipalities and other counties, and federal and state agencies with jurisdiction over the area in question, shall issue a nontidal wetland permit only if it finds that the regulated activity is in the public interest and that the applicant has demonstrated by a preponderance of the evidence that the regulated activity:
a.
Is water-dependent or requires access to the nontidal wetland as a central element of its basic function, or is not water-dependent but has no practicable alternative;
b.
Will result in minimum feasible alteration or impairment to the nontidal wetland's functional characteristics and its existing contour, vegetation, fish and wildlife resources, and hydrological conditions;
c.
Will not jeopardize the continued existence of species that appear on federal or state endangered species lists;
d.
Will not cause significant degradation of groundwater or surface-water quality;
e.
Complies with all applicable state, local, and federal laws, including those related to sediment control, pollution control, floodplain zoning, and on-site wastewater disposal;
f.
Will provide a nontidal wetland buffer area of not less than 50 feet between the nontidal wetland and upland activities for those portions of a regulated activity that need not be conducted in the wetland; and
g.
Complies with other standards contained in this ordinance, including those pertaining to nontidal wetland creation and restoration as required.
3.
Practicable Alternative. For all permit applications, an alternative site for the proposed activity shall be considered practicable if it is available and the proposed activity can be carried out on that site after taking into consideration costs, existing technology, infrastructure, and logistics, in light of overall project purposes.
G.
Nontidal Wetland Restoration and Creation.
1.
Standards. As a condition of a permit issued or as an enforcement action under this ordinance, the Director of Development Services may require that the applicant engage in the restoration or creation of other nontidal wetlands in order to offset, in whole or in part, the losses resulting from the action of an applicant or violator under these regulations. In making a determination of whether such a requirement will be imposed, and, if so, the degree to which it would be required, the Director of Development Services will consider the following:
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
a.
Recommendations by the Army Corp of Engineers.
b.
The long and short term effects of the action upon the nontidal wetland and associated aquatic ecosystem, and the reversible or irreversible nature of the impairment or loss;
c.
The type and benefit of the wetland functions and associated resources lost;
d.
The type, size, and location of the wetland altered, and the effect it may have upon the remaining system or watershed of which the wetland is a part;
e.
Observed or predicted trends with regard to the gains or losses of this type of wetland in the watershed of which the wetland is a part;
f.
The cost and likely success of the possible compensation measures in relation to the magnitude of the proposed project or violation; and
g.
The degree to which an applicant has demonstrated a good-faith effort to incorporate measures to minimize and avoid wetland impacts within the proposed project.
An applicant or violator may prepare or be required by the Director of Development Services to develop a nontidal wetlands restoration or creation plan of review and approval of the Director of Development Services. The approval shall be based on the recommendation of a qualified consultant which shall be at the cost of the applicant. The creation or restoration of wetlands shall not be an alternative to the standards set forth in Section 6-413G1 but shall be used only to compensate for unavoidable losses. [Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017] |
2.
Restoration and Creation Plan Requirements. The plan should state the location, by metes and bounds description, of the site proposed for restoration or creation; ownership; size; type; and complete ecological assessment (flora, fauna, hydrology, wetland functions, etc.) of the wetland being restored or the area where a new wetland will be created; and the natural suitability of the proposed site for establishing the replacement wetland (i.e., water source and drainage patterns, topographic position, wildlife habitat opportunities, value of the existing area to be converted, etc.). In addition, plane view and cross-sectional, scaled drawings; topographic survey data, including slope percentage and final grade elevations; and other technical information are required in sufficient detail to explain, illustrate, and provide for:
a.
Soil and substrate conditions; topographic elevations; grading and excavation; erosion and sediment control needed for wetland construction and long-term survival;
b.
Planting plans specifying plant species types, quantities, locations, size spacing, or density; source of plant materials, propagules, or seeds; timing, season, water, and nutrient requirements for planting; and, where appropriate, measures to protect plants from predation;
c.
Water-quality parameters, water source, water depths, water-control structures, and water-level maintenance practices needed to achieve the necessary ambient water conditions and hydrocycle/hydroperiod characteristics;
d.
Mid-course corrections and a three-year monitoring and replacement plan establishing responsibility for removal of exotic and nuisance vegetation and permanent establishment of the wetland system and all its component parts; and
e.
A demonstration of fiscal, administrative, and technical competence of sufficient standing to successfully execute the overall project.
H.
Suspension, Revocation. The Director of Development Services may suspend or revoke a permit if he or she finds that the applicant has not complied with the conditions or limitations set forth in the permit or has exceeded the scope of the work set forth in the permit. The Director of Development Services shall cause notice of his or her denial, issuance, conditional issuance, revocation, or suspension of a permit by written notice to the petitioner.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995; amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
§ 6-414 Conservation Areas.
A.
Intent. It is the intent of the Village to promote open space in order to preserve natural features and the Village's natural heritage, as well as to provide for flood control, to provide residents with views of natural areas, to provide residents the opportunity to interact with nature in their own neighborhoods, to increase property values, to provide wildlife habitat corridors, and to generally improve the quality of life. The Board of Trustees shall consider the use of conservation easements as an alternative way of preserving open space in developments.
B.
Requirements.
1.
Conservation easements shall be required when critical and sensitive environmental areas, as identified in the Comprehensive Plan, are located in a proposed development and are not protected through public land acquisition.
2.
Developers shall be required to provide legal descriptions of the conservation easement, to enter into a grant of conservation easement, and to record the easement on a Plat of Subdivision with the County.
3.
Developers shall transfer the conservation easement only to an agency of the State of Illinois, to a unit of local government or to a not-for-profit corporation or trust whose primary purposes include the conservation of land, natural areas, open space or water areas, or the preservation of native plants or animals, or biotic communities.
4.
The conservation easement grantee shall preserve and maintain said property in its natural state and maintain all trails and nature signs located within said property.
5.
The grantee shall have the right to view the easement in its scenic condition at ground level from adjacent roadways and property.
[Ord. 2746, 6-5-1995]
§ 6-415 Bikeways and Bikepaths.
A.
Intent. It is the intent of the Village to provide bikeways, bikepaths and other bicycle facilities in order to promote bicycling as a means of both recreation and transportation. The Board of Trustees shall consider bicycle traffic when it approves all future improvements to the existing street system, as well as the cost and desirability of building facilities such as bicycle lanes, bicycle routes, shoulder improvements and wide curb lanes.
B.
Requirements.
1.
Bikeways shall be required on one side of all arterial and collector streets or at other alternate locations including reasonable off-site connections that provide contiguity to the overall system. The use of additional pedestrian ways or bikepaths in any instance to provide safe and convenient access to schools, parks or other similar destinations may be recommended by the Plan Commission and required by the Board of Trustees.
2.
Developers shall be required to install bicycle parking and racks sufficient to serve all new commercial and industrial developments. Developers of other uses may be required to install bicycle parking and racks, provided that the uses generate such need, and subject to the approval of the Director of Development Services.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017]
3.
Although bike paths are generally not required in the rural/suburban area (Exhibit 2), there may be circumstances in which continuity for larger networks of bicycle paths, or nearby sidewalk or bike path access to schools, parks, neighborhood commercial, or similar features may necessitate installation of such facilities in certain areas. Sidewalks, bikepaths or streetlights on perimeter roads may be required if health, safety and welfare reasons warrant such installation.
C.
Construction Requirements. The latest edition of construction requirements and other standards published by the American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials (AASHTO), 444 North Capital Street, N.W., Suite 249, Washington, D.C. 20001, that pertain to the planning, operation and maintenance of roadways, bikeways and bikepaths shall be applicable to all development located within the Village. Copies of this Guide shall be kept on file at the Department of Development Services and the Engineering Department.
[Amended by Ord. 5167, 2-20-2017; 11-1-2021 by Ord. No. 5653]